Mitsubishi - Mirage G4 - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017

£9.99

Get your hands on the complete Mitsubishi factory workshop software

Download now

Check out our popular Mitsubishi Mirage Manuals below:

1999-05--Mitsubishi--Mirage--4 Cylinders A 1.5L MFI SOHC--32635101

Mitsubishi - Mirage - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

1990-2000--Mitsubishi--Mirage--4 Cylinders A 1.5L MFI SOHC--32172701

1990-2000--Mitsubishi--Mirage--4 Cylinders C 1.8L MFI SOHC--31910001

See All

1999-05--Mitsubishi--Mirage--4 Cylinders A 1.5L MFI SOHC--32635101

Mitsubishi - Mirage - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

1990-2000--Mitsubishi--Mirage--4 Cylinders A 1.5L MFI SOHC--32172701

1990-2000--Mitsubishi--Mirage--4 Cylinders C 1.8L MFI SOHC--31910001

See All

Get your hands on the Complete Mitsubishi Factory Workshop Software

Download now

9.99

Summary of Content

Mirage G4 / 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL Mirage G4 2017 © Copyright 2016 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc / OWNER’S MANUAL BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Table of contents Overview Quick index General information Seat and restraint systems Features and controls Driving safety Comfort controls For emergencies Vehicle care and maintenance Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects Specifications Alphabetical index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Instruments and controls 1 Instruments and controls N00100202704 Instrument cluster P.5-64 Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-82 Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-79 Turn-signal lever P.5-81 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-82 Wiper and washer switch P.5-82 Cruise control switches (if so equipped) P.5-54 Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13 Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch P.5-53 Electric remote-controlled outside rearview mirror switch P.5-36 Steering wheel height adjustment P.5-33 Fuse box P.9-22 1-1 Overview Ignition switch (if so equipped) P.5-37 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag (for driver) P.4-21, 4-27 Horn switch P.5-85 Steering wheel remote control switches (if so equipped) P.5-87, 7-40 Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag P.4-21, 4-28 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Instruments and controls Center vents P.7-2 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag (for front passenger) P.4-21, 4-27 Audio (if so equipped) P.7-19 Clock (if so equipped) P.7-26 Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-84 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) P.7-12 Side vents P.7-2 Engine hood release lever P.9-4 Fuel tank filler door release lever P.3-3 1 Heater (if so equipped) P.7-4 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) P.7-7 Cup holder (for the front seat) P.5-117 Gearshift lever (if so equipped) P.5-40 Selector lever (if so equipped) P.5-42 Glove compartment P.5-117 12 V power outlets P.5-110 Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-84 Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-20 Parking brake lever P.5-32 Cup holder (for the rear seat) P.5-117 Overview 1-2 BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Interior 1 Interior N00100302428 Power window lock switch P.5-30 Bottle holders P.5-118 Power door lock switch (if so equipped) P.5-25 Sun visors P.5-109 Vanity mirror P.5-109 Card holder P.5-109 Dome light P.5-116, 9-28 Inside rearview mirror P.5-34 Assist grips P.5-119 USB input terminal (if so equipped) P.5-105 Power window switch P.5-29 Seat belts P.4-7 Heated seats switches (if so equipped) P.4-4 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)curtain airbags P.4-21, 4-32 Head restraints P.4-5 Manual window control (if so equipped) P.5-29 Front seats P.4-2 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-side airbag (for front seat) P.4-21, 4-32 Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-16 Armrest P.4-5 1-3 Overview Jack P.8-5 Cup holder (for the rear seat) P.5-117 Rear seat P.4-5 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Luggage area 1 Luggage area N00100501553 Trunk room light P.9-28 Tools P.8-5 Spare tire P.8-7 Overview 1-4 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Outside 1 Outside N00100602649 Windshield wipers P.5-82 Power window P.5-29 Outside rearview mirrors P.5-36 Fuel tank filler P.3-3 Engine hood P.9-4 Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-82, 9-27, 9-29 Front turn signal lights/Parking lights P.5-81, 9-27, 9-29 Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped) P.5-79, 9-27, 9-28 1-5 Overview Side turn signal lights (if so equipped) P.5-81, 9-27 Front side- marker lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-29 F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped) P.5-9 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-6 Locking and unlocking P.5-24 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Outside 1 High-mounted stop light P.9-27 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) P.5-58 Changing tires P.8-6 Size of tires and wheels P.11-5 Tire inflation pressure P.9-15 Tire rotation P.9-17 Tire chains P.9-18 Antenna P.7-44 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) P.5-62 Trunk lid P.5-27 Rear side- marker lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-30 License plate lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-31 Tail and stop lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-30 Rear turn signal lights P.5-81, 9-27, 9-30 Back-up light P.9-27, 9-30 Overview 1-6 BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... N00200702250 NOTE  These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON. Warning lights Do this Ref. Page  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. P. 5-78  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. P. 5-14  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil level. If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-78 Charging system warning light (Illuminates and intermittent sounds) Oil pressure warning light Quick index 2-1 2 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... Warning lights Do this Ref. Page or  If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully released.  If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check the brake fluid level.  If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. P. 5-76  Park your vehicle in a safe place. Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing. If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-45  Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-5764878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assistance. P. 5-77  If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-51 2 Brake warning light Selector lever position indicator in the instrument cluster flashes rapidly (once per second) or Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) Electric power steering system (EPS) warning light 2-2 Quick index BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... Warning lights Do this Ref. Page P. 5-50 Anti-lock braking system warning light  When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Test the system as described on page 5-50.  If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. P. 4-27  Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-45  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning. P. 5-54 2 SRS warning light Selector lever position indicator in the instrument cluster flashes slowly (every 2 seconds) and ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator Quick index 2-3 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... Warning lights 2 ASC indicator Tire pressure monitoring system warning light (if so equipped) 2-4 Quick index Do this Ref. Page  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning. Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope. P. 5-49  If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. (See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.) Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.  If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. P. 5-58 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this problem occurs... If this problem occurs... N00200901978 Problem Do this Ref. Page Unable to turn the key. (except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) From “ACC” to “OFF” Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT): Check the position of the selector lever. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position. The engine does not start when the engine switch is pressed. (for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) P. 5-37 Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle. Vehicles with manual transaxle: Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal. P. 5-16 Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT): Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal. The F.A.S.T.-key does not operUse the emergency key to lock and unlock the door. ate. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or (for vehicles equipped with the change the operation mode. F.A.S.T.-key) P. 5-18, 5-19 Quick index 2-5 2 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this problem occurs... Problem 2 Cannot shift the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position. (for vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT)) The windows are fogged up. Do this Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal. Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. Vehicles equipped with the heater without air conditioning function or the manual air conditioning: 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. 2. Turn on the blower. Ref. Page P. 5-42 P. 7-6, 7-10, 7-14 Vehicles equipped with the automatic air conditioning: Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode. The engine does not start. The lights do not come on. The lights are dim. The horn does not honk. The horn sound is weak. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed. P. 8-2, 9-10 The engine is overheated. Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place. P. 8-4 The high coolant temperature warning light is illuminated. Steam comes out of the engine compartment. 2-6 Quick index BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this problem occurs... Problem The vehicle is stuck in sand, mud or snow Do this Ref. Page Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. 2 P. 8-13 WARNING  When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.  Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure. If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out. Problem The brakes are not functioning properly after crossing a puddle or stream. Do this Ref. Page Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5 The continuously variable transmission (CVT) makes no shift change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT. initial movement of the vehicle Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of is slow when the vehicle starts your choice. moving. (for vehicles with CVT) P. 5-45 A tire is punctured. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level. 2. Replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire. P. 8-6 Quick index 2-7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General information 3 Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2 Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuel selection Fuel selection N00301000912 3 Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gasoline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank filler pipe specifically designed to accept only a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing nozzle. WARNING  Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. Whenever you refuel your vehicle, stop the engine and keep flames, sparks, and smoking materials away from the vehicle. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas. CAUTION  Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will damage the engine, catalytic converter, and the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gasoline is illegal, and will void your warranty coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, and oxygen sensors. Gasoline detergent additives In the United States, fuel suppliers are required by law to add detergents to their gas- 3-2 General information oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and your emission-control system working properly. Octane requirement Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON. Oxygenated gasoline Gasoline sold at some service stations contains oxygenates such as ethanol, although the oxygenates may not be identified by those names. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in your vehicle. Ethanol (Gasohol) A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alcohol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used in your vehicle, provided the octane number is at least as high as that recommended for unleaded gasoline. Methanol Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline containing methanol (wood alcohol). Using this type of alcohol could adversely affect the vehicle’s performance and damage critical parts of the vehicle’s fuel system. Reformulated gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and is specially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline has no adverse effect on vehicle performance or the durability of the engine and fuel system. MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl) MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasolines to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends using gasolines without MMT. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Filling the fuel tank Use of gasolines blended with MMT may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Sulfur in gasoline Your vehicle may have been designed to satisfy California’s low-emission regulations based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. Gasoline sold in parts of the country other than California is allowed to have a higher sulfur content. Using such gasoline could adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic converter and cause the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) to come on. Illumination of this indicator while using high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer may suggest using a different, lowersulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to determine if the problem is fuel-related. NOTE WARNING  Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling during idling, abnormal engine noise, and poor acceleration. If you experience any of these problems, try using a different brand of gasoline. If the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible by the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel system and engine, resulting in hard starting and poor acceleration. If these problems occur, you are advised to add a detergent additive to the gasoline when you refuel the vehicle. The additive will remove the deposits, thereby returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an unsuitable additive could make an engine malfunction. For details, please contact the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Filling the fuel tank N00301101981 WARNING  When handling fuel, comply with the safety regulations displayed by garages and filling stations.  Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. When refueling your vehicle, always turn the engine off and keep away from flames, sparks, and smoking materials. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas.  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap, be sure to get rid of your body’s static electricity by touching a metal part of the car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on your body could create a spark that ignites fuel vapor.  Perform the whole refueling process (opening the fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by yourself; do not let any other person near the fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to help you and that person was carrying static electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until refueling is finished. If you moved away and did something else (for example, sitting on a seat) part-way through the refueling process, you could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity.  Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel contains toxic substances.  Keep the doors and windows closed while refueling the vehicle. If they were open, fuel vapor could get into the cabin. General information 3-3 3 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Filling the fuel tank Fuel tank capacity 3 WARNING  Since the fuel system may be under pressure, remove the fuel tank filler cap slowly. This relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have built up in the fuel tank. If the fuel tank filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you or others. 9.2 gal (35 L) Refueling 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear driver side of your vehicle. The fuel tank filler door can be opened from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank filler door release lever located at the left side of the driver’s seat. 1- Remove 2- Close 4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank filler cap cord on the hook located on the inside surface of the fuel tank filler door. 5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly on correct handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it goes. CAUTION  Your vehicle can only be operated using unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and catalytic converter damage will result if leaded gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and consequently, this must never be attempted. 3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly turning the fuel tank filler cap counterclockwise. 3-4 General information 6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do not add more fuel. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle CAUTION  To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paintwork. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it off with a soft cloth. 7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap slowly clockwise until you hear clicking sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler door closed. WARNING  Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is securely closed. If the fuel tank filler cap were loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a fire. NOTE  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while driving, the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) may come on when the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs a self check. Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until you hear at least 3 clicks. The indicator will go off after several driving cycles. If the indicator does not go off, contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Modifications to and racing of your vehicle N00301600194 CAUTION  If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, use only the fuel tank filler cap specified for your model vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety and durability. Modifications using non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may affect the performance, safety and/or durability of your vehicle, and may violate applicable state and/or federal regulations. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICATIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR VEHICLE ARE NOT UNDER WARRANTY. COVERED Examples of modifications to your vehicle that can cause damage or performance problems include the following:  Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts  Failure to use required fuel and fluids  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust, emission, suspension, engine, drive train or electrical wiring systems  Modification of any onboard computer/control module, including reprogramming, or replacing/adding chips to any onboard computer/control module Review the Warranty and Maintenance Manual for further details regarding warranty coverage. Installation of accessories N00301700212 CAUTION  Before any electrical or electronic accessories are installed, consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. General information 3-5 3 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts 3  The installation of accessories, optional parts, etc., should only be performed within the limits prescribed by law, and in accordance with the guidelines and warnings contained within the documents accompanying this vehicle. Only Mitsubishi Motors approved accessories should be fitted to your vehicle.  Improper installation of electrical parts could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems” section within this owner’s manual.  Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle without an external antenna may cause electrical system interference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.  Tires and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used. Refer to the “Specifications” section for information regarding wheel and tire sizes. WARNING  While driving, do not use a cellular phone in a way that hinders safe driving. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident. Refer to and follow all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving. Due to the large number of accessory and replacement parts provided by different manufacturers in the market, it is not always possible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to check whether the attachment or installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts affects the driving safety of your Mitsubishi-vehicle. N00301800183 Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer before installation of any General information CAUTION  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer concerning any such accessory fitment or modification. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or improper installation methods are used (protective fuses not included, etc.), electronic devices may be adversely affected, resulting in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident. Important point! Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 3-6 accessory which may involve modification of the electrical or fuel systems. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts N00301400219 Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are designed and manufactured to meet high standards of performance, and are recommended for all of your maintenance needs. Also available from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are a wide variety of accessories to personalize your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors authorized accessories to choose from to tailor your new vehicle to your own personal preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s Parts Manager has information on various audio systems, protection items, as well as interior and exterior accessories available for your specific model. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements California Perchlorate Materials Requirements N00300100017 3 Certain components of this vehicle, such as airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may apply. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. General information 3-7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat and restraint systems Seats .................................................................................................4-2 Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2 Front seats ........................................................................................4-2 Rear seat ...........................................................................................4-5 Head restraints .................................................................................4-5 Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-7 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12 Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-12 Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-13 Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-21 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21 4 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seats Seats and restraint systems Seats N00408401577 4 1 - Front seats  To adjust the seat forward or backward  Page 4-3  To adjust the seatbacks  Page 4-3  To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat only, if so equipped)  Page 4-4  Heated seats (if so equipped)  Page 4-4 2 - Rear seat  Armrest  Page 4-5 N00401601235 Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety features that help protect you and your passengers in an accident. Seat belts are the most important safety device. When worn properly, seat belts can reduce the chance of serious injury or death in various types of crashes. For added protection during a severe frontal collision, your vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with airbags for the driver and passengers. The seats, head restraints, and door locks also are safety equipment, which must be used correctly. Seat and restraint systems Front seats N00401800403 Position the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel and safely operate the vehicle. Always check the following before you drive:  That everyone in your vehicle is properly wearing their seat belt.  That infants and small children are properly secured in an appropriate child restraint system in the rear seat.  That all doors are fully closed and locked.  That seatbacks are upright, with head restraints properly adjusted. Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or death in all motor vehicle accidents. However, you can help reduce the risk of injury or death by following the instructions in this manual. 4-2 WARNING  Do not place objects under the seats. This could prevent the seat from locking securely, and it could lead to an accident. It may also cause damage to the seat or other parts. WARNING  Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Front seats WARNING  After adjusting the seat, make sure that seat is securely locked into position.  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver’s airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.  To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death during deployment of the passenger’s airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the front passenger’s seat as far back as possible.  Always place children 12 years old and under in the rear seat and use appropriate child restraint systems. To adjust the seatbacks CAUTION  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay careful attention to the rear seat passengers. To adjust the seat forward or backward N00401900316 Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in place. CAUTION CAUTION  Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unexpected accident might occur.  Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an accident.  When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your hand or leg. N00402000369 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then lean backward to a comfortable position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in place. WARNING  To make sure that the seat is securely locked, try to move it forward or backward without using the adjusting lever.  The reclining mechanism used in the seatback is spring loaded, and will cause the seatback to return quickly to the vertical position when the lock lever is operated. When pulling the lever, sit close to the seatback or hold the seatback with your hand to control its return motion. Seat and restraint systems 4-3 4 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Front seats WARNING 4  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death. 1- To move the seat cushion up 2- To move the seat cushion down Heated seats (if so equipped) N00435601418 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat only, if so equipped) N00402100243 To adjust the seat height, turn the dial as shown in the illustration. 4-4 Seat and restraint systems The heated seats can be operated by pushing the switch when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. The indicator light (A) will illuminate while the heater is on. 1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating) 2Heater off 3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm) WARNING  Persons who are unable to feel temperature change or skin pain due to age, illness, injury, medication, alcohol use, fatigue or other physical conditions or who have sensitive skin may suffer burns when using the heated seat even at low temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, people with such conditions must use care when using the heated seat. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Rear seat CAUTION  Switch off the heated seats when not in use. Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for quick heating. After the seat has become warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” position to keep it warm. Slight variations in the seat temperature may be felt while using the heated seats. This is caused by the operation of the heater’s internal thermostat and does not indicate a malfunction.  Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into the seat.  Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other insulating material on the seat while using the heater; doing so can cause the heater element to overheat.  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic solvents; doing so can cause damage not only to the surface of the seat, but also to the heater.  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use. Head restraints Rear seat N00402501257 Arm rest N00403001334 To use the arm rest, tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to “Cup holder” on page 5-117. N00404301637 Padded head restraints for the seats can reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear. The head restraints are equipped in the illustrated position. To maximize the effectiveness of your head restraint, adjust the front seatback to the upright position and the head restraint to the proper position. Sit back against the seatback with your head close to the head restraint. NOTE  Never sit on an arm rest. Doing so could damage the arm rest. Seat and restraint systems 4-5 4 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Head restraints WARNING 4  Driving without the head restraints in place can cause you and your passengers serious injury or death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when the seat is occupied.  In order to minimize the risk of a neck injury due to a rear impact, the front seatback must be adjusted to the upright position and the head restraint to the proper position before vehicle operation. The driver should never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.  Never place a cushion or similar device on the seatback. This can adversely affect head restraint performance by increasing the distance between your head and the restraint. 4-6 Seat and restraint systems Adjustment of the head restraint height (front seats) To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, adjust the head restraint height so that the center of the restraint is at your ear level when seated. Any person too tall for the restraint to reach their ear level when seated should raise the restraint to the highest locked position.  To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.  To lower the restraint, push down on it while pressing the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrow.  After adjusting the height, push down on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position. To remove Press the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrows. Then pull the head restraint up and out of the seatback. WARNING  To help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident, the head restraints must be properly installed and positioned to proper height before vehicle operation. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts To install First check that the head restraint is facing in the right direction as shown in the previous illustration, and then insert it into the seatback. Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint locks into place. CAUTION WARNING  The shape and size of the head restraint differs according to the seat. Always use the correct head restraint provided for the seat and do not install the head restraint in the wrong direction. CAUTION  Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out as shown in the illustration. Then pull the head restraint up to make sure that it is locked in place and will not come out of the seatback. Seat belts N00406001481 Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help reduce the risk of injury to the driver and passenger in the event of an accident. Always use the provided seat belts. Carefully review the following information for proper seat belt usage.  To help reduce the risk of injury or death in an accident, seat belts and child restraint systems must always be used. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13 for additional information.  Never use one seat belt for more than one person.  Never carry more people in your vehicle than there are seat belts.  Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.  Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put it behind you or under your arm.  Always wear the lap belt as low as possible across your hips, not around your waist.  Never modify or alter the seat belts in your vehicle.  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver’s airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle. Seat and restraint systems 4-7 4 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts WARNING 4  To reduce the risk to a front seat passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying airbag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated all the way back and upright in their seat, and moves the seat as far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page 4-21 for additional information.  Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.  Children 12 years old and under should always ride in the rear seat and be properly restrained. This reduces their risk of serious injury or death in an accident, especially due to a deploying front passenger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13 for additional information.  Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing child safety seat and positioned in the rear seat. 4-8 Seat and restraint systems WARNING  In the event of an accident, all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attachment hardware, should be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to determine whether replacement is necessary. Seat belt instructions N00406200460 All seats are equipped with a seat belt which uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with an emergency locking retractor. This system is designed to provide both comfort and safety. It permits full extension and automatic retraction of the belts during normal vehicle operation. A sensing device inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the retractor in the event of a sudden change in the vehicle’s motion. NOTE  For instructions on installing a child restraint system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt” on page 4-18. 1. Occupants should always sit back in their seats with their backs against the upright seatback. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death during deployment of the airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle. The front passenger seat should also be moved as far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust the seat forward or backward” on page 4-3. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts WARNING  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death. 2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the webbing so that it easily pulls across your body. 3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate. Push the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is locked securely in the buckle. 4 NOTE NOTE  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled out, pull it once with force and let it retract all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. 4. The lap part of the belt must always be worn low and snug across the hips. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to take up any slack in the lap belt.  With the exception of the seat belt for the driver, the seat belts in all other seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function (see page 4-18). When the ALR function has been activated, the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4. WARNING  Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and is worn as low as possible across the hips, not around the waist. Failure to follow this instruction will increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident. Seat and restraint systems 4-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts WARNING  Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt performance. 4 5. To release the belt, press the button on the buckle and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists in the webbing. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts. Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light N00418400384 A tone and warning light are used to remind the driver to fasten the seat belt. without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a warning light will come on and a tone will sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind you to fasten your seat belt. If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still unfastened, the warning light will blink and the tone will sound intermittently until the seat belt is fastened. WARNING  In order to reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, always fasten your own seat belt. Do not allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or she is also seated and fastening a seat belt. Children should additionally be restrained in a secure child restraint system. NOTE  If the seat belt subsequently remains unfastened, the warning light and the tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a stop. Front passenger seat belt warning light N00418300237 If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON 4-10 Seat and restraint systems The front passenger seat belt warning light is located at shown in the illustration. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, this indicator normally comes on and goes off a few seconds later. The light comes on when a person sits on the front passenger seat but does not fasten the seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is subsequently fastened. WARNING  When a child booster seat is used on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat belt warning light will not come on, if the seat belt is not fastened when the booster seat is used. Confirm that the child is wearing the seat belt properly.  Do not install any accessory or sticker that makes the light difficult to see. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (front seats) N00406300357 The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) and slide the anchor to the desired position. Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into position. Installation WARNING  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when the vehicle is not in motion.  Make sure the anchor is securely locked in position after adjusting it. 1. Unfasten the button (A) of the seat belt guide strap. Put the seat belt webbing through the seat belt guide strap and fasten the button. Seat belt guide strap (rear seat) N00419301055 The seat belt guide straps are equipped on the seatback. The seat belt guide strap will provide comfort by keeping away the belt webbing from your neck. CAUTION WARNING  Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder without touching your neck. The shoulder belt should not be able to fall off your shoulder. Failure to follow this instruction can adversely affect seat belt performance and increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.  Make sure the part of the seat belt webbing you inserted into the seat belt guide strap is not twisted. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt performance. Seat and restraint systems 4-11 4 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belt use during pregnancy 2. Fasten the seat belt and make sure it fits snugly across your shoulder. 4 WARNING  The extender should only be used if the existing belt is not long enough. Anyone who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an extender can adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.  When not required, the extender must be removed and stowed. Seat belt use during pregnancy Seat belt extender N00406800147 N00406700205 If your seat belt is not long enough, even when fully extended, a seat belt extender must be obtained. The extender may be used for either of the front seats. Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, pregnant women are more likely to be seriously injured or killed in an accident if they do not wear seat belts. WARNING  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to pregnant women and unborn children in an accident, pregnant women should always wear a seat belt. The lap portion of the seat belt should be worn snug and low across the hips and below the rounding. Consult your doctor if you have any additional questions or concerns. 4-12 Seat and restraint systems Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems N00417701752 The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner system and force limiter system. Pre-tensioner system The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner system. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side collision or when a rollover or overturning of the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner system operates simultaneously with the deployment of the front airbags, side airbags or curtain airbags. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within the seat belt retractors (A). When activated, the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt webbing and increase seat belt performance. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in ON. The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes the following components: 12345- SRS warning light Front impact sensors Seat belt pre-tensioner Side impact sensors Airbag control unit The airbag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate under the same conditions as the airbag control unit. When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, some smoke is released and a loud noise will be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, as it may cause some temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems. The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in certain collisions, even though the vehicle may appear to be severely damaged. Such non-activation does not mean that something is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather that the collision forces were not severe enough to activate the system. WARNING  The seat belt pre-tensioner system is designed to work only once. After the seat belt pre-tensioners have been activated, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire seat belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. SRS warning light N00408700137 This warning light tells you if there is a problem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS warning light” on page 4-27. Force limiter system N00408900142 In the event of an accident, the seat belt force limiter system will help reduce the force applied to the driver and front seat passenger. Child restraint systems N00407101753 When transporting infants or small children in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint system must always be used. This is required by law in the U.S. and Canada. Seat and restraint systems 4-13 4 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems 4 Child restraint systems specifically designed for infants and small children are offered by several manufacturers. Choose only a child restraint system with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufacturer’s statement of compliance on the box and child restraint system itself. The child restraint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight and height, and should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. For detailed information, refer to the instruction manual accompanying the child restraint system. Guidelines for child restraint system selection All children should be properly restrained in a restraint device that offers the maximum protection for their size and age. Be sure to check local, state, or provincial requirements for child size and age that may vary from the recommendations listed below.  Children less than 1 year old and who weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat. 4-14 Seat and restraint systems  Children older than 1 year of age and who weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must be in a forward-facing restraint used only in the rear seat.  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should use a suitable child seat or a booster seat in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-andshoulder belt fits them properly. WARNING  All children must be seated in the rear seat, and properly restrained. Accident statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat, rather than in the front seat.  Be sure to select a child restraint system that is appropriate not only for the child’s size and age but also for your vehicle. Some child restraint systems may not fit your vehicle properly. WARNING  Any child who is too large to use a child restraint system should ride in the rear seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt properly. The shoulder belt must be positioned over the shoulder and across the chest, not across their neck, and with the lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips, not across their stomach. If necessary, a booster seat should be used to help achieve a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use a booster seat that is certified as complying with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations.  Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop. BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems Airbag WARNING  Your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger’s airbag. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger’s airbag. During deployment of that airbag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraint systems or infant restraint systems must only be used in the rear seat. WARNING  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If one must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child. WARNING  It is important to use an approved rearfacing infant restraint until the infant is one year old (unless the infant outgrows the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s neck and spine to develop enough to support the weight of their head in the event of an accident.  When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer and follow the directions in this manual. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death to your child in an accident or sudden stop.  After installation, push and pull the child restraint system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the child or other occupants in the event of an accident or sudden stop.  When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt, or remove it from the vehicle, in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident. Seat and restraint systems 4-15 4 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems NOTE 4  Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it in the rear seat to ensure proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some manufacturer’s child restraint systems. If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has been tightened, choose another manufacturer’s child restraint system. Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the child restraint system that you have, the child restraint system can be attached using one of the following 2 methods: • Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the child restraint system is compatible with the LATCH system (See page 4-16). • Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-18). 4-16 Seat and restraint systems Installing a child restraint system using the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for children) system N00418801183 Lower anchor locations The outboard seating positions in the rear seat of your vehicle are equipped with lower anchors for attaching child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system. Tether anchor locations N00418901230 Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear seat. These are for securing a child restraint system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your vehicle. BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems Examples of child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system N00419000202 3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the child restraint system into the lower anchors (C) in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Remember, the lower anchors provided with your vehicle are designed to secure suitable child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system in the outboard positions of the rear seat only. The anchor connectors are NOT designed to secure a suitable child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat. A- Rear-facing child restraint system B- Front-facing child restraint system C- Child restraint system lower anchor connectors D- Tether strap (These are only examples.) Using the LATCH system N00419101297 1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, remove the head restraint from the location where you wish to install the child restraint system. 2. Open the gap a little between the seat cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with your hand to locate the lower anchors (C). ABCD- Vehicle seat cushion Vehicle seatback Lower anchor Connector NOTE  In order to secure a child restraint system compatible with the LATCH system, you must use the lower anchor points in the outboard positions of the rear seat. To secure a child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’s center seat belt. WARNING  If there is any foreign material in or around the lower anchors, remove it before installing the child restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is away from, not looped through or otherwise interfering with, the child restraint system. If foreign matter is not removed and/or the seat belt interferes with the child restraint system, the child restraint system will not be secured properly, could detach and move forward in the event of sudden braking or an accident, and could result in injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.  When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust the seat where the child restraint system is installed. 4. Open the cover for the tether anchor by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (4). Seat and restraint systems 4-17 4 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems 5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child restraint system to the anchor (F) as illustrated below (5) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened. 4 Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt (with emergency/automatic locking mechanism) N00407301540 6. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to ensure it is firmly secured. WARNING  Child restraint system tether anchors are designed only to withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 4-18 Seat and restraint systems With the exception of the driver, the seat belt in all other seating positions can be converted from normal Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. This means that when you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function. Always use the ALR child restraint installation function when you install a child restraint system using the seat belt. Children 12 years old and under should always be restrained in the rear seat, whenever possible, although the front passenger seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode. WARNING  When you install a child restraint system using the seat belt, always make sure the retractor has been switched to the ALR child restraint installation function. The ALR function will keep the child restraint system tightly secured to the seat. Failure to convert the retractor to the ALR function may allow the child restraint system to move forward during sudden braking or an accident, resulting in serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems WARNING  Never remove the buckle (A) for the rear center seat from the rubber belt (B). If the buckle is detached from the rubber belt, the ALR mode may become deactivated and a child restraint system used in the rear center seat position may not be secured, resulting in serious injury or death to a child using the child restraint system and/or other occupants. Always make sure that the buckle is passed under the rubber belt as shown in the illustration below. Installation 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat where you wish to install it. To help assure proper fitting of the child restraint system, always remove the head restraint. 2. Route the seat belt through the child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure you hear a “click” when you insert the latch plate into the buckle. 3. To activate the ALR child restraint installation function, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out of the retractor until it stops. Then let the belt feed back into the retractor. 4 4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is in the ALR function, you will not be able to pull it out. If the webbing can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR function has not been activated and you will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. Seat and restraint systems 4-19 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems 4 5. After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt allowing the slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child restraint system will not be secure. It may help to put your weight on the child restraint system and/or push on its seatback while pulling up on the belt (See illustration). 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint system to the tether anchor (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened. 9. To remove a child restraint system from the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, remove the child from the restraint. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt from the restraint and let the belt fully retract. 10. Reinstall the head restraint. Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-5. Children who have outgrown child restraint systems N00407601686 WARNING If your child restraint system requires the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in accordance with the following procedures. 6. Open the cover from the tether anchor installation point by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (6). 4-20 Seat and restraint systems  Child restraint system tether anchors are designed only to withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 8. Before putting your child in the restraint, push and pull the restraint in all directions to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this before each use. If the child restraint system is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 through 7. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses their stomach, a commercially available booster seat must be used to raise the child so that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the lap belt remains positioned low across their hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations. BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Maintenance and inspection of seat belts WARNING  Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system, to reduce their risk of serious injury or death in an accident.  A child should never be left unattended in, or unsupervised around, your vehicle. When you leave the vehicle, always take the child out as well.  Children can die from heat stroke if left or trapped inside the vehicle, especially on hot days.  Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children.  Never allow children to play in the trunk of your vehicle. Maintenance and inspection of seat belts N00407000364 The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow them to retract until completely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or redye the belts. The color may rub off and the webbing strength may be affected. Regularly check your seat belt buckles and their release mechanisms for positive engagement and release of the latch plate. Check the retractors for automatic locking when in the Automatic Locking Retractor function. The entire seat belt assembly should be replaced if the webbing shows any obvious cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any section of the webbing from broken fibers, or severe fading from sunlight. All of these conditions indicate a weakening of the belt, which may adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident. WARNING  Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the seat belt assemblies. This work should be done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer perform the work could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could result in a serious injury or death in an accident. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag N00407701850 This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which includes airbags for the driver and passengers. The SRS front airbags are designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems by providing those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS front airbags, together with sensors at the front of the vehicle and sensors attached to the front seats, form an advanced airbag system. The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the forward movement of the driver’s lower legs and provide increased overall body protection in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags are also designed to supplement the seat belts. The SRS side airbags provide the driver and front passenger with protection against chest injuries by deploying the bag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide the driver and passengers on the front seat and rear outboard seat with protection against head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions and by deploying both curtain airbags when a rollover is detected. The curtain airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of complete and partial ejec- Seat and restraint systems 4-21 4 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag tion from the vehicle through side windows in both side impact and rollover type accidents. 4 The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use of the seat belts. For maximum protection in all types of accidents, seat belts must ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or rides in this vehicle (with infants and small children in an appropriate child restraint system in the rear seat, and older children buckled in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13. WARNING  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. • Seat belts help keep the driver and passengers properly positioned. This reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, and reduces the risk of serious injuries or death when the airbags inflate. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained or improperly restrained driver or passengers can move forward into direct contact with, or within close proximity to, the airbag when it begins to inflate. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injuries or death if the occupant comes in contact with the airbag at this time. 4-22 Seat and restraint systems WARNING • Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in rear impact collisions, and in lowerspeed frontal collisions because the airbags are not designed to inflate in those situations. • Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle in a collision or rollover.  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED. • A driver or front passenger sitting too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment can be seriously injured or killed. • Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. If the driver and front passenger are not properly seated and restrained, the airbag may not provide the proper protection, and can cause serious injuries or death when it inflates. • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death due to a deploying driver’s airbag, always properly wear your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible, maintaining a position that still allows the driver to have good control of the steering wheel, brake, accelerator, and other vehicle controls. WARNING • To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying passenger’s airbag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated upright and all the way back in the seat, and positions the seat as far back as possible. • Seat all infants and children in the rear seat, properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. Do not sit on the edge of the seat or sit with your lower legs too close to the instrument panel, or lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or the instrument panel.  Do not put your feet or legs on or against the instrument panel. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag WARNING  Infants and small children should never ride unrestrained, or lean against the instrument panel. They should never ride held in your arms or on your lap. They can be seriously injured or killed in an accident, especially when the airbags inflate. Seat all infants and children in the rear seat, properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13. WARNING  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger’s airbag. During deployment of that airbag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraint systems or infant restraint systems must only be used in the rear seat. WARNING  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If they must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child. Airbag WARNING  Older children should be seated in the rear seat with their seat belt properly worn, and with an appropriate booster seat if needed. Refer to “Children who have outgrown child restraint systems” on page 4-20. Seat and restraint systems 4-23 4 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag When the impact sensors detect a sufficient front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s), the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. How the Supplemental Restraint System works N00407801587 When the airbag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be deployed. The SRS includes the following components: 4 10- Front impact sensors 11- Side impact sensors 12- Curtain airbag modules 1234567- Airbag module (Driver) Passenger’s airbag off indicator SRS warning light Airbag module (Passenger) Side airbag modules Driver’s seat position sensor Passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system 8- Airbag module (Driver’s knee) 9- Airbag control unit The airbag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in ON. The airbags will operate under the same conditions as the airbag control unit. When airbags deploy, some smoke is released accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale the smoke as it may cause temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems. An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you may not even notice that the airbag was inflated. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, and does not prevent people from leaving the vehicle. CAUTION  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. In certain situations, contact with an inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abrasions, and bruises. Event Data Recording N00418600256 This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). 4-24 Seat and restraint systems BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:  How various systems in your vehicle were operating;  Whether or not the driver and front passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,  How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. “SRS warning light” on page 4-27. NOTE  EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. WARNING  If the SRS warning light comes on, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.  Please observe the following instructions to ensure that the driver’s seat position sensor can operate correctly. • Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2. • Do not recline the seatback more than necessary when driving. • Do not place metallic objects or luggage under the front seat.  If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. Driver’s seat position sensor N00417900223 The driver’s seat position sensor is attached to the seat rail and provides the airbag control unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft position. The airbag control unit controls deployment of the driver’s front airbag in accordance with the information it receives from this sensor. If there is a problem involving the driver’s seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to Passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system N00418000364 The passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system is attached to the front passenger seat cushion and provides the airbag control unit with information regarding the occupant on the front passenger seat. The airbag control unit controls deployment of the Seat and restraint systems 4-25 4 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag 4 passenger’s front airbag in accordance with the information it receives from this system. The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy in an impact when the system senses no occupant on the front passenger seat or a child in a child restraint system. In this case, the passenger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate. Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on page 4-26. If there is a problem involving the passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-27. WARNING  If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible: • The SRS warning light does not initially come on when the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions. • [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in ON. • The SRS warning light does not go out after several seconds. 4-26 Seat and restraint systems WARNING • The SRS warning light comes on while you are driving.  To ensure that the passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system can sense correctly, observe the following instructions. Failure to follow these instructions can adversely affect the performance of the passenger’s airbag system. • Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2. • Do not recline the seatback more than necessary. • Never have more than one person (adult or child) sitting on the seat. • Do not place anything between the seat and the floor console. • When attaching a child restraint system, secure it firmly. • Do not place luggage or other objects on the seat. • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion. • Do not modify or replace the seat and seat belt. • Do not place luggage or other objects under the seat. • Do not place and use an electronic device such as a computer on the seat. • Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other objects into it. • Do not remove the seat cushion skin. WARNING • If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it and dry the seat immediately.  If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. Passenger’s airbag off indicator N00418101359 The passenger’s airbag off indicator is located at shown in the illustration. The indicator normally comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes out a few seconds later. In the following situations, the indicator will stay on to show that the passenger front airbag is not operational.  The front passenger seat is not occupied. BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag  The system senses that a child is using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. When the passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system senses there is a person seated in the front passenger seat, the indicator goes out to show that the passenger’s front airbag is operational. WARNING  If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have the airbag system in your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible: • The passenger’s airbag off indicator comes on when an adult is sitting on the front passenger seat. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does not come on when the front passenger seat is not occupied. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does not come on when a child is in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator comes on and goes out repeatedly. WARNING  Do not attach any accessory to your vehicle that makes the passenger’s airbag off indicator difficult or impossible to see. You must be able to see the passenger’s airbag off indicator and verify the status of the passenger’s airbag system. SRS warning light N00408300579 There is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. The system checks itself every time the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS warning light will come on for several seconds and then go out. This is normal and means the system is working properly. If there is a problem involving one or more of the SRS components, the warning light will come on and stay on. The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system. 4 WARNING  If any of the following conditions occur, there may be a problem with the SRS airbags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and they may not function properly in a collision or may suddenly activate without a collision: • Even when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON, the SRS warning light does not come on or it remains on. • The SRS warning light comes on while driving. The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-tensioners are designed to help reduce the risk of serious injury or death in certain collisions. If either of the above conditions occurs, immediately have your vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Driver’s and passenger’s front airbag system N00407900321 The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. Seat and restraint systems 4-27 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag 4 The front passenger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panel above the glove compartment. The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at the same time. However, the front passenger’s airbag does not deploy when the front passenger seat is not occupied or when the system senses that a child is in the child restraint system. Driver Front passenger Driver’s knee airbag system N00404500036 The driver’s knee airbag is located under the steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is designed to deploy at the same time as the driver’s front airbag. 4-28 Seat and restraint systems 午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Deployment of front airbags N00408001658 The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when … Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical condition is shown in the illustration to the left. The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are designed to deploy only in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions within the shaded area between the arrows in the illustration to the right. 4 Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is above a specific threshold level. The threshold level is approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is below this threshold level, the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This threshold level may also be higher if the vehicle hits something that absorbs the impact, either by bending or moving (for example, another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard rail). The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful, and can cause serious injury or death if you are too close to the deploying airbag. Accordingly, it is important that you always wear the available seat belt. Seat and restraint systems 4-29 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when … 4 In certain types of front collisions, the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the impact and deform in order to help protect the occupants. Some typical situations where the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy are shown in the illustrations. Since the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag do not protect the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck Oblique frontal impact Side collision to your vehicle The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are not designed to deploy in situations where Seat and restraint systems Since the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear the your seat belts properly. Rear end collision to your vehicle The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when … 4-30 they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustration. Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when … The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may deploy if the underside of the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe impact (undercarriage impact). Some typical situations are shown in the illustration. Since the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may deploy in certain types of unexpected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, and these unexpected impacts can move you out of position, it is important to always wear your seat belts properly. When worn properly, seat belts can help maintain your distance from the airbags when they begin to inflate. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injury or death if you are close to the deploying airbag. Collision with an elevated median/island or curb 4 Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole WARNING Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground WARNING  Do not attach anything to the steering wheel’s padded cover, such as trim material, badges, etc. These could strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.  Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the instrument panel above the glove compartment. Such items could strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.  Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of, the windshield. They could restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and injure an occupant, when the airbag inflates.  Do not attach additional keys or accessories (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the ignition key. Such objects could prevent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating normally or could be propelled to cause serious injury if the airbag inflates.  Do not attach accessories to the lower portion of the driver’s side instrument panel. Such objects could prevent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating normally or could be propelled to cause serious injury if the airbag inflates. Seat and restraint systems 4-31 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Side airbag system 4 Curtain airbag system N00408100421 N00419201302 The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and front passenger seatbacks. The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat. The curtain airbags are contained in the front pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the seat. Also, when the airbag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags will deploy. WARNING  Do not attempt to remove, install, disassemble or repair the SRS airbags.  Do not place objects, such as packages or pets, between the airbags and the driver or the front passenger. Such objects can adversely affect airbag performance, or cause serious injury or death when the airbag deploys.  Immediately after airbag inflation, some parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do not touch them. You could otherwise be burned.  The airbag system is designed to work only once. After the airbags deploy, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire airbag system must be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 4-32 Seat and restraint systems A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehicles equipped with side airbags. WARNING  The side airbags and curtain airbags can cause serious injury or death to anyone too close to the airbag when it deploys. To reduce the risk of injury from a deploying side airbag and curtain airbag, all occupants must be properly restrained and seated well back, upright, and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean against the door. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag WARNING  Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other object around the part where the curtain airbag deploys, such as on the windshield, side door glass or front and rear pillars and roof side rail. When the curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or other object may be hurled with great force or the curtain airbag may not inflate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. WARNING  In order to reduce the risk of injury from a deploying side airbag, do not allow any rear seat passengers to hold onto the back of either front seat. Special care should be taken with children.  Do not place any objects around the area where the side airbags deploy. Such objects can interfere with proper side airbag deployment, and cause injury during deployment of the side airbag.  Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on the back of either front seat. They can interfere with proper side airbag deployment. WARNING  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats that have side airbags. Covers can interfere with proper side airbag deployment and adversely affect side airbag performance. WARNING  Never install a rear-facing child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Rearfacing child restraint systems MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.  Front-facing child restraint systems should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. If a front-facing child restraint system must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, and make sure that the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained and away from the door.  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit close to the passenger door, even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. The child’s head should also not lean against or be close to the section of the seatback where the side airbag and curtain airbag are located. It is dangerous if the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys. Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead to serious injury or death to the child.  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side airbag or curtain airbag components should be done only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk of a serious injury or death. Improper work methods can cause accidental side airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or render a side airbag or curtain airbag inoperable. Either of these situations could result in serious injury or death. Seat and restraint systems 4-33 4 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Deployment of side airbag and curtain airbag N00408201588 4 The side airbag and curtain airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when... The side airbag and curtain airbag are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe side impact to the middle of the passenger compartment. Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy. Typical situations are shown in the illustration. Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body’s side structure When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle (Curtain airbag only) 4-34 Seat and restraint systems The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in an accident. The SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly. The side airbag and curtain airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when... In certain types of side collisions, the side airbag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the impact and to deform in order to help protect the occupants. There are also cases where the side airbag and curtain airbag may not deploy at the same time, depending on the location of the impact. Some typical situations where the side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy are shown in the illustrations on the following page. Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always wear the seat belts properly. Side impact in an area away from the passenger compartment Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collision with the side of vehicle Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Oblique side impact Head-on collision SRS servicing N00408501741 WARNING Rear end collision to your vehicle Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag only) Pitch end over end The side airbag and curtain airbag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when... The side airbag and curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustration. Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.  Any maintenance performed on or near the components of the SRS should be performed only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else to do any service, inspection, maintenance or repair on any SRS components or wiring. Similarly, no part of the SRS should ever be handled, removed or disposed by anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper work methods on the SRS components or wiring could result in an accidental airbag deployment or could make the SRS inoperable. Either of these situations could result in serious injury or death.  Do not modify your steering wheel or any other SRS component or related vehicle part. For example, replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications to the front bumper or body structure can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury.  If your vehicle has received any damage, you should have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to make sure it is in proper working order. Seat and restraint systems 4-35 4 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag WARNING 4  Do not modify your front seats, center pillar or center console. Such modifications can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury. Also, if you discover any tear or open seam in the seat fabric near the side airbag, have the seat inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  If you have found any scratch, crack or damage to the portion of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, you should have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to another person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the applicable sections in this owner’s manual.  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can be made safe for disposal.  If any of the following parts needs to be modified for use by a handicapped person, the advanced airbag system will be greatly affected. Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. • Driver’s seat • Front passenger seat • Front seat belt 4-36 Seat and restraint systems NOTE • Steering wheel • Instrument panel [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064 [For vehicles sold in Canada] To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 Warning label N00408600383 Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS are located in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. * - Located in the passenger’s side as well. BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Features and controls Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2 Keys .................................................................................................5-2 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9 Door locks ......................................................................................5-24 Power door locks ...........................................................................5-25 Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-26 Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-27 Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-28 Manual window control (if so equipped)........................................5-29 Power window control ...................................................................5-29 Parking brake .................................................................................5-32 Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-33 Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-34 Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-36 Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-37 Starting the engine .........................................................................5-38 Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-40 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-42 Service brake .................................................................................5-46 Hill start assist ................................................................................5-47 Brake assist system ........................................................................5-49 Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-49 Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-51 Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-52 Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-54 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) ..........................5-58 Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-62 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-64 Multi-information display .............................................................5-65 Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-75 Indicators .......................................................................................5-76 Warning lights ................................................................................5-76 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-79 Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-81 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-82 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-82 Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-82 Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-84 Horn switch ...................................................................................5-85 Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-85 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).......................................5-85 USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-105 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-109 12 V power outlets ....................................................................... 5-110 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) ............... 5-110 Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-115 Storage spaces .............................................................................. 5-116 Cup holders .................................................................................. 5-117 Bottle holders ............................................................................... 5-118 Convenience hook ....................................................................... 5-118 Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-119 5 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Break-in recommendations Break-in recommendations Keys N00508701382 5 Advanced automobile manufacturing techniques permit you to operate your new vehicle without requiring a long break-in period of low-speed driving. However, you can add to the future performance and economy of your vehicle by observing the following precautions during the first 300 miles (500 km). Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during the break-in period.  Avoid revving the engine.  Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts, sudden acceleration, prolonged highspeed driving and sudden braking. These would have a detrimental effect on the engine and also cause increased fuel and oil consumption, which could result in malfunction of the engine components. Be particularly careful to avoid full acceleration while in low shift position (low gears).  Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load precautions” on page 6-10.)  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. 5-2 Features and controls N00508801703 Type 1 Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and keyless entry system 2- Key number plate Type 3 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer 2- Key number plate Type 2 Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys are provided. Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency key in a safe place together as a set of spare keys. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) NOTE 1- F.A.S.T.-key (with electronic immobilizer and keyless entry system function) 2- Emergency key 3- Key number plate NOTE  The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a precision electronic device with a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to prevent damage. • Do not leave where it may be exposed to heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on top of the dashboard. • Do not take the remote control transmitter apart. • Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong impacts. • Keep the remote control transmitter dry. • Keep away from magnetic objects such as key rings. • Keep away from devices that produce magnetism, such as audio systems, computers and televisions. • Keep away from devices that emit strong electromagnetic waves, such as cellular phones, wireless devices and high frequency equipment (including medical devices). • Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. • Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high temperature or high humidity.  If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of the vehicle immediately contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer of the key number, they can make a new key. The key number is stamped on the key number plate. Keep the key number plate in a safe place separate from the key itself.  No keys other than those registered in advance can be used to start the engine. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-3. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-19. NOTE  When the theft-alarm is in the system operational status, the alarm operates if a door is opened after using the key, the door lock knob or the power door lock switch to unlock the vehicle.  The system does not enter the preparation status if the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehicle. Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) N00509100780 [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key)] For information on operations for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Antitheft starting system)” on page 5-19. [Except for vehicles equipped with the Freehand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)] The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is Features and controls 5-3 5 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions) using a key “registered” to the immobilizer system. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics. 5 NOTE  A system failure is suspected when the ignition switch is turned to the “START” position, and the engine does not start. In such a case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to recognize the registered ID code from the key. This means the engine will not start even when the key is turned to the “START” position. • When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or magnetic object (Type A) • When the key grip contacts metal of another key (Type B) • When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizer keys (including keys of other vehicles) (Type C)  In cases like the above, move the offending object(s) away from the key and turn the key back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then try to start the engine again. If the engine does not start, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 5-4 Features and controls CAUTION  Do not make any alterations or additions to the immobilizer system. Alterations or additions could cause failure of the immobilizer. Replacement keys Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the vehicle. NOTE  The key may not operate properly when it is near an object or facility that emits strong electromagnetic waves.  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible with commercially available remote starting systems. Use of commercially available remote starting systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. If you lose the key, you can order a key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the vehicle keys must be changed. Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer) by doing the following: Additional keys To add a key, you must already have 2 registered keys. You need to register the ID code to the vehicle. Registering the ID code can be done by yourself (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For you to register the ID code yourself, follow the “Customer key programming” procedure below. If you choose to have your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and all remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  You are provided with 2 keys, but you may register up to 8 keys. Customer key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada) N00562201178 You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid (already registered) keys and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for 1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the “ON” position for 5 seconds. 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and remove the first key. 3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first key, insert the second valid key into the ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer indicator will start to blink. 4. When the immobilizer indicator starts blinking, turn the second valid key to the “OFF” position and remove it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank immobilizer key into the ignition switch and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform this operation no more than 30 seconds after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking. When registration of the ID code is complete, the immobilizer indicator will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an error occurs, the immobilizer indicator will go off during the procedure. NOTE  When the key registration is completed, the immobilizer indicator will come on within 3 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON” position with the blank immobilizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer). 5. If you wish to register another key, perform the process again from step 1. NOTE  It is not possible to register a key if: • the immobilizer indicator goes off during the procedure • the immobilizer indicator does not come on within 30 seconds after step 4.  The procedure will be terminated automatically if: • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the first key is turned to the “OFF” position to the moment when the second key is turned to the “ON” position • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the second key is turned to the “OFF” position to the moment when the blank immobilizer key is turned to the “ON” position • more than 20 seconds elapses after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking Features and controls 5-5 5 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) General information Keyless entry system (if so N00562300097 5 Your electronic immobilizer operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions. equipped) N00509002015 Press the remote control transmitter buttons to lock or unlock the doors. It can also help you signal for attention by setting off the panic alarm.  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTE  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the horn will sound once. To unlock Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all the doors. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. The turn signal lights will also blink twice. Answerback function 1- LOCK ( ) button 2- UNLOCK ( ) button 3- PANIC button 4- Indicator light The horn of the keyless entry system answerback function can be changed as required. This is done with the key removed from the ignition switch. NOTE  The answerback function will not operate if any of the doors are open. To lock Horn deactivation/reactivation Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the doors. The turn signal lights will also blink once. 5-6 Features and controls The answerback function can be set in the following three ways. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) Each time the answerback function is set, a chime will sound to tell you the condition of the answerback function. One chime: The horn will not sound. Two chimes: The horn will sound. Four chimes: The horn will sound if the LOCK button is pressed twice within 1 second. 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. Turn signal lights deactivation/reactivation The turn signal lights answerback function can be changed. If you want to change the answerback function, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Using the panic alarm N00543700034 If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than 1 second. 2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will sound intermittently for about 3 minutes. 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the remote control transmitter. Replacement remote control transmitters Additional remote control transmitters N00543900078 To add a remote control transmitter, you must already have 1 registered remote control transmitter. Registering the ID code can be done by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Take your vehicle and any remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  You are provided with 2 remote control transmitters, but you may register up to 4 remote control transmitters. N00543801090 Only remote control transmitters programmed with the vehicle’s electronics can lock or unlock all doors. If you lose the remote control transmitter, you can order a remote control transmitter from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the remote control transmitter must be changed. Take your vehicle and all remote control transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. General information N00546100114 Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions. Features and controls 5-7 5 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Keyless entry system (if so equipped)  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. 5 NOTE  Be sure to perform the procedure with the Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you open the remote control transmitter case, the buttons may come out.  The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC) number and the model number (radio certification) are indicated in the illustrated position. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter battery 3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the notch in the remote control transmitter case and use it to open the case. N00544101191 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object. 2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote control transmitter. 5-8 Features and controls 4. Remove the old battery. 5. Install a new battery with the + side (B) up. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) + side - side Coin type battery CR1620 6. Close the remote control transmitter firmly. 7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2. 8. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works. CAUTION  When the remote control transmitter case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components. NOTE  You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric appliance store.  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can replace the battery for you if you prefer. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key) (if so equipped) N00503101150 The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be opened, and the engine to be started and the operation mode to be changed simply by carrying it. The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the remote control transmitter of the keyless entry system. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry system” on page 5-21. The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for vehicle operations such as locking and unlocking the doors, starting the engine, and changing the operation mode. When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are carrying the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle. WARNING  Individuals who use implantable pacemakers or implantable cardiovasculardefibrillators should keep away from the external and internal transmitters. The electromagnetic waves used in the F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators. A- External transmitter B- Internal transmitter Features and controls 5-9 5 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) WARNING 5  Individuals using other electro-medical apparatus besides implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should check with the manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm the effect of the electromagnetic waves used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromagnetic waves may affect the operations of the electro-medical apparatus. The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.key can be modified as stated below. (Keyless entry operations are possible.) For details, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. • Enabling only the locking and unlocking of the doors and the opening of the trunk lid • Enabling only the starting of the engine • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key NOTE  The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic waves. In cases such as the following, operation may be improper or unstable. • The vehicle is near a facility that emits strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV transmitting tower, a power station, a radio station or an airport 5-10 Features and controls NOTE • The key is carried together with other communication devices such as cellular phones or radios, or electrical appliances such as computers • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a metal object • A keyless entry system is being used nearby • The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down • The vehicle is in a location with strong electromagnetic waves or noise Use the emergency key in such circumstances. Refer to “To operate without using the F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-19.  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing reception operations in its communication with the vehicle. This means that the battery is always running down, regardless of how often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery life is about 1 to 2 years, depending on the usage conditions.  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing reception operations, the reception of strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate the running down of the battery. Do not place near to electrical appliances such as televisions or computers. Operating range of the F.A.S.T.-key N00503201223 When a person enters the operating range of the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlock switch the trunk lid switch, verification of the ID code is performed. The doors can only be locked and unlocked, the trunk lid can only be opened, the engine can only be started and the operation mode can only be changed when the ID codes of the vehicle and F.A.S.T.-key match. NOTE  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run down or there are strong electromagnetic waves or noise in the area, the operating range could decrease or operations could become unstable. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Operating range for locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk lid The operating range is within about 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock switch and the trunk lid switch. NOTE NOTE  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating range, even a person not carrying the F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s door switch or the trunk lid switch. Operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode N00503301093 The operating range is the interior of the vehicle.  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating range, it may not be possible to start the engine and change the operation mode if the key is in a storage space such as the glove compartment, on top of the instrument panel, or in the door pocket or luggage compartment.  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle, it may not be possible to start the engine and change the operation mode if the key is too close to a door or door window. To operate using the F.A.S.T.key N00503401313 To lock *: Front of the vehicle : Operating range NOTE  The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.key is too close to the windshield, door windows or trunk lid.  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door switch or the trunk lid switch, the system may not operate if the key is close to the ground or in a high position. *: Front of the vehicle : Operating range While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the driver’s door switch (A) within the operating range to lock all the doors. The turn signal lights will blink once and the buzzer will sound once. Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door locks” on pages 5-24 and 5-25 respectively. Features and controls 5-11 5 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Driver’s door To unlock While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the operating range, you can unlock the doors by using the F.A.S.T.-key. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. The turn signal lights will blink twice and the buzzer will sound twice. 5 Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door locks” on pages 5-24 and 5-25 respectively. Trunk lid switch Press the driver’s door switch (A) to unlock only the driver’s door. Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s door switch one more time to unlock all the doors. NOTE  Settings can be changed so that all the doors are unlocked automatically by pressing the driver’s door switch once. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. To open the trunk lid N00590900027 Press the trunk lid switch (B) to open the trunk lid. Trunk lid switch Driver’s switch NOTE  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.key does not operate. • There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger compartment • A door is open or ajar • The operation mode is not in OFF.  The time within which locking confirmation is possible can be adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. 5-12 Features and controls NOTE  If the doors are unlocked using the driver’s door switch when all doors are locked and no doors are opened within about 30 seconds, the doors will automatically re-lock. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) NOTE  The amount of time after unlocking until the vehicle relocks automatically can be adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.key does not operate. • A door is open or ajar • The operation mode is not in OFF.  Functions settings can be modified as stated below. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. • Activating the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn signal lights) only during locking, or only during unlocking. • Deactivating the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn signal lights) and buzzer. • Modifying the number of blinks in the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn signal lights). • Making the buzzer sound when the F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger compartment when all the doors are closed. Engine switch N00513500088 To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys other than those registered in advance can be used to start the engine. (Electronic immobilizer function) While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine switch can be used to start the engine. NOTE  When operating the engine switch, press the switch all the way in. If the switch is not fully pressed, the engine may not start or the operation mode may not change. If the engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no need to hold the engine switch down. 5 Operation mode of the engine switch and its function OFF CAUTION  The indicator light (A) will flash orange when there is a problem or malfunction in Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter. Never drive if the indicator light on the engine switch is flashing orange. Immediately contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  If the engine switch operation is not smooth and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the switch. Immediately contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. The indicator light on the engine switch turns off. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), the operation mode cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever is in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position. ACC Allows operation of some electrical accessories. The indicator light on the engine switch illuminates orange. ON All electrical accessories can be used. Features and controls 5-13 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) The indicator light on the engine switch illuminates green. The indicator light turns off when the engine is running. ACC power auto-cutout function N00568101049 NOTE 5  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-19) Changing the operation mode N00568000025 If you press the engine switch without pressing the brake pedal {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle) while the vehicle is stationary, you can change the operation mode in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. 5-14 Features and controls CAUTION  When the engine is not running, put the operation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation mode in ON or ACC for a long time when the engine is not running may cause the battery to be discharged, making it impossible to start the engine.  When the battery is disconnected, the current operation mode is memorized. After reconnecting the battery, the memorized mode is selected automatically. Before disconnecting the battery for repair or replacement, make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. Be careful if you are not sure which operation mode the vehicle is in when the battery is run down.  The operation mode cannot be changed from OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode” on page 5-11. When the vehicle is in ACC operation mode for approximately 30 minutes, the ACC power auto-cutout function automatically cuts power to the audio system and other electronic devices that can be used during ACC operation mode. To enable power after ACC power auto-cutout function, press the engine switch while in ACC. NOTE  It is possible to modify the functions as follows: • The time until the power cuts out can be changed to approximately 60 minutes. • The ACC power auto-cutout function can be deactivated. For details, we recommend you to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Warning activation N00503501239 With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given through buzzers and displayed symbols in order to prevent mistaken operations or vehicle theft. When a warning operates, be sure to check the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) also shown if there is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key. If the following warning shows, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key Put the operation mode in OFF and then start the engine again. If the warning is not cancelled, there is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Antitheft starting system). Please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If the following warnings show, the light goes off if the correct action is taken.  The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the vehicle cannot be verified Someone may be carrying a F.A.S.T.-key with a different ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key may not be within the operating range Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key takeout monitoring system” on page 5-15. The battery of the F.A.S.T.key is run down  All the doors cannot be locked even when the driver’s door switch is pressed. Refer to “Key lock-in prevention system” on page 5-15. Refer to “Door ajar prevention system” on page 5-16. Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system” on page 5-16. F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, and a door is opened and the F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger compartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.key and the vehicle can no longer be verified. When the door is closed, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzer sounds once. NOTE  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is removed through a window without opening a door. This setting can be changed. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.  The warning may display even if the F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode. The surrounding environment or electromagnetic waves may make it impossible to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle. Key lock-in prevention system N00559901168 N00559801196 Features and controls 5-15 5 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) When the operation mode is in OFF, the F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compartment, all the doors are closed, and someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s door switch, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked. 5 the driver’s door switch, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked. Starting and stopping the engine N00560001169 When the operation mode is in OFF, and someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s door switch while one of the doors is not fully closed, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked. Operation mode OFF reminder system N00560101160 When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, all the doors are closed, and someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing 5-16 Features and controls WARNING N00514601357 Door ajar prevention system The engine is warmed up enough for driving when the low coolant temperature indicator goes out. Refer to “Low coolant temperature indicator” on page 5-76. Tips for starting  The operation mode can be in any mode to start the engine.  The starter motor will be turning for up to approximately 15 seconds if the engine switch is released at once. Pressing the engine switch again while the starter motor is still turning will stop the starter motor. The starter motor will be turning for up to approximately 30 seconds while the engine switch is pressed. If the engine does not start, wait for a while and then attempt to start the engine again. Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.  If the engine will not start because the battery is weak or discharged, refer to “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2 for instructions.  A longer warm up period will only consume extra fuel.  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle out of the area. Carbon monoxide gas, which is odorless and extremely poisonous, could build up and cause serious injury or death. CAUTION  Do not push-start the vehicle.  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive at high speeds until the engine has had a chance to warm up. Starting the engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel injection system. This is a system that automatically controls fuel injection. There is usually no need to depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds between attempts to restart the engine. BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) 1. Make sure all occupants are properly seated with seat belts fastened. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down firmly with your right foot. NOTE  After the engine has not started the brake pedal effort needed engine may become greater. If depress the brake pedal more usual. for a while, to start the this occurs, firmly than 4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down (manual transaxle). NOTE  For vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle, the engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock). This is a safety feature. NOTE  On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), the engine can only be started when the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. For safety reasons, the engine should be started when the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position in which the driving wheels lock. 6. Press the engine switch. 7. Confirm that all warning lights and warning displays are functioning properly. NOTE  Minor noises may be heard on engine startup. These will disappear as the engine warms up. When the engine is hard to start 5. On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. After several attempts, you may experience that the engine still does not start. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such as lights, air conditioning blower and rear window defogger, are turned off. 2. While depressing the brake pedal {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it there, then crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal, immediately after the engine starts. 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine could be flooded with too much gasoline. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), push the accelerator pedal all the way down and hold it there, then press the engine switch to crank the engine. If the engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push the engine switch to stop cranking the engine, and release the accelerator pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a few seconds, and then press the engine switch to crank the engine again while depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but do not push the accelerator pedal. If the engine fails to start, repeat these procedures. If the engine still will not start, contact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Startability of continuously variable transmission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower Features and controls 5-17 5 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) 5 When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start from a standstill even with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position. This phenomenon occurs because the transaxle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. The transaxle will warm up, and you will be able to start normally. Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up operation. Stopping the engine NOTE  If you have to bring the engine to an emergency stop while driving, press and hold the engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.  On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the engine with the selector lever in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the engine is stopped with the selector lever in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position, the operation mode will go to ACC rather than OFF. Put the operation mode in OFF after placing the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operating properly N00568301054 Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console. Starting the engine and changing the operation mode should be now possible. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot after starting the engine or changing the operation mode. N00568200014 WARNING  Do not operate the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake servomechanism will cease to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the steering. This could result in a serious accident. 5-18 Features and controls 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Fully engage the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal. 3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle, press the engine switch to stop the engine, and then move the gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch to stop the engine. NOTE  Do not insert into the key slot anything other than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause damage or a malfunction. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) NOTE  Remove the object or additional key from the F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the key slot. The vehicle may not be able to receive the registered ID code from the registered key. Therefore, the engine may not start and the operation mode may not change. vehicle has run down, the emergency key can be used to lock and unlock the passenger’s door. that the door is locked, turn the emergency key back to the center and remove it. To use the emergency key (A), unlock the lock knob (B) and remove it from the F.A.S.T.-key (C). 5 F.A.S.T.-key reminder If the operation mode is in OFF and the driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key in the key slot, a warning is issued with the warning light and the buzzer buzzing for approximately 3 seconds to remind you to remove the key. To operate without using the F.A.S.T.-key N00514800017 Emergency key N00515201174 The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.key. When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the 1- Lock 2- Unlock NOTE  Only use the emergency key in an emergency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run down, replace the battery as soon as possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.  After using the emergency key, be sure to reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. Locking and unlocking the passenger’s door Turn the emergency key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the door. After checking Electronic immobilizer (Antitheft starting system) N00529600055 The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions) using a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobilizer system. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics. Features and controls 5-19 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE N00561000042 Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the vehicle. 5 If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID codes reprogrammed. Additional F.A.S.T.-keys  You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys. You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada) N00561201201 You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the system if you have two valid (already registered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not registered) F.A.S.T.-key. N00561100056 To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have 2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to register the ID code to the vehicle. Registering the ID code can be done by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it can be done by yourself (except for vehicles sold in Canada). For you to register the ID code yourself, follow the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming” procedure below. If you choose to have your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 5-20 Features and controls 3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot. For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the procedures below. 1. Open the driver’s door. NOTE  Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.key programming is finished. Do not open or close other doors. 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.key, put the operation mode in ON. (Perform the following procedure within 30 seconds.) 4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button during this time. 5. Release in sequence the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Perform the following procedure within 30 seconds.) 6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button during this time. 7. Release in sequence the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The immobilizer warning light will blink. BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Keyless entry system NOTE N00515501278 When registration of ID code is complete, the buzzer will sound 3 times and the immobilizer indicator will come on for 30 seconds. If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key programming will be terminated and the buzzer will sound for 3 seconds. Press the remote control transmitter buttons to lock or unlock the doors. It can also help you signal for attention by setting off the panic alarm. 8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.key, repeat the process from step 1 after the operation mode is put in OFF. NOTE  The immobilizer display will go off immediately if the operation mode is put in OFF.  It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if the immobilizer warning light goes off during the procedure. To unlock Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all the doors. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. The turn signal lights will also blink twice. NOTE  F.A.S.T.-key programming will be terminated if the operation mode is put in OFF before the immobilizer warning light starts blinking.  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the horn will sound once. NOTE 1- LOCK ( ) button 2- UNLOCK ( ) button 3- Trunk button 4- PANIC button 5- Operation indicator light  The door unlock function can be set so that all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on page 5-22. To open the trunk lid N00544401035 To lock Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the doors. The turn signal lights will also blink once. Press the trunk button (3) twice within about 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened. The trunk lid must be closed manually after it has been opened. Features and controls 5-21 5 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Answerback function N00544501094 The horn of the keyless entry system answerback function can be changed as required. Horn deactivation/reactivation 5 The answerback function can be set in the following three ways. One chime: The horn will not sound. Two chimes: The horn will sound. Four chimes: The horn will sound if the LOCK button is pressed twice within 1 second. Turn signal light deactivation/reactivation The turn signal lights answerback function can be changes. If you want to change the answerback function, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. The buzzer answerback function can be turned ON or OFF as required. Setting of door unlock function The door unlock function can be set to the following two conditions. Each time the door unlock function is set, a chime will sound to tell you the condition of the door unlock function. Number of chimes One chime Condition All doors unlock Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position. 5-22 Features and controls Using the panic alarm N00544701100 Buzzer deactivation/reactivation N00544601138 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 3. If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than 1 second. 2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will sound intermittently for about 3 minutes. 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the remote control transmitter. NOTE  The indicator light (4) comes on each time a button is pressed.  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However, this distance may change if your vehicle is near a TV transmitting tower, a power station, or a radio station. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) NOTE  If the following conditions are observed after pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) button on the remote control transmitter, the buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be replaced. • The doors cannot be locked or unlocked. • The panic alarm cannot be operated. • The indicator light (4) is dim or does not come on.  If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a replacement.  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.key can be programmed for your vehicle.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it is necessary to register the key with the electronic immobilizer and keyless entry system. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page 5-20. General information N00562000065 Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device com- plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions.  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter battery 5 NOTE  Be sure to perform the procedure with the Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you open the case, the transmitter may come out. 3. Remove the old battery. 4. Install a new battery with the + side (A) up. + side N00562100066 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object. 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the notch in the case and use it to open the case. - side Coin type battery CR2032 Features and controls 5-23 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Door locks 5. Close the case firmly. 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works. NOTE 5  You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric appliance store.  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can replace the battery for you if you prefer. CAUTION  When the remote control transmitter case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components. Door locks N00509201573 WARNING  Make sure all doors are tightly closed and locked while driving. • Locked doors, in combination with the use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk of ejection in an accident. • Locked doors can help keep passengers, especially small children, from opening doors and falling out of moving vehicles. • Locked doors can help prevent outsiders from gaining access to your vehicle when you slow or come to a stop. 5-24 Features and controls WARNING  Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. Children who get into unlocked vehicles may not be able to get out. Children trapped inside vehicles can quickly be overcome by heat and suffer serious injury or death due to heat stroke.  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat stroke, children can activate switches and controls, resulting in an injury or fatal accident.  When closing a door, make sure that the door is fully closed and the door-ajar warning display goes out on the information screen on the multi-information display. If the door is ajar it could open while driving and cause an accident. To lock and unlock with the key (driver’s door) Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the door. After checking that the door is locked, turn the key back to the center and remove it. 1- Lock 2- Unlock NOTE  When locking or unlocking with the key, only the driver’s door will be locked or unlocked. To lock or unlock all doors, use the power door lock switches, the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T-key operation. (if so equipped) Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-25, “Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and 5-21, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.key” on page 5-11.  In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, the passenger’s door can be locked and unlocked using the emergency key. Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-19. BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Power door locks To lock or unlock the door from the inside 2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehicle. Close the door. the lock knob will automatically return to the unlocked position. Operation mode ON reminder system (vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) Move the lock knob to the lock position to lock the door. All doors should be kept locked while driving. N00503800150 If the driver’s door is opened while the engine is stopped and the operation mode is in any position other than OFF, the operation mode ON buzzer will sound intermittently to remind you to put the operation mode in OFF. Key reminder system (except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) N00549600253 1- Lock 2- Unlock The driver’s door can be unlocked without using the lock knob by pulling on the inside door handle. To lock the door without using the key 1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked position. If the ignition switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the key in the ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will sound intermittently to remind you to remove the key. Lock out protection Power door locks N00509301646 NOTE  When locking or unlocking with the key on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will lock or unlock.  Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock could activate the power door locking system’s built-in protection circuit, and prevent the system from operating. If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the power door lock switch. N00517300042 If the key is in the ignition switch or the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF when you push the lock knob forward with the driver’s door or passenger’s door open, Features and controls 5-25 5 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child safety locks for rear door To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors N00563401177 Using the power door lock switch (if so equipped) 5 You can select the functions to unlock the doors either using the ignition switch or the engine switch, or using the selector lever position {continuously variable transmission (CVT)}. These functions are not activated when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. To activate or deactivate these functions, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Using the ignition switch or the engine switch 1- Lock 2- Unlock All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by pressing the power door lock switch on the driver’s or the front passenger door. Features and controls N00509401315 All doors will unlock when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF. Using the selector lever position {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} All doors will unlock when the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK) position with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. 5-26 Child safety locks for rear door 1- To lock 2- To release BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Trunk lid Child safety locks help prevent rear passengers, especially children, from opening the rear door using the inside door handle. A lock lever for the child safety lock is provided on each rear door. When the lever is in the lock position (1), the rear door cannot be opened using the inside door handle. To open the rear door when the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, pull the outside door handle. When the lever is in the release position (2), the child safety lock is released and the rear door can be opened using the inside door handle. WARNING  Always keep the doors tightly closed and locked when driving. An unlocked door may be accidentally opened by a passenger, especially by a child who could fall out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there is a greater risk of someone being thrown from the vehicle in an accident. To open Trunk lid N00509501215 WARNING  It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and even death.  Do not allow children to have access to the trunk by climbing into the trunk from outside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. If trapped in the trunk, it is possible to escape from the trunk by using the inside emergency trunk release lever. (See “Inside emergency trunk lid release” on page 5-28.) Operation from outside the vehicle Using the key (Vehicles with key cylinder) Insert the key and turn it clockwise. The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to open the trunk. CAUTION  Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns. Using the remote control transmitter (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key) Press the trunk button (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key). (See “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-9.) Features and controls 5-27 5 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Inside emergency trunk lid release The trunk lid will pop up to slightly. Lift it to open the trunk. Operation from inside the vehicle To close Pull the trunk lid downward as illustrated. Gently slam the trunk lid from the outside so that it is completely closed. Always ensure the trunk lid is securely closed. 5 Inside emergency trunk lid release N00509801188 The emergency trunk lid release is designed to provide a way to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. It was developed to help prevent death and serious injuries to children who might become locked inside a vehicle trunk. The emergency trunk lid release lever (see illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid. The lever glows in the dark after exposure to sunlight. Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the left of the driver’s seat, up to open the trunk. CAUTION  Do not use the trunk lid release lever while the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto the road and cause an accident. NOTE  The trunk area light comes on when the trunk lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed. 5-28 Features and controls CAUTION  Be careful to prevent catching anyone’s fingers when closing the trunk lid.  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to confirm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects stored in the trunk could fall out onto the road. You and your family should familiarize yourselves with the location and operation of the emergency trunk lid release lever. Children should be taught not to play in or around vehicles. BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual window control (if so equipped) WARNING  Children should never be left unsupervised in or around vehicles.  Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open vehicle or trunk.  People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk, even if only for a short period of time, can quickly die from suffocation or heat stroke, especially on hot days. Interior temperatures in vehicles can rise in minutes.  Keep your vehicle doors locked and the trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children. CAUTION Power window control  When loading the trunk, place your things so that they will not touch the emergency trunk lid release lever when you close the trunk. Otherwise you could damage the lever and make it unusable. N00510800370 5 Manual window control (if so equipped) N00510700021 1- Open (down) 2- Close (up) To open the trunk from the inside, move the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the trunk and climb out. NOTE 1- To open 2- To close  Never try to operate the main switch and sub-switch in different directions at the same time. This will freeze the window in position.  Operating the power windows repeatedly with the engine stopped will run down the battery. Use the window switches only while the engine is running. WARNING  Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window. Features and controls 5-29 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Power window control WARNING Type 1 Sub switch  Never leave the vehicle without carrying the key.  Never leave children or unreliable adults unattended inside the vehicle. 5 N00548800098 Main switch N00548700130 The main switch located on the driver’s door can be used to operate all the windows. A window can be opened or closed by operating the corresponding switch. Press the switch down to open the window, and pull up the switch to close it. If the driver’s door window switch is fully pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door window automatically opens/closes completely. (Type 1) If the driver’s door window switch is fully pressed down, the driver’s door window automatically opens completely. (Type 2) If you want to stop the window movement, operate the switch lightly in the reverse direction. Type 2 1- Close 2- Open Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own passenger door window, unless the driver’s window lock switch is activated. 12345- Driver’s door window switch Front passenger door window switch Left rear door window switch Right rear door window switch Lock switch NOTE  The rear door windows open only half-way. Power window timer function N00548900132 The power windows can be run up or down when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. The door windows can be opened or closed for a 30-second period after the engine is 5-30 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Power window control stopped. However, once the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened, the power windows cannot be operated. Lock switch N00549000169 When this switch is in the lock mode, the passenger door switches cannot be used to open or close the door windows, and the main switch will open or close only the driver’s door window. To unlock the switch, press it again. Type 1 WARNING CAUTION  Before driving with a child in the vehicle, be sure to lock the window switch to make it inoperative. Children tampering with the switch could easily trap their hands or heads in the window. Safety mechanism (Driver’s door window of Type 1 only) N00528801161 If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the door window is automatically lowered a little. After the door window is lowered, clear the obstruction, then pull up the switch again to close the door window. WARNING Type 2 1- Lock 2- Unlock  If the battery terminals are disconnected or the fuse for electric window is replaced, the safety mechanism will be cancelled. If a hand or head got trapped, a serious injury could result. CAUTION  The safety mechanism is deactivated just before the door window closes. This allows the door window to close completely. Therefore be especially careful that fingers are not trapped in the door window opening.  The safety mechanism is deactivated while the switch is pulled up. Therefore be especially careful that fingers are not trapped in the door window opening.  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head in order to activate the safety mechanism. Your hand or head could be trapped and personal injury could result. NOTE  The safety mechanism can be activated if the driving conditions or other circumstances cause the door window to be subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by trapped hand or head.  If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or more times in a row, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the door window will not close correctly. In such a case, the following procedure should be implemented to rectify this situation. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the driver’s door window switch until that window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, raise the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least1 second, then release it. You should now be able to operate in the normal fashion. Features and controls 5-31 5 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Parking brake NOTE 5 What to do if you hear wind buffeting when driving N00551400043 Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a booming or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting when driving with one or both rear door windows down or partially opened. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear door windows open, open the front door windows as well as the rear door windows to minimize the condition. 5-32 Features and controls To apply Parking brake  If the battery terminals are disconnected or the fuse for electric window is replaced, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the door window will not automatically open/close completely. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the driver’s door window switch until the window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, raise the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least 1 second, then release it. You should now be able to operate the driver’s door window in the normal fashion. N00511400399 To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position for vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle, set the selector lever to “P” (PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a continuously variable transmission (CVT). 1- Pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of hand grip. When the parking brake is set and the ignition switch or the operation mode is in the “ON” position, the brake warning light in the instrument cluster will come on. Before driving, be sure to release the parking brake. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Steering wheel height adjustment To deactivate CAUTION  Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and brake warning light is off. If you drive without the parking brake fully released, the warning lamp will illuminate and a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake, the brakes will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and possible brake failure. 1- Pull the lever up slightly. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of the hand grip. 3- Push the lever downward. When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. Steering wheel height adjustment 5 A- Wheel lock B- Release WARNING N00511500231 To adjust the steering wheel to the desired position, move the lever upward or downward while moving the steering wheel to the desired level.  After adjusting, make sure the lever is secured in the locked (A) position.  Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving. This can be dangerous.  When releasing the lever (moving it to the position (B)), be sure to hold the steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering wheel may slip down too suddenly. Features and controls 5-33 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Inside rearview mirror WARNING Inside rearview mirror N00511601385 Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after making any seat adjustments so as to have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle. 5  Do not attempt to adjust the inside rearview mirror while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirror before driving. Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the view through the rear window. Type 1 To adjust the vertical mirror position It is possible to move the mirror up and down to adjust its position. Type 2 Type 3 5-34 Features and controls To adjust the mirror position It is possible to move the mirror up/down and left/right to adjust its position. BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Inside rearview mirror To reduce the glare Type 1 The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving. Type 2 When the headlights of the vehicles behind you are very bright, the reflection factor of the rearview mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare. NOTE  If you want to stop automatic mode, press the switch (3) for approximately 2 seconds and the indicator (1) will go off. To return to automatic mode, press the switch again. Or turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or put the operation mode in ON, after turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the operation mode in OFF. Type 3 When the headlights of the vehicles behind you are very bright, the reflection factor of the rearview mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare. 1- Daytime position 2- Night position Normally, use the automatic mode. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the green indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection factor of the mirror is automatically changed. NOTE  Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner on the sensor (2), as reduced sensitivity could result. Normally, use the automatic mode. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the green Features and controls 5-35 5 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Outside rearview mirrors indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection factor of the mirror is automatically changed. NOTE 5  Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity could result.  If you want to stop automatic mode, press the switch (3) and the indicator (1) will go off. To return to automatic mode, press the switch again. Or turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or put the operation mode in ON, after turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the operation mode in OFF. WARNING  Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. The objects you see in the mirror will look smaller and farther away than they appear in a regular flat mirror. Do not use this mirror to estimate the distance of vehicles following you when changing lanes. To adjust the mirror position N00549100144 The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. Move the lever (A) to the same side as the mirror you wish to adjust. Outside rearview mirrors N00512200206 Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after making any seat adjustments so as to have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle. WARNING  Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirrors while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driving. 5-36 Features and controls L- Left outside mirror adjustment R- Right outside mirror adjustment Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror position. 1- Up 2- Down 3- Right 4- Left NOTE  After adjusting, return the lever to the “•” (OFF) position (C). To fold the mirror N00549200099 The outside mirror can be manually folded in towards the side window to prevent damage when parking in tight locations. BK0236100US.book 37 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Ignition switch Door mirror heater (if so equipped) N00549301286 When the rear window defogger switch is pressed with the engine running, the outside rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Current will flow through the heater element inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or condensation. The indicator light (A) will illuminate while the defogger is on. The heater will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes. For information on operations for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Engine switch” on page 5-13. [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)] ACC Allows operation of some electrical accessories with the engine off. ON The engine runs and all accessories can be used. START Engages the starter. Release the key when the engine starts.It will automatically return to the “ON” position. NOTE OFF Ignition switch N00512401739 [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key)] The engine is off. The key can be inserted and removed only when the switch is in this position.  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code (which the transponder inside the key sends) must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page 5-3.) To remove the key N00550901240 1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position {continuously variable transmission (CVT)}. Features and controls 5-37 5 BK0236100US.book 38 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Starting the engine 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and remove it. Starting the engine N00512601816 [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key)] For information on operation for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the engine” on page 5-16. 5 CAUTION  If the engine is stopped while driving, the power brake booster will cease to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the steering.  Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for a long time when the engine is not running. Doing so will cause the battery to be discharged.  Do not turn the key to the “START” position when the engine is running, doing so could damage the starter motor. 5-38 Features and controls [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)] Tips for starting  Do not operate the starter motor continuously for longer than 15 seconds as this could run the battery down or damage the starter motor. If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF” position, wait a few seconds, and then try again. Trying repeatedly with the engine or starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.  If the engine will not start because the battery is weak or discharged, refer to “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2) for instructions.  A longer warm up period will only consume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up enough for driving when the low coolant temperature indicator goes out. Refer to “Low coolant temperature indicator” on page 5-76. WARNING  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle out of the area. Carbon monoxide gas, which is odorless and extremely poisonous, could build up and cause serious injury or death. CAUTION  Do not push-start the vehicle.  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive at high speeds until the engine has had a chance to warm up.  Release the ignition switch as soon as the engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor will be damaged. Starting the engine This model is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel injection system. This is a system that automatically controls fuel injection. BK0236100US.book 39 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Starting the engine There is usually no need to depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. The starter should not be run for more than 15 seconds at a time. To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds between attempts to restart the engine. 1. Make sure all occupants are properly seated with seat belts fastened. 2. Insert the ignition key. 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with your right foot. 5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down (manual transaxle). NOTE  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, the starter will not operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock). 6. On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. NOTE  On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter will not operate unless the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” (PARK) position so that the wheels are locked. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and make certain that all warning lights are functioning properly before starting the engine. 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without pressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key when the engine starts. NOTE  Minor noises may be heard on engine startup. These will disappear as the engine warms up. When the engine is hard to start 2. While depressing the brake pedal {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it there, then crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal, immediately after the engine starts. 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine could be flooded with too much gasoline. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), push the accelerator pedal all the way down and hold it there, then crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and then crank the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but do not push the accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key if the engine starts. If the engine fails to start, repeat these procedures. If the engine still will not start, contact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. After several attempts, you may experience that the engine still does not start. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such as lights, air conditioning blower and rear window defogger, are turned off. Features and controls 5-39 5 BK0236100US.book 40 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual transaxle (if so equipped) Startability of CVT vehicle with ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower 5 When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start from a standstill even with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position. This phenomenon occurs because the transaxle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. The transaxle will warm up, and you will be able to start normally. Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up operation. Manual transaxle (if so equipped) N00512701181 The shift pattern below is shown on the gearshift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way down while shifting gears. 5-40 Features and controls CAUTION  Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal because this will cause premature clutch wear or damage.  Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position (illegal in many states).  Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest, because this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks. NOTE  During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle. To start Press the clutch pedal all the way down and shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then gradually release the clutch pedal while depressing the accelerator pedal. NOTE  If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then be easier.  To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position, and then shift it into reverse.  To avoid grinding noises when shifting into reverse, wait approximately 3 seconds with the clutch pedal depressed when the vehicle is stationary. Proper shift points N00537400065 CAUTION  Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse while the vehicle is moving forward; doing so will damage the transaxle. Always use care to change the gear with the vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. Proper shifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life. BK0236100US.book 41 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual transaxle (if so equipped) CAUTION  Avoid downshifting that may cause the tachometer pointer to enter the red zone. This puts the engine at risk of being damaged. Upshifting N00512900131 For the best fuel economy and performance in using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed below. At high altitude locations, upshift as listed below. Shift point Upshift speeds 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h) 3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h) 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) Downshifting 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear. Driving precautions N00513100244  Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest. This can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks. Maximum possible driving speed Acceleration Cruise 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h) 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd gear to 3rd gear 28 mph (45 km/h) 19 mph (31 km/h) 3rd gear to 4th gear 36 mph (58 km/h) 33 mph (53 km/h) Recommended downshifting speed 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) 45 mph (72 km/h) Shift point Upshift speeds Shift point N00513000096 It is recommended that you downshift to a lower gear when needed to maintain the desired speed, according to the table. Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The engine may suffer damage. To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep hill. Downshifting is also important to avoid “lugging” the engine at too low a speed, such as when turning a corner or when driving up a steep hill. At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will improve your fuel economy. Downshifting speed Downshifting speed Shift point Under 20 mph (32 km/h) Shift down from current gear to 2nd gear. Shift points Maximum possible driving speed 1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h) 2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h) 3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h) 4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h)  The table above shows the maximum recommended driving speed for in each gear. Do not drive near or at these speeds for prolonged periods of time. Features and controls 5-41 5 BK0236100US.book 42 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) N00560200050 5 The CVT will automatically and continuously change its gear ratio depending on road and driving conditions. This helps achieve smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. DRIVING UPHILL The transmission prevents unnecessary upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is released and ensures smooth driving. DRIVING DOWNHILL According to the conditions, the transmission will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio to achieve stronger engine braking. This may help reduce your need to use the service brake. Selector lever operation N00560301087 As an additional safety precaution, models equipped with a continuously variable transmission have a shift-lock device that holds 5-42 Features and controls the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. To move the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position to another position, follow the steps below. 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. 2. Move the selector lever to the desired position. NOTE  The selector lever cannot be moved from “P” (PARK) to another position if the ignition switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” position, or if the key has been removed, or operation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if the brake pedal is not pressed and held down. The CVT selects an optimum ratio automatically when the selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelerator pedal. Set the selector lever in the gate to operate while the brake pedal is depressed. Set the selector lever in the gate to operate. WARNING  Always press the brake pedal when shifting the selector lever into a selector position from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. When beginning to drive, do not shift the selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while pressing the accelerator pedal. This will cause the vehicle to “jump” forward or backward. BK0236100US.book 43 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) NOTE  To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, make sure you stop briefly at each position. After operating, check the position in the multi-information display.  If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock device activates to prevent the selector lever from being moved from the “P” (PARK) position.  For a shift indicated by If you need to move the vehicle, shift the selector lever as follows. 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully applied. 2. Stop the engine if it is running. 3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry gently as shown to remove the cover. 5 in the illustra- tion, depress the brake pedal before moving the selector lever. If you attempt to move the selector lever before depressing the brake pedal, the selector lever may not move. Selector lever position display N00560400078 When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the selector lever position is shown on the multi-information display. When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” (PARK) position N00563300049 When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” (PARK) position to another position while the brake pedal is pressed and held down with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunctioning. Immediately have your vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right foot. 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while pressing the screwdriver down. Features and controls 5-43 BK0236100US.book 44 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) Selector lever positions WARNING N00560601093 “P” PARK 5 This position locks the transmission to prevent the vehicle from moving. The engine can be started from the “P” (PARK) position. “R” REVERSE Move the lever to this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. CAUTION  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion, the transmission may be damaged. “N” NEUTRAL At this position, the transmission is disengaged. It is the same as the neutral position on a manual transaxle and should be used when the vehicle is not moving for an extended length of time during driving, such as in a traffic jam. 5-44 Features and controls  Never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving since you could accidentally slip it into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position, damaging the transmission.  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when stopped on a slope, the engine should be started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in “N” (NEUTRAL) position.  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shifting into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) position. “D” DRIVE This position is used for most city and highway driving. The transmission will automatically and continuously change its gear ratio depending on road and driving conditions. CAUTION  To prevent transmission damage, never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. “Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING Use when engine braking is needed, or for high-power sport drive. “L” LOW This position is for driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds when driving down steep hills. WARNING  This position can be used for maximum engine braking. Be very careful not to shift into “L” (LOW) suddenly. Sudden engine braking may cause the tires to skid. Select this position according to the road conditions and vehicle speed. BK0236100US.book 45 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) When a malfunction occurs in the automatic transaxle N00549500018 When the selector lever position indicator blinks N00574601036 When the selector lever position indicator blinks while you are driving, there could be a malfunction in the automatic transaxle system or CVT fluid temperature becomes abnormally high. CAUTION  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while driving, the indicator will blink. In this case, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and follow these procedures: [If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per second), the CVT fluid is overheating.] Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not turn off the engine. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position and open the engine hood. Keep the engine, idling. After a while, move the selector lever into any position other than “P” (PARK) position and confirm that the indicator stops blinking. It is safe to continue driving if the indicator no longer blinks. If the indicator continues blinking or blinks intermittently, have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of your choice. [If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2 seconds), the CVT may be operating in failsafe mode due to a malfunction.] Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Operation of the CVT N00560801079 CAUTION  Before selecting a position with the engine running and the vehicle stationary, firmly depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the CVT is engaged, especially when the engine speed or idle speed is high, or with the air conditioning (cooling or heating) operating. Do not release the brake pedal until you are ready to drive away.  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all times. Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency.  To prevent sudden acceleration, never run the engine at high rpms when shifting from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).  Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking efficiency and may cause premature wear of brake pads. NOTE  The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT selector lever switch is broken. It is not seen during normal driving. Features and controls 5-45 5 BK0236100US.book 46 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Service brake CAUTION 5  Use the selector lever in the correct shift position in accordance with driving conditions. Never coast downhill backward in the driving shift position “D” (DRIVE), “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L” (LOW) or coast forward in the “R” (REVERSE) position. Engine stopping and increased brake pedal and steering effort could lead to an accident.  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal pressed when the vehicle is stationary. This can damage the CVT. Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal while holding down the brake pedal with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine revolutions may not rise as high as when performing the same operation with the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. Passing acceleration To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position (when passing another vehicle) push the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will automatically downshift. Waiting For short waiting periods, such as at traffic lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever position and held stationary with the service brake. For longer waiting periods with the engine running, place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking brake, while holding the vehicle stationary with the service brake. Prior to moving off after having stopped the vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in “D” (DRIVE) position. CAUTION  To avoid transmission overheating, never try to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by using the accelerator pedal. Always apply the parking brake and/or service brake.  Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceleration may occur if the selector lever is in a position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). Parking To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, 5-46 Features and controls and then move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. When the CVT makes no speed change If the CVT does not shift while driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual happening in the transmission. Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Service brake N00517501328 Brake pedal Overuse of the brake can cause weakening, resulting in poor brake response and premature wear of the brake pads. When driving down a long or steep hill, use engine braking by moving the selector lever to “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING) or “L” (LOW) position. BK0236100US.book 47 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Hill start assist WARNING  Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emergency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is securely held in place. CAUTION  It is important not to drive the vehicle with your foot resting on the brake pedal when braking is not required. This practice can result in very high brake temperatures, premature lining wear, and possible damage to the brakes. Power brakes N00517600436 Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes for more braking force with less brake pedal effort. Your brakes are designed to operate at full capacity, even if the power assist is not being used. If the power assist is not being used, the effort needed to press the brake pedal is greater. If you should lose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still work. If the power brake unit or either of the two brake hydraulic systems stops working properly, the rest of the brake system will still work, but the vehicle will not slow down as quickly. You will know this has happened if you find you need to press the brake down farther, or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if the brake warning light and the warning display in the multi-information display come on. Have the brake system repaired at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately. WARNING  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Keep the engine running whenever your vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the engine while driving, the power brake booster will stop working and your brakes will not work as well.  If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic system stops working properly, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately. Brake pad wear alarm N00550700124 The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a metallic squeal when the brake pads have worn down enough to need service. If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. WARNING  Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to stop, and can cause an accident. Hill start assist N00562601114 The hill start assist makes it easy to start off on a steep uphill slope by preventing the vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the brakes applied for about 2 seconds when you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Features and controls 5-47 5 BK0236100US.book 48 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Hill start assist CAUTION 5  Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. Under certain circumstances, even when hill start assist is activated, the vehicle may move backwards if the brake pedal is not sufficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily loaded, or if the road is very steep or slippery.  The hill start assist is not designed to keep the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes for more than 2 seconds.  When facing uphill, do not rely on using the hill start assist to maintain a stopped position as an alternative to depressing the brake pedal. Doing so could cause an accident.  Do not perform the following operation while the hill start assist is operating. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or “ACC” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The hill start assist could stop operating, which could result in an accident. To operate N00562701115 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the brake pedal. 5-48 Features and controls 2. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lever into the 1st position. On vehicles with CVT, place the selector lever into the “D” (DRIVE) position. NOTE  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the gearshift lever or selector lever into the “R” position. 3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start assist will maintain the braking force applied while stopping for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill start assist gradually will decrease the braking force as the vehicle starts moving. NOTE  The hill start assist is activated when all of the following conditions are met. • The engine is running. (The hill start assist will not be activated while the engine is starting or immediately after the engine is started.) NOTE • On vehicles with M/T, the gearshift lever is in the following position. [When starting an uphill slope forwards.] The gearshift lever is in any position other than “R” (Reverse). (The hill start assist will operate, even if the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position.) [When starting an uphill slope backwards.] The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position. (The hill start assist will not operate when the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position.) • On vehicles with CVT, the selector lever is in any position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). • The vehicle is completely stationary, with the brake pedal depressed. • The parking brake is released.  The hill start assist will not operate if the accelerator pedal is depressed before the brake pedal is released.  The hill start assist also operates when reversing on an uphill slope.  When the hill start assist is activated, you may feel the operating sound or vibration from under the body. This is a normal result of the hill start assist operation, and does not indicate a problem. BK0236100US.book 49 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Brake assist system Warning indicator N00562800092 If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, the following indicator will turn on. - ASC indicator CAUTION  If the warning is displayed, the hill start assist will not operate. Start off carefully.  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out, in which case the hill start assist is again working normally. If they remain displayed or reappear frequently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Brake assist system N00567301116 The brake assist system is a device assisting drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly such as in emergency stop situations and provides greater braking force. If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakes will be applied with more force than usual. CAUTION  The brake assist system is not a device designed to exercise braking force greater than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a sufficient distance between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you without relying too much on the brake assist system. NOTE  Once the brake assist system is operational, it maintains great braking force even if the brake pedal is lightly released. To stop its operation, completely remove your foot from the brake pedal.  When the brake assist system is in use while driving, you may feel as if the depressed brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small motions in conjunction with the operation noise, or the vehicle body and the steering wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does not indicate faulty operation. Continue to depress the brake pedal.  When the anti-lock brake system warning light is illuminated, the brake assist system is not functioning. Anti-lock braking system N00517900338 The anti-lock braking system helps prevent the wheels from locking up when braking. This helps maintain vehicle drivability and steering wheel handling. 5 Driving hints  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden braking), steering is slightly different from normal driving conditions. Use the steering wheel carefully.  Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock braking system, leave a greater braking distance when: • Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads. • Driving on uneven road surfaces.  Operation of anti-lock braking system is not restricted situations where brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also prevent the wheels from locking when you drive over manholes, steel roadwork plates, road markings, or any uneven road surface. Features and controls 5-49 BK0236100US.book 50 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Anti-lock braking system 5  When the anti-lock braking system is in use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrating and hear a unique sound. It may also feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. In this situation, simply hold the brake pedal down firmly. Do not pump the brake, which will result in reduced braking performance. Anti-lock braking system warning light N00531600674 If the warning light illuminate while driving CAUTION  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent accidents. It is your responsibility to take safety precautions and to drive carefully.  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the same size and the same type. NOTE  You may feel the operating sound or vibration from under the body when driving immediately after starting the engine. This is a normal result the anti-lock braking system makes when performing a self-check. It does not indicate a problem.  The anti-lock braking system can be used after the vehicle has reached a speed over approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops working when the vehicle slows below 3 mph (5 km/h). 5-50 Features and controls CAUTION • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the warning light does not come on or it remains on and does not go off. • The warning light comes on while driving N00531700604 If only the anti-lock braking system warning light illuminate If there is a malfunction in the system, the anti-lock braking system warning light will come on. Under normal conditions, the ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds later. CAUTION  Any of the following indicates that the antilock braking system is not functioning and only the standard brake system is working. (The standard brake system is functioning normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Test the system by restarting the engine and driving at a speed of about 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. If the warning light then remains off during driving, there is no abnormal condition. However, if the warning light does not disappear, or if they come on again when the vehicle is driven, have the vehicle checked by an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. BK0236100US.book 51 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electric power steering system (EPS) If the anti-lock braking system warning light and brake warning light illuminate at the same time Front WARNING Rear  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is moving. Stopping the engine would make the steering wheel extremely hard to turn, possibly resulting in an accident. NOTE The anti-lock braking system and brake force distribution function may not work, so hard braking could make the vehicle unstable. Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your choice. After driving on icy roads N00529200080 After driving on snow or icy roads, remove any snow and ice which may have be left around the wheels. On vehicles that have an anti-lock braking system, be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the cables located at each wheel. Electric power steering system (EPS) N00568400074 The power steering system operates while the engine is running. It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steering wheel. The power steering system has mechanical steering capability in case the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost for some reason, you will still be able to steer your vehicle, but you will notice it takes much more effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  During repeated full-lock turning of the steering wheel (for example, while you are manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking space), a protection function may be activated to prevent overheating of the power steering system. This function will make the steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In this event, limit your turning of the steering wheel for a while. When the system has cooled down, the steering effort will return to normal.  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary with the headlights on, the headlights may become dim. This behavior is not abnormal. The headlights will return to their original brightness after a short while. Features and controls 5-51 5 BK0236100US.book 52 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Active stability control (ASC) Electric power steering system warning light CAUTION Active stability control (ASC) N00559100176 The Active stability control (ASC) takes overall control of the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function to help maintain the vehicle’s control and traction. Please read this section in conjunction with the page on the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function. 5 If there is a malfunction in the system, the warning light will come on. Under normal conditions, the warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes off after the engine has started. CAUTION  If the warning light appears while the engine is running, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. It may become harder to turn the steering wheel. Anti-lock braking system  P.5-49 Traction control function  P.5-52 Skid control function  P.5-53 CAUTION  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. This system, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s responsibillty to drive carefully, This means taking into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.  Be sure to use the same specified type and size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the ASC may not work properly.  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC may stop functioning properly. NOTE  An operating sound or vibration may be emitted from under the body in the following situations. The sound or vibration is associated with checking the operations of the ASC. At this time, you may feel a shock from under the body and the brake pedal if you depress it. These do not indicate a malfunction. • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • When the vehicle is driven for a while after the engine is turned on.  When the ASC is activated, you may feel a vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whining sound from the engine compartment. This indicates that the system is operating normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.  When the anti-lock braking system warning light is illuminated, the ASC is not active. Traction control function N00559200076 On slippery surfaces, the traction control function prevents the drive wheels from spin- 5-52 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 53 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Active stability control (ASC) ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a stopped condition. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle turns while pressing the acceleration pedal. deactivate the system by pressing down the “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer. When the ASC is deactivated, the indicator will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch; the CAUTION indicator is turned off.  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be sure to install snow tires and drive the vehicle at moderate speeds. ASC operation indicator or ASC OFF indicator Skid control function N00559300051 The skid control function is designed to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle on slippery roads or during rapid steering maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine output and the brake on each wheel. NOTE  The skid control function operates at speeds of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher. ASC OFF switch N00559400254 The ASC is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. You can NOTE  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not allow the engine speed to increase. In such situations, temporarily turning off ASC with the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to move out your vehicle.  If you continue to press the “ASC OFF” switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken operation protection function” will activate and the ASC will turn back on. N00546500118 CAUTION  For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch should be operated when your vehicle is stopped.  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in normal circumstances. NOTE  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both the stability control function and the traction control function. ASC operation indicator The indicator will blink when the ASC is operating. ASC OFF indicator This indicator will turn on when the ASC is turned off with the “ASC OFF” switch. CAUTION  When indicator blinks, ASC is operating, which means that the road is slippery or that your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip. If this happens, drive slower with less accelerator input. Features and controls 5-53 5 BK0236100US.book 54 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE 5 CAUTION  The indicator may turn on when you start the engine. This means that the battery voltage momentarily dropped when the engine was started. It does not indicate a malfunction, provided that the display goes out immediately.  When a compact spare tire has been put on your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire will be lower, making it more likely that the indicator will blink. Towing ASC warning indicator N00546300031 N00546600119 If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, the following indicator will turn on. - ASC indicator - ASC OFF indicator 5-54 Features and controls Cruise control (if so equipped)  The system may be malfunctioning. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out. If they go out, there is no abnormal condition. If they do not go out or appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but you should have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. CAUTION  When towing the vehicle with only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, do not place the ignition switch in the “ON” position or do not put the operation mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in the “ON” position or putting the operation mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate, resulting in an accident. Note that the correct towing method depends on the transmission type and the vehicle’s drive configuration. For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12. N00518300573 Cruise control is an automatic speed control system that keeps a set speed. It can be activated at speeds from about 25 mph (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). CAUTION  When you do not wish to drive at a set speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.  Do not use cruise control when driving conditions will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, slippery, on a steep downhill slope.  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, do not move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position while driving at a set speed without depressing the clutch pedal. The engine will run too fast and might be damaged. NOTE  Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on uphills or downhills.  Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. You may use the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed. BK0236100US.book 55 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE  Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep downhill. You have to use the brake to control your speed. As a result, the set speed driving is deactivated. C- RES + switch Used to increase the set speed and to return to the original set speed. D- CANCEL switch Cruise control switches 5 Used to deactivate the set speed driving. NOTE  When operating the cruise control switches, press the cruise control switches correctly. The set speed driving may be deactivated automatically if two or more switches of the cruise control are pressed at the same time. To activate N00518400385 A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch Used to turn on and off the cruise control. 1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” position or the operation mode is in ON, press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A) to turn on the cruise control. The indicator in the meter cluster will come on. Indicator 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed, then press and release the SET switch (B) when the indicator is illuminated. The vehicle will then maintain the desired speed. B- SET - switch Used to reduce the set speed and to set the desired speed. Features and controls 5-55 BK0236100US.book 56 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE  When you release the SET - switch, the vehicle speed will be set. To increase the set speed 5 N00518500344 There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. RES + switch Press and hold the RES + switch (C) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase. When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. To increase your speed in small amounts, press the RES + switch for less than about 1 second and release it. Each time you press the RES + switch, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. Accelerator pedal SET - switch Press and hold the SET - switch (B) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will slow down gradually. When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator pedal to reach your desired speed and then press the SET - switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed. To slow down your speed in small amounts, press the SET - switch for less than about 1 second and release it. Each time you press the SET - switch, your vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To decrease the set speed N00518600273 Brake pedal There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal, which disengages the cruise control, 5-56 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 57 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) then press the SET - switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed. To deactivate N00518801634 The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:  Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned off.)  Press the CANCEL switch (D).  Depress the brake pedal. To temporarily decrease the speed To temporarily increase or decrease the speed N00541700056 Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To return to the previously set speed, press the RES + switch (C). Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page 5-58. To temporarily increase the speed Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When you release the pedal, you will return to your set speed. The set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any of the following ways.  When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehicles equipped with manual transaxle).  When your speed slows to about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more below the set speed because of a hill, etc.  When your speed slows to about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. Features and controls 5-57 5 BK0236100US.book 58 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)  When the active stability control (ASC) starts operating. Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page 5-52. WARNING 5  On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), although the set speed driving will be deactivated when shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving. You would have no engine braking and could cause a serious accident. To resume the set speed N00518900306 If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condition described in “To deactivate” on page 5-57, you can resume the previously set speed by pressing the RES + switch (C) while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or higher. Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated automatically when the engine speed rises and approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer dial). CAUTION  When the set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any situation other than those listed above, there may be a system malfunction. Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch to turn off the cruise control and have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. 5-58 Features and controls Under either of the following conditions, however, using the switch does not allow you to resume the previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch is pressed.  [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or “ACC” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.  Indicator is turned OFF. Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) N00530201612 The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The system only indicates when a tire is significantly under-inflated. BK0236100US.book 59 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) WARNING  The compact spare wheel does not have a tire inflation pressure sensor. When the spare tire is used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible to replace or repair the original tire. Tire pressure monitoring system warning light N00532701363 NOTE  The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for regularly checking tire inflation pressures. Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.  The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is installed in the illustrated location. Replace rubber air valve (B) with a new one when the tire is replaced. For details, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light normally illuminates and goes off a few seconds later. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, the warning light will remain illuminated while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. Refer to “If the warning light illuminates while driving” on page 5-60 and take the necessary measures. CAUTION  If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, it means that the tire pressure monitoring system is not working properly. Have the system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. The warning light will issue further warnings each time the engine is restarted as long as the malfunction exists. Check to see whether the warning light goes off after few minutes driving. If it then goes off during driving, there is no problem. However, if the warning light does not go off, or if it blinks again when the engine is restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when the warning light appears while driving, avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving. Features and controls 5-59 5 BK0236100US.book 60 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) 5 Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when 5-60 Features and controls the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. If the warning light illuminates while driving N00532801540 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates, avoid hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. You should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page 9-12. NOTE  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, do not apply excessive force to the valve stem to avoid breakage.  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve cap on the valve stem. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve, resulting in damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor.  Do not use metal valve caps, which may cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion and damage of the tire inflation pressure sensors.  Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving. BK0236100US.book 61 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) 2. If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light remains illuminated after you have been driving for about 20 minutes after you adjust the tire inflation pressure, one or more of the tires may have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a puncture, have it repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. WARNING  If the warning light illuminates while you are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire adversely affects vehicle performance and can result in an accident. CAUTION  The warning light may not illuminate immediately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid leak. NOTE  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors, have any punctured tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor is not covered by your warranty. NOTE  Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray on any tire. Such a spray could damage the tire inflation pressure sensors. Have any puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. The tire pressure monitoring system may not work normally in the following circumstances:  A wireless facility or device using the same frequency is near the vehicle.  Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders and/or on the wheels.  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery is dead.  Wheels other than Mitsubishi Genuine wheels are being used.  Wheels that are not fitted with tire inflation pressure sensors are being used.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memorized by the vehicle are used.  Compact spare tire is fitted on a road wheel.  A window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. NOTE  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambient temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to large variations in ambient temperature, the tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated (causing the warning light come on) when the ambient temperature is relatively low. If the warning light comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure. Whenever the tires and wheels are replaced with new ones N00532900153 If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure sensors are installed, their ID codes must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system. Have tire and wheel replacement performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel replacement is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by your warranty. CAUTION  The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of the sensors. Features and controls 5-61 5 BK0236100US.book 62 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) General information 5 Your tire pressure monitoring system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions.  This device may not cause harmful interference  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5-62 Features and controls Location of rear-view camera Rear-view camera (if so N00533000236 equipped) N00546201268 The rear-view camera (A) is built-in to the trunk lid. When the gearshift lever or the selector lever is in the “R” position with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view image will be displayed on the left portion of the inside rearview mirror. When the gearshift lever or the selector lever is shifted out of the “R” position, the rearview image will go off. WARNING  Never rely solely on the rear-view camera to clear the area behind your vehicle. Always check visually behind and all around your vehicle for persons, animals, obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to do so can result in vehicle damage, serious injury or death.  The rear-view camera is an aid system for backing up, but it is not a substitute for your visual confirmation.  The view on the screen is limited, and objects outside the view, such as under the bumper or around either corner of the bumper, cannot be seen on the screen. CAUTION  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the lens with clean water and gently wipe with a clean, soft cloth.  To avoid damaging the camera; • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish it by using an abrasive compound. • Do not disassemble the camera. • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. • Do not spray the camera and its surroundings with high-pressure water. • Make sure that the trunk lid is securely closed when backing up. BK0236100US.book 63 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) Reference lines on the screen Reference lines and upper surface of the rear bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.  Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.  Two Green lines (C) indicate approximately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the vehicle body.  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate distance from the rear bumper. CAUTION  The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle lens. As a result, images and distances shown on the screen are not exact.  Actual distance may be different from distance indicated by the lines on the screen, depending on the loading condition of the vehicle and road surface condition. The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are based on a level, flat road surface. In the following cases, objects shown on the screen will appear to be farther off than they actually are. • When the rear of the vehicle is weighed down with the weight of passengers and luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) • When there is an upward slope at the back. (Case 2) Case 1 1: 2: 3: Approximately at the rear edge of the rear bumper Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) Case 2 5 A- Actual objects B- Objects shown on the screen CAUTION  The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are intended to indicate the distance to a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. They may not indicate correct distance depending on the shape of an obstacle. For example, when there is an object behind the vehicle that has upper sections projecting in the direction of the vehicle, the reference lines on the screen will indicate that point A is the farthest point and point B is the closest point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B are actually the same distance from the vehicle, and point C is farther off than point A and B. A- Actual objects B- Objects shown on the screen Features and controls 5-63 BK0236100US.book 64 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Instrument cluster To change the language of warning text (3) N00591000025 It is possible to change the language of the warning messages on the screen. 5 4. Press the switch until the desired language appears on the display. Each time you press the switch, the language will change to the next one. When the warning text flashes, setting is completed. Instrument cluster N00519001428 NOTE  Mirror image is displayed on the screen.  It is possible to change the display language of the inside rearview mirror screen. For details, refer to “Change language or turn off the inside rearview mirror screen: To change the language of warning text (3)” on page 5-64.  Under certain circumstances, it may become difficult to see an image on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly. • In a dark area, such as at night. • When water drops or condensation are on the lens. • When sun light or headlights shine directly into the lens. 5-64 Features and controls 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or put the operation mode in ON. CAUTION  For safety reasons, do not perform the following operations with the engine running. 2. Put the gearshift lever or the selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position. 3. Press and hold down the switch (1) to enter language selection mode (for 6 to 11 seconds). In this mode, the image appears and the green indicator (2) comes on. 1234- Tachometer  P.5-65 Multi-information display  P.5-65 Speedometer  P.5-64 Multi-information display switch Speedometer N00519101302 The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). BK0236100US.book 65 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display Type A CAUTION Type D  The red zone indicates an engine speed beyond the range of safe operation. Select the correct shift position (manual transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to control the engine speed so that the tachometer indicator does not enter the red zone. 5 Type B Tachometer N00519201332 The tachometer shows engine revolutions per minute. This allows the driver to determine the most efficient selector position and engine speed combinations. This gauge also assists in evaluating engine performance. Type C Multi-information display N00555001389 The multi-information display includes the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, fuel remaining, selector lever position, average fuel consumption, driving range, etc. Features and controls 5-65 BK0236100US.book 66 ページ２０１６年２月１日 Multi-information display 5 1- Information display  P.5-67 2- Frozen road warning (if so equipped)  P.5-70 3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-70 4- Selector lever position display (if so equipped)  P.5-43 NOTE  When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the selector lever position display, fuel remaining display and frozen road warning are not displayed. 5-66 Features and controls 月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 67 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display Information display N00574801054 Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order. 5 1234- Odometer  P.5-68 Trip odometer  P.5-68 Trip odometer  P.5-68 Instrument panel light dimmer control  P.5-68 5- Driving range display  P.5-69 6- Average fuel consumption display  P.5-69 7- Outside temperature display (if so equipped)  P.5-69 8- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-71 9- Service reminder (month)  P.5-71 NOTE  When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are not displayed.  While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch. Features and controls 5-67 BK0236100US.book 68 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display NOTE  When the parking lights are not illuminated, the instrument panel light dimmer control is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch. Odometer N00574900016 5 The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has traveled. Trip odometer N00575000014 The trip odometer indicates the distance traveled between two points. Usage examples for trip odometer , trip odometer It is possible to measure two currently traveled distances, from home using trip odometer and from a particular point on the way using trip odometer . If trip odometer is displayed, only trip odometer will be reset. To return the display to 0, hold down the multi-information display switch for about 1 second or more. Only the currently displayed value will be reset. Example 5-68 Features and controls Dim NOTE  Both trip odometers and can count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers. When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilometers.  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the memories of trip odometer displays and are cleared, and their displays return to “0.0 miles/kilometers”. 1- Brightness level 2- Multi-information display switch NOTE Instrument panel light dimmer control N00575101025 To reset the trip odometer Bright Turn the parking lights on and press the multi-information display switch (2), there is a sound and the brightness changes.  When the parking lights are illuminated, you can adjust to 8 levels.  Each time you reduce two brightness levels, the segment display of the brightness level decreases by one segment.  If you press and hold the switch for longer than about 1 second, the brightness automatically scrolls through its different levels, and stops scrolling when you release the switch. Select your desired level of brightness. BK0236100US.book 69 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display NOTE NOTE  The brightness level of the instruments is stored when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF. Driving range display N00575201042 This displays the approximate driving range (how many more miles or kilometers you can drive). When the driving range falls below approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed. NOTE  The driving range is determined based on the fuel consumption data. This may vary depending on the driving conditions and habits. Treat the distance displayed as just a rough guideline.  When you refuel, the driving range display is updated. However, if you only add a small amount of fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. Fill to a full tank whenever possible.  When your vehicle is stopped on an extremely steep hill, the driving range value may change. This is due to the movement of fuel in the tank and does not indicate any breakdown. NOTE  The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (miles or km). Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72. Average fuel consumption display N00575300017 This displays the average fuel consumption from the last reset to the present. The reset mode conditions for the average fuel consumption display can be switched between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. For information on how to change the average fuel consumption display setting, refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72.  Average fuel consumption may vary depend on the driving conditions (road conditions, how you drive, etc.). The actual fuel consumption may differ from the fuel consumption displayed, so treat the fuel consumption displayed as just a rough guideline.  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase from memory the manual reset mode or auto reset mode setting for the average fuel consumption display.  The display setting can be changed to the preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72. Outside temperature display (if so equipped) N00556501134 NOTE  The average fuel consumption display can be reset separately in both auto reset mode and manual reset mode.  “---” is displayed when the average fuel consumption cannot be measured.  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”. Shows the temperature outside the vehicle. NOTE  The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (°F or °C). Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72.  Depending on factors such as the driving conditions, the displayed temperature may vary from the actual outside temperature. Features and controls 5-69 5 BK0236100US.book 70 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is changed to ON. When the remaining fuel level runs very low (no segments displayed), the bar graph flashes. If the warning display appears, refuel as soon as possible. Frozen road warning (if so equipped) N00579000041 5 If the outside air temperature drops below approx. 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds and the outside air temperature warning symbol (A) flashes for about 10 seconds. 1- Full 0- Empty NOTE CAUTION  There is a danger the road might be icy, even when this symbol is not flashing, so please take care when driving.  It may take several seconds to stabilize the display after refilling the tank.  If fuel is added with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON, the remaining fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.  The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler door is located on the left side of the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page 3-3.) Fuel remaining warning display Fuel remaining display N00575401031 The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. 5-70 Features and controls When the remaining fuel level runs low (one segment is displayed), the last segment of the fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is NOTE  On hills or curves, the display may be incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the tank. CAUTION  Running out of gas could damage the catalytic converter. If the warning display appears, refuel as soon as possible. BK0236100US.book 71 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display Service reminder NOTE N00556701312 Displays the approximate time until the next recommended periodic inspection. “---” is displayed when the inspection time has arrived. NOTE  The service reminder time can be modified by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to “Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehicle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For further information, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Distance Month  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100 km) and the time in units of 1 month. 2. This informs you that a periodic inspection is due. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the system checked. 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it displays the time until the next periodic inspection. To reset The “---” display can be reset while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the service reminder display. NOTE  When the next periodic inspection is approaching, the wrench symbol will be displayed whenever the ignition switch is turned from the “OFF” position to the “ON” position or when the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON. The wrench symbol will continuously be displayed, even on non-service reminder displays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until the service reminder is reset. When the service reminder resets, the wrench symbol will not be displayed until the next periodic inspection. 2. Press and hold the multi-information display switch for about 1 second or more to make the wrench symbol start flashing. (If there is no operation for about 10 seconds with flashing, the display will revert to its original indication.) 1. Shows the time until the next periodic inspection. Features and controls 5-71 5 BK0236100US.book 72 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display 3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly press the multi-information meter switch, the display switches from “---” to “cLEAr”. After that, the time until the next periodic inspection is shown. 5 NOTE  When “---” is displayed, after a certain distance and a certain period of time, the display is reset and the time until the next periodic inspection is displayed.  If you accidentally reset the display, consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. Changing the function settings N00556801267 CAUTION  The customer is responsible for making sure that regular inspections and maintenance and periodic inspections and maintenance are performed. Inspections and maintenance must be performed to prevent accidents and malfunctions. NOTE  The “---” display cannot be reset while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. 5-72 Features and controls The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”, “Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature unit” setting can be modified as desired, when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the driving range display. Refer to “Information display” on page 5-67. 2. Each time you press the multi-information display switch for 1 second or more on driving range display, you can switch reset mode for average fuel consumption. (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset mode) Auto reset mode Manual reset mode CAUTION  The driver should not operate the display while the vehicle is in motion.  When operating the system, stop the vehicle in a safe area. Manual reset mode Changing the reset mode for average fuel consumption N00575501032 You can change the mode condition for the average fuel consumption display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset”.  When the average fuel consumption is being displayed, if you hold down the multi-information display switch, these calculations will be reset to zero.  When the following operation is performed, the mode setting changes automatically from manual to auto. BK0236100US.book 73 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] Change the operation mode to ON from ACC or OFF. NOTE  The average fuel consumption display can be reset separately for the auto reset mode and for the manual reset mode.  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase from memory the manual reset mode or auto reset mode setting for the average fuel consumption display.  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”. 3. Press and hold the multi-information display switch to switch in sequence from “km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg”  “km/L”. 5 Auto reset mode  When the average fuel consumption is being displayed, if you hold down the multi-information display switch, these calculations will be reset to zero.  When the engine switch or the operation mode is in the following conditions, the average fuel consumption display will automatically reset. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch has been set to the “ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 hours or more. [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] The operation mode has been set to ACC or OFF for about 4 hours or more. Changing the fuel consumption display unit N00557100156 The fuel consumption display unit can be changed. The distance and amount units are also switched to match the selected fuel consumption unit. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the average fuel consumption display. Refer to “Information display” on page 5-67. 2. Press and hold the multi-information display switch for about 5 seconds or more until buzzer sound is heard twice. NOTE  The display units for the driving range, the average fuel consumption are changed, but the units for the indicating needle (speedometer), the odometer, the trip odometer and the service reminder will remain unchanged.  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of the unit setting is erased and it returns automatically to factory setting. The distance units is also changed in the following combinations to match the selected fuel consumption unit. Features and controls 5-73 BK0236100US.book 74 ページ２０１６年２月１日 Multi-information display 5 Fuel consumption Distance (driving range) km/L km L/100 km km mpg mile (s) Changing the temperature unit (if so equipped) N00557201183 The temperature display unit can be switched. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the outside temperature display. Refer to “Information display” on page 5-67. 2. Each time you press the multi-information display switch for 5 seconds or more on outside temperature display, you can switch from °F to °C or from °C to °F unit of outside temperature display. NOTE  The temperature value on air conditioning panel is switched in conjunction with outside temperature display unit of the multi-information display. However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to temperature display of an air conditioning. 5-74 Features and controls 月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 75 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Indicator and warning light package Indicator and warning light package N00519801905 5 1- High beam indicator  P.5-76 2- Electric power steering system warning light  P.5-51 3- Tire pressure monitoring system warning light (if so equipped)  P.5-59 4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning lights  P.5-76 5- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped)  P.5-76 6- Door-ajar warning light  P.5-78 7- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light  P.4-27 8- High coolant temperature warning light (red)  P.5-78 9- Low coolant temperature indicator (green)  P.5-76 10- Oil pressure warning light  P.5-78 11- Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”)  P.5-77 12- Charging system warning light P.5-78 13- Brake warning light  P.5-76 14- Anti-lock braking system warning light  P.5-50 15- Multi-information display  P.5-65 16- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light  P.4-10 17- Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)  P.5-55 18- Active stability control (ASC) indicator/warning light  P.5-53, 5-54 19- Washer fluid level warning light (if so equipped)  P.5-79 20- Active stability control (ASC) OFF indicator/warning light  P.5-53, 5-54 21- Position indicator (if so equipped) P.5-76 22- ECO indicator  P.5-76 23- For details, refer to “Warning activation” on page 5-14 (if so equipped) Features and controls 5-75 BK0236100US.book 76 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Indicators 24- For details, refer to “Warning activation” on page 5-14 (if so equipped) Indicators Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) N00520300147 N00520200175 N00519900127 Turn signal indicators/Hazard 5 warning lights This indicator comes on while the front fog lights are on. Position indicator (if so equipped) N00520000216 N00551301049 The arrows will flash in time with the corresponding exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is used. This indicator light illuminates while the parking lights are on. Both arrows will flash when the hazard warning flasher switch is pressed. Low coolant temperature indicator - green N00575600010 NOTE  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if the indicator stays on without flashing, check for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or turn signal connection. This indicator comes on in green while the coolant temperature is low. NOTE  When the indicator goes out, this should be used as a rough indication of when the heating starts working. High beam indicator N00520100086 A blue light comes on when the headlights are on high beam. ECO indicator N00568800036 This indicator comes on while fuel-efficient driving is achieved. 5-76 Features and controls Warning lights Brake warning light and buzzer N00520400526 This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or the operation mode is put in ON. When the engine is started, the light should go off a few seconds later. The warning light also illuminates after starting the engine under the following conditions.  When the parking brake is still applied.  When the brake fluid level is low.  When the brake system circuit is not working properly. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the parking brake is not properly release. Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off. BK0236100US.book 77 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Warning lights CAUTION  If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock braking system warning light are illuminated at the same time, the braking force distribution function will not operate, the vehicle may be destabilized during sudden braking under the following conditions. • When the brake warning light does not go out even when the parking brake is released. • When the brake warning light stays on while driving. If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in a safe place, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the following manner when brake performance is deteriorated. • Confirm that the vehicle slows down when you press down on the brake pedal harder than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal may go all the way to the floor. • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking to reduce your speed and slowly apply the parking brake. Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the stop lights and to alert the vehicles behind you. Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) N00520500804 This indicator is a part of the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system which monitors the emissions, engine control system or continuously variable transmission (CVT) control system. If a problem is detected in one of these systems, this indicator illuminates or flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, this indicator normally comes on and goes off after the engine has started. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank filler cap is not properly tightened. If this indicator comes on and stays on after refueling, stop the engine and check that the cap is properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise until you hear clicking sounds.) If this indicator does not go off after several seconds or lights up while driving, have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. CAUTION  Driving for a long time with the engine malfunction indicator on may cause more damage to the emission control system. This could also affect fuel economy and drivability.  If this indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  If the engine malfunction indicator comes on while the engine is running, avoid driving at high speeds. During vehicle operation with the indicator on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle is stationary with the indicator on, you must depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual since the engine idling speed is higher than usual and a vehicle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to creep forward. Features and controls 5-77 5 BK0236100US.book 78 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Warning lights Oil pressure warning light NOTE 5  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is on. The engine electronic control module stores critical OBD information (especially exhaust emission data), which may be lost if the battery cable is disconnected while the engine malfunction indicator is on. This will make it difficult to diagnose the cause of future problems. Charging system warning light N00520600313 This light comes on in the event of a malfunction in the charging system or when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or the operation mode is put in ON. When the engine is started, the light should go out. Check to make sure that the light has gone out before driving. CAUTION  If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the system checked. N00520700170 This light comes on when the engine oil pressure is below normal. If the light stays on while driving, stop the engine as soon as possible. Do not run the engine until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. CAUTION CAUTION  If the light comes on during vehicle operation, it indicates that the engine is possibly overheating. Continued driving could make the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and take appropriate action. (Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.) NOTE  If this light comes on when the engine oil level is not low, have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  This warning light does not show the amount of oil in the crankcase. This can only be determined by checking the oil level with the dipstick with the engine turned off.  The high coolant temperature warning light may illuminate when the vehicle has been driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This illuminating does not necessarily indicate a problem. It should stop if you keep the engine running for a while or continue driving the vehicle. Door-ajar warning light and buzzer High coolant temperature warning light - red N00520901342 N00575700011 This light comes on in red if the coolant temperature becomes excessively high. This light comes on when any door is open or not completely closed. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h) and any door is open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times to inform the driver that any door is not properly shut. CAUTION  Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar warning light is off. 5-78 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 79 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Combination headlights and dimmer switch The daytime running lights will be illuminated: NOTE  When the auto cut-out function of the doom light is been activated, the light goes out automatically after about 30 minutes. Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-116. OFF The daytime running lights illuminated Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on Washer fluid level warning light (if so equipped) N00590300021 This light comes on when the washer fluid is running low. If the light comes on, replenish the container with washer fluid. Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-9. Combination headlights and dimmer switch N00522501889 Headlights Rotate the switch to operate the lights. The daytime running lights illuminated The combinations of switch operations and illuminated lights differ in accordance with the following conditions. Except for vehicles equipped with daytime running lights OFF All lights off Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on Headlights and other lights on Vehicles equipped with daytime running lights [When the engine is started, and the parking brake is released] Headlights and other lights on NOTE  Once the daytime running light come on, they do not go out until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the operation mode is changed to OFF or ACC. [When the engine is not running, or when the engine is running but the parking brake is not released] The engine starts when the lights are off. OFF All lights off Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on Headlights and other lights on Features and controls 5-79 5 BK0236100US.book 80 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Combination headlights and dimmer switch NOTE 5  Do not leave the headlights and other lights on for a long period of time when the engine is not running. The battery will run down.  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. However, if water collects inside the light, have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. The operation mode is changed to OFF or ACC and the driver’s door is opened.  If the following operation is performed with the combination headlights and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position, the lights automatically turn off after about 3 minutes. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the key is removed from the ignition switch and the driver’s door is not opened. When you want to keep the lights on: If the combination headlights and dimmer switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” position again after the engine is turned off, the about 3-minute auto-cutout function described above will not work. The lights (the parking lights, tail lights and license plate lights) will stay on and will not turn off automatically. Headlight reminder buzzer N00549800226 Light auto-cutout function (headlights and other lights) N00532600570  If the following operation is performed with the combination headlights and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position, the lights automatically turn off. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the key is removed from the ignition switch and the driver’s door is opened. [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] 5-80 Features and controls [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] The operation mode is changed to OFF or ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. NOTE  The light auto-cutout function can be deactivated. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. [When using a key to start the engine] If the driver’s door is opened with the key in the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed from the ignition switch while the lights are on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights. [When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the engine] If the driver’s door is opened with the operation mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the operation mode is changed to OFF while the lights are on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights. In either case, the lights will turn off automatically and so will the tone. Or you can turn BK0236100US.book 81 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Turn signal lever the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop the tone. Dimmer (high/low beam change) go back to normal when you let go. While the high beam is on, you will see a blue light on the instrument panel. NOTE N00549900142 To change the headlights from high beam to low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low beam as a courtesy whenever there are oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue light in the instrument cluster indicates when the headlights are on high beam.  You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever toward you, even if the light switch is off.  If you turn the lights off with the head lights set to high-beam illumination, the headlights are automatically returned to their low-beam setting when the light switch is next turned to the “ ” position. Turn signal lever N00522600519 Headlight flasher N00550000185 You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever gently toward you (2). The lights will When changing lanes, or to making a gradual turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” position (1). It will return to the neutral position when you let go. Use the full position (2) when making a normal turn. The lever will return to the neutral position when the turn is complete. There may be times when the lever does not return to the neutral position. This usually happens when the steering wheel is turned only slightly. You can easily return the lever by hand. Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly then release it, the turn signal lights and the indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash three times. 5 NOTE  A light in the instrument panel flashes to show when the turn signal lights are working properly. If this light flashes faster than usual, check for a burned out turn signal light bulb or malfunctioning connection in the signal. If the panel light does not come on when the lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a burned out bulb in the panel. Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  It is possible to modify functions as follows: • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash function for lane changes. • Adjust the time required to operate the lever for the 3-flash function. • Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer as the turn signal lights flash. Features and controls 5-81 BK0236100US.book 82 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Hazard warning flasher switch See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. Front fog light switch (if so equipped) Hazard warning flasher switch N00522700318 5 NOTE  If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or N00522800393 The front fog lights illuminate only when the headlights are on low beam. Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” position turns on the front fog lights as well as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of the “OFF” position. The knob will return to the neutral position when it is released. “ ” position while the front fog lights are illuminated, they will automatically turn off. They can be turned back on again by rotating the combination headlights and dimmer switch back to “ ” position, and turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” position.  Do not use fog lights except in conditions of fog, otherwise excessive light glare may temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. Wiper and washer switch N00523001748 CAUTION If you press the flasher switch, the turn signals will flash intermittently, and so will the hazard warning lights. This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion, except for emergencies. If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers will keep working after the ignition switch is removed or the operation mode is put in OFF. NOTE  If the flashers are used for several hours, the battery will run down. This could make it difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle. 5-82 Features and controls  If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm the glass with the defroster before using the washer. Windshield wipers NOTE  If the headlights are switched to high beam, the front fog lights will go out; they will illuminate again when the headlights are switched back to low beam. The windshield wiper and washer can be operated with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted BK0236100US.book 83 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Wiper and washer switch and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. A 5 1- Fast 2- Slow MIST- Misting function The wipers will operate once. OFF- Off INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) LO- Slow HI- Fast To adjust intermittent intervals With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive intermittent operation) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (A). NOTE  The speed-sensitive-operation function of the windshield wipers can be deactivated. For further information, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Windshield washer N00504600298 To turn on the windshield washer, pull the lever toward you with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will wipe automatically several times when the washer fluid is sprayed. To turn off the spray, release the lever. Misting function The misting function can be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will operate once if the wiper lever is raised to the “MIST” position and released. This operation is useful when it is drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” position. Features and controls 5-83 BK0236100US.book 84 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electric rear window defogger switch Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers N00523501349 CAUTION 5  If the washer is used in cold weather, washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass with the defroster before using the washer. NOTE  Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely.  Before using the wipers in cold weather, check to be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers while the blades are frozen could cause the wiper motor to burn out.  If the moving wipers become blocked partway through a sweep by ice or other deposits on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop operating to prevent the motor from overheating. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF, and then remove the ice or other deposits. Because the wipers will start operating again after the wiper motor cools down, check that the wipers operate before using them. 5-84 Features and controls NOTE Type 1  Avoid using the washer for more than 20 seconds at a time. Do not operate the washer when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or the pump may fail.  During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution that will not freeze in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer may not work or may be damaged.  Replace the wiper blades when they are worn. Use the proper size replacement blades. For further information, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Type 2 Electric rear window defogger switch N00523701484 The rear window defogger can be used when the engine is running. The indicator light (A) will come on when you press the electric rear window defogger switch. Electric current will flow through the heating wires on the rear window to help clear away moisture or frost. After about 20 minutes of operation, the system will shut off automatically. To switch the defogger OFF before 20 minutes have passed, press the switch again. The indicator light will go out and the defogger will turn off. If you need the defogger for more than 20 minutes, press the switch again. This will add 20 more minutes. BK0236100US.book 85 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Horn switch Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device” on page 7-37. CAUTION  The rear window defogger is not designed to melt snow. Remove any snow manually before using the rear window defogger.  Use the rear window defogger only after the engine has started and is running. Be sure to turn the defogger switch off immediately after the window is clear to save on battery power.  Do not place stickers, tape, or other items that are attached with adhesive over the grid wires on the rear window.  When cleaning the inside rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid wires. NOTE  If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, mist can also be removed from the outside rearview mirrors when the rear window defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door mirror heater” on page 5-37.) Horn switch N00523800185 To honk the horn, press around the “ on the steering wheel. ” mark Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. Link System End User License Agreement N00563801083 Link System (if so equipped) N00563701167 The Link System takes control of the devices connected via the USB input terminal or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the connected devices to be operated by using the switches in the vehicle or voice commands. See the following section for details on how to operate. Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-85. Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-105. Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on page 7-29. Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31. You have acquired a device that includes software licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corporation from Visteon Corporation, and their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a complete list of these 3rd party products and their end user license agreements, please go to the following website. http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldisclosure.pdf Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) N00563901316 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for making/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle using a cellular phone compatible with a wireless communication technology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It also allows the user to play music, saved in a Bluetooth® music player, through the vehicle’s speakers. Features and controls 5-85 5 BK0236100US.book 86 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) The system is equipped with a voice recognition function, which allows you to make hands-free calls by simple switch and voice command operations using a defined voice tree. 5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device” on page 5-91. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. WARNING  Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows you to make hands-free calls, if you choose to use the cellular phone while driving, you must not allow yourself to be distracted from the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident.  Refer to and comply with all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving. 5-86 Features and controls NOTE  For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, if the operation mode is left in ACC, the accessory power will automatically turn off after a certain period of time and you will no longer be able to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory power comes on again if the engine switch is operated. Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function” on page 5-14.  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery or the device power is turned off.  Hands-free calls will not be possible if your phone does not have service available.  If you place the Bluetooth® device in the cargo area, you may not be able to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  You can confirm the Link System software version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3 times (press and hold 2 times and then press briefly) within 10 seconds. NOTE  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, refer to the following website: [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North America website. [For vehicles sold in Canada] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors website. Please read and agree to the “Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”, the websites mentioned above may connect you to websites other than the Mitsubishi Motors website. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/products/index.html  Software updates by cellular phone/digital audio device manufacturers may change/alter device connectivity. Steering control switch and microphone  P.5-87 Voice recognition function  P.5-88 Useful voice commands  P.5-89 Speaker enrollment function  P.5-90 Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and the Bluetooth® device  P.5-91 Operating a music player connected via Bluetooth®  P.5-96 How to make or receive hands-free calls  P.5-96 Phonebook function  P.5-98 BK0236100US.book 87 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Steering control switch and microphone N00564000072 Volume down button Press this button to decrease the volume. SPEECH button 123456- Volume up button Volume down button SPEECH button PICK-UP button HANG-UP button Microphone Volume up button Press this button to increase the volume.  Press this button to change to voice recognition mode. While the system is in voice recognition mode, “Listening” will appear on the audio display.  If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition mode, it will interrupt prompting and allow voice command input. Pressing the button longer will deactivate the voice recognition mode.  Pressing this button briefly during a call will enable voice recognition and allow voice command input. PICK-UP button  Press this button when an incoming call is received to answer the telephone.  When another call is received during a call, press this button to put the first caller on hold and talk to the new caller. • In such circumstances, you can press the button briefly to switch between callers. You will switch to the first caller and the other caller will be put on hold. • To establish a three-way call in such situations, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode and then say “Join calls.” HANG-UP button  Press this button when an incoming call is received to refuse the call.  Press this button during a call to end the current call. When another call is on hold, you will switch to that call.  If this button is pressed in the voice recognition mode, the voice recognition mode will be deactivated. NOTE  When you press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode with a cellular phone paired to the system, current information on the cellular phone, such as “remaining battery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on the audio display.* *: Some cellular phones will not send this information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Features and controls 5-87 5 BK0236100US.book 88 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  Call waiting and three-way calls can be used by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is possible to use those services with your cellular phone. 5 Microphone Your voice will be recognized by a microphone in the overhead console, allowing you to make hands-free calls with voice commands. NOTE  If a cellular phone is within close proximity of the microphone, it may distort the sound quality. In this case, place the cellular phone as far as possible from the microphone. Voice recognition function N00564100086 Bluetooth® The 2.0 interface is equipped with a voice recognition function. Simply say voice commands and you can perform various operations and make or receive hands-free calls. With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice recognition is possible for US English, North 5-88 Features and controls American Spanish, Canadian French and Japanese. The factory setting is “English.” NOTE  If the voice command that you say differs from the predefined command or cannot be recognised due to ambient noise or some other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will ask you for the voice command again up to 3 times.  For best performance and further reduction of ambient noise, the vehicle windows should be closed, lower the blower speed and refrain from conversation with your passengers while engaging the voice recognition function.  Some voice commands have alternative commands.  Depending on the selected language, some functions may not be available.  Language can be changed by using the audio control panel besides the following procedure. For details, refer to “To change the language (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)” on page 7-27. Selecting the language 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Language.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select a language: English, Spanish, French or Japanese.” Say the desired language. (Example: “English”) 5. The voice guide will say “English (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this correct?” Say “Yes.” If you say “No,” the system will return to Step 4. NOTE  The voice guide will repeat the same message twice. The first message is in the current language, and the second message is in the selected language.  If many entries are registered in the vehicle phonebook, changing the language will take a longer time.  Changing the language deletes the mobile phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. If you wish to use it, you will have to import it again. 6. When the voice guide says “English (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,” the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu. BK0236100US.book 89 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Useful voice commands N00564200016 Help function N00564300017 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a help function. If you say “Help” when the system is waiting for a voice command input, the system will tell you a list of the commands that can be used under the circumstances. Canceling N00564401073 There are 2 cancel functions. If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. If you are anywhere else within the system, say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. With the confirmation function activated, you are given more opportunities than normal to confirm a command when making various settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This allows you to decrease the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed. The confirmation function can be turned on or off by following the steps below. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Confirmation prompts.” 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are . Would you like to turn confirmation prompts .” Answer “Yes” to change the setting or answer “No” to keep the current setting. 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are ” and then the system will return to the main menu. Security function NOTE N00564600023  You can return to the previous menu by saying “Go Back.” Confirmation function setting N00564500019 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a confirmation function. It is possible to use a passcode as a security function by setting a passcode of your choice for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. When the security function is turned on, it is necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit passcode in order to use all functions of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for reception. Setting the passcode Use the following procedure to turn on the security function by setting a passcode. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Passcode.” 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is disabled. Would you like to enable it?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the passcode and return to the main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4digit passcode. Remember this passcode. It will be required to use this system.” Say a 4-digit number which you want to set as a passcode. 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say “Passcode <4-digit passcode>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to return to the passcode input in Step 5. 7. When the registration of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say “Passcode is enabled” and the system will return to the main menu. NOTE  Passcode will be required to access the system after the next ignition cycle. Features and controls 5-89 5 BK0236100US.book 90 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE 5  It is required for a little time after engine stop that the entered passcode is actually recorded in the system. If the ignition switch or the operation mode is made to ACC or ON or the engine is started immediately after engine stop, there is a case when the entered passcode is not recorded in the system. At this time, please try to enter the passcode again. Entering the passcode If a passcode has been set and the security function is enabled, the voice guide will say “Hands-free system is locked. State the passcode to continue” when the SPEECH button is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the passcode. If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct passcode. NOTE  You can reenter the passcode as many times as you want.  If you have forgotten your passcode, say “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and then check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 5-90 Features and controls Disabling the passcode Use the following procedure to turn off the security function by disabling the passcode. Speaker enrollment NOTE N00564800038  System must be unlocked to disable the passcode. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Passcode.” 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is enabled. Would you like to disable it?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of the passcode and return to the main menu. 5. When the disabling of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say “Passcode is disabled” and the system will return to the main menu. Speaker enrollment function N00564700011 Bluetooth® You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want. The 2.0 interface can use the speaker enrollment function to create a voice model for one person per language. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to recognise voice commands said by you. It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the speaker enrollment process. To ensure the best results, run through the process while in the driver’s seat, in an environment that is as quiet as possible (when there is no rain or strong winds and the vehicle windows are closed). Please turn off your phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent interruption of the process. Use the following procedure for speaker enrollment. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transaxle), or the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position (continuously variable transmission (CVT)), and pull the parking brake lever. NOTE  Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before attempting speaker enrollment. 2. Press the SPEECH button. BK0236100US.book 91 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 3. Say “Voice training.” 4. The voice guide will say “This operation must be performed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is stopped. See the owner’s manual for the list of required training phrases. Press and release the SPEECH button when you are ready to begin. Press the HANG-UP button to cancel at any time.” Press the SPEECH button to start the speaker enrollment process. NOTE  If you do not start the speaker enrollment process within 3 minutes after pressing the SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment function will time out. The voice guide will say “Speaker enrollment has timed out.” The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be deactivated. 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in table “Enrollment commands” on page 5-105. The system will register your voice and then move on to the registration of the next command. Continue the process until all phrases have been registered. NOTE  To repeat the most recent voice training command, press and release the SPEECH button.  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime during the process, the system will beep and stop the speaker enrollment process. 6. When all enrollment commands have been read out, the voice guide will say “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The system will then end the speaker enrollment process and return to the main menu. NOTE  Completing the speaker enrollment process will turn on the voice model automatically.  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not work in this mode. Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining N00564900055 2. Say “Voice training.” 3. If you have completed a speaker enrollment process once already, the voice guide will say either “Enrollment is enabled. Would you like to disable or retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled. Would you like to enable or retrain?” 4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice model is on; when enrollment is “disabled,” the voice model is off. Say the command that fits your needs. Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enrollment process and recreate a new voice model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on page 5-90.) Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device N00565001366 Before you can make or receive hands-free calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface function, you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want. You can also retrain the system. Use the following procedure to perform these actions. 1. Press the SPEECH button. Features and controls 5-91 5 BK0236100US.book 92 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  Pairing is required only when the device is used for the first time. Once the device has been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, all you need is to bring the device into the vehicle next time and the device will 5 connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically (if supported by the device). The device must have connect. Bluetooth® turned ON to 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transaxle), or the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position (continuously variable transmission (CVT)), and pull the parking brake lever. NOTE  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehicle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is automatically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can also change a Bluetooth® device to be connected. To pair device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. 2. Press the SPEECH button. 3. Say “Pair Device.” NOTE  The following procedure ( to ) can also be used instead of saying “Pair Device.” Replace this step 3 with the following procedure if you prefer. Say “Setup.” Say “Pairing Options.” To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below. 5-92 Features and controls The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set code.” Say “Pair.” NOTE  If 7 devices have already been paired, the voice guide will say “Maximum devices paired” and then the system will end the pairing process. To register a new device, delete one device and then repeat the pairing process. (Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a device” on page 5-93.) 4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing procedure on the device. See the device manual for instructions.” and then will say “The pairing code is .” NOTE  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific pairing code. Please refer to the device manual for pairing code requirements and read the next section “If your device requires a specific pairing code” on page 5-93 to set the pairing code.  The pairing code entered here is only used for the Bluetooth® connection certification. Depending on the connection settings of the Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be entered each time you connect the Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. For the default connection settings, refer to the instructions for the device. BK0236100US.book 93 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number that has been read out in Step 4. NOTE  Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may take a few minutes to pair it with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. NOTE  When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the device tag you have said, the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” To change the device tag, answer “No” and then say the device tag again.  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recogBluetooth® nize the device, the voice guide will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pairing process will be cancelled. Confirm that the device you are pairing supports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.  If you enter the wrong number, the voice guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pairing process will be cancelled. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing it again. If your device requires a specific pairing code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer to the device manual for pairing code requirements and read the next section “If your device requires a specific pairing code” on page 5-93. 6. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the device after the beep.” You can assign a desired name for the Bluetooth® device and register it as a device tag. Say the name you want to register after the beep. 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Complete. Would you like to import the contacts from your mobile device now?” Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say “Please wait while the contacts are imported. This may take several minutes.” Answer “No” to end the pairing process. 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code set to .” When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether the number said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 6. 8. The voice guide will say “Do you want to pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” the system will proceed to Step 3 in the pairing process. Refer to the previous section “To pair.” Selecting a device N00565100025 Bluetooth® If your device requires a specific pairing code If your device requires a specific pairing code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow the procedures below. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. Say “Set Code.” 5. The voice guide will say “Do you want the pairing code to be random or fixed?” Say “Fixed.” 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. If multiple paired devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is automatically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can connect to the other paired cellular phone or music player by following setting change procedures. To select a cellular phone 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Select phone.” Features and controls 5-93 5 BK0236100US.book 94 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 5 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the numbers of the cellular phones and device tags of corresponding cellular phones will be read out in order, starting with the cellular phone that has been most recently connected. Say the number of the cellular phone that you want to connect to. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the phone that you want to connect to is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and connect to the cellular phone. Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say “Please say.” Say the number of the phone that you want to connect to. NOTE  You can connect to a phone at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the number, even before all of the paired numbers and device tags of corresponding cellular phones are read out by the system. 5. The selected phone will be connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice guide will say “ selected” and then the system will return to the main menu. To select a music player 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Select music player.” 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the numbers of the music players and device tags of corresponding music players will be read out in order, starting with the music player that has been most recently connected. Say the number of the music player that you want to connect to. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the music player that you want to connect to is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and connect to the music player. Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say “Please say.” Say the number of the music player that you want to connect to. NOTE  You can connect to a music player at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the number, even before all of the paired numbers and device tags of corresponding music players are read out by the system. 5. The selected music player will be connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 5-94 Features and controls The voice guide will say “ selected” and then the system will return to the main menu. Deleting a device Use the following procedure to delete a paired Bluetooth® device from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “Delete.” 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the numbers of the devices and device tags of corresponding devices will be read out in order, starting with the device that has been most recently connected. After it completes reading all pairs, the voice guide will say “or all.” Say the number of the device that you want to delete from the system. If you want to delete all paired phones from the system, say “All.” 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say “Deleting . Is this correct?” or “Deleting all devices. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). BK0236100US.book 95 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 4. 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and then the system will end the device deletion process. NOTE  If the device deletion process fails for some reason, the voice guide will say “Delete failed” and then the system will cancel deleting the device. To check a paired Bluetooth® device N00565200013 Bluetooth® You can check a paired following the steps below. device by 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “List.” 5. The voice guide will read out device tags of corresponding devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth® device that has been most recently connected. 6. After the device tags of all paired Bluetooth® devices have been read, the system will say “End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?” To hear the list again from the beginning, answer “Yes.” When you are done, answer “No” to return to the main menu. NOTE  If you press and release the SPEECH button and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with the next highest number or “Previous” to return to the phone with the previous number.  You can change the device tag by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Edit” while the list is being read.  You can change the phone to be connected by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Select phone” while the list is being read.  You can change the music player to be connected by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Select music player” while the list is being read. Changing a device tag N00565300014 You can change the device tag of a paired cellular phone or music player. Follow the steps below to change a device tag. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “Edit.” 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and read out the numbers of the Bluetooth® devices and device tags of corresponding devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth® that has been most recently connected. After all paired device tags have been read, the voice guide will say “Which device, please?” Say the number of the device tag you want to change. NOTE  You can press and release the SPEECH button while the list is being read, and immediately say the number of the device tag you want to change. Features and controls 5-95 5 BK0236100US.book 96 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 5 6. The voice guide will say “New name, please.” Say the name you want to register as a new device tag. When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say “. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” you can say the new device tag you want to register again. 7. The device tag is changed. When the change is complete, the voice guide will say “New name saved” and then the system will return to the main menu. Operating a music player connected via Bluetooth® You can also use the phonebooks in the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without dialing telephone numbers. To make a call P.5-96 Send function P.5-98 Receiving calls P.5-98 Mute function P.5-98 Switching between hands-free mode and private mode P.5-98 NOTE  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly when you place or receive the call directly from your cellular phone, instead of using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. N00565400015 For the operation of a music player connected via Bluetooth®, refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device” on page 7-37. How to make or receive handsfree calls N00565500087 You can make or receive hands-free calls using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. NOTE To make a call N00565600020 You can make a call in the following 3 ways using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: - By saying a telephone number - By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s phonebook - By redialing a telephone number Making a call by using the telephone number You can make a call by saying the telephone number. 5-96 Features and controls 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Dial.” 3. After the voice guide says “Number please,” say the telephone number. 4. The voice guide will say “Dialing .” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then make the call. When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the telephone number again. To continue with that number, answer “Yes.” To change the telephone number, answer “No.” The system will say “Number please” then say the telephone number again.  In the case of English, the system will recognise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the number “0.”  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports numbers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).  The maximum supported telephone number length is as follows: • International telephone number: + and telephone numbers (to 18 digits). • Except for international telephone number: telephone numbers (to 19 digits). BK0236100US.book 97 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Making a call using a phonebook You can make calls using the vehicle phonebook or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. For details on the phonebooks, refer to “Phonebook function” on page 5-98. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Call.” NOTE  If you say “Call” when the vehicle phonebook and the mobile phonebook are empty, the voice guide will say “The vehicle phonebook is empty. Would you like to add a new entry now?” Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say “Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.” You can now create data in the vehicle phonebook. Answer “No,” the system will return to the main menu. 3. After the voice guide says “Name please,” say the name you want to call, from those registered in the phonebook. 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will proceed to Step 5. If there are 2 or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to call .” If that person is the one you want to call, answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the name of the next matching person will be uttered by the voice guide. NOTE  If you say “No” to all names read by the system, the voice guide will say “Name not found, returning to main menu” and the system will return to the main menu. 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered under the name you just said, the voice guide will proceed to Step 6. If 2 or more telephone numbers are registered that match the name you just said, the voice guide will say “Would you like to call at [home], [work], [mobile], or [other]?” Select the location to call. NOTE  If the name you selected has matching data in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for . Would you like to add location or try again?” Say “Try again,” and the system will return to Step 3. Say “Add location” and you can register an additional telephone number under the selected location.  If the name you selected has matching data in the mobile phonebook but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for . Would you like to try again?” Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to Step 3. Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled. Start over again from Step 1. 6. The voice guide will say “Calling ” and then the system will dial the telephone number. Features and controls 5-97 5 BK0236100US.book 98 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Receiving calls NOTE 5  When the confirmation function is on, the system will check if the name and location of the receiver are correct. If the name is correct, answer “Yes.” To change the name or location to call, answer “No.” The system will return to Step 3. Redialing You can redial the last number called, based on the history of dialed calls in the paired cellular phone. Use the following procedure to redial. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Redial.” Send function N00565700018 During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode, then say “ SEND” to generate DTMF tones. For example, if during a call you need to simulate the pressing of a phone button as a response to an automated system, press the SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cellular phone. 5-98 Features and controls N00565800035 If an incoming phone call is received while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC, the audio system will be automatically turned on and switched to the incoming call, even when the audio system was originally off. The voice guide announcement for the incoming call will be output from the front passenger’s seat speaker. If the CD player or radio was playing when the incoming call was received, the audio system will mute the sound from the CD player or radio and output only the incoming call. To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel control switch. When the call is over, the audio system will return to its previous state. Mute function N00565900010 At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle microphone. Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute function and mute the microphone. Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn off the mute function and cancel the mute on the microphone. Switching between hands-free mode and private mode N00566600014 Bluetooth® The 2.0 interface can switch between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) and private mode (calls using cellular phone). If you press the SPEECH button and say “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you can stop the hands-free mode and talk in private mode. To return to hands-free mode, press the SPEECH button again and say “Transfer call.” Phonebook function N00566000018 Bluetooth® The 2.0 interface has 2 types of unique phonebooks that are different from the phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile phonebook. These phonebooks are used to register telephone numbers and make calls to desired numbers via voice recognition function. NOTE  Disconnecting the battery cable will not delete information registered in the phonebook. BK0236100US.book 99 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Vehicle phonebook N00566101162 This phonebook is used when making calls with the voice recognition function. Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehicle phonebook per language. Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: home, work, mobile and other. You can register one telephone number for each location. You can register a desired name as a name for any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle phonebook. Names and telephone numbers can be changed later on. The vehicle phonebook can be used with all paired cellular phones. To register a telephone number in the vehicle phonebook You can register a telephone number in the vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: Reading out a telephone number, and selecting and transferring 1 phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone. To register by reading out a telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “New entry.” 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” Say your preferred name to register it. NOTE  If the maximum number of entries are already registered, the voice guide will say “The phonebook is full. Would you like to delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to delete a registered name. If you say “No,” the system will return to the main menu. 5. When the name has been registered, the voice guide will say “home, work, mobile, or other?” Say the location for which you want to register a telephone number. NOTE  When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say “. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say “The current number is , number please.” If you do not want to change the telephone number, say “cancel” or the original number to keep it registered. 6. The voice guide will say “Number please.” Say the telephone number to register it. NOTE  In the case of English, the system will recognise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the number “0.” 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone number you have just read, and then register the number. When the telephone number has been registered, the voice guide will say “Number saved. Would you like to add another number for this entry?” To add another telephone number for a new location for the current entry, answer “Yes.” The system will return to location selection in Step 5. Features and controls 5-99 5 BK0236100US.book 100 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Answer “No” to end the registration process and return to the main menu. NOTE 5  When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the telephone number you have read, the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to return to telephone number registration in step 6. To select and transfer one phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone You can select 1 phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone and register it in the vehicle phonebook. NOTE  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is parked. Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.  All or part of data may not be transferred, even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth®, depending on the compatibility of the device.  The maximum supported telephone number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits. 5-100 Features and controls NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer.  For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Import contact.” 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like to import a single entry or all contacts?” Say “Single entry.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become ready to receive transferred phonebook data. NOTE  If the maximum number of entries are already registered, the voice guide will say “The phonebook is full. Would you like to delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to delete a registered name. If you say “No,” the system will return to the main menu. 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to receive a contact from the phone. Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will receive the phonebook data from the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone. 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone to set it up so that the phonebook entry you want to register in the vehicle phonebook can be transferred to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. NOTE  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recognise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone or the connection takes too much time, the voice guide will say “Import contact has timed out” and then the system will cancel the registration. In such case, start over again from Step 1.  Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing and holding the SPEECH button will cancel the registration. 7. When the reception is complete, the voice guide will say “ numbers have been imported. What name would you like to use for these numbers?” BK0236100US.book 101 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Say the name you want to register for this phonebook entry. NOTE  If the entered name is already used for other phonebook entry or similar to a name used for other phonebook entry, that name cannot be registered. 8. The voice guide will say “Adding .” When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the name is correct. Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the voice guide will say “Name please.” Register a different name. 9. The voice guide will say “Numbers saved.” 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like to import another contact?” Answer “Yes” if you want to continue with the registration. You can continue to register a new phonebook entry from Step 5. Answer “No,” the system will return to the main menu. To change the content registered in the vehicle phonebook You can also listen to the list of names registered in the vehicle phonebook. NOTE  The system must have at least one entry. [Editing a telephone number] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact”. Say “Edit number.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names.” Say the name of the phonebook entry you want to edit. NOTE  Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phonebook will be read out in order. Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list of registered names” on page 5-102. 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, mobile or other?” Select and say the location where the telephone number you want to change or add is registered. When the confirmation function is on, the system will check the target name and location again. Answer “Yes” if you want to continue with the editing. Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 3. 6. The voice guide will say “Number, please.” Say the telephone number you want to register. NOTE  If the telephone number is already registered in the selected location, the voice guide will say “The current number is . New number, please.” Say a new telephone number to change the current number. 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone number. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the number is correct. Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the system will return to the Step 3. 8. Once the telephone number is registered, the voice guide will say “Number saved” and then the system will return to the main menu. You can change or delete a name or telephone number registered in the vehicle phonebook. Features and controls 5-101 5 BK0236100US.book 102 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  If the location where a telephone number was already registered has been overwritten with a new number, the voice guide will say “Number changed” and then the system will return to the main menu. 5 [Editing a name] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Edit name.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names.” Say the name you want to edit. NOTE  Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list of registered names” on page 5-102. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing .” When the confirmation function is on, the system will check if the name is correct. Answer “Yes” if you want to continue with the editing based on this information. 5-102 Features and controls Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 4. 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.” Say the new name you want to register. 7. The registered name will be changed. When the change is complete, the system will return to the main menu. [Listening to the list of registered names] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “List names.” 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the entries in the phonebook in order. 5. When the voice guide is done reading the list, it will say “End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?” When you want to check the list again from the beginning, answer “Yes.” When you are done, answer “No” to return to the previous or main menu. NOTE  You can call, edit or delete a name that is being read out. Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or “Delete” to delete it. The system will beep and then execute your command.  If you press the SPEECH button and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to the next entry or “Previous” to return to the previous entry. [Deleting a telephone number] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Delete.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry you would like to delete, or say list names.” Say the name of the phonebook entry in which the telephone number you want to delete is registered. BK0236100US.book 103 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list of registered names” on page 5-102. 5. If only one telephone number is registered in the selected phonebook entry, the voice guide will say “Deleting .” If multiple telephone numbers are registered in the selected phonebook entry, the voice guide will say “Would you like to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], or all?” Select the location to delete, and the voice guide will say “Deleting .” NOTE  To delete the telephone numbers from all locations, say “All.” 6. The system will ask if you really want to delete the selected telephone number(s) to go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the system will cancel deleting the telephone number(s) and then return to Step 4. 7. When the telephone number deletion is complete, the voice guide will say “ deleted” and then the system will return to the main menu. If all locations are deleted, the system will say “ and all locations deleted” and the name will be removed from the phonebook. If numbers still remain under the entry, the name will retain the other associated numbers. Erasing the phonebook You can delete all registered information from the vehicle phonebook. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Erase all.” 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will ask “Are you sure you want to erase everything from your hands-free system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook and return to the main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “You are about to delete everything from your hands-free system phonebook. Do you want to continue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook and return to the main menu. 6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, erasing the hands-free system phonebook” and then the system will delete all data in the phonebook. When the deletion is complete, the voice guide will say “Hands-free system phonebook erased” and then the system will return to the main menu. Mobile phonebook N00566200049 All entries in the phonebook stored in the cellular phone can be transferred in a batch and registered in the mobile phonebook. Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing up to 1,000 names, can be registered. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically converts from text to voice the names registered in the transferred phonebook entries, and creates names. NOTE  Only the mobile phonebook transferred from the connected cellular phone can be used with that cellular phone. Features and controls 5-103 5 BK0236100US.book 104 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE 5  You cannot change the names and telephone numbers in the phonebook entries registered in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select and delete specific phonebook entries, either. To change or delete any of the above, change the applicable information in the source phonebook of the cellular phone and then transfer the phonebook again. To import a devices phonebook Follow the steps below to transfer to the mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in the cellular phone. NOTE  Transfer should be completed while the vehicle is parked. Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile phonebook is overwritten by the stored phonebook in the cellular phone.  All or part of data may not be transferred, even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth®, depending on the compatibility of the device.  Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported.  The maximum supported telephone number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits. 5-104 Features and controls NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer.  For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Import contact.” 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like to import a single entry or all contacts?” Say “All contacts.” 5. The voice guide will say “Importing the contact list from the mobile phonebook. This may take several minutes to complete. Would you like to continue?” Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in the cellular phone will start. Answer “No,” the system will return to the main menu. NOTE  The transfer may take some time to complete depending on the number of contacts. NOTE  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable to transfer contact list from phone” and then the system will return to the main menu.  If you press the HANG-UP button or press and hold the SPEECH button during the data transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and the system will return to the main menu.  If an error occurs during the data transfer, all transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide will say “Unable to complete the phonebook import” and then the system will return to the main menu.  If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the voice guide will say “There are no contacts on the connected phone.” 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice guide will say “Import complete” and then the system will return to the main menu. General information N00566301119 Model name: MMC or MDGMY10 FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 or NT8MDGMY10 IC: 279B-MDGMY10 or 3043A-MDGMY10 Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- BK0236100US.book 105 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION  Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Endusers and installers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, use and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Enrollment commands N00566401080 5 USB input terminal (if so equipped) N00566701155  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. You can connect your USB memory device or iPod* to play music files stored in the USB memory device or iPod. This section explains how to connect and remove a USB memory device or iPod. See the following section for details on how to play music files. ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on page 7-29. Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31. *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries. Features and controls 5-105 BK0236100US.book 106 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) How to connect a USB memory device WARNING  An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving. N00566800104 To connect 5 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the glove compartment and remove the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C). 3. Connect a commercially available USB connector cable (D) to the USB memory device (E). 5-106 Features and controls NOTE 4. Connect the commercially available USB connector cable (D) to the vehicle’s connector cable (B). Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. 5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the clips.  Do not connect the USB memory device to the vehicle’s connector cable directly. The USB memory device may be damaged.  When closing the glove compartment, be careful not to trap the connector cable and USB memory device. To remove 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Remove the commercially available USB connector cable (D). Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. BK0236100US.book 107 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) 5 3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and close the glove compartment. How to connect an iPod N00566901157 To connect 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the glove compartment and remove the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C). 3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod. NOTE  Use a genuine connector cable from Apple Inc. 4. Connect the connector cable (D) to the connector cable (B). Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. 5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the clips. WARNING  An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving. NOTE  When closing the glove compartment, be careful not to trap the connector cable and iPod. To remove 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Remove the connector cable (D). Features and controls 5-107 BK0236100US.book 108 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. Model name Condition USB memory device Storage capacity of 256 Mbytes or more iPod* 5 fifth generation F/W Ver.1.3 or later Model name first gener- F/W Ver.3.1.3 or ation later iPod touch* 80GB/180 F/W Ver.1.1.2 or GB later iPod clas120GB sic* Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications N00567000015 Device types N00567101143 Devices of the following types can be connected. 5-108 Features and controls first gener- F/W Ver.1.3.1 or ation later second F/W Ver.1.1.3 or generation later iPod nano* third generation F/W Ver.1.1.3 or later fourth F/W Ver.1.0.4 or generation later fifth generation F/W Ver.1.0.2 or later sixth generation F/W Ver.1.0 or later second F/W Ver.4.2.1 or generation later third generation F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later fourth F/W Ver.4.3.1 or generation later F/W Ver.2.0.1 or later 160GB F/W Ver.2.0.4 or (late 2009) later 3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and close the glove compartment. Condition iPhone* iPhone F/W Ver.3.1.3 or later iPhone 3G F/W Ver.4.2.1 or later iPhone 3GS F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later iPhone 4 F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later iPhone 4S F/W Ver.5.0.1 or later Models other than USB memory devices and iPods Digital audio player supporting mass storage class On vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, for these connectable device types, “iPod*,” “iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*” and “iPhone*,” refer to the following website: [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] BK0236100US.book 109 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Sun visors You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North America website. [For vehicles sold in Canada] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors website. Please read and agree to the “Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”. The websites mentioned above may connect you to websites other than the Mitsubishi Motors website. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/products/index.html *: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod touch” and “iPhone” are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries. NOTE  Depending on the type of the USB memory device or other device connected, the connected device may not function properly or the available functions may be limited.  It is recommended to use an iPod with firmware updated to the latest version.  You can charge your iPod by connecting it to the USB input terminal when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC.  Do not keep your USB memory device or iPod in your vehicle.  It is recommended that you back up the files in case of data damage. NOTE Sun visors  Do not connect to the USB input terminal any device (hard disk, card reader, memory reader, etc.) other than the connectable devices specified in the previous section. The device and/or data may be damaged. If any of these devices was connected by mistake, remove it after turning the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or putting the operation mode in OFF. N00524600353 Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce front glare while driving. To reduce side glare, turn the visor to the side (2). 5 File specifications N00567200020 You can play music files of the following specifications that are saved in a USB memory device or other device supporting mass storage class. When you connect your iPod, playable file specifications depend on the connected iPod. Item Condition File format MP3, WMA, AAC Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor. Maximum number of levels (including the Level 8 root) Number of folders 700 Number of files 65,535 Features and controls 5-109 BK0236100US.book 110 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 12 V power outlets 12 V power outlets N00525001670 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) CAUTION 5 Card holder Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on the sun visor.  Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.  Also be aware that using electronic equipment with the engine off may run the battery down.  When the power outlet is not in use, be sure to close the power outlet cover. This will prevent the power outlet from becoming clogged and short circuiting. Accessories can be operated while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the cover, and insert the plug in the power outlet. N00554301040 HomeLink® Wireless Control System is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. HomeLink® provides a convenient way to replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink® information can be found at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink®-Hotline at 1800-355-3515. WARNING  Do not use HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Regulations. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. 5-110 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 111 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) Programming a new HomeLink® WARNING  During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming. N00584700020 HomeLink® To program to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. NOTE  Once HomeLink® is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (for example, new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Cleaning the programmed information” on page 5-114.  You can program a maximum of 3 devices. To change or replace any of the 3 devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See “Cleaning the programmed information” on page 5-114 or “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button” on page 5-115. 1. Press the HomeLink® button that you would like to program. The indicator light (A) will flash orange slowly. 1- HomeLink® button 1 2- HomeLink® button 2 3- HomeLink® button 3 Before programming HomeLink® N00584600029  Some garage door openers manufactured after 1995 have “rolling code protection”. To program a garage door opener equipped with “rolling code protection”; you will need to access the garage door opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn” or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use a ladder and another person to assist you.  It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. NOTE  You do not need to continue holding the HomeLink® button.  If the indicator light does not flash, refer to “Cleaning the programmed information” on page 5-114. Features and controls 5-111 5 BK0236100US.book 112 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button while keeping the indicator light in view. 5 NOTE  Some devices may require you to replace this “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate operator / Canadian programming” section. If the indicator light does not change to rapidly flashing green or continuously lit green after performing these steps, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com NOTE  Some hand-held transmitters may actually train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button while watching the indicator light (A). Continue pressing the button until the indicator light (A) changes from slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code). Now you may release the hand-held transmitter button. 5-112 Features and controls 4. Press the HomeLink® button that was just programmed and observe the indicator light. • If the indicator light continuously illuminates green, programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. • If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. • If the device does not operate, continue with “Programming a new HomeLink®” steps 5 to 7 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device. 5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit (see the garage door opener manual to identify the “Learn” button.) 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) There are typically 30 seconds to initiate step 7. 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device. BK0236100US.book 113 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) NOTE NOTE  In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink® Hotline. Gate operator/Canadian programming N00584800021 Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission - which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held transmitter will go off when the device times out indicating that it has finished transmitting. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Programming” procedures, replace “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3 with the following:  If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. 3. Press and release - every 2 seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code). Now you may release the hand-held transmitter button. Proceed with “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 4 to complete. Additional steps for programming a door system with feedback N00584900022 The HomeLink® has the capability of receiving garage door status from compatible garage door opener systems. Check your garage door opener manual for the available feature and HomeLink® compatibility. Also for a listing of compatible systems contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com 5 1. Within 5 seconds after successfully programming the garage door opener (refer to “Programming a new HomeLink®” section), both garage door operation indicators (A) will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door feedback has been enabled. If the indicators do not flash, perform steps 2 and 3 while pressing the HomeLink® button up to the first 10 times after successful programming. 2. Press and release the programmed HomeLink® button to activate the door. You now have 1 minute in which to complete step 3. Features and controls 5-113 BK0236100US.book 114 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) 5 3. Once the door has stopped, press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener (refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for the location of the “Learn” button). Both the HomeLink® garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly green upon successful synchronization with the door opener (within 5 seconds). Operating HomeLink® N00585000020 To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. The indicators will illuminate/blink response to the following conditions: : Blinking : Illuminates Garage door opener closing Garage door opener closed Out of range Garage door feedback (orange) (green) (red) N00585200022 The HomeLink® has the capability of receiving garage door status from compatible garage door opener systems. Refer to “Additional steps for programming a door system with feedback” on page 5-113. Garage door status is then displayed with indicators (A). 5-114 Features and controls Garage door opener opening Garage door opener opened Out of range (orange) (green) (red) in The HomeLink® has the capability of listening to these messages at a range up to 820.2 feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED message feedback from the garage door opener. If the unit is out of range before receiving either the UP or DOWN message from the door opener, both the UP and DOWN indicators will flash red followed by a continuous lit orange indicator in the direction the door was last moving. Recall of the door state after initial feedback is possible by simultaneously pressing either HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and 3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message will be displayed for 3 seconds, again following the garage door status indication of the figure above. Clearing the programmed information N00585300023 To erase programming from the 3 buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), follow the steps noted: BK0236100US.book 115 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Interior lights 1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink® buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indicator will change from continuous yellow to rapidly flashing green. 2. Release both buttons. NOTE  Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. 3. HomeLink® is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 1. Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button N00585400024 To reprogram a the following. HomeLink® button, complete 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink® button can be released at this point. Proceed with “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 2. NOTE CAUTION  If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, it will revert to the previously stored programming. For questions or comments, visit www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by  The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. calling the HomeLink® Hotline. General information N00585600026 HomeLink® Your system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 12 inches (20 cm) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Interior lights N00525301644 NOTE  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated with the engine off may run the battery down. Never leave the vehicle without checking that the light is off. Features and controls 5-115 5 BK0236100US.book 116 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Storage spaces Dome light N00525801317 5 1- ( ) The light illuminates regardless of whether a door is open or closed. 2- (•) Delayed off function The light illuminates when a door is opened. It goes off approximately 30 seconds after the door is closed. However, the light goes off immediately with all doors closed in the following cases: • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • When the power door lock function is used to lock the vehicle. 5-116 Features and controls • When the remote control transmitter of the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.key is used to lock the vehicle. • When the door lock/unlock switch is pressed to lock the vehicle while carrying the F.A.S.T.-key. Auto cut-out function If the light is left switched on with the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the operation mode is in OFF or ACC, and a door is opened, it goes off automatically after approximately 30 minutes. The light will illuminate again after it automatically goes off in the following cases: • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • When the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key is operated. • When all doors are closed. NOTE  When the key was used to start the engine: if the key is removed while the doors are closed, the light is illuminated and after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the engine: if the operation mode is put in OFF while the doors are closed, the light illuminates and after approximately 30 seconds it goes off. NOTE  The time until the light goes off (delayed off) can be adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.  The auto cut-out function cannot be operated when the dome light switch is in the “ ” position. Also, this function can be deactivated. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. 3- ( ) The light goes off regardless of whether a door is open or closed. Storage spaces N00526400528 CAUTION  Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans, or spectacles in the cabin when parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will become extremely hot, so lighters and other flammable items may catch fire and unopened drink cans (including beer cans) may rupture. The heat may also deform or crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spectacle parts that are made of plastic.  Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a storage space could otherwise cause injuries during a sudden stop. BK0236100US.book 117 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cup holders NOTE NOTE  Do not leave valuables in any storage space when leaving the vehicle.  The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is located in the glove compartment. For details, refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-105. Glove compartment N00551500275 WARNING  An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving. To open, pull the lever (A). 5 Cup holders N00527301433 The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans securely in its holes. NOTE  Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit securely depending on the shape of the bottle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving is done while a plastic bottle is not securely placed, so check that plastic bottles are placed securely or use the bottle holder. CAUTION  Do not drink beverages while driving your vehicle. This is distracting and could cause an accident. For the rear seat N00537001215 For the front seat Type 1 The cup holder is located in front of the floor console. The cup holder is located behind the parking brake lever. Features and controls 5-117 BK0236100US.book 118 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bottle holders NOTE Bottle holders N00502800065 CAUTION  Drink beverages while driving your vehicle is distracting and can cause an accident.  Vibration and shaking while driving may cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as spilling hot beverages could cause burns. 5  Some beverages may not be stored, depending on the size and shape of the plastic bottles, etc. Convenience hook N00574700014 Convenience hook is located on the seatback of the passenger’s seat. There are bottle holders located on the front doors. Type 2 In order to use cup holder, allow the arm rest to drop down. NOTE NOTE  Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle holder.  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when storing beverages that are in plastic bottles, etc. 5-118 Features and controls  To avoid damage to the convenience hook, do not hang objects that weight more than 9 pounds (4 kg). BK0236100US.book 119 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Assist grips Assist grips N00559000074 These grips are to support the body by hand while seated in the vehicle. 5 CAUTION  Do not use the assist grips when getting into or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could detach causing you to fall. Features and controls 5-119 BK0236100US.book 120 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Driving safety Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2 Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2 Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2 Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3 Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4 Braking ............................................................................................6-5 Parking .............................................................................................6-5 Loading information ........................................................................6-6 Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10 Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11 6 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuel economy Fuel economy 6 Driving, alcohol and drugs N00628800178 N00628900049 Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Your personal driving habits can have a significant effect on your fuel consumption. Several recommendations for achieving the greatest fuel economy are listed below. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation. Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of any of these medications.  Whenever accelerating from a stop, always accelerate slowly and smoothly.  When parked for even a short period, do not idle the engine. Shut it off.  Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary stops.  Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures.  For freeway driving, maintain a speed of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when traffic, roadway and weather conditions safely permit.  Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle lubricated according to the recommendations in this manual.  Always keep your vehicle well maintained. A poorly maintained engine wastes fuel and costs money.  Never overload your vehicle. Driving safety To install the floor mat N00628700047 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the floorboard. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation holes over the retaining clips. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips. WARNING  NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired. Floor mat N00628600046 The original equipment floor mat provided with your vehicle was specifically designed for your vehicle. Always properly position the floor mat and assure it does not interfere with operation of the pedals. Always use the 6-2 retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will help prevent the floor mat from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi genuine floor mats are recommended. NOTE  The shape of the mat and the number of retaining clips may vary depending on the vehicle model. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle preparation before driving  Move the driver’s seat as far backward as possible, while keeping good visibility, and good control of the steering wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check the instrument panel indicators and multiinformation display for any possible problem.  Similarly, the front passenger seat should also be moved as far back as possible.  Make sure that infants and small children are properly restrained in accordance with all laws and regulations. WARNING  If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the operation of the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distances resulting in a crash and injury. Always make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal.  Always use the retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor mat.  Always install the mat with the correct side facing down.  Never install a second mat over or under an existing floor mat.  Do not use a floor mat designed for another model vehicle even if it is a Mitsubishi genuine floor mat.  Before driving, be sure to check the following: • Periodically check that the floor mat is properly secured with the retaining clips. If you remove the floor mat while cleaning the inside of your vehicle or for any other reason, always check the condition of the floor mat after it has been reinstalled. • While the vehicle is stopped with the engine off, check that the floor mat is not interfering with the pedals by depressing the pedals fully. Vehicle preparation before driving N00629001770 For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always check for the following: Seat belts and seats  Before starting the vehicle, make certain that you and all passengers are seated and wearing their seat belts properly (with children in the rear seat, in appropriate restraints), and that all the doors are locked. Defrosters Check these by selecting the defroster mode, and set the blower switch on high. You should be able to feel the air blowing against the windshield. Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows)” on page 7-6, 7-10, 7-17. Tires Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires (including spare tire) for proper pressure. Driving safety 6-3 6 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Safe driving techniques Replace your tires before they are heavily worn out. On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, there is a risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement should, only be performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 6 Lights Have someone watch while you turn all the exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn signal indicators and high-beam indicators on the instrument panel. Fluid leaks Check the ground under the vehicle after parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need to find out why immediately and have it fixed. Safe driving techniques N00629200137 Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you can avoid an accident or injury. However, if 6-4 Driving safety you give extra attention to the following areas, you can better protect yourself and your passengers:  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road and weather conditions. Leave plenty of stopping distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.  Before changing lanes, check your mirrors, your blind spots, and use your turnsignal light.  While driving, watch the behavior of other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.  Always obey applicable laws and regulations. Be a polite and alert driver. Always leave room for unexpected events, such as sudden braking.  If you plan to drive in another country, obey their vehicle registration laws and make sure you will be able to get the right fuel. Driving during cold weather N00629400474  Check the battery. At the same time, check the terminals and wiring. During extremely cold weather, the battery will not be as strong. Also, the battery power level may drop because more power is used for cold starting and driving. Before driving the vehicle, check to see if the engine runs at the proper speed and if the headlights are as bright as normally. Charge or replace the battery if necessary. During extreme cold weather, it is possible that a very low battery could freeze. WARNING  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas. Any spark or flame can cause the battery to explode, which could cause serious injury or death. Always wear protective clothes and a face mask when working with your battery, or let a skilled mechanic do it.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After starting the engine, allow a short warm-up time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then drive your vehicle slowly.  Stay at low speeds at first so that the manual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxle fluid has time to spread to all the lubrication points.  Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in cold weather conditions. This is normal and shifting will get easier as the transaxle warms up.  Check the engine antifreeze. If there is not enough coolant because of a leak or from engine overheating, add Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium or equivalent. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Braking Please read this section in conjunction with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7. WARNING  Never open the radiator cap when the radiator is hot. You could be seriously burned. Braking N00629500521 All parts of the brake system are critical to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice at regular intervals according to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. When brakes are wet When driving in cold weather On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking system, making the brakes less effective. While driving in such conditions, pay close attention to surrounding vehicles and to the condition of the road surface. From time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal and check how effective the brakes are. When driving downhill It is important to take advantage of the engine braking by downshifting while driving on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the brakes from overheating. Parking N00629601372 Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immediately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally. A film of water can be formed on the brake discs or brake drums, and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal. Parking on a hill When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels. For vehicles equipped with manual transaxle Place the gearshift lever into the “R” (Reverse) position when parking on a downhill slope, into the 1st position when parking on an uphill slope. For vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT) Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set when parked and that the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This prevents loading the parking brake against the transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to move the selector lever out of the “P” (PARK) position. Parking with the engine running Never leave the engine running while you take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or poorly ventilated place. Driving safety 6-5 6 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information WARNING  Leaving the engine running risks injury or death from accidentally moving the gearshift lever (manual transaxle) or the selector lever (CVT) or from the accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger compartment. 6 Where you park Your front bumper can be damaged if you scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. Be careful when traveling up or down steep slopes where your bumper can scrape the road. WARNING  Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. Do not keep the steering wheel fully turned for a long time More effort could be required to turn the steering wheel. Refer to “Electric power steering system (EPS)” on page 5-51. 6-6 Driving safety When leaving the vehicle Always carry the key and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area. Loading information N00629900424 It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, non-factory-installed options, if any, being towed. The tire and loading information placard located on the driver’s door sill of your vehicle will show how much weight it may properly carry. WARNING  Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can damage your vehicle, adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, cause tire failure, and result in an accident. It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:  Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.  Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum of (a) Curb weight; (b) Accessory weight; (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and (d) Production options weight.  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant.  Accessory weight: the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory- installed equipment (whether installed or not).  Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)* times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information  Production options weight: the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* times the number of specified occupants. (In your vehicle the number is 3)  Occupant distribution: Occupant distribution within the passenger compartment (In your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, 1 in second row seat) *: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one person as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian regulations. 6 This placard shows the maximum number of occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as well as “the combined weight of occupants and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle capacity weight. This placard also tells you the size and recommended inflation pressure for the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-12. Tire and loading information placard N00630100396 The tire and loading information placard is located on the inside sill of the driver’s door. Driving safety 6-7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit N00630201277 1. Locate 6 the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) 6-8 Driving safety 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE  The above steps for determining correct load limit were written in accordance with U.S.A. regulations. Your vehicle cannot tow a trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information NOTE  The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.  For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 6  Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of this manual. Driving safety 6-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cargo loads WARNING Cargo loads N00629700435 Cargo load precautions N00630300082 6 To determine the cargo load capacity for your vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. For additional information, if needed, refer to “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” on page 6-8. DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers listed on the safety certification label (A) located on the inside sill of the driver’s door as the guide for passengers and/or cargo weight. WARNING  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the combined weights of the driver, passengers and cargo and must never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.  Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, and may cause an accident.  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo or luggage cannot move when your vehicle is in motion. Having either the rear view blocked, or your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury or death.  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. Loading cargo on the roof N00630401149 WARNING  Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and adversely affect its handling characteristics. As a result, driving errors or emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss of control and result in an accident. Drive slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers such as sudden braking or quick turning. 6-10 Driving safety  Make sure that the weight of luggage and the roof carrier do not exceed the maximum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maximum roof load is exceeded, this could cause damage to the vehicle or result in an accident.  The total weight of all occupants and luggage, including your roof load, must not exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For more information, refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 11-3.  Roof load is determined by adding the weight of the roof carrier and the weight of the luggage placed on the roof carrier. CAUTION  Do not load luggage directly onto the roof. Use a roof carrier that properly fits your vehicle. For installation, refer to the instruction manual provided with the roof carrier.  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest items on the bottom. Do not load items that are wider than the roof carrier. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Trailer towing CAUTION Trailer towing  Before driving and after traveling a short distance, always check the load to make sure it is securely fastened to the roof carrier. Stop the vehicle periodically and check that the load remains secure. If the load is not secure, it could fall from the vehicle and damage your vehicle, another vehicle or create a road hazard. N00629801358 6 NOTE  To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in use.  Before using an automatic car wash, check with the attendant to determine if the roof carrier should be removed.  Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the trunk lid during loading luggage on the roof carrier. WARNING  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. It may not be possible to maintain control or adequate braking. Driving safety 6-11 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Comfort controls Vents ................................................................................................7-2 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) .........................................7-7 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)...................................7-12 Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-18 Air purifier (if so equipped)............................................................7-19 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-19 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) ..........................7-29 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-37 Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) .....7-40 Error codes .....................................................................................7-41 Handling of compact discs .............................................................7-42 Antenna ..........................................................................................7-44 General information about your radio ...........................................7-44 7 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vents Vents N00729901305 7 Side vents 1- Center vents 2- Side vents Air flow and direction adjustments N00730200330 Center vents Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vents open. To close the vents, press the dimple on the opposite side. Change the direction of the air flow by turning the vent itself. 1- Open 2- Close NOTE  On rare occasions, air from the vents of an air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is only moist air cooling suddenly and does not indicate a problem.  Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the vents as they could prevent the air conditioning from operating normally. Changing the mode selection N00736401676 To change air flow direction, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on page 7-5, 7-8. On vehicles with the automatic air conditioning, press the MODE switch or defogger switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page 7-2 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vents 7-14, “Defogger switch” on page 7-14.) These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the vents. : Small amount of air from the vents : Medium amount of air from the vents : Large amount of air from the vents Face position Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger compartment. NOTE  With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between 7 Foot/Defroster position Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and the door windows. the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. Foot position Air flows mainly to the leg area. Foot/Face position Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and flows to the leg area. Comfort controls 7-3 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) NOTE  With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the windshield and the door windows. 7 Defroster position Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) N00737700031 The heater can only be used while the engine is running. Control panel N00737801042 Air flows mainly to the windshield and the door windows. 1- Temperature control dial 2- Blower speed selection dial 3- Electric rear window defogger switch  P. 5-84 4- Mode selection dial 5- Air selection lever 7-4 Comfort controls Blower speed selection dial N00737901043 When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the blower speed; turning the dial counterclockwise will decrease it. When the dial is set to the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) Temperature control dial Mode selection dial N00738001067 N00738101084 Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler. To change air flow direction, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside air position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up. CAUTION Air selection lever N00738201056 Normally, use the outside air position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. To change the air selection, use the air selection lever. “ “ ” Outside air ” Recirculated air  Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up. Operating the system N00738301073 Heating Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. Comfort controls 7-5 7 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed to fit your needs. Combination of unheated air and heated air N00738401045 Set the mode selection dial to the positions shown in the illustration and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part of the passenger compartment. Set the desired blower speed. Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm air (depending upon the position of the temperature control dial) flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment. 7 CAUTION Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) N00738501091 CAUTION  For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows. Set the mode selection dial (between “ ” and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the windshield and door window. For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).  The engine speed may increase when the heater is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. NOTE  For quick heating, set the blower speed at the 3rd position. 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ position. 7-6 Comfort controls ” BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. 4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial. Manual air conditioning (if so N00736501228 equipped) N00730300344 The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running. For quick defrosting Control panel N00730501327 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 4. Set the temperature to the highest position. NOTE Blower speed selection dial When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the blower speed; turning the dial counterclockwise will decrease it. When the dial is set to the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop. 1234- Temperature control dial Air conditioning switch Blower speed selection dial Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-84 5- Mode selection dial 6- Air selection lever  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the side vents toward the door windows. Comfort controls 7-7 7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) Temperature control dial Mode selection dial Air selection lever N00736601258 N00736701246 N00736801423 Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler. To change air flow direction, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. Normally, use the outside air position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. To change the air selection, use the air selection lever. “ “ 7 ” Outside air ” Recirculated air NOTE  While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial. If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside air position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up. 7-8 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) CAUTION  Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up. Operating the air conditioning system Cooling N00731201389 N00731101304 Heating Air conditioning switch N00731001488 Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indicator light (A) will come on. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed to fit your needs. Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indicator light (A) goes off. 7 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Push the air conditioning switch. 4. Change the temperature by turning the control dial clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. Set the desired blower speed. CAUTION NOTE  For quick heating, set the blower speed at the 3rd position.  The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. Comfort controls 7-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) NOTE  If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, set the air selection lever to the recirculation position. Let in some outside air from time to time for good ventilation.  To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection dial to the “ Combination of unheated air and heated air N00731301292 Set the mode selection dial to the positions shown in the illustration and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. ” position. The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part of the passenger compartment. Set the desired blower speed. Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm air (depending upon the position of the temperature control dial) flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment. 7 Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) N00731401596 CAUTION  For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows. Set the mode selection dial (between “ ” and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the windshield and door window. For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow). 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ position. 7-10 Comfort controls ” BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. 4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial. 5. Push the air conditioning switch. NOTE  When defrosting, do not set the temperature control dial near the maximum cool position. This would blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up. For quick defrosting 7 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 4. Set the temperature to the highest position. 5. Push the air conditioning switch. NOTE  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the side vents toward the door windows. Comfort controls 7-11 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) N00731501353 The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running. Control panel N00711801624 Type 1 7 Type 2 12345678- 7-12 Temperature control switch Air conditioning switch MODE switch Air selection switch Blower speed selection switch Defogger switch AUTO switch Electric rear window defogger switch  P.5-84 Comfort controls 9101112131415- OFF switch Temperature display Mode selection display Air selection indicator Air conditioning indicator AUTO indicator Blower speed display NOTE  There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) in the illustrated position. Never place anything over the sensor, since doing so will prevent it from functioning properly. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) NOTE NOTE  A sound will be made every time you push any of the switches. 1- Increase 2- Decrease Blower speed selection switch N00736900179 Press of the blower speed selection switch to increase the blower speed. Press of the blower speed selection switch to decrease the blower speed. The selected blower speed will be shown in the display (A). Temperature control switch N00737001406 Press or of the temperature control switch to the desired temperature. The selected temperature will be shown in the display (A).  The temperature value of air conditioning is switched in conjunction with outside temperature display unit of the multi information display. Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on page 5-74.  While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the switch. To prevent the windshield and windows from fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to “ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.  When the temperature is set to the highest or the lowest setting under the AUTO operation, the air selection and the air conditioning will be automatically changed as follows. • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set to the highest setting) Outside air will be introduced and the air conditioning will stop. If the air selection and the air conditioning are operated manually after an automatic changeover, manual operation will be selected. • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set to the lowest setting) Inside air will be recirculated and the air conditioning will operate. Comfort controls 7-13 7 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) 7 The above indicates the factory settings. You can personalize the air selection switch and air conditioning switch to match your personal preferences. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning switch (Changing the function setting)” on page7-16. Refer to “Personalizing the air selection (Changing the function setting)” on page7-15. N00737200368 N00703400015 N00737101247 To change air flow direction, press the MODE switch. Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes to the next one in the following sequence: “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”. The selected mode is shown in the display (A). Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. Comfort controls Air selection switch Defogger switch MODE switch 7-14 NOTE  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air conditioning system automatically operates and outside air (as opposed to recirculated air) is selected. Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows)” on page 7-17. When this switch is pressed, the mode changes to the “ ” mode. The indicator light (A) will come on. The selected mode is shown in the display (B). Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. Normally, use the outside air position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch. The selected position will be shown in the display (A).  Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment.  Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment. BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) NOTE  If you press the AUTO switch to select automatic control after manual operation, the air selection switch will also be automatically controlled. Personalizing the air selection (Changing the function setting) N00760000089 When the air conditioning turns on, the air selection is controlled automatically. When the air conditioning turns off, the air selection automatically goes back to the outside air position. If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside air position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up. CAUTION  Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up. You can change the following functions to match your preference.  Enable automatic air control: When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection switch will also be automatically controlled. the system will beep three times and the indicator will flash three times. • When the setting has changed from disabled to enabled, the system will beep two times and the indicator will flash three times. NOTE  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air control”.  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air selection will automatically change to the outside air position, even if the system is set to “Disable automatic air control”, in order to prevent windows from fogging up.  Disable automatic air control: Even when the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection switch will not be automatically controlled.  Changing the settings Press the air selection switch for about 10 seconds or longer. When the setting has changed, the system will beep and the “ ” indicator will flash. • When the setting has changed from enabled to disabled, Comfort controls 7-15 7 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) Air conditioning switch N00737301409 Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator will be shown in the display (A). When the AUTO switch is pressed, or when the temperature control switch has been set to the minimum temperature, the air conditioning switch is automatically controlled.  Disable automatic air conditioning control: The air conditioning switch is not automatically controlled, unless the air conditioning switch is used. 7 Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indicator goes off. Personalizing the air conditioning switch (Changing the function setting) N00759800090 You can change the following functions to match your preference.  Enable automatic air conditioning control: 7-16 Comfort controls  Changing the settings Press the air conditioning switch for about 10 seconds or longer. When the setting has changed, the system will beep and the “ ” indicator will flash. • When the setting has changed from enabled to disabled, the system will beep three times and the indicator will flash three times. • When the setting has changed from disabled to enabled, the system will beep two times and the indicator will flash three times. NOTE  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air conditioning control”. NOTE  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air conditioning will run automatically, even if the system is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning control”, in order to prevent windows from fogging up. AUTO switch N00703500016 When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode selection, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/outside air selection, temperature adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all controlled automatically. The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the display (A). BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) OFF switch N00703600017 Push the switch to turn off the air conditioning system. In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO mode and follow these procedures: 1. Push the AUTO switch. 2. Set the temperature control switch to the desired temperature. The temperature can be set within a range of around 61 to 89 (Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2). The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower speed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFF of air conditioning will be controlled automatically. CAUTION Operating the air conditioning system (automatic mode)  The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. N00731701528 Operating the air conditioning system (manual mode) N00731801141 Blower speed and vent mode may be controlled manually by setting the blower speed selection switch and the MODE switch to the desired positions. To return to automatic operation, press the AUTO switch. CAUTION  The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) N00732401522 NOTE  Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or 24 (Type 2) under normal conditions. CAUTION  For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows. To remove frost or mist from the windshield and door windows, use the MODE switch or defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”). Comfort controls 7-17 7 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Important air conditioning operating tips For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow). 7 1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection switch to the outside air position. 3. Select your desired blower speed by pressing the blower speed selection switch. 4. Select your desired temperature by pressing the temperature control switch. 5. Push the air conditioning switch. 7-18 Comfort controls For quick defrosting Important air conditioning operating tips N00733700336 1. Push the defogger switch to change to the “ ” position. 2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 3. Set the temperature to the highest position. NOTE  While the mode selection is set “ ” position, the air conditioning compressor will run automatically. The outside air position will also be selected automatically.  If the mode selection is set “ ” position, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or select the recirculation position. This prevents the windows from fogging up.  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the side vents toward the door windows.  When defrosting, do not set the temperature to the maximum cool position. This will blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up. 1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the vehicle interior extremely hot which then requires more time to cool. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning to expel the hot air. 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed when the air conditioning is in use. The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce cooling efficiency. 3. When running the air conditioning, make sure the air intake, which is located in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake chamber may reduce air flow and plug the water drains. Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Air purifier (if so equipped) Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. CAUTION  The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC134a and the lubricant ZXL 200PG. Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and may require replacing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system. The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is not recommended. The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, it may contribute slightly to global warming. It is recommended that the old refrigerant be saved and recycled for future use. Air purifier (if so equipped) N00733800180 The air conditioning system is equipped with an air filter to remove pollen and dust. The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace it periodically. For the maintenance interval, refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. NOTE  Operation in certain conditions such as driving on a dusty road and frequent use of the air conditioning can lead to reduction of service life of the filter. When you feel that the air flow is lower than normal or when the windshield or windows start to fog up easily, replace the air filter. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. During a long period of disuse The air conditioning should be operated for at least five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This includes the quick defrosting mode. Operating the air condition system weekly maintains lubrication of the compressor internal parts to keep the air conditioning in the best operating condition. AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) N00734302131 The audio system can only be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. NOTE  To listen to the audio system while the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position or put the operation mode in ACC. For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, if the operation mode is left in ACC, the accessory power will automatically turn off after a certain period of time and you will no longer be able to use the audio system. The accessory power comes on again if the engine switch is operated with it in the “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power autocutout function” on page 5-14.  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise in the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far away as possible from the audio equipment.  If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system and have it checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Never try to repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio system until it is inspected by a qualified person.  If the audio system is damaged by foreign objects, water, or fire, have the system checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors technician. Comfort controls 7-19 7 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) Volume and tone control panel To adjust the tone N00711901742 NOTE N00712101712 1. Press the /MENU button to select BASS  TREBLE  FADER  BALANCE  Sound control mode off. 2. Turn the SEL switch either clockwise or counterclockwise to change the tone/balance setting. The status will be shown in the display. 7 BASS (Bass tone control) 1- PWR (On-Off)/VOL (Volume control)/SEL (Select) switch 2- Display 3/MENU (Mode change) button 4- SEL (Select) indicator 5(Return) button To select the desired bass level.  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  When set to “0”, it will beep.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Another mode is selected. • No adjustment is performed within 10 seconds.  In a two-speakers vehicle, keep the FADER setting in the middle position. Since no rear speakers are connected, adjusting the FADER setting toward the “R” (rear) side will result in a loss of sound output. TREBLE (Treble tone control) To select the desired treble level. Radio control panel and display N00734901925 FADER (Front/Rear balance control) To adjust the volume N00712001434 Turn the VOL switch clockwise to increase the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The status will be shown in the display. To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R (rear) speakers. BALANCE (Left/Right balance control) To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R (right) speakers. 7-20 Comfort controls 1- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 2- PWR (On-Off) switch BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) 3456- Display Seek (Down-seek) button Seek (Up-seek) button Memory select buttons Automatic tuning CD control panel and display N00735301766 After keeping the seek button depressed until it beeps, release the button, and the selected station reception will start. To listen to the radio N00735001936 1. Press the PWR switch or the RADIO button to turn on the radio. Press and hold the PWR switch for 2 seconds or longer to turn off the radio. 2. Press the RADIO button to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2). 3. Press the seek button to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons to tune in to a station memorized for that button. Refer to “Automatic tuning”, “Manual tuning” or “To enter frequencies into the memory”. To tune the radio Manual tuning The frequency changes every time the seek button is pressed. Press the button to select the desired station. To enter frequencies into the memory As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be entered into the memory. To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps: 1. Press the seek button to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory. 2. Press and hold one of the memory select buttons until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the frequency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in memory as well as the frequency is displayed. 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within 1 second. 7 1234567891011121314151617- MEDIA button RADIO button INFO button CD eject button CD indicator Disc-loading slot FOLDER indicator TRACK indicator Display RPT (Repeat)/F-RPT (Folder repeat mode) indicator RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder random mode) indicator SEL (Select) indicator PAGE (Title scroll) button (Fast-reverse/Track down) button (Fast-forward/Track up) button (Return) button PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch Comfort controls 7-21 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) 18- RPT (Repeat) button 19- RDM (Random) button To eject a disc When the CD eject button is pressed, the disc automatically stops and is ejected. To listen to a CD N00735502127 To load a disc 7 1. Insert the disc with the label facing up. When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator will come on and the CD player will begin playing even if the radio is being used. The CD player will also start playback when the MEDIA button is pressed with a disc in the player or with a disc set in the Disc-loading slot, even if the radio is being used. 2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by pressing the PWR switch for 2 seconds or longer, or change over to the radio mode by pressing the RADIO button, or eject the disc by pressing the eject button. NOTE  For information on adjusting the volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20.  3 inch (8 cm) compact discs cannot be played on this CD player.  For information concerning the handling of compact discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 7-42. 7-22 Comfort controls NOTE  If you do not remove the disc before 15 seconds have elapsed, the CD player will automatically reload the disc and stop. To listen to a music CD Press the MEDIA button if a disc is already in the CD player. The CD player will start playback. The track number and the playing time will appear on the display. The tracks in the disc will be played continuously. To listen to an MP3 CD This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc can hold up to 255 files in up to 100 folders, up to a maximum of 16 levels. The ID3 tag information can be displayed during MP3 playback. For information concerning ID3 tags, refer to “CD text and MP3 title display” on page 7-24. 1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot. 2. Press the MEDIA button if a disc is already in the CD player. The display shows “READING”, then playback will begin. NOTE  While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files, and the external audio input mode by pressing the MEDIA button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep). For information on the external audio input, refer to “To use the external audio input function” on page 7-28.  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.  The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.  Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.  MP3 encode software and writing software are not supplied with this unit. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) NOTE  You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 or displaying the information of MP3 files recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).  If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.  This unit does not record MP3 files.  For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 7-43. Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example) Root folder (Root directory) The disc is fast-reversed while the button is held down. Playback will begin once the button is released. To select a desired track Track up CAUTION  Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format which has the “.mp3” file name may produce noise from the speakers and speaker damage, and can damage your hearing. Fast-reverse Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Folder selection in the order File selection in the order To fast-forward/reverse the disc Fast-forward The disc is fast-forwarded while the button is held down. Playback will begin once the button is released. The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the button is pressed. The display window will show the track number of the track selected. Track down The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the button is pressed. The display window will show the track number of the track selected. To find a file (MP3 CDs only) Operate the SEL switch to select desired file. When this mode is activated by pressing the SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear on the display. Comfort controls 7-23 7 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or to select the folder or file. Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or file. NOTE 7  To cancel the selection, press the button to return to the previous step.  If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the SEL switch has been turned, searching for the desired file is canceled.  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the file is displayed, playback starts.  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the display and the SEL switch is operated, the volume adjustment is activated. To repeat tracks To repeat a track Press the RPT button to repeat the same track. If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indicator will come on. To exit this mode, press the button again. 7-24 Comfort controls To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3 CDs only) Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only) While a song is playing, press the RPT button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep). The F-RPT indicator will come on and the disc will repeat all the songs in the folder that contains the song currently playing. To exit this mode, press the button again. If the RDM button is pressed, the F-RDM indicator will come on and the tracks are played at random from the folder that is currently selected. To exit this mode, press the button again. NOTE  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated. To change the order of tracks for playback Random playback for a disc (music CDs only) If the RDM button is pressed, the RDM indicator will come on and the tracks are played at random. To exit this mode, press the button again. Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only) Press the RDM button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep). The RDM indicator will come on and the tracks are played at random from all folders on the disc currently selected. To exit this mode, press the button again. NOTE  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the random mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random sequence. CD text and MP3 title display N00752101192 This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titles, including ID3 tag information. BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) CD text The CD player can display disc and track titles. Press the INFO button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: disc name  track name  normal display mode. NOTE  The display can show up to 11 characters. If a disc name or track name has more than 11 characters, press the PAGE button to view the next 11 characters.  When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.  Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as “•”. MP3 titles The CD player can display folder and file titles. Press the INFO button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: folder name  file name  normal display mode. ID3 tag information 1. Press the INFO button for 2 seconds or longer to switch to the ID3 tag information. 2. Press the INFO button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: album TAG  track TAG  artist TAG  normal display mode. Example CD player mode Clock mode NOTE  To return from ID3 tag information to the folder name, press the INFO button again for 2 seconds or longer.  When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.  The display can show up to 11 characters. If a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag information has more than 11 characters, press the PAGE button to view the next 11 characters.  Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as “•”. A- 7 (Clock) button NOTE  While the clock mode is selected, the display will switch to the applicable operation display whenever the CD player, external audio input mode or radio, etc. is operated. Then, if no entries are made for 7 seconds, the display will automatically return to the clock mode. To display the clock N00702600010 Press the button to switch the clock mode. To exit the clock mode, press the button. The CD player can display ID3 tag information for files that have been recorded with ID3 tag information. Comfort controls 7-25 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) To adjust the clock NOTE N00702701047  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The beep. 7 A(Clock) button B- SEL (Select) switch C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the button and the clock display flashes. 2. Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “hours” digit. 3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, press the button to flash the “minutes” digit. Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “minutes” digit. 4. When the desired time is displayed, press the button to complete the procedure. 7-26 Comfort controls To confirm the version number of the Gracenote DB (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00702801048 button is pressed until you hear a • The button is pressed. • Another mode is selected.  Reset the time after the battery terminals are disconnected and reconnected.  Seconds do not appear in the clock display, but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, the clock begins to operate from 0 seconds. A/MENU button B- SEL (Select) switch C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2 seconds or longer. 2. Turn the SEL switch or press the /MENU button several times to select “Gracenote DB” and then press the SEL switch. 3. Turn the SEL switch to select “DB Version” and then press the SEL switch to determine the Gracenote DB version. BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) NOTE  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Any operation is not performed for more than 10 seconds. • The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. To change the language (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00702901049 It is possible to set the language used for voice control. C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2 seconds or longer. 2. Turn the SEL switch or press the /MENU button several times to select “PHONE SET” and then press the SEL switch. 3. Turn the SEL switch to select “LANGUAGE” and then press the SEL switch. 4. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangChg YES” and then press the SEL switch. 5. Turn the SEL switch to select language and then press the SEL switch. 6. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangSet YES” and then press the SEL switch. To change the position of the speaker of the output sound (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00755400030 It is possible to change the position of the speaker of the output sound during cellular phone voice cut-in. 7 NOTE  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Any operation is not performed for more than 10 seconds. • The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. A/MENU button B- SEL (Select) swicth C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the seconds or longer. /MENU button for 2 A/MENU button B- SEL (Select) switch Comfort controls 7-27 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) 7 2. Turn the SEL switch or press the /MENU button several times to select “PHONE SET” and then press the SEL switch. 3. Turn the SEL switch to select “ PHONE IN ” and then press the SEL switch. 4. Turn the SEL switch to select “IN-L” (output sound from the left side speaker) or “IN-R” (output sound from the right side speaker) and then press the SEL switch. NOTE  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Any operation is not performed for more than 10 seconds. • The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. To use the external audio input function N00703001021 A- Auxiliary Audio connector (Mini-jack) B- MEDIA button C- Display You can listen to commercially available audio equipment, such as a portable audio system, from your vehicle’s speakers, by connecting the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio connector. NOTE  Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio connector. 7-28 Comfort controls To activate the external audio input mode 1. Connect the headphone port of the portable audio system to the auxiliary audio connector using a commercially available connection cord. 2. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the AUX mode. The display will show “AUX” and then the external audio input mode will be activated. 3. To deactivate the external audio input mode, press the MEDIA button to switch to another mode. CAUTION  Do not operate the connected audio equipment while driving. This could distract you and an accident might occur. NOTE  The connected audio equipment cannot be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio system.  Depending on the connected audio equipment, it may produce noise from the speakers. BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) NOTE  Use the connected audio equipment’s own power source, such as its battery. Noise may be produced from the speakers if the connected audio equipment is used while charging it using the accessory socket of the vehicle.  Do not activate the external audio input mode when no audio equipment is connected. Otherwise, noise may be produced from the speakers.  Connect audio equipment when the external audio input mode is deactivated or lower the vehicle’s speaker volume before connecting it. Noise may be produced from the speakers if audio equipment is connected after the external audio input mode is activated.  Compared to the CD player mode and radio mode, the vehicle’s speaker volume will be lower in the external audio input mode. Therefore, be careful when switching from the external audio input mode to the CD player mode or radio mode since the speaker volume will be higher.  Do not use excessive force on the connection cord. Otherwise, the cord and connectors may be damaged.  If the connection cord alone is left connected to the auxiliary audio connector, noise may be produced from the speakers. NOTE NOTE  For information on how to connect and operate the commercially available audio equipment, refer to the owner’s manual for the commercially available audio equipment. To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)  A file protected by copyright might not be able to playback.  It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of the connected device to 0 db or neutral. iPod control panel and display N00762301070 N00762200056 You can connect your iPod or USB memory device to the USB input terminal and play music files stored in the iPod or USB memory device. See the following section for the types of connectable devices and supported files. Refer to “Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications” on page 5-108. See the following sections for the connecting methods, “How to connect an iPod” on page 5-107 and “How to connect a USB memory device” on page 5-106. If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, you can play music files in your iPod or USB memory device via voice operation. Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31 and “To play USB memory device tracks via voice operation” on page 7-37. 7 123456789- MEDIA button RADIO button INFO button (USB device active) indicator iPod indicator Display TRACK indicator RPT (Repeat mode) indicator RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder random mode) indicator 10- SEL (Select) indicator 11- PAGE (Title scroll) button Comfort controls 7-29 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) 12(Fast-reverse/Track down) button 13(Fast-forward/Track up) button 14(Return) button 15- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch 16- RPT (Repeat) button 17- RDM (Random) button To play from an iPod N00762401101 7 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used. 2. Connect your iPod to the USB input terminal. Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page 5-107. 3. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the iPod mode. The input mode changes as follows every time the MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  iPod mode Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. The iPod indicator is illuminated and then the iPod mode will be activated. 4. Once the device is selected, playback starts and indicator appears on the display. To select a desired track NOTE  Depending on the condition of your iPod, it may take a longer time before the playback starts. 5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO button or MEDIA button to switch to a different mode. NOTE  Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the iPod is connected to the audio system.  To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20. Comfort controls Track up Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display. Track down Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display. NOTE  Pressing the button once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the song. To fast-forward/reverse the track N00762501043 To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button. Fast-forward To fast-forward the current track, press and hold the button. Fast-reverse To fast-reverse the current track, press and hold the button. 7-30 N00762600034 To find a track from the iPod menu N00762701090 You can select desired tracks from the “Playlists”, “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs” or “Genre” (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) menus on your iPod. Operate the SEL switch to select desired tracks. The selected menu or category or track is shown in the display. BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) When this mode is activated by pressing the SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear on the display. Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or to select the menu or category or track. Turn the SEL switch :To show the menu or category or track. To play tracks in random order N00762901034 Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the display. The iPod randomly selects and plays tracks from the current category. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play tracks in each album in random order NOTE NOTE  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button. The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed.  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display.  Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “•”. N00763001045  To cancel the selection, press the button to return to the previous step.  If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the SEL switch has been pressed, searching of the desired tracks is canceled.  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the track is displayed, playback starts.  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the display and the SEL switch is operated, the volume adjustment is activated. To play the same track repeatedly N00762800023 Press the RPT button during playback to show “RPT” in the display. To exit this mode, press the button again. Press and hold the RDM button until you hear a beep to show “F-RDM” in the display. The iPod randomly selects and plays tracks in the album from the current category. To exit this mode, press the button again. To switch the display N00763101059 You can display the track titles, artist names, genre and album titles recorded in the iPod. The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed during playback: Album title  Track name  Artist name  Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)  Normal display. To play iPod tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00763200040 Desired tracks can be selected and played from your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice commands. For information concerning the voice recognition function or speaker registration function, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-85. The following explains how to prepare for voice operation and play the tracks. Preparation for voice operation N00763300067 To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH button (A) first. Comfort controls 7-31 7 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) 3. After the voice guide says “What Artist would you like to play?,” say the artist name. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play ?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. If you say “No,” the next matching artist is spoken by the system. 7 To search by artist name N00763401081 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Artist”. NOTE  If you say “Artist ,” you can skip step 3. 7-32 Comfort controls NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all artist names offered, the voice guide will say “Artist not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2.  Search time depends on the number of songs on your connected device. Devices containing a large number of songs may take longer to return search results. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing ,” the system creates a playlist index for the artist. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the artist name is correct. If the artist name is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Artist not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. To search by album title N00763501082 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Album”. NOTE  If you say “Album ,” you can skip step 3. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) 3. After the voice guide says “What Album would you like to play?” say the album title. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play <album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. If you say “No,” the name of the next matching album is spoken by the system. NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all album titles offered, the voice guide will say “Album not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <album title>,” the system creates a playlist index for the album title. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the album title is correct. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Album not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. To search by playlist N00763601041 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Playlist”. NOTE  If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip step 3. If the device has no playlist, the voice guide will say “There are no playlists stored on device” and the system returns to step 2. 3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist would you like to play?,” say the playlist name. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play <playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. If you say “No,” the next matching playlist name is spoken by the system. NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all playlist names offered, the voice guide will say “Playlist not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <playlist>,” the system creates an index for the playlist. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the playlist name is correct. If the playlist name is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Playlist not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function setting” on page 5-89. 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. Comfort controls 7-33 7 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) To search by genre N00763701042 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized 7 or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Genre”. NOTE  If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step 3. 3. After the voice guide says “What Genre would you like to play?,” say the music type. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play <genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. 7-34 Comfort controls If you say “No,” the next matching genre is spoken by the system. USB control panel and display N00763901073 NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all genres offered, the voice guide will say “Genre not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <genre>,” the system creates an index for the genre. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function setting” on page 5-89. 12345678- 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. 910111213141516- MEDIA button RADIO button INFO button (USB device active) indicator USB indicator Display TRACK indicator RPT (Repeat mode)/F-RPT (Folder repeat mode) indicator RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder random mode) indicator SEL (Select) indicator PAGE (Title scroll) button (Fast-reverse/Track down) button (Fast-forward/Track up) button PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch RPT (Repeat) button RDM (Random) button BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) To play from a USB memory device N00764001101 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used. 2. Connect your USB memory device to the USB input terminal. Refer to “How to connect a USB memory device” on page 5-106. 3. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the USB mode. The input mode changes as follows every time the MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  USB mode Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. The USB indicator is illuminated and then the USB mode will be activated. 4. Once the device is selected, playback starts and indicator appears on the display. NOTE  Depending on the condition of your USB device, it may take a longer time before the playback starts. NOTE  To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20. Root folder (Root directory) Supported compressed music files N00764100105 This audio can play MP3, WMA and AAC files recorded in a USB memory device. This audio supports up to 65,535 files in 700 folders on 8 levels. Folder selection order (example) order/file 7 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 playback The folder and file hierarchy in the USB memory device is shown below. Folder selection In the order File selection In the order NOTE  If a file protected by copyrights is played, the file will be skipped. To fast-forward/reverse the track N00764201044 5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO button or MEDIA button to switch to a different mode. To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button. Comfort controls 7-35 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) To find a file Fast-forward To fast-forward the current track, press and hold the button. Fast-reverse To fast-reverse the current track, press and hold the button. 7 To select a file N00764300035 To play the same file repeatedly N00703101035 N00764500024 Operate the SEL switch to select desired file. When this mode is activated by pressing the SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear on the display. Press the RPT button to show “RPT” in the display. To cancel this mode, press the button again. Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or to select the folder or file. Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or file. Track up Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. Track down Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. NOTE  Pressing the button once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the file. NOTE  To cancel the selection, press the button to return to the previous step.  If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the SEL switch has been turned, searching of the desired file is canceled.  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the file is displayed, playback starts.  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the display and the SEL switch is operated, the volume adjustment is activated. To play the files in the same folder repeatedly N00764600038 Press and hold the RPT button until you hear a beep to show “F-RPT” in the display. All tracks in the current folder are played repeatedly. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play a folder in random order N00764701049 Press the RDM button to show “F-RDM” in the display. The audio randomly selects and plays tracks from the current folder. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play all folders in random order N00764801040 Press and hold the RDM button until you hear a beep to show “RDM” in the display. The audio randomly selects and plays tracks from all folders. 7-36 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 37 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) To exit this mode, press the button again. To switch the display N00765101053 You can displays titles with tag information. NOTE  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display.  Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “•”. Folder title The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed during playback: Folder name  File name  Normal display. Tag information 1. Press and hold the INFO button until you hear a beep. 2. The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed briefly: Album TAG  Track TAG  Artist TAG  Genre TAG (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)  Normal display. NOTE  Press and hold the INFO button again until you hear a beep, and the tag information display returns to the folder title display.  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button. The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed. To play USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00765200073 Desired tracks can be selected and played from your USB memory device by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice commands. For information concerning the voice recognition function or speaker registration function, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-85. The playback sequence of tracks is the same as when an iPod is connected. Refer to the “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31. 7 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00765301114 You can wirelessly connect a digital audio player or cellular phone supporting Bluetooth® to listen to the tracks on the connected device. Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” for the connecting method, etc. on page 5-85. The following explains the basic playback method. Preparation for voice operation To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH button (A) first. Comfort controls 7-37 BK0236100US.book 38 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) NOTE 7  Depending on the connected device, operation of the connected device is limited to its available functions.  Depending on the connected device, the device may not operate correctly.  A file protected by copyright might not be able to playback.  It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of the connected device to 0 db or neutral.  The voice operation is not available to access music files on the connected Bluetooth® device. Bluetooth® device control panel and display N00765401072 1- MEDIA button 2- PWR (On-Off) switch 3- BT (Bluetooth®) indicator 7-38 Comfort controls 45678910111213- TRACK indicator Display PAGE (Title scroll) button (Fast-reverse/Track down) button (Fast-forward/Track up) button INFO button Play/Pause button Stop button RPT (Repeat) button RDM (Random) button To listen to tracks from a device connected via Bluetooth® N00765501103 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used. 2. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the BT-A (Bluetooth®) mode. The input mode changes as follows every time the MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  iPod mode  Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. The BT indicator is illuminated and then the BT-A mode will be activated. 3. Connect your Bluetooth® device. Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device” on page 5-91. 4. Playback starts automatically. NOTE  Depending on the connected device, the playback may not start automatically. In this case, operate the connected device to start the playback. To stop the playback (if supported by the device) N00765600035 To stop the playback, press the Stop button. To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause button. To pause the playback (if supported by the device) N00765700036 To pause the playback, press and hold the Play/Pause button until you hear a beep. To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause button. To fast-forward/reverse the track (if supported by the device) N00703201023 To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button. BK0236100US.book 39 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) Fast-forward To fast-forward the current track, press and hold the button. Fast-reverse To fast-reverse the current track, press and hold the button. To select a track (if supported by the device) N00765800037 Track up To play the same track repeatedly (if supported by the device) N00765900038 N00766001033 Press the RPT button several times to switch to show “RPT” in the display. The mode changes as follows every time the RPT button is pressed: No display (not repeat)  RPT (repeat same track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No display To exit this mode, press the button again. Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the display. The system randomly selects and plays tracks from the Bluetooth® device. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play all tracks repeatedly (if supported by the device) N00703301024 Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. Track down Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. NOTE  Pressing the button once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the file. To play tracks in random order (if supported by the device) Press the RPT button several times to switch to show “F-RPT” in the display. The mode changes as follows every time the RPT button is pressed: No display (no repeat)  RPT (repeat same track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No display (no repeat) All tracks in the Bluetooth® device are played repeatedly. To exit this mode, press the button again. To switch the display (if supported by the device) N00766201051 The system can display tag information. 1. Press the INFO button. 2. The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed: Album title  Title name  Artist name  Genre  Normal display NOTE  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button. The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed.  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display.  Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “•”. Comfort controls 7-39 7 BK0236100US.book 40 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) N00714801494 The remote control switches are located on the left side of the steering wheel. These switches can be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. 3- MODE key Hold down to turn the audio function ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is pressed, switches the audio source. The order of switching is shown below. 7 1- Vol + key, - key Adjust audio functions and the mobile phone function volume. 2- CH key, key Select CD and other audio source tracks and radio stations. Hold down to skip up and down through tracks. 7-40 Comfort controls *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is required. *2: Requires a separately-purchased Bluetooth-capable audio device (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). BK0236100US.book 41 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Error codes Error codes N00736101790 If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below. Audio system Error display Item Repair CHECK DISC Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on disc. Insert disc with label facing up. Remove moisture from disc. DISC ERROR Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or excessive vehicle vibration. Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop. INTERNAL E Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position. to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair. HEAT ERROR Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes. ERROR DC Foreign material is inside of radio or amplifier. Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair. 7 iPod (if so equipped) Error display Item Repair NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod. VER ERROR The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod. Comfort controls 7-41 BK0236100US.book 42 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Handling of compact discs USB memory device (if so equipped) Error display 7 Item Repair FILE ERROR The file cannot be played. The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayed for several seconds, and then the next playable file is played automatically. UNSUPPORTED (first)  DEVICE (after) The USB memory device cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device. UNSUPPORTED (first)  FORMAT (after) The USB memory device format cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device. USB BUS PWR An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred. Remove the USB memory device. Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. LSI ERROR Internal device errors Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Handling of compact discs N00734101350  Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark shown in the illustration below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may cause problems.) 7-42 Comfort controls  The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs (like cracked discs) or lowquality compact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the discs) such as those shown will damage the CD player. BK0236100US.book 43 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Handling of compact discs  In the following circumstances, moisture can form on compact discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal operation. • When there is high humidity (for example, when it is raining). • When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after the heater is turned on in cold weather. In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry out.  When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations, such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not work.  When storing compact discs, always store them in their separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sunlight, or anywhere the temperature or humidity is high.  Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there isn’t a label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always hold it by the outer edge and the center hole.  To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.  Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.  Do not put additional labels or stickers on compact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on which a label or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc that has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD player may stop working properly and you may not be able to eject the compact disc. Notes on CD-Rs/RWs N00751900066  You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.  CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and high humidity than ordinary music CDs and can therefore be damaged and rendered unplayable if left inside your vehicle for a long time.  Depending on the combination of the writing software, the CD recorder (CDR/RW drive), and the disc used to create a CD-R/RW, the disc might not play successfully.  This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session is not closed.  This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs which contain data other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).  Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CD-R/RW disc. Comfort controls 7-43 7 BK0236100US.book 44 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Antenna To install WARNING  Operating the CD player in a manner other than specifically instructed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself. There are no user serviceable parts inside. In case of malfunction, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. 7 Antenna N00734201511 To remove Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. Signal transmission Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) until it is securely retained. NOTE  Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the following cases: • When using an automatic car wash • When covering your vehicle with a car cover • When driving into a structure that has a low ceiling. FM signals do not follow the earth surface nor are they reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot be received over long distances. AM signals follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM broadcasts can be received over longer distances. FM AM General information about your radio N00733901524 Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and FM stations. The quality of your reception is affected by distance, obstacles, and signal interference. 25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius (40 to 64 km) (160 km) Weak reception (fading) Because of the limited range of FM signals and the way FM waves transmit, you may experience weak or fading FM reception. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains or similar obstructions, reception can be disturbed. 7-44 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 45 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General information about your radio Reflection The reason why one can hear FM but not AM in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected by solid objects such as buildings, etc. Because FM signals are easily reflected by buildings, this can also cause reception disturbances. The direct signal from the broadcast station reaches the antenna slightly before the reflected signal. This time difference may cause some reception disturbance or flutter. This problem occurs primarily in urban areas. Cross modulation If one listens to a weak station and is in the vicinity of another strong station, both stations might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression device. The disturbance is even greater if the station is weak or poorly tuned. FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensitive to electrical disturbances such as power lines, lightning and other types of similar electrical phenomena. 7 FM stereo reception Stereo reception requires a high quality broadcast signal. This means that types of disturbances mentioned previously become more marked and the reception range is somewhat diminished during stereo reception. Causes of disturbances FM reception is affected by the electrical systems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially Comfort controls 7-45 BK0236100US.book 46 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 For emergencies If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2 Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2 Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4 Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5 How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6 Towing ...........................................................................................8-12 Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13 Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15 8 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If the vehicle breaks down If the vehicle breaks down 8 Jump-starting the engine N00836300233 N00836401837 If your vehicle breaks down on the road, move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane slowly with the hazard lights flashing until you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the flashers flashing. If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or dead, you can start it with the battery from another vehicle using jumper cables. If the engine stops/fails If the engine stops, there will be no power assist to the steering and brakes, making these difficult to use.  The brake booster will not work, so the brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal will be harder to press than usual.  Since there is no power steering assist, the steering wheel will be hard to turn. When the engine fails at the intersection Get help from your passengers, bystanders, etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe area. 8-2 For emergencies WARNING  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery, carefully read this section before jumpstarting the vehicle.  Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing. This can cause an accident resulting in serious injury or death and can damage the vehicle. CAUTION  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt, both systems can be damaged. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N” (Neutral). 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. NOTE  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical loads. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. NOTE  Do not use jumper cables if they have damage or corrosion. 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might create an accidental electrical contact. 2. Position the vehicles close enough together so that the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. 5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.) WARNING  If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP STARTING!! The battery might split open or explode if the temperature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to the proper level. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Jump-starting the engine 6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and then connect the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B). NOTE  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size. Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result. 7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and then connect the other end to the designated ground location of the vehicle with the discharged battery (A) at the point farthest from the battery. WARNING WARNING  Make sure that the jumper cables and your clothing are clear of the cooling fans and drive belts. Entanglement with the fans or belts can cause serious personal injury. NOTE  Open the terminal cover before connecting the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery. (Refer to “Battery: Disconnection and connection” on page 9-11.)  Be sure to follow the proper order when connecting the batteries, of:     Make sure that the connection is made to the correct designated location (as shown in the illustration) properly. If the connection is directly made to the negative (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable gases from inside the battery might catch fire and explode, causing personal injury.  When connecting the jumper cable, do not connect the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal. Sparks can make the battery explode. 8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing the boost. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the reverse order from the way you connected them. Charging the battery by using an external battery charger WARNING  Always remove the battery from your vehicle when the battery is charged by an external battery charger.  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode.  Keep your work area well vented when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.  Remove all the caps before charging the battery.  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corrosive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte comes in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes, or the painted surface of your vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them immediately and thoroughly with water, and get prompt medical attention. For emergencies 8-3 8 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine overheating WARNING  Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working near the battery.  Keep the battery out of the reach of children. As your vehicle has anti-lock brakes 8 If you drive your vehicle with a low battery charge after the engine has been started by using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. This can cause the anti-lock braking system warning light to blink on and off. This is only due to the low battery voltage. It is not a problem with the brake system. If this happens, fully charge the battery and ensure the charging system is operating properly. Engine overheating N00836501391 If the high coolant temperature warning light illuminates while the engine is running, the engine may be overheating. If this happens: 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 2. With the engine still running, carefully raise the engine hood to vent the engine compartment. 8-4 For emergencies 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If the fan is not turning, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. WARNING  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, jewelry and clothes away from the cooling fan. The cooling fan can start at any time. 4. If you see steam or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming from under the hood, leave the engine on until the high coolant temperature warning light goes off. After the high coolant temperature warning light has gone off, you can start driving again. If the high coolant temperature warning light stays on, turn off the engine. WARNING  Before raising the engine hood, check to see if there is steam or spray coming from under the hood. Steam or spray coming from an overheated engine could seriously scald you. Do not open the hood until there is no steam or spray. 6. When you do not see any more steam or spray, open the hood. Look for obvious leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be careful as components will be hot. Any leak source must be repaired. 7. If there is no obvious leak source, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add coolant. 8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs coolant, you will probably also need to add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen or remove the radiator cap until the engine has cooled down. WARNING  Removing the radiator cap could scald you with escaping hot water or steam. When checking the radiator level, cover the cap with a cloth before trying to remove it. Turn it slowly counterclockwise, without pressing down, to the first notch. The pressure in the system will then be let out. When the pressure is COMPLETELY LET OUT, press down and keep turning the cap counterclockwise until it comes off. 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use plain water if you have to (and replace it with the right coolant as soon as possible). BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Jack and tools 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it fully. Check the coolant temperature warning light. You can start driving again when the high coolant temperature warning light does not come on. 11. Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Tools Jack and tools N00836601422 Storage The tools are stored beneath the floor board of the cargo area. The jack is stored under the driver’s seat. 1234- 8 Tools bag Wheel nut wrench Jack bar Towing hook Jack 1- Tools 2- Jack Move the driver’s seat fully forward to access the jack from the rear seat area. (Refer to “Front seat” on page 4-3.) CAUTION  Never access, remove or store the jack from the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so could damage electrical wires under the driver’s seat. For emergencies 8-5 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire To remove Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction (1) until the jack fully retracts and remove the jack from the holder (A). To store Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction (2) by hand until the jack is firmly secured. 8 WARNING  After storing the jack in place, make sure the jack is securely fixed in the holder. If the jack is not fixed securely, it may move and hit an occupant in an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Also the jack may move forward during driving and could interfere with driver’s pedal operation causing an accident. How to change a tire N00836901887 WARNING On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and stop the engine. 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a warning triangle, flashing signal light, etc., at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers exit the vehicle. 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally opposite from the tire (B) you are changing.  The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tire.  Never get under the vehicle or put any portion of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat location. 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground. 2. Set the parking brake firmly. 3. On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, stop the engine and move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. 8-6 For emergencies WARNING  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position, leading to an accident. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire NOTE CAUTION  The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with your vehicle. It is recommended that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep them in the vehicle for use if needed.  If chocks or blocks are not available, use stones or any other objects that are large enough to hold the wheel in position. 6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench ready. (Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.) Spare tire information N00849600344 Compact spare tire The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the floor board of the cargo area. It is designed to save space in the cargo area. Its lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs. WARNING  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious.  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the inflation pressure should be checked at least once a month to assure that it remains at the recommended inflation pressure. See the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 11-3.  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.  The compact spare tire should be used only temporarily. While the compact spare tire is being used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly. Have the tire replaced or repaired at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with the compact spare tire.  Avoid sudden starting and braking when driving with the compact spare tire.  Do not drive through automatic car washes and over obstacles that could possibly damage the underside of your vehicle. Because the compact spare tire is smaller than the original tire, there is less clearance between the ground and your vehicle. CAUTION  Because the compact spare tire is designed only for your vehicle, do not use it on any other vehicle.  Do not put the compact spare tire on a different wheel, and do not put standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could damage these parts or other parts on your vehicle.  Do not use tire chains with your compact spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage to your vehicle and loss of the chains. To remove compact spare tire N00849701371 1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area. 2. To remove the compact spare tire, remove the installation clamp (A) by turning it counterclockwise. For emergencies 8-7 8 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire NOTE  The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot be stored beneath the floor board. Store the flat tire in the cargo area. 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking points (A) shown in the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tire you wish to change. NOTE  Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position. To change a tire N00849801529 8 1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first remove the covers (refer to “Wheel covers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. WARNING  Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your vehicle or the jack might fall over and cause personal injury.  Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base. 8-8 For emergencies 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top of the jack. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire 4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the illustration. Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until the tire is raised slightly off the ground surface. WARNING  No one should be in your vehicle when using the jack.  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is on the jack.  Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires that are still on the ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the jack. WARNING  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the valve stem (I), you have installed the wheel backwards. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel installed backwards can cause vehicle damage and result in an accident. 5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench, then take the wheel off. CAUTION 8  Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel surface. WARNING  Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tire is raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the vehicle any higher.  Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack.  Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous.  Do not use a jack except the one that came with your vehicle.  The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tire. 6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installation holes (H) in the wheel, and then mount the spare tire. For emergencies 8-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire 7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered ends facing inward, then tighten by hand until the wheel is no longer loose. 9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the illustration until each nut has been tightened to the torque listed here. 65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) Steel wheel 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The recommended tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver’s door sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15. Aluminum wheel 8 CAUTION  Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts or they will tighten too much. 8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground, by rotating the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. CAUTION  Never use your foot or a pipe extension to apply added force to the wheel nut wrench when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. 10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. 8-10 For emergencies CAUTION  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.  After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that they have not come loose. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION  If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after changing the tire, have the tire checked for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Do not mix one type of tire with another or use a different size from the one listed. This would cause early wear and poor handling. To store the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut wrench N00849401248 To remove Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it into the notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry the cover away from the wheel. Using the same procedure at the other wheel cover notches, work the wheel cover away from the wheel to remove it completely. N00850000175 Store the flat tire in the cargo area. Reverse the removing procedure when storing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut wrench. Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page 8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5. CAUTION  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only your bare hands can seriously injure your fingers. To install CAUTION  Before installing the wheel cover to the wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the back of the wheel cover correctly engage the ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that has broken tabs. NOTE  The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be careful when prying it off. For emergencies 8-11 8 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Towing 1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel cover notch (D). 4. Gently tap around the circumference of the wheel cover at the top (H), then push the wheel cover into place. CAUTION  Do not attempt to be towed by another vehicle with a rope. NOTE  Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing. These hooks are provided only for the purpose of transporting the vehicle itself.  Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle. 8 There may be local regulations concerning towing in your area. Obey the regulations of the area where you are driving your vehicle. NOTE  Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) provided on the reverse side to show the air valve location. Before installing the wheel cover to the wheel, make sure that the opening with the symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air valve. 2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover into the wheel. 3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel cover and hold them in place with both knees. 8-12 For emergencies Towing N00837001960 If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by a commercial tow truck service. When towing is required, transport the vehicle using a tow truck. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Operation under adverse driving conditions CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the ground. Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style. Towing with front wheels off the ground. Towing the vehicle by a tow truck CAUTION  This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using sling lift type equipment (Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will damage the bumper and front end.  Do not tow continuously variable transmission (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the vehicle is towed like this, the continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not reach all parts of the transmission, thus damaging it. If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E equipment.  If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.  If the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground (Type B or C), the Active Stability Control (ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position or put the operation mode in ACC. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch or the operation mode as follows. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in OFF or ACC. Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B - M/T vehicles only) Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or tie-down strap. Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C) Release the parking brake. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transaxle) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (CVT). Operation under adverse driving conditions N00837200750 If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or snow If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. For emergencies 8-13 8 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Operation under adverse driving conditions Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels. Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the transaxle before trying again. If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for a commercial tow truck service. WARNING 8  When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion can make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward or backward, and injure any bystanders. On wet roads CAUTION  Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt by driving into flood water.  When driving in rain, on water-covered roads, or through a car wash, water could get into the brake discs and make them fail temporarily. In such cases, lightly press the brake pedal to see if they are working properly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly several times while driving to dry the brake pads or linings, then check them again. 8-14 For emergencies CAUTION  When driving in rain, a layer of water may form between the tires and the road surface (hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip on the road, making it difficult to steer or brake properly. When driving on a wet road: • Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. • Do not drive on worn tires. • Always keep the tires at the correct inflation pressures. On snowy or icy roads  When driving on a road covered with snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. There may be state or local regulations about using snow tires. Always check the regulations in your local area before using them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-18 and “Tire chains” on page 9-18.  Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the brakes.  Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.  If a skid occurs when the accelerator pedal is depressed, take your foot off the pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the skid.  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). Hold the brake pedal down firmly and keep it depressed. Do not pump the brake pedal which will result in reduced braking performance.  After parking on snowy or icy roads, it may be difficult to move your vehicle due to the brake being frozen. Depress the accelerator pedal little by little to move the vehicle when safe to do so. CAUTION  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly. The vehicle could start moving when it breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in an accident. On a bumpy or rutted road  Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc. CAUTION  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes can damage the tires and wheels. Wheels with low-profiles tires or underinflated tires are especially at risk for damage.  The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is: BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuel Pump Shut-off System CAUTION • driven over a step (for example, at the entrance or exit of a parking lot); • parked too closely against a curb or parking block, or by the side of a road with curbstones; • driven on a steep slope. Fuel Pump Shut-off System N00860600031 WARNING 8  Before attempting to restart the engine after a collision, always inspect the ground under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do not restart the engine.  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any collision. In the event of a collision causing frontal airbag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off system will activate to stop fuel supply to the engine. For emergencies 8-15 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle care and maintenance Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2 Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3 Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4 View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5 Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5 Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7 Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8 Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9 Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9 Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10 Battery ............................................................................................9-10 Tires ...............................................................................................9-12 Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-18 Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-18 Parking brake .................................................................................9-19 Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19 Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-19 General maintenance .....................................................................9-20 For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-22 Fusible links ...................................................................................9-22 Fuses ..............................................................................................9-22 Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-26 Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-32 Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-32 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-33 9 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Service precautions WARNING Service precautions N00937301485 Taking regular care of your vehicle will preserve its value and appearance as long as possible. 9 You can do some of the maintenance work yourself, and the rest should only be performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. If you discover a malfunction or other problem, have it corrected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. This section describes the maintenance inspections that you can do yourself, if you so desire. Follow the instructions and precautions for each procedure. WARNING  When checking or servicing the inside of the engine compartment, be sure the engine is stopped and has had a chance to cool down.  If you need to work in the engine compartment with the engine running, be especially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, or other moving parts. 9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance  After performing the maintenance work, make sure that no tools or cloths are left behind in the engine compartment. If they are left behind, a fire or damage to the vehicle may occur.  The fan can turn on automatically even if the engine is not running. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF to be safe while you work in the engine compartment.  Do not smoke or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. The fumes are flammable.  Be extremely careful when working around the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on a jack. Always use properly rated automotive jack stands.  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materials in the wrong way can injure you. Ask an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice if you have questions. Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Catalytic converter If your vehicle is raised with a garage jack Only use the designated positions shown in the illustration. Never use the rear suspensions as a jacking point. WARNING WARNING  Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base. To reduce the possibility of catalytic converter damage: Catalytic converter N00937400450 The catalytic converter requires you to use unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the emission-control effectiveness of the converter. *- Front of the vehicle Normally, the catalytic converter does not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned for the converter to continue to work properly. CAUTION WARNING  Set a garage jack only at the position shown here. If the garage jack is set a wrong position, it could damage your vehicle and/or your vehicle might fall from the jack causing injury or death.  Do not park or run your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.  Do not put undercoat paint on the catalytic converter.  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. If the engine malfunctions or misfires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, have it serviced promptly. Running your vehicle when it is overheated may result in damage to the converter and vehicle.  Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of the type of recommended in the “Fuel selection”.  Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of gas could damage the catalytic converter.  Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. If the battery is weak or run down, use jumper cables to properly start the engine.  Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when performing diagnostic tests.  Do not idle the engine for a long time if it is idling roughly or otherwise obviously malfunctioning.  To prevent the catalytic converter from being damaged from unburned gas, do not race the engine when stopping the engine. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3 9 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine hood 9  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the performance is noticeably low, or the engine has a malfunction such as with the ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop driving immediately, slow down and drive for only a short time. Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  In unusual situations involving major engine problems, a burning odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalytic converter overheating. If this occurs, stop in a safe place, shut the engine off and let the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool, immediately take your vehicle to a dealer or a repair facility of your choice for service. Engine hood To open Use the engine hood release lever (located under the instrument panel near the driver’s door) to unlock the engine hood. Vehicle care and maintenance NOTE  To prevent damage to the engine hood and wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting position when you open the engine hood. Support the engine hood with the hood prop. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening under the hood marked with an arrow. WARNING  Never use the release lever to unlatch the engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.  Do not drive your vehicle unless the engine hood is locked. Release the lever and lift the engine hood. N00937501647 9-4 Pull the lever toward you to release the engine hood latch. CAUTION  Always insert the support prop into the hole specially made for it. Propping the engine hood at any other place could cause the prop to slip out and lead to an accident.  The hood prop can fall out if the hood is lifted by a strong wind. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 View of the engine compartment To close Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and put it back in its retainer. NOTE Engine oil and oil filter  If this does not close the engine hood properly, drop it again from a slightly higher position.  Do not push down strongly on the engine hood. Depending on how strongly or where you push down, you could create a dent in the vehicle body. View of the engine compartment N00937601781 Slowly lower the engine hood approximately 8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight. To check and refill engine oil It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may need to add oil between the recommended oil change intervals. Before starting the engine, check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary. To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and check the oil level by checking the upper surface of the dipstick. The oil level must not go above the line on the dipstick. NOTE  If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a moment and then recheck the oil level by checking the upper surface of the dipstick. CAUTION  Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when closing the engine hood.  Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed before driving. If you drive without the engine hood completely closed, it could open up while driving. N00937702011 12345678- Engine oil level dipstick Air cleaner filter Battery Brake fluid Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Radiator cap Engine coolant reservoir If the level does not reach the line which shows the minimum amount of oil required, remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve cover, and fill to within the “Good” range. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-5 9 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine oil and oil filter NOTE Good CAUTION 9  Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of oil pressure, which could damage the engine.  The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for example, repeated operation on rough roads, in mountainous regions, on roads with many uphill and downhill gradients, or over short distances). Consequently, the oil will require earlier replacement in accordance with the schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only engine oils with the ILSAC certification symbol on the front of the container. 9-6 Vehicle care and maintenance 1- The upper part indicates the quality of the oil. 2- The center part indicates the SAE grade of the oil viscosity. ILSAC certification symbol Recommended engine oil viscosity Use engine oil with the proper thickness for the outdoor temperatures where you will be driving. NOTE  Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced by payload, engine speed, etc. API service symbol Engine oil identification mark WARNING  Used engine oil is poisonous, and can damage your skin. Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let used oil touch your skin and wash thoroughly after working with it.  Keep used oil out of the reach of children. This mark appears on the top of the oil container and tells you two important things about the oil. If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certification symbol, use an API classification SN or higher oil with the following label. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine coolant require that the filter can withstand a pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi oil filter is the best replacement filter. Follow the installation instructions printed on the filter. Engine coolant N00937801637 To check the coolant level Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel economy and cold weather starting. If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20 grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the next oil change to maintain optimum fuel economy and cold weather starting. The engine coolant reservoir (A) lets you quickly see when you need to add coolant. When the engine is cold, the level of the coolant in the reservoir should be between the “F” (FULL) and “L” (LOW) marks. The radiator usually stays full so there is no reason to remove the radiator cap (B) except when you check the coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze coolant. Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*. *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation on all metals, including aluminum, and prevents clogs in some parts of the engine. If you need to add coolant often, or if the level in the reservoir does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for testing. CAUTION To replace the oil filter The oil filter should be replaced at the time or mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. Only use high quality replacement filters on this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifications for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters To add coolant FULL LOW  Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants that contain them. Using the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum parts. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-7 9 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Air cleaner filter CAUTION 9  The required concentration of anti-freeze differs depending on the expected ambient temperature. Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration of anti-freeze Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration of anti-freeze You can check the concentration level with a gauge from an automotive supply store, or your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or service station can check it for you.  Do not use water to adjust the concentration of coolant.  Do not top off the reservoir with plain water only. Water by itself boils at a lower temperature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the water freezes, it will damage your cooling system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause corrosion and rust. Radiator cap The radiator cap must be sealed tight to prevent losing coolant, which may result in engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equivalent. 9-8 Vehicle care and maintenance WARNING  Wait for the engine to cool down before opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot steam or boiling coolant could spray up from the filler port and scald you.  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator with the proper gauge, and only when it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the contents of the reservoir must be protected against freezing.  Keep the front of the radiator and condenser clean.  If the engine coolant temperature does not rise after the engine is warmed-up, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the thermostat checked, and replaced if necessary. Air cleaner filter N00937900413 Points to remember  Do not overfill the reservoir.  Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow from the reservoir back to the radiator when the engine cools down. If you need to change the cap, use the exact same kind. The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty from use and not filter properly. Replace it with a new filter using the schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. 1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the cover and take out the air cleaner filter. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the correct level. Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) N00938200181 Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, if necessary. Refill or change with the oil according to the table below. 2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the cover back on in its original position.  Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recommended when replacing the air cleaner filter.  Make sure that the connector is properly reconnected.  After replacing the air cleaner filter, make sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover are firmly set. CAUTION  Take care not to scratch the engine air flow sensor when removing the air cleaner cover. Lubricant Viscosity range Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance. CAUTION Oil type NOTE Fluid type  Using the improper transaxle fluid may damage the transaxle. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO API Classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid 9 Special additives Do not use any fluid additives to the transmission. Washer fluid N00938601371 (if so equipped) The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in the engine compartment. N00938101129 The continuously variable transmission (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to obtain the best performance and longest life. It is impor- Vehicle care and maintenance 9-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Brake fluid Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary. Open the reservoir cap and check the level of washer fluid. Full level is approximately 2 inches (5 cm) below from the upper surface of the reservoir. Upper surface Brake fluid N00938701297 To check the fluid level The fluid level must be between the “MAX” and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. MAX Full 9 MIN When freezing weather is anticipated, flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. 9-10 Vehicle care and maintenance The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality. The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when doing other work under the engine hood. The brake system should also be checked for leaks at the same time. If the fluid level falls noticeably in a short length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake system. If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Fluid type Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water out. CAUTION  Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This will damage the seals.  Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can damage painted surfaces.  Use only the listed brake fluid. Different brands of brake fluid have different additives, and these can cause a chemical reaction. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.  Keep the reservoir cap closed to keep the brake fluid from evaporating. Battery N00939100943 The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s electrical system working properly. Check the battery regularly. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Battery Checking battery electrolyte level N00901500072 The electrolyte level must be between the limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill it with distilled water as needed. The inside of the battery is divided into several compartments. Take the cap off of each compartment and fill to the mark. Do not fill above the top line because a spill during driving could cause damage. WARNING NOTE  If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace the battery. During cold weather N00901600060 The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. This has to do with its chemical and physical properties and is why a very cold battery, especially one with a low charge, will have a hard time starting your vehicle. It is recommended that you have your battery and charging system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice before the start of cold weather. If necessary, have it charged. This will provide more reliable starting, and longer battery life. Disconnection and connection N00901701169 WARNING  If the battery goes flat, be sure to check the battery electrolyte level before connecting booster cables.  After checking the battery electrolyte level, make sure the caps are fitted securely.  Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the battery.  Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, then the positive (+) terminal. To reconnect the battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, before starting the vehicle. 9 WARNING  Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running, or you could damage the vehicle’s electrical parts.  Never short-circuit the battery. This could cause it to overheat and be damaged.  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode.  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corrosive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or discolor them. And if it gets on your skin or in your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness. Please observe the following handling instructions: Vehicle care and maintenance 9-11 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires WARNING 9 • If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of water and neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water. • If electrolyte gets on your hands or clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with water immediately and get immediate medical attention.  Open doors and windows in any closed space where you may be charging or working with the battery.  Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working with the battery, or have a skilled automobile technician do it.  If you are quick-charging your battery, first disconnect the battery cables.  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, and reconnect it last.  Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. NOTE  Check each battery terminal for corrosion. You can stop more corrosion by washing with a solution of baking soda and water. Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or tightening them. 9-12 Vehicle care and maintenance NOTE  Check to see that the battery is securely installed and cannot be moved. Also check each terminal for tightness.  If you will not be driving your vehicle for a long period of time, remove the battery and store it in a place where the battery fluid will not freeze. The battery only should be stored with a full charge.  Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out. Tires N00939201635 WARNING  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged or improperly inflated is dangerous. These type tire conditions will adversely affect vehicle performance. These type tire conditions can also cause a tread separation or blowout which may result in an accident causing serious injury or death.  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious. It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms:  Cold tire pressure: • The measured pressure after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or • The measured pressure when the vehicle is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours.  Maximum pressure: the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.  Recommended inflation pressure: the inflation pressure for optimum tire performance.  Intended outboard sidewall: • The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or • The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.  Tread: portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.  Tread rib: a tread section running circumferentially around a tire.  Tread separation: pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.  Carcass: the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the tread and bead.  Section width: the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the tire.  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.  Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the bead seat.  Groove: the space between two adjacent tread ribs. Tire Markings 215 Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire. R Construction code • “R” means radial construction. • “D” means diagonal or bias construction. 15 Rim diameter in inches (in) NOTE 12345- Size Designation Service Description Maximum Load Maximum Pressure U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades Size Designation EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 P Passenger car tire size based on U.S.A. design standards  European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based on European/Japanese design standards. Tires designed to these standards have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter “P” is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based on U.S.A. design standards. The size designation for LT-metric tires is the same as for P-metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.  Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-13 9 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires Service Description EXAMPLE: 95H 95 Load index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry. H Speed symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions. The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits) 9 Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry. WARNING  Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire but the date code may only be on one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504 Vehicle care and maintenance Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use. Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits) Code representing the tire size. (2 L9 digits) ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits) 15 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) 04 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) Maximum Pressure DOT 9-14 MA Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause problems in three major areas: Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Tire inflation pressures N00939301984 Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for the safe and satisfactory operation of your  Safety Too little pressure increases flexing in the tire and can cause tire failure. Too much pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes could then cause tire damage that may result in tire failure.  Economy The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven wear patterns in the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce the tread life, and the tire will have to be replaced sooner. Too little pressure also makes it harder for the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.  Ride comfort and vehicle stability The superior riding experience built into your vehicle partly depends on the correct tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to respond. Unequal tire pressures can make steering your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. The tire pressure for your vehicle under normal driving conditions is listed on the placard attached to the driver’s door sill. (Refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 11-3.) The recommended inflation pressures under normal driving conditions should be used for the tires listed below. Item Tire size Front Rear 165/65R14 240 kPa, 35 psi 240 kPa, 35 psi 175/55R15 220 kPa, 32 psi 220 kPa, 32 psi Normal tire Compact T115/70D14 420 kPa, 60 psi spare wheel Tire pressures should be checked, and adjusted if necessary, at least once a month. Pressures should be checked more often whenever weather temperatures change severely, because tire pressures change with outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed are always “cold inflation pressure”. Cold inflation pressure is measured after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours. Cold inflation pressure must not go above the maximum values molded into the tire sidewall. After driving several miles, your tire inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure. Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the Vehicle care and maintenance 9-15 9 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires specified cold pressure, or your tires will be too low. Check your tires each time you refuel. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure for all of them. You should also take the following safety precautions: 9  Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures. (See the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver’s door sill.)  Stay within the recommended load limits.  Make sure that the weight of any load in your vehicle is evenly distributed.  Drive at safe speeds.  After filling your tires to the correct pressure, check them for damage and air leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the valve stems. Replacing tires and wheels N00939601453 CAUTION  Avoid using different size tires from the one listed and the combined use of different types of tires, as this can affect driving safety. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5. Tread wear indicator CAUTION  If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly. N00939801240 Tire maintenance N00939701193 The following maintenance steps are recommended:  Check tire pressures regularly.  Have regular maintenance done on the wheel balance and front and rear suspension alignment.  Rotate your tires regularly as described in the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-17. 1- Location of the tread wear indicator 2- Tread wear indicator Tread wear indicators are built into the original equipment tires on your vehicle to help you know when your tires should be replaced. Many states have laws requiring that you replace your tires at this point. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear when the tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). When the bands appear next to one another in two or more places, replace your tires. NOTE  Tire wear indicators can have different marks and locations depending on the tire manufacturer. 9-16 Vehicle care and maintenance BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires Tire rotation N00939901557 To even out the wear on your tires and make them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends that you rotate your tires at the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. However, the timing for tire rotation may vary according to your vehicle condition, road surface conditions, and your own personal driving habits. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pressure, wheels that are not aligned properly, wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe braking. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find out the reason for uneven tread wear. The first tire rotation is the most important one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly. Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation direction Front Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction Front CAUTION  A compact spare tire can be installed temporarily in place of a tire that has been removed during the tire rotation. However, it must not be included in the regular tire rotation sequence. CAUTION  If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the correct direction of rotation, swap the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle and the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle separately. Keep each tire on its original side of the vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure the arrows point in the direction in which the wheels will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tire whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not perform to its full potential. 9 Front CAUTION  Avoid the combined use of different types of tires. Using different types of tires can affect vehicle performance and safety. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-17 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped) Snow tires Clutch pedal free play (if so N00940001428 In some areas of the country, snow tires are required for winter driving. If snow tires are required in your area, you must choose snow tires of the same size and type as the original tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires should also be installed on all four wheels. Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling can be reduced. Even where laws may permit it, snow tires should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). 9 equipped) Brake pedal free play N00940300336 To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn off the engine and press the pedal until you feel resistance. To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn off the engine and press the brake pedal several times with your foot. Then press the pedal down with your fingers until you first feel resistance. Clutch pedal free play: .4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm) Brake pedal free play: .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm) N00940200090 CAUTION  If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly. Tire chains N00940100116 CAUTION  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. The clearance between the chains and the body is not sufficient to allow proper clearance, and the vehicle body might be damaged. 9-18 Vehicle care and maintenance If the free play is not within these limits, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for adjustment. If the free play is not within these limits, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for adjustment. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Parking brake WARNING Parking brake N00940400252 Parking brake lever stroke Check the parking brake lever travel occasionally. To check this, pull the lever up slowly and count the number of clicks of the ratchet. Parking brake lever stroke: 7 to 9 notches (clicks) (Parking brake adjustment when pulled with the force of 200 N) Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by the ratchet after pulling.  Continued operation of the vehicle with the parking brake lever out of adjustment may result in the vehicle moving when unattended. Wiper blades N00940701223 Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean them regularly to remove deposits of salt and road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the blades and glass areas. Replace the blades if they continue to streak or smear. NOTE  Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long time. This wears out the rubber and can scratch the glass. During cold weather If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. Emission-control system maintenance N00940800328 Your vehicle is equipped with an emissioncontrol system that meets all the requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and Environment Canada. The emission-control system is made of:  a positive crankcase ventilation system  an evaporative emission-control system  an exhaust emission-control system To be sure the emission-control system works properly, have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. This should be done at the time or mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. These, and all the other “general” maintenance services listed in this manual, need to be performed to keep your vehicle running properly and reliably. You should also have an inspection and service any time you suspect a malfunction. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-19 9 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General maintenance Fuel hoses NOTE  To meet government regulations and promote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD). The engine electronic control module that controls OBD functions stores various data (especially about the exhaust emissions). This data will be erased if the battery cable is disconnected, which could make a rapid diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the battery cable when the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is ON. Intake valve clearance 9 Spark plugs N00950100050 N00940900228 Spark plugs must fire properly for good engine performance and emission-control. Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Change them at the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. NOTE  Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are exactly the same. Other plugs could cause engine damage, performance problems or radio noise. 9-20 N00941000040 Check the hose surfaces for any heat and mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay special attention to the hoses closest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check all the hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure and that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or damage, replace the hoses immediately. Vehicle care and maintenance Have the valve clearance checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have adjustments made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Fuel system (tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank filler cap) high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. WARNING  If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel, do not run the engine. Any spark (including from the ignition), flame or smoking material could cause an explosion or fire. Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Evaporative emission control system (except evaporative emission canister) N00941400187 If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or damaged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, polluting the air. Have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. General maintenance N00941300173 N00941500292 Check these regularly for damage or leaks in the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay special attention to the fuel lines closest to The next pages list the maintenance service recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. In addition to the general maintenance that needs to be performed at the times listed, BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General maintenance there are other parts which do not usually need regular maintenance. But, if any of these parts stops working properly, your vehicle performance could suffer. Have these items checked if you notice a problem with them. If you have any questions, see your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. Disc brake pads N00941600059 Good brakes are essential for safe driving. Check the brake pads for wear. For good braking performance, replace the brake pads with the same type pads as the originals. Brake hoses N00941700076 Brake hoses and tubing should be checked for:  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is showing through any cracks or worn spots in the rubber hose cover, the hose should be replaced. The brakes can fail if the hose wears through.  Improper installation may cause twisting, or wheel, tire or chassis interference. Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots N00941800077 Check the following parts for damage and grease leaks:  Ball joint boots of the front suspension and steering linkage  Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft  The underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged Also check the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, or required service. Any open seams or loose connections could let dangerous exhaust fumes seep into the luggage and passenger compartments. Check for any of the following conditions: Exhaust system N00942200111 WARNING  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these fumes can cause unconsciousness or death. The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas from entering inside your vehicle is to have the engine exhaust system properly serviced. Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and nearby body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts if you notice any of the following:  A change in the sound of the exhaust system  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the vehicle  Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks caused by corrosion or damage.  Check the joints and connections for looseness or exhaust gas leaks.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for damage. Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch N00942500127 The hood lock release mechanism and hood safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and oiled when needed for easy movement and to prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts of the hood latch and release lever. Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- Vehicle care and maintenance 9-21 9 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 For cold and snowy weather nism until all the movable surfaces are covered. Also, put a light coat of the same grease on the safety catch wherever moving parts touch. For cold and snowy weather N00942600102 Ventilation slots 9 The ventilation slots in front of the windshield should be brushed clear after a heavy snowfall so that the operation of the heating and ventilation systems will not be impaired. Weatherstripping To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease. Additional equipment (For regions where snow is encountered) It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a shorthandled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping 9-22 Vehicle care and maintenance snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windshield, side and rear window are also useful. individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The fuse blocks are located in the passenger compartment and in the engine compartment. Passenger compartment Fusible links N00942700305 The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current attempts to flow through certain electrical systems. In case of a melted fusible link, see your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for inspection and replacement. For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse load capacities” on page 9-23. The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located in front of the driver’s seat at the position shown in the illustration. WARNING  Fusible links must not be replaced by any other device. Failing to fit the correct fusible link may result in fire in the vehicle, property destruction and serious or fatal injuries at any time. Fuses N00942800902 Fuse block location To prevent damage to the electrical system from short-circuiting or overloading, each Engine compartment In the engine compartment, the fuse block is located as shown in the illustration. While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the cover. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuses Type A Passenger compartment fuse location table Type B SymNo. bol Fuse load capacities N00954801342 This fuse list shows the names of the electrical systems and their fuse capacities. There are spare fuses in the fuse block in the engine compartment. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same capacity as the original. Electrical system Capacity 1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A 3 Ignition coil 10 A 4 Starter motor 7.5 A 5 — — — 6 — — — 7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A 8 Outside rearview mirrors 7.5 A 9 Engine control unit 7.5 A 10 Control unit 7.5 A No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity 11 Rear fog light 10 A 12 Door lock 15 A 13 Interior light (Dome light) 15 A 14 Rear window wiper 15 A 15 Gauges 7.5 A 16 Relay 7.5 A 17 Heated seats 20 A 18 Option 10 A 19 Heated outside rearview mirrors 7.5 A 20 Windshield wiper 20 A 21 Back-up light 7.5 A 22 Defogger 30 A 23 Heater 30 A 24 — — — 25 Radio 10 A 26 Electronic controlled unit 15 A  Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-23 9 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuses  The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. Engine compartment fuse location table Type A 9 Electrical system Capacity No. Electrical system Capacity BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A F15 Alternator 7.5 A BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A F16 Hazard warning flasher F1 Headlight (low beam) (left) 10 A 10 A F17 Automatic transaxle F2 Headlight (low beam) (right) 15 A 10 A F18 Air conditioning 10 A F3 Headlight (high beam) (left) 10 A F19 ETV 15 A F4 Headlight (high beam) (right) F20 Starter 7.5 A 10 A F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A F5 Horn 10 A F22 Fuel pump 15 A F6 Front fog lights 15 A F23 Engine 20 A F7 Daytime running lights 10 A F24 Automatic transaxle 7.5 A No. Symbol Symbol F8 — — — #1 — Spare fuse 20 A CapacElectrical system ity F9 — — — #2 — Spare fuse 30 A SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A* F10 Battery current sensor 7.5 A SBF2 Anti-lock braking system 30 A* — — SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A* F12 Stop lights (Brake lights) 15 A SBF4 Power window control 40 A* F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A F14 Engine control 7.5 A No. 9-24 Symbol Vehicle care and maintenance F11 — *: Fusible link  Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.  The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuses 15 A: Cigarette lighter When using a substitute fuse, replace with a fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possible. Type B Identification of fuse No. SymCapacElectrical system bol ity Capacity Color 7.5 A Brown 10 A Red 15 A Blue 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse block. 20 A Yellow 40 A* 30 A Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible link type) 40 A* 40 A Green (fusible link type) SBF1 PTC heater 40 A* SBF2 PTC heater SBF3 PTC heater *: Fusible link  Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.  The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A, 10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses burns out, substitute with the following fuse. 7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors 10 A: Option Fuse replacement N00954900131 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical item concerned to the fuse and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine compartment fuse block. 4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the matching tables, to check the fuse that is related to the problem. If the fuse is not blown, something else must be causing the problem. Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-25 9 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs Replacement of light bulbs N00942901362 Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is off. Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy the bulb when it gets hot. CAUTION B- Fuse is OK C- Blown fuse 9 5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity securely into the appropriate slot. CAUTION  Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring to heat up and could cause a fire.  If the replacement fuse blows again after a short time, have the electrical system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find and correct the cause. 9-26 Vehicle care and maintenance  Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being turned off. When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently before touching it. You could otherwise be burned.  Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas inside halogen light bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.  Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlights are used. If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with alcohol and let it dry completely before installing the bulb. CAUTION  Do not install commercially available LEDtype bulbs. Commercially available LED-type bulbs could adversely affect the operation of the vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and other vehicle equipment from operating properly. NOTE  If you are unsure of how to carry out the work as required, it is recommended that these procedures be carried out by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing a light and lens. BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs NOTE  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the light, please have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Bulb capacity N00943000132 The bulb should only be replaced with a new bulb with the same rating and type. The type and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Outside N00950302043 Description 1 Front turn signal light/Parking light Headlight/Day2 time running light (if so equipped) Wattage ANSI Trade No. or Bulb type 32/3 cp #1157NA — 9007 HB5 3 Front fog light (if so equipped) 55 W H11 4 Front side-marker light 5W W5W Side turn signal 5 light (on fender, if so equipped) 5W Side turn signal light (on outside 6 rearview mirror, if so equipped) NOTE  The side turn signal light (on outside rearview mirror) uses an LED rather than the bulb. For repair and replacement, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Rear 9 — — Item — Front NOTE  It is not possible to repair or replace only the bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender). Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice when the light needs to be repaired or replaced. ANSI trade No. Wattage or bulb type 1 High-mounted stop light — — 2 License plate light 5W W5W 3 Back-up light 21 W P21W 21 W PY21W 4 Rear turn signal light Vehicle care and maintenance 9-27 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs Item 5 Tail and stop light 6 Rear side-marker light ANSI trade No. Wattage or bulb type 21/5 W P21/5W 5W W5W Inside N00950401715 Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped) N00901801203 1. While pressing the tab (A), pull out the connector (B). NOTE 9  The high-mounted stop light uses an LED rather than the bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. *- Front of the vehicle 2. Remove the locking cap (C) by turning it counterclockwise, and then pull the bulb (D). Item 9-28 Vehicle care and maintenance Wattage 1 Dome light 8W 2 Trunk room light 5W BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counterclockwise while pressing in. 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Headlight aim adjustment N00943200352 The alignment of the headlights should be checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Front side-marker lights N00917301681 1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to remove it. Front turn signal lights/Parking lights N00943401478 1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to remove it. Front fog lights (if so equipped) N00943601904 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver with a cloth over its tip at the edge of the cover (A) and pry gently to remove the cover. *- Front of the vehicle *- Front of the vehicle Vehicle care and maintenance 9-29 9 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs 2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the light unit. 9 NOTE  When unfastening the screw of the fog light, be careful not to mistakenly move the beam position adjustment screw (C). 3. Depress the tab (D) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector (E) to remove it. Vehicle care and maintenance N00943701572 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light unit. 4. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to remove it. 3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the vehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C). 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 9-30 Rear combination lights BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs 4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it. Type 1 Type 2 License plate lights N00944001439 1. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it, and then pull the bulb out of the socket. DEFG- Back-up light Rear turn signal light Tail and stop light Rear side-marker light 5. Remove the bulb from the socket as follows. • Type 1: Rear side-marker light bulb Pull the bulb out. • Type 2: Other light bulb Turn the bulb counterclockwise while pressing in. 6. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. NOTE 9  When mounting the light unit, align the notch (H) and pin (I) on the light unit with the clip (J) and hole (K) in the body. 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-31 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle care precautions Vehicle care precautions N00945100166 In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, perform regular maintenance using the proper materials and procedures. Be sure to use only those materials and procedures that meet your local environmental pollution control regulations. Choose the materials you will use carefully, to be sure that they do not contain corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help in choosing these materials. 9 CAUTION  Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some are poisonous and others are highly flammable. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything in a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the instructions. Always open your vehicle doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use the following chemicals to clean your vehicle: • Gasoline • Carbon Tetrachloride • Benzine • Kerosene • Naphtha • Acetone • Turpentine • Paint Thinner • Lacquer Thinner 9-32 Vehicle care and maintenance Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts CAUTION • Nail Polish Remover These can all be dangerous, and they all can damage your vehicle. Cleaning the inside of your vehicle N00945200095 After washing the inside of your vehicle with any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well ventilated area. CAUTION  Do not use organic substances (solvents, benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or cracking of the surface. If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above. N00945300142 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap and water. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, wring it out well, and wipe off all the soap. NOTE  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protectants containing silicones or wax. Such products, when applied to the instrument panels or other parts, may cause reflections on the windshield and obscure vision. Also, if such products get on the switches of the electrical accessories, it may lead to failure of these accessories. Upholstery N00945500128 NOTE  Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, maintain the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm water. 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth and spot remover. NOTE  If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush over the surface in one direction. Genuine leather (if so equipped) Foreign material NOTE  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew may grow.  The genuine leather surface can be damaged if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber brush.  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents can discolor the genuine leather surface and should not be used.  Genuine leather can mildew if not kept clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.  The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as possible.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in summer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather seat may deteriorate and stick to the seat. N00945600187 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gentle soap and water. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, wring it out well, and wipe off all the soap. 3. To preserve and protect, use a leather protecting agent on the genuine leather surface. Cleaning the outside of your vehicle N00945700058 To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax. N00945800033 Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other foreign matters can damage the finish on your vehicle. Generally, the longer any foreign material stays on the finish, the worse the damage. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible whenever the finish gets soiled. Washing N00945901666 Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from air, rain, snow, or road surfaces can damage the paint and body of your vehicle if left on. Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a chamois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to remain. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-33 9 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle CAUTION 9  When washing the underside of your vehicle or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands.  Never spray or splash water on the electrical parts in the engine compartment. This may damage them. Be careful also when washing the underbody to ensure that water does not enter the engine compartment.  Avoid automatic car washers that use rotating brushes. These brushes may scratch the paint surface and make it dull. Scratches are more noticeable on darker colored vehicles.  Some hot water washing equipment uses high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. Because hot water can damage plastics parts and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you do the following when using such equipment: • Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches (70 cm) away from the vehicle body. • When washing around the door glass, hold the nozzle at a distance of more than 28 inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the glass surface.  Make sure to do the following when using an automatic car wash, with help from either this manual or the car wash operator, to avoid damaging your vehicle: • Fold the outside rearview mirrors. • Remove the antenna. 9-34 Vehicle care and maintenance During cold weather Salt and other chemicals spread on winter roads in some geographical areas can have a detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody. You should flush the underbody with a high pressure hose every time you wash the outside of your vehicle. Take special care to remove mud or other debris which could trap and hold salt and moisture. After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing. NOTE  When the door is frozen, opening it by force may tear off or crack the rubber gasket installed around the door. Pour warm water to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe off the water after opening the door. To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubricant. Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax on the painted surfaces. After the wax has dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax when the painted surfaces are cool. CAUTION  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should not be used. These waxes remove rust and stain effectively from the paintwork, but are harmful to the finish of the paint, because they also remove paint/clearcoat. They are also harmful to other glossy surfaces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt from the vehicle surface.  Do not put wax on the areas having black matte coating because it can cause uneven discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get wax on them, wipe the wax off right away with a soft cloth and warm water. Polishing N00946100046 Waxing N00946000234 Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or when water does not bead up on the paint. If painted surfaces have been severely damaged and lost their original luster and color tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine polishing compound. Avoid limiting your polishing to the damaged surface only; polish a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush the compound from the surface and apply a coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. Damaged paint N00946200092 Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched up as soon as possible with touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. Check body areas facing the road or the tires carefully for damage to the paint caused by flying stones, etc. The paint code number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle information code plate on the front passenger door sill. Cleaning plastic parts N00946300194 Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black rough surface of the bumper, molding or lights, the surface may appear white in color. In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water and a soft cloth or chamois. CAUTION  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough scrubber as these may damage the plastic surface. CAUTION CAUTION  Do not use wax containing compounds (polishing powder) which may damage the plastic surface.  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gasoline, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte), as such substances will cause stains, cracks, or discoloration. If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse them immediately with water. Chrome parts  Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the wheels.  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become discolored or stained.  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam cleaner or by any other means.  Contact with seawater or road salt used for de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible. Window glass N00946400052 N00946600054 To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a commercially available chrome polish. The window glass can usually be cleaned using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Aluminum wheels Wiper blades (if so equipped) N00946500183 N00946700084 1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. 2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed easily with water. Rinse off the detergent after washing the wheel. 3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft cloth. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer clean the windshield properly. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-35 9 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle Engine compartment N00947000071 Never spray or splash water on the electrical accessories in the engine compartment. This puts the engine at risk of being damaged. Do not bring the circumferential parts, the plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolor them. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water. 9 9-36 Vehicle care and maintenance 月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2 Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2 Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-3 10 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) N01047101208 This information is provided in compliance with the requirements of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers with information on reporting safety defects. Uniform tire quality grading 10 DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. The specific grade rating in each grade category is shown on the side wall of the tires on your vehicle. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of 10-2 their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING  The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING  The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Reporting Safety Defects N01047201544 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Important facts to know in case of an accident If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: NHTSA Headquarters 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE West Building Washington, DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064 For vehicles sold in Canada To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 Important facts to know in case of an accident N01047300232 If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. You may write to: Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 We hope you will never be involved in an accident, but there is always that potential danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and drive safely. In the event of an accident  Remain calm.  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to the police, and, if necessary, call for an ambulance. Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3 10 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Important facts to know in case of an accident  Record all the details of the accident. This will provide you with accurate records of the accident for discussions with your insurance company and other persons who may be acting on your behalf. Key information to discuss with your insurance company 10  Understand your repair estimate before approving repairs.  Choosing the repair shop and the brands of parts that they use on your vehicle is your decision.  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. Many times, to save money, your insurance company will recommend imitation parts that do not meet the original specifications of fit, finish, corrosion resistance or workmanship. Mitsubishi Motors built-in protection The strength and integrity built into your Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific design referred to as “Energy Management”. Individual body parts are designed to act as one unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves are absorbed by protective panels or are channeled around the passenger compart- 10-4 ment. This important feature is possible because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, something that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets are designed and constructed as important protection features in the event of an accident. By replacing body parts with non-Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, your vehicle may no longer meet original equipment specifications. Consumer rights (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) As a consumer requesting repair on your vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the country, State Insurance Commissioners have begun considering rules on the use of nonOEM parts. This could mean that repair shops will have to disclose to the consumer when they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since regulations are not consistent on this point, remember you have a choice. So, if you want genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may have to specifically request them. Make certain your insurance company understands imitations are not to be used in the repair of your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built with the high quality and durability standards you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors replacements parts are your guarantee that your vehicle will have all the technological advantages and maintain the style and protection of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Specifications Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2 Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3 Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4 Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4 Battery ............................................................................................11-5 Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5 Capacity .........................................................................................11-5 11 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle labeling Vehicle labeling N01147401837 Keep a record of the chassis number and vehicle identification number. Such information will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. 2 - Vehicle identification number plate The vehicle identification number is stamped on the plate riveted to the left front corner of the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. 3 - Air conditioning label The air conditioning label is affixed on the inside panel of the engine hood. 11 1 - Vehicle emission control information label The vehicle emission control information label is affixed on the underside of the engine hood. 4 - Vehicle information code plate The vehicle information code plate is located on the front passenger door sill. 11-2 Specifications Chassis number The chassis number is stamped on the bulkhead as shown in the illustration. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle dimensions Engine model/serial number Certification label The engine model and serial number are stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration. The certification label is located on the driver’s door sill. *- Front of the vehicle N01148200242 Vehicle dimensions N01147501652 Tire and loading information placard N01148101639 The tire and loading information placard is located on the driver’s door sill. Overall length 169.5 in (4,305 mm) Overall width 65.7 in (1,670 mm) Overall height 59.3 in (1,505 mm) Wheel base 100.4 in (2,550 mm) Specifications 11-3 11 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle weights Vehicle weights N01147601985 Item Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) Gross axle weight rating (GAWR) Manual transaxle CVT 3,053 lb (1,385 kg) 3,108 lb (1,410 kg) Front 1,609 lb (730 kg) Rear 1,521 lb (690 kg) Vehicle capacity weight Seating capacity Maximum roof load 827 lb (375 kg) 5 persons 110 lb (50 kg) NOTE  Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10. 11 GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants Engine specifications N01147701579 Engine model Engine displacement No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 3A92 72.8 CID (1,193 cm3) Inline-3 Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm) Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm) Compression ratio 11-4 Specifications 10.5:1 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Battery Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C) Spark plugs NGK LZFR5DI-11 Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm) Firing order 1-3-2 Battery PCD: holes) Tires and wheels N01147800296 55D23L (356CCA/99RC) N01147901858 Tire Battery is a 12 volt type. Pitch Circle Diameter (installation Size Wheel PCD 165/65R14 79S 175/55R15 77V 14 x 5 J 15 x 5 1/2J 3.93 in (100 mm) Offset 1.5 in (38 mm) NOTE  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owner’s manual. Capacity N01148002228 Item Fuel (approximate) Engine oil Capacity Lubricants 9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2 Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“starburst” symbol) on the container. If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or higher can be used. Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L) Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on page 9-9. Specifications 11-5 11 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Capacity Item Capacity Brake Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch Engine coolant {Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve tank} Washer fluid Refrigerant (air conditioning) Lubricants As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4 As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2 Manual transaxle 4.2 qt (4.0 L) CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium or equivalent* 2.6 qt (2.5 L) — Refer to the “Air conditioning label” on HFC-134a page 11-2. *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology 11 11-6 Specifications BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index A Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5 Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-52 Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Air conditioning Automatic air conditioning .............. 7-12 Important air conditioning operating tips.. 7-18 Manual air conditioning .................... 7-7 Air purifier ......................................... 7-19 Airbag ............................................... 4-21 Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-35 Antenna ............................................. 7-44 Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-49 Arm rest............................................... 4-5 Assist grip ........................................ 5-119 Audio AM/FM electronically tuned radio CD player .................................... Error codes..................................... Handling of compact discs............... with 7-19 7-41 7-42 Automatic air conditioning .................. 7-12 B Back-up light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots ....................................... 9-21 Capacities .......................................... 11-5 Battery .............................................. Charging system warning light ........ Checking battery electrolyte level .... Disconnection and connection ......... During cold weather ....................... Specification.................................. 9-10 5-78 9-11 9-11 9-11 11-5 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 5-85 Charging system warning light ............. 5-78 Bottle holders.................................... 5-118 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-13 Brake Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-26 Brake assist system............................. 5-49 Braking ............................................... 6-5 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-49 Hose ............................................. 9-21 Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-47 Parking brake................................. 5-32 Pedal............................................. 5-46 Pedal free play ............................... 9-18 Power brakes ................................. 5-47 Service brake ................................. 5-46 Warning lights ............................... 5-76 Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2 Card holder ...................................... 5-110 Cargo room light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-3 Certification label ............................... 11-3 Cleaning Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-32 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-33 Clutch Pedal free play................................ 9-18 Consumer information......................... 10-2 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ... 5-42 Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-5 Selector lever operation ................... 5-42 Selector lever positions.................... 5-44 Convenience hook............................. 5-118 Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-27 Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5 C Cup holders ...................................... 5-117 Cruise control ..................................... 5-54 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements..................................... 3-7 12-1 12 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index D Daytime running lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-28 Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-84 Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) .......................... 7-6, 7-10, 7-17 Dimensions ........................................ 11-3 Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-81 Engine Compartment................................... 9-5 Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5 High coolant temperature warning light.... 5-78 Hood............................................... 9-4 Model ............................................ 11-3 Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5 Overheating..................................... 8-4 Serial number ................................. 11-3 Specification................................... 11-4 Disc brake pads .................................. 9-21 Engine hood ........................................ 9-4 Dome light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Engine switch ..................................... 5-13 Error codes ......................................... 7-41 Door-ajar warning buzzer .................... 5-78 Exhaust system ................................... 9-21 Door-ajar warning light ....................... 5-78 12 Doors Lock.............................................. 5-24 Power door locks ............................ 5-25 F Floor mat............................................. 6-2 Electric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-51 Fluid Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-5 Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-5 Manual transaxle............................. 11-5 Washer fluid ............................ 9-9, 11-5 Electric rear window defogger switch ... 5-84 Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-5 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ..................................... 5-3, 5-19 Free-hand advanced security transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9 Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-19 Front fog lights Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4 Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 E 12-2 Bulb capacity ................................. Indicators....................................... Replacement .................................. Switch ........................................... 9-27 5-76 9-29 5-82 Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-2 Front side-marker lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-29 Front turn signal lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-29 Fuel Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3 Fuel economy................................... 6-2 Fuel hoses...................................... 9-20 Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-70 Fuel selection ................................... 3-2 Tank capacity................................. 11-5 Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-15 Fuel remaining display ........................ 5-70 Fuses ................................................. 9-22 Fusible links....................................... 9-22 G General maintenance Maintenance................................... 9-20 General vehicle data............................ 11-3 Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 Glove compartment........................... 5-117 BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index Loading information.............................. 6-6 H Important facts to know in case of an accident 10-3 Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-82 Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-75 Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-76 Indicators .......................................... 5-76 M Head restraints...................................... 4-5 Information display ............................ 5-67 Malfunction indicator light .................. 5-77 Headlights Bulb capacity ................................. Dimmer ......................................... Headlight flasher ............................ Replacement .................................. Switch ........................................... Inside emergency trunk lid release ....... 5-28 Manual air conditioning......................... 7-7 Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-34 Manual transaxle................................. 5-40 Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-5 Shift points..................................... 5-40 9-27 5-81 5-81 9-28 5-79 Instrument panel light dimmer control .. 5-68 Interior lights .................................... 5-115 Manual window control....................... 5-29 Heater without air conditioning function . 7-4 J High beam indicator............................ 5-76 Jack Garage jack up position..................... 9-3 Storage............................................ 8-5 High coolant temperature warning light 5-78 High-mounted stop light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Hill start assist .................................... 5-47 HomeLink® Wireless Control System 5-110 Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2 K Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch................................................ 9-21 Key slot............................................. 5-18 Hook Convenience hook ........................ 5-118 Keys ................................................... 5-2 Horn switch........................................ 5-85 L I If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2 Ignition switch.................................... 5-37 Lubricants .......................................... 11-5 Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-21 Labeling ............................................ 11-2 License plate lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-31 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle .. 3-5 Multi-information display ........... 5-64, 5-65 O Octane rating ........................................ 3-2 Oil Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5 Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-5 Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-78 Operation mode .................................. 5-13 Operation under adverse driving conditions.. 8-13 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-36 Overheating.......................................... 8-4 Link System....................................... 5-85 12-3 12 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index P Parking ................................................ 6-5 Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-19 Parking brake ............................ 5-32, 9-19 Parking lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-29 Polishing............................................ 9-34 Power brakes...................................... 5-47 Power outlet ..................................... 5-110 Power windows .................................. 5-29 Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 R 12 Radio AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player .................................... 7-19 General information about your radio 7-44 Rear combination lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Rear seat .............................................. 4-5 Rear side-marker lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Rear turn signal lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 12-4 Replacement................................... 9-30 Service precautions ............................... 9-2 Rear-view camera ............................... 5-62 Side turn signal lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Rearview mirror Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-34 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-36 Snow tires .......................................... 9-18 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-20 Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-26 Starting the engine .............................. 5-38 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-16 Steering Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-51 Steering wheel height adjustment ..... 5-33 Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 S Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4 Seat belts............................................. 4-7 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-11 Child restraint systems..................... 4-13 Front passenger seat belt warning light..... 4-10 Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-21 Seat belt extender............................ 4-12 Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-13 Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-8 Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-12 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-12 Seats ................................................... Arm rest .......................................... Front seats ....................................... Head restraints ................................. Heated seats..................................... Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2 4-5 4-2 4-5 4-4 4-2 Service brake ...................................... 5-46 Stop lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Storage spaces .................................. 5-116 Sun visors ........................................ 5-109 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-21 How the Supplemental Restraint System works .......................................... 4-24 Maintenance service ....................... 4-35 T Tail lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Tank capacity ..................................... 11-5 Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-58 Tires.................................................. 9-12 Inflation pressures .......................... 9-15 Maintenance................................... 9-16 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index Quality grading............................... 10-2 Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-16 Rotation ......................................... 9-17 Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5 Snow tires ...................................... 9-18 Tire and loading information placard 11-3 Tire chains ..................................... 9-18 To change a tire ................................ 8-6 Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-16 Tools ................................................... 8-5 Storage ............................................ 8-5 Towing .............................................. 8-12 Trailer towing..................................... 6-11 Trunk lid............................................ 5-27 Turn signal light Indicators....................................... 5-76 Lever ............................................. 5-81 U Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-3 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-4 Vents .................................................. 7-2 W Warning lights ................................... 5-76 Washer Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-5 Switch................................... 5-82, 5-83 Washing ............................................ 9-33 Waxing ............................................. 9-34 Weights ............................................. 11-4 Wheel Covers........................................... 8-11 Specification.................................. 11-5 Wiper Switch........................................... 5-82 Wiper blades.................................. 9-19 12 USB input terminal ........................... 5-105 How to connect a USB memory device .... 5-106 How to connect an iPod................. 5-107 V Vanity mirror ................................... 5-109 Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-32 Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3 Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2 12-5 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to calculate your gasoline mileage </div> </div> </div> <div class="subscription_form__container"> <input type="hidden" class="subscription_target" data-key="model" value="2381"> <div class="subscription_form"> <div class="subscription_form__manufacturer_logo" style="background-image: url("https://onlymanuals.com/images/brands/mitsubishi.png");"></div> <div class="subscription_form__email"> <form action="" method="post"> <label for="subscription-email">Get notified when we add a new Mitsubishi Mirage Manual</label> <input type="hidden" name="_token" value="jOnBfbU74nwfdJ7W0v1iBM3p9bCREAJiEFjXERxQ"> <div class="input_wrapper form-group"> <input class="form-control email_input" id="subscription-email" type="email" required placeholder="Your work email..."> <button class="btn btn-primary subscribe_button" type="submit">Notify me</button> </div> <p> We'll send you a quick email a new Mitsubishi Mirage document is added. <br> Spam free: Maximum of 1 email per month </p> </form> </div> </div> <div class="subscription_form mobile_subscription_block"> <div class="subscription_form__header"> <div class="subscription_form__manufacturer_logo" style="background-image: url("https://onlymanuals.com/images/brands/@mitsubishi.png");"></div> <div class="subscription_form__title_block"> <h5>Get notified when we add a new MitsubishiMirage Manual</h5> </div> </div> <div class="subscription_form__email"> <form action="" method="post"> <input type="hidden" name="_token" value="jOnBfbU74nwfdJ7W0v1iBM3p9bCREAJiEFjXERxQ"> <div class="input_wrapper form-group"> <input class="form-control email_input" type="email" required placeholder="Your work email..."> <button class="btn btn-primary subscribe_button" type="submit">Notify me</button> </div> <p> We'll send you a quick email a new Mitsubishi Mirage document is added. <br> Spam free: Maximum of 1 email per month </p> </form> </div> </div> </div> <div class="other_manufacturer_manuals"> <h4>We cover 60 Mitsubishi vehicles, were you looking for one of these? </h4> <div class="mb-5">  <div id='div-gpt-ad-1586362580872-0'> <script> googletag.cmd.push(function() { googletag.display('div-gpt-ad-1586362580872-0'); }); </script> </div> </div> <div class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_wrapper"> <div class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list"> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_owners_manual_2008_2008" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2008 - 2008">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2008 - 2008</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/2003_mitsubishi_montero_service_repair_manual_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2003 Mitsubishi Montero Service Repair Manual PDF"> 2003 Mitsubishi Montero Service Repair Manual PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/2008_2010_mitsubishi_lancer_wiring_diagrams_m3030000100019" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2008-2010 Mitsubishi Lancer Wiring Diagrams (M3030000100019)"> 2008-2010 Mitsubishi Lancer Wiring Diagrams (M3030000100019)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/colt/2006_mitsubishi_colt_service_repair_manual_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2006 Mitsubishi Colt Service Repair Manual PDF"> 2006 Mitsubishi Colt Service Repair Manual PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_wiring_diagram_2001_2003" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 2001 - 2003">Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 2001 - 2003</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_workshop_manual_2001_2001" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2001 - 2001">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2001 - 2001</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/2003_2006_mitsubishi_outlander_electrical_wiring_diagram_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2003-2006 Mitsubishi Outlander Electrical Wiring Diagram PDF"> 2003-2006 Mitsubishi Outlander Electrical Wiring Diagram PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/galant/mitsubishi_galant_wiring_diagram_2004_2009" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Galant - Wiring Diagram - 2004 - 2009">Mitsubishi - Galant - Wiring Diagram - 2004 - 2009</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/l200/mitsubishi_l200_owners_manual_2010_2010" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - L200 - Owners Manual - 2010 - 2010">Mitsubishi - L200 - Owners Manual - 2010 - 2010</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/mitsubishi_lancer_workshop_manual_2003_2003" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2003">Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2003</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/l200/mitsubishi_l200_1996_workshop_service_repair_manual_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" Mitsubishi L200 1996 Workshop Service Repair Manual PDF"> Mitsubishi L200 1996 Workshop Service Repair Manual PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/eclipse/2006_mitsubishi_eclipse_spyder_service_and_repair_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2006 Mitsubishi Eclipse & Spyder Service And Repair Manual"> 2006 Mitsubishi Eclipse & Spyder Service And Repair Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/l200/mitsubishi_l200_workshop_manual_my_2012_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" Mitsubishi L200 Workshop Manual, MY 2012 PDF"> Mitsubishi L200 Workshop Manual, MY 2012 PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/l300/mitsubishi_mitsubishi_l300_mitsubishi_l300_workshop_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi Mitsubishi L300 Mitsubishi L300 Workshop Manual">Mitsubishi Mitsubishi L300 Mitsubishi L300 Workshop Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/eclipse/mitsubishi_eclipse_spyder_2003_2005_service_and_repair_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" Mitsubishi Eclipse & Spyder 2003-2005 Service and Repair Manual"> Mitsubishi Eclipse & Spyder 2003-2005 Service and Repair Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/mitsubishi_lancer_owners_manual_2011_2011" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Lancer - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011">Mitsubishi - Lancer - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_wiring_diagram_1995_1999" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 1995 - 1999">Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 1995 - 1999</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/1999_05_mitsubishi_lancer_4_cylinders_e_20l_mfi_sohc_32752102" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="1999-05--Mitsubishi--Lancer--4 Cylinders E 2.0L MFI SOHC--32752102">1999-05--Mitsubishi--Lancer--4 Cylinders E 2.0L MFI SOHC--32752102</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/galant/2001_mitsubishi_galant_service_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2001 Mitsubishi Galant Service Manual"> 2001 Mitsubishi Galant Service Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/2013_mitsubishi_outlander_xl_workshop_manual_for_russia" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2013 Mitsubishi Outlander XL Workshop Manual (For Russia)"> 2013 Mitsubishi Outlander XL Workshop Manual (For Russia)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_workshop_manual_2008_2008" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_owners_manual_2002_2002" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero - Owners Manual - 2002 - 2002">Mitsubishi - Montero - Owners Manual - 2002 - 2002</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/galant/mitsubishi_galant_1989_1990_1991_1992_1993_service_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" Mitsubishi Galant 1989-1990-1991-1992-1993 Service Manual"> Mitsubishi Galant 1989-1990-1991-1992-1993 Service Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_mitsubishi_pajero_mitsubishi_pajero_1998_workshop_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 1998 Workshop Manual">Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 1998 Workshop Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/eclipse/1999_05_mitsubishi_eclipse_6_cylinders_30l_mfi_sohc_32738701" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="1999-05--Mitsubishi--Eclipse--6 Cylinders 3.0L MFI SOHC--32738701">1999-05--Mitsubishi--Eclipse--6 Cylinders 3.0L MFI SOHC--32738701</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/l200/2006_2007_mitsubishi_l200_service_repair_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2006-2007 Mitsubishi L200 Service Repair Manual"> 2006-2007 Mitsubishi L200 Service Repair Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/canter/mitsubishi_canter_workshop_manual_1995_1995" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Canter - Workshop Manual - 1995 - 1995">Mitsubishi - Canter - Workshop Manual - 1995 - 1995</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/asx/mitsubishi_asx_workshop_manual_2013_2013" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - ASX - Workshop Manual - 2013 - 2013">Mitsubishi - ASX - Workshop Manual - 2013 - 2013</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_sport_owners_manual_2016_2016" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero Sport - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016">Mitsubishi - Pajero Sport - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_owners_manual_2017_2017" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/mitsubishi_lancer_workshop_manual_2004_2004" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - 2004 - 2004">Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - 2004 - 2004</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/1999_05_mitsubishi_lancer_4_cylinders_f_24l_fi_sohc_33007001" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="1999-05--Mitsubishi--Lancer--4 Cylinders F 2.4L FI SOHC--33007001">1999-05--Mitsubishi--Lancer--4 Cylinders F 2.4L FI SOHC--33007001</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/mitsubishi_lancer_owners_manual_2009_2009" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Lancer - Owners Manual - 2009 - 2009">Mitsubishi - Lancer - Owners Manual - 2009 - 2009</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_workshop_manual_2002_2002" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero - Workshop Manual - 2002 - 2002">Mitsubishi - Montero - Workshop Manual - 2002 - 2002</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/mitsubishi_outlander_owners_manual_2012_2012" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Outlander - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012">Mitsubishi - Outlander - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_workshop_manual_2015_2015" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2015 - 2015">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2015 - 2015</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_owners_manual_2015_2015" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015">Mitsubishi - Montero - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_wiring_diagram_1998_1998" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 1998 - 1998">Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 1998 - 1998</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/mitsubishi_lancer_wiring_diagram_2017_2" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Lancer - Wiring Diagram - (2017) 2">Mitsubishi - Lancer - Wiring Diagram - (2017) 2</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/other_model/1991_1999_mitsubishi_3000gt_complete_service_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 1991-1999 Mitsubishi 3000Gt Complete Service Manual"> 1991-1999 Mitsubishi 3000Gt Complete Service Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_mitsubishi_pajero_mitsubishi_pajero_1996_misc_document_workshop_manual_supplement" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 1996 Misc. Document Workshop Manual Supplement">Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 1996 Misc. Document Workshop Manual Supplement</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/mitsubishi_auto_mitsubishi_outlander_2013_owner_s_manual_36837" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Auto - mitsubishi-outlander-2013-owner-s-manual-36837">Mitsubishi - Auto - mitsubishi-outlander-2013-owner-s-manual-36837</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_mitsubishi_pajero_mitsubishi_pajero_1991_1998_workshop_manual_russian" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 1991 1998 Workshop Manual Russian">Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 1991 1998 Workshop Manual Russian</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_mitsubishi_pajero_mitsubishi_pajero_2002_misc_document_workshop_manual_supplement" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 2002 Misc. Document Workshop Manual Supplement">Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Pajero Mitsubishi Pajero 2002 Misc. Document Workshop Manual Supplement</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/eclipse/eclipse_spyder_gs_l4_2350cc_24l_sohc_mfi_2001" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Eclipse Spyder GS L4-2350cc 2.4L SOHC MFI (2001)">Eclipse Spyder GS L4-2350cc 2.4L SOHC MFI (2001)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/montero_sport_xs_2wd_v6_35l_sohc_2001" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Montero Sport XS 2WD V6-3.5L SOHC (2001)">Montero Sport XS 2WD V6-3.5L SOHC (2001)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_owners_manual_2013_2013" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/montero_sr_4wd_v6_35l_dohc_1995" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Montero SR 4WD V6-3.5L DOHC (1995)">Montero SR 4WD V6-3.5L DOHC (1995)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/mitsubishi_outlander_owners_manual_2016_2016_2" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Outlander - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016 (2)">Mitsubishi - Outlander - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016 (2)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/precis_l4_1468cc_15l_sohc_1993" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - (1993)">Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - (1993)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_sport_parts_catalogue_2012_2012" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero Sport - Parts Catalogue - 2012 - 2012">Mitsubishi - Montero Sport - Parts Catalogue - 2012 - 2012</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/mitsubishi_outlander_workshop_manual_2018_2018" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Outlander - Workshop Manual - 2018 - 2018">Mitsubishi - Outlander - Workshop Manual - 2018 - 2018</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/l200/mitsubishi_l200_workshop_manual_2015_2015" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - L200 - Workshop Manual - 2015 - 2015">Mitsubishi - L200 - Workshop Manual - 2015 - 2015</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/eclipse/1990_1998_mitsubishi_eclipse_4_cylinders_y_20l_mfi_dohc_31988403" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="1990-1998--Mitsubishi--Eclipse--4 Cylinders Y 2.0L MFI DOHC--31988403">1990-1998--Mitsubishi--Eclipse--4 Cylinders Y 2.0L MFI DOHC--31988403</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/eclipse/mitsubishi_eclipse_owners_manual_1995_1999" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Eclipse - Owners Manual - 1995 - 1999">Mitsubishi - Eclipse - Owners Manual - 1995 - 1999</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/canter/mitsubishi_mitsubishi_canter_mitsubishi_canter_2005_owners_manual" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Canter Mitsubishi Canter 2005 Owners Manual">Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Canter Mitsubishi Canter 2005 Owners Manual</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/mitsubishi_mitsubishi_lancer_mitsubishi_lancer_workshop_manual_brm" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Lancer Mitsubishi Lancer Workshop Manual BRM">Mitsubishi Mitsubishi Lancer Mitsubishi Lancer Workshop Manual BRM</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/other_model/1983_1995_mitsubishi_mighty_max_2wd_4_cylinders_e_26l_2bl_sohc_32152702" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="1983-1995--Mitsubishi--Mighty Max 2WD--4 Cylinders E 2.6L 2BL SOHC--32152702">1983-1995--Mitsubishi--Mighty Max 2WD--4 Cylinders E 2.6L 2BL SOHC--32152702</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/galant/mitsubishi_galant_1993_2001_service_manuals_collection" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" Mitsubishi Galant 1993-2001 Service Manuals Collection"> Mitsubishi Galant 1993-2001 Service Manuals Collection</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/mitsubishi_outlander_owners_manual_2017_2017" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Outlander - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017">Mitsubishi - Outlander - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017</h5> </a> </div> <div class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list owl-carousel__manufacturer_manuals owl-carousel owl-theme"> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_owners_manual_2008_2008" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2008 - 2008">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Owners Manual - 2008 - 2008</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/2003_mitsubishi_montero_service_repair_manual_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2003 Mitsubishi Montero Service Repair Manual PDF"> 2003 Mitsubishi Montero Service Repair Manual PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/2008_2010_mitsubishi_lancer_wiring_diagrams_m3030000100019" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2008-2010 Mitsubishi Lancer Wiring Diagrams (M3030000100019)"> 2008-2010 Mitsubishi Lancer Wiring Diagrams (M3030000100019)</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/colt/2006_mitsubishi_colt_service_repair_manual_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2006 Mitsubishi Colt Service Repair Manual PDF"> 2006 Mitsubishi Colt Service Repair Manual PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/montero/mitsubishi_montero_wiring_diagram_2001_2003" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 2001 - 2003">Mitsubishi - Montero - Wiring Diagram - 2001 - 2003</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/pajero/mitsubishi_pajero_workshop_manual_2001_2001" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2001 - 2001">Mitsubishi - Pajero - Workshop Manual - 2001 - 2001</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/outlander/2003_2006_mitsubishi_outlander_electrical_wiring_diagram_pdf" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title=" 2003-2006 Mitsubishi Outlander Electrical Wiring Diagram PDF"> 2003-2006 Mitsubishi Outlander Electrical Wiring Diagram PDF</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/galant/mitsubishi_galant_wiring_diagram_2004_2009" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Galant - Wiring Diagram - 2004 - 2009">Mitsubishi - Galant - Wiring Diagram - 2004 - 2009</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/l200/mitsubishi_l200_owners_manual_2010_2010" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - L200 - Owners Manual - 2010 - 2010">Mitsubishi - L200 - Owners Manual - 2010 - 2010</h5> </a> <a href="https://onlymanuals.com/mitsubishi/lancer/mitsubishi_lancer_workshop_manual_2003_2003" class="other_manufacturere_manuals__list_item"> <div class="manual_preview_img"> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/manufacturer_car.png" alt=""> </div> <h5 title="Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2003">Mitsubishi - Lancer - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2003</h5> </a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="show-sm"> <div id="summary-of-content" class="main_block"> <div class="header_block">Summary of Content</div> <div class="wrap_main_block custom_scroll"> Mirage G4 / 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL Mirage G4 2017 © Copyright 2016 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc / OWNER’S MANUAL BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Table of contents Overview Quick index General information Seat and restraint systems Features and controls Driving safety Comfort controls For emergencies Vehicle care and maintenance Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects Specifications Alphabetical index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Instruments and controls 1 Instruments and controls N00100202704 Instrument cluster P.5-64 Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-82 Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-79 Turn-signal lever P.5-81 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-82 Wiper and washer switch P.5-82 Cruise control switches (if so equipped) P.5-54 Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13 Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch P.5-53 Electric remote-controlled outside rearview mirror switch P.5-36 Steering wheel height adjustment P.5-33 Fuse box P.9-22 1-1 Overview Ignition switch (if so equipped) P.5-37 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag (for driver) P.4-21, 4-27 Horn switch P.5-85 Steering wheel remote control switches (if so equipped) P.5-87, 7-40 Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag P.4-21, 4-28 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Instruments and controls Center vents P.7-2 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag (for front passenger) P.4-21, 4-27 Audio (if so equipped) P.7-19 Clock (if so equipped) P.7-26 Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-84 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) P.7-12 Side vents P.7-2 Engine hood release lever P.9-4 Fuel tank filler door release lever P.3-3 1 Heater (if so equipped) P.7-4 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) P.7-7 Cup holder (for the front seat) P.5-117 Gearshift lever (if so equipped) P.5-40 Selector lever (if so equipped) P.5-42 Glove compartment P.5-117 12 V power outlets P.5-110 Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-84 Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-20 Parking brake lever P.5-32 Cup holder (for the rear seat) P.5-117 Overview 1-2 BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Interior 1 Interior N00100302428 Power window lock switch P.5-30 Bottle holders P.5-118 Power door lock switch (if so equipped) P.5-25 Sun visors P.5-109 Vanity mirror P.5-109 Card holder P.5-109 Dome light P.5-116, 9-28 Inside rearview mirror P.5-34 Assist grips P.5-119 USB input terminal (if so equipped) P.5-105 Power window switch P.5-29 Seat belts P.4-7 Heated seats switches (if so equipped) P.4-4 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)curtain airbags P.4-21, 4-32 Head restraints P.4-5 Manual window control (if so equipped) P.5-29 Front seats P.4-2 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-side airbag (for front seat) P.4-21, 4-32 Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-16 Armrest P.4-5 1-3 Overview Jack P.8-5 Cup holder (for the rear seat) P.5-117 Rear seat P.4-5 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Luggage area 1 Luggage area N00100501553 Trunk room light P.9-28 Tools P.8-5 Spare tire P.8-7 Overview 1-4 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Outside 1 Outside N00100602649 Windshield wipers P.5-82 Power window P.5-29 Outside rearview mirrors P.5-36 Fuel tank filler P.3-3 Engine hood P.9-4 Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-82, 9-27, 9-29 Front turn signal lights/Parking lights P.5-81, 9-27, 9-29 Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped) P.5-79, 9-27, 9-28 1-5 Overview Side turn signal lights (if so equipped) P.5-81, 9-27 Front side- marker lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-29 F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped) P.5-9 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-6 Locking and unlocking P.5-24 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Outside 1 High-mounted stop light P.9-27 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) P.5-58 Changing tires P.8-6 Size of tires and wheels P.11-5 Tire inflation pressure P.9-15 Tire rotation P.9-17 Tire chains P.9-18 Antenna P.7-44 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) P.5-62 Trunk lid P.5-27 Rear side- marker lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-30 License plate lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-31 Tail and stop lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-30 Rear turn signal lights P.5-81, 9-27, 9-30 Back-up light P.9-27, 9-30 Overview 1-6 BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... N00200702250 NOTE  These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON. Warning lights Do this Ref. Page  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. P. 5-78  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. P. 5-14  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil level. If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-78 Charging system warning light (Illuminates and intermittent sounds) Oil pressure warning light Quick index 2-1 2 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... Warning lights Do this Ref. Page or  If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully released.  If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check the brake fluid level.  If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. P. 5-76  Park your vehicle in a safe place. Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing. If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-45  Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-5764878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assistance. P. 5-77  If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-51 2 Brake warning light Selector lever position indicator in the instrument cluster flashes rapidly (once per second) or Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) Electric power steering system (EPS) warning light 2-2 Quick index BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... Warning lights Do this Ref. Page P. 5-50 Anti-lock braking system warning light  When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Test the system as described on page 5-50.  If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. P. 4-27  Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-45  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning. P. 5-54 2 SRS warning light Selector lever position indicator in the instrument cluster flashes slowly (every 2 seconds) and ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator Quick index 2-3 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving... Warning lights 2 ASC indicator Tire pressure monitoring system warning light (if so equipped) 2-4 Quick index Do this Ref. Page  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning. Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope. P. 5-49  If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. (See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.) Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.  If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. P. 5-58 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this problem occurs... If this problem occurs... N00200901978 Problem Do this Ref. Page Unable to turn the key. (except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) From “ACC” to “OFF” Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT): Check the position of the selector lever. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position. The engine does not start when the engine switch is pressed. (for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) P. 5-37 Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle. Vehicles with manual transaxle: Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal. P. 5-16 Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT): Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal. The F.A.S.T.-key does not operUse the emergency key to lock and unlock the door. ate. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or (for vehicles equipped with the change the operation mode. F.A.S.T.-key) P. 5-18, 5-19 Quick index 2-5 2 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this problem occurs... Problem 2 Cannot shift the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position. (for vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT)) The windows are fogged up. Do this Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal. Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. Vehicles equipped with the heater without air conditioning function or the manual air conditioning: 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. 2. Turn on the blower. Ref. Page P. 5-42 P. 7-6, 7-10, 7-14 Vehicles equipped with the automatic air conditioning: Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode. The engine does not start. The lights do not come on. The lights are dim. The horn does not honk. The horn sound is weak. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed. P. 8-2, 9-10 The engine is overheated. Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place. P. 8-4 The high coolant temperature warning light is illuminated. Steam comes out of the engine compartment. 2-6 Quick index BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If this problem occurs... Problem The vehicle is stuck in sand, mud or snow Do this Ref. Page Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. 2 P. 8-13 WARNING  When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.  Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure. If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out. Problem The brakes are not functioning properly after crossing a puddle or stream. Do this Ref. Page Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5 The continuously variable transmission (CVT) makes no shift change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT. initial movement of the vehicle Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of is slow when the vehicle starts your choice. moving. (for vehicles with CVT) P. 5-45 A tire is punctured. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level. 2. Replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire. P. 8-6 Quick index 2-7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General information 3 Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2 Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuel selection Fuel selection N00301000912 3 Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gasoline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank filler pipe specifically designed to accept only a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing nozzle. WARNING  Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. Whenever you refuel your vehicle, stop the engine and keep flames, sparks, and smoking materials away from the vehicle. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas. CAUTION  Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will damage the engine, catalytic converter, and the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gasoline is illegal, and will void your warranty coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, and oxygen sensors. Gasoline detergent additives In the United States, fuel suppliers are required by law to add detergents to their gas- 3-2 General information oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and your emission-control system working properly. Octane requirement Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON. Oxygenated gasoline Gasoline sold at some service stations contains oxygenates such as ethanol, although the oxygenates may not be identified by those names. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in your vehicle. Ethanol (Gasohol) A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alcohol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used in your vehicle, provided the octane number is at least as high as that recommended for unleaded gasoline. Methanol Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline containing methanol (wood alcohol). Using this type of alcohol could adversely affect the vehicle’s performance and damage critical parts of the vehicle’s fuel system. Reformulated gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and is specially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline has no adverse effect on vehicle performance or the durability of the engine and fuel system. MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl) MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasolines to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends using gasolines without MMT. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Filling the fuel tank Use of gasolines blended with MMT may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Sulfur in gasoline Your vehicle may have been designed to satisfy California’s low-emission regulations based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. Gasoline sold in parts of the country other than California is allowed to have a higher sulfur content. Using such gasoline could adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic converter and cause the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) to come on. Illumination of this indicator while using high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer may suggest using a different, lowersulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to determine if the problem is fuel-related. NOTE WARNING  Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling during idling, abnormal engine noise, and poor acceleration. If you experience any of these problems, try using a different brand of gasoline. If the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible by the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel system and engine, resulting in hard starting and poor acceleration. If these problems occur, you are advised to add a detergent additive to the gasoline when you refuel the vehicle. The additive will remove the deposits, thereby returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an unsuitable additive could make an engine malfunction. For details, please contact the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Filling the fuel tank N00301101981 WARNING  When handling fuel, comply with the safety regulations displayed by garages and filling stations.  Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. When refueling your vehicle, always turn the engine off and keep away from flames, sparks, and smoking materials. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas.  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap, be sure to get rid of your body’s static electricity by touching a metal part of the car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on your body could create a spark that ignites fuel vapor.  Perform the whole refueling process (opening the fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by yourself; do not let any other person near the fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to help you and that person was carrying static electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until refueling is finished. If you moved away and did something else (for example, sitting on a seat) part-way through the refueling process, you could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity.  Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel contains toxic substances.  Keep the doors and windows closed while refueling the vehicle. If they were open, fuel vapor could get into the cabin. General information 3-3 3 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Filling the fuel tank Fuel tank capacity 3 WARNING  Since the fuel system may be under pressure, remove the fuel tank filler cap slowly. This relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have built up in the fuel tank. If the fuel tank filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you or others. 9.2 gal (35 L) Refueling 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear driver side of your vehicle. The fuel tank filler door can be opened from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank filler door release lever located at the left side of the driver’s seat. 1- Remove 2- Close 4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank filler cap cord on the hook located on the inside surface of the fuel tank filler door. 5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly on correct handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it goes. CAUTION  Your vehicle can only be operated using unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and catalytic converter damage will result if leaded gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and consequently, this must never be attempted. 3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly turning the fuel tank filler cap counterclockwise. 3-4 General information 6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do not add more fuel. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle CAUTION  To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paintwork. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it off with a soft cloth. 7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap slowly clockwise until you hear clicking sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler door closed. WARNING  Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is securely closed. If the fuel tank filler cap were loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a fire. NOTE  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while driving, the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) may come on when the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs a self check. Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until you hear at least 3 clicks. The indicator will go off after several driving cycles. If the indicator does not go off, contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Modifications to and racing of your vehicle N00301600194 CAUTION  If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, use only the fuel tank filler cap specified for your model vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety and durability. Modifications using non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may affect the performance, safety and/or durability of your vehicle, and may violate applicable state and/or federal regulations. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICATIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR VEHICLE ARE NOT UNDER WARRANTY. COVERED Examples of modifications to your vehicle that can cause damage or performance problems include the following:  Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts  Failure to use required fuel and fluids  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust, emission, suspension, engine, drive train or electrical wiring systems  Modification of any onboard computer/control module, including reprogramming, or replacing/adding chips to any onboard computer/control module Review the Warranty and Maintenance Manual for further details regarding warranty coverage. Installation of accessories N00301700212 CAUTION  Before any electrical or electronic accessories are installed, consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. General information 3-5 3 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts 3  The installation of accessories, optional parts, etc., should only be performed within the limits prescribed by law, and in accordance with the guidelines and warnings contained within the documents accompanying this vehicle. Only Mitsubishi Motors approved accessories should be fitted to your vehicle.  Improper installation of electrical parts could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems” section within this owner’s manual.  Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle without an external antenna may cause electrical system interference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.  Tires and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used. Refer to the “Specifications” section for information regarding wheel and tire sizes. WARNING  While driving, do not use a cellular phone in a way that hinders safe driving. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident. Refer to and follow all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving. Due to the large number of accessory and replacement parts provided by different manufacturers in the market, it is not always possible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to check whether the attachment or installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts affects the driving safety of your Mitsubishi-vehicle. N00301800183 Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer before installation of any General information CAUTION  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer concerning any such accessory fitment or modification. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or improper installation methods are used (protective fuses not included, etc.), electronic devices may be adversely affected, resulting in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident. Important point! Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 3-6 accessory which may involve modification of the electrical or fuel systems. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts N00301400219 Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are designed and manufactured to meet high standards of performance, and are recommended for all of your maintenance needs. Also available from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are a wide variety of accessories to personalize your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors authorized accessories to choose from to tailor your new vehicle to your own personal preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s Parts Manager has information on various audio systems, protection items, as well as interior and exterior accessories available for your specific model. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements California Perchlorate Materials Requirements N00300100017 3 Certain components of this vehicle, such as airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may apply. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. General information 3-7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat and restraint systems Seats .................................................................................................4-2 Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2 Front seats ........................................................................................4-2 Rear seat ...........................................................................................4-5 Head restraints .................................................................................4-5 Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-7 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12 Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-12 Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-13 Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-21 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21 4 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seats Seats and restraint systems Seats N00408401577 4 1 - Front seats  To adjust the seat forward or backward  Page 4-3  To adjust the seatbacks  Page 4-3  To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat only, if so equipped)  Page 4-4  Heated seats (if so equipped)  Page 4-4 2 - Rear seat  Armrest  Page 4-5 N00401601235 Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety features that help protect you and your passengers in an accident. Seat belts are the most important safety device. When worn properly, seat belts can reduce the chance of serious injury or death in various types of crashes. For added protection during a severe frontal collision, your vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with airbags for the driver and passengers. The seats, head restraints, and door locks also are safety equipment, which must be used correctly. Seat and restraint systems Front seats N00401800403 Position the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel and safely operate the vehicle. Always check the following before you drive:  That everyone in your vehicle is properly wearing their seat belt.  That infants and small children are properly secured in an appropriate child restraint system in the rear seat.  That all doors are fully closed and locked.  That seatbacks are upright, with head restraints properly adjusted. Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or death in all motor vehicle accidents. However, you can help reduce the risk of injury or death by following the instructions in this manual. 4-2 WARNING  Do not place objects under the seats. This could prevent the seat from locking securely, and it could lead to an accident. It may also cause damage to the seat or other parts. WARNING  Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Front seats WARNING  After adjusting the seat, make sure that seat is securely locked into position.  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver’s airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.  To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death during deployment of the passenger’s airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the front passenger’s seat as far back as possible.  Always place children 12 years old and under in the rear seat and use appropriate child restraint systems. To adjust the seatbacks CAUTION  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay careful attention to the rear seat passengers. To adjust the seat forward or backward N00401900316 Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in place. CAUTION CAUTION  Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unexpected accident might occur.  Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an accident.  When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your hand or leg. N00402000369 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then lean backward to a comfortable position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in place. WARNING  To make sure that the seat is securely locked, try to move it forward or backward without using the adjusting lever.  The reclining mechanism used in the seatback is spring loaded, and will cause the seatback to return quickly to the vertical position when the lock lever is operated. When pulling the lever, sit close to the seatback or hold the seatback with your hand to control its return motion. Seat and restraint systems 4-3 4 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Front seats WARNING 4  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death. 1- To move the seat cushion up 2- To move the seat cushion down Heated seats (if so equipped) N00435601418 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat only, if so equipped) N00402100243 To adjust the seat height, turn the dial as shown in the illustration. 4-4 Seat and restraint systems The heated seats can be operated by pushing the switch when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. The indicator light (A) will illuminate while the heater is on. 1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating) 2Heater off 3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm) WARNING  Persons who are unable to feel temperature change or skin pain due to age, illness, injury, medication, alcohol use, fatigue or other physical conditions or who have sensitive skin may suffer burns when using the heated seat even at low temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, people with such conditions must use care when using the heated seat. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Rear seat CAUTION  Switch off the heated seats when not in use. Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for quick heating. After the seat has become warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” position to keep it warm. Slight variations in the seat temperature may be felt while using the heated seats. This is caused by the operation of the heater’s internal thermostat and does not indicate a malfunction.  Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into the seat.  Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other insulating material on the seat while using the heater; doing so can cause the heater element to overheat.  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic solvents; doing so can cause damage not only to the surface of the seat, but also to the heater.  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use. Head restraints Rear seat N00402501257 Arm rest N00403001334 To use the arm rest, tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to “Cup holder” on page 5-117. N00404301637 Padded head restraints for the seats can reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear. The head restraints are equipped in the illustrated position. To maximize the effectiveness of your head restraint, adjust the front seatback to the upright position and the head restraint to the proper position. Sit back against the seatback with your head close to the head restraint. NOTE  Never sit on an arm rest. Doing so could damage the arm rest. Seat and restraint systems 4-5 4 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Head restraints WARNING 4  Driving without the head restraints in place can cause you and your passengers serious injury or death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when the seat is occupied.  In order to minimize the risk of a neck injury due to a rear impact, the front seatback must be adjusted to the upright position and the head restraint to the proper position before vehicle operation. The driver should never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.  Never place a cushion or similar device on the seatback. This can adversely affect head restraint performance by increasing the distance between your head and the restraint. 4-6 Seat and restraint systems Adjustment of the head restraint height (front seats) To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, adjust the head restraint height so that the center of the restraint is at your ear level when seated. Any person too tall for the restraint to reach their ear level when seated should raise the restraint to the highest locked position.  To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.  To lower the restraint, push down on it while pressing the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrow.  After adjusting the height, push down on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position. To remove Press the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrows. Then pull the head restraint up and out of the seatback. WARNING  To help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident, the head restraints must be properly installed and positioned to proper height before vehicle operation. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts To install First check that the head restraint is facing in the right direction as shown in the previous illustration, and then insert it into the seatback. Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint locks into place. CAUTION WARNING  The shape and size of the head restraint differs according to the seat. Always use the correct head restraint provided for the seat and do not install the head restraint in the wrong direction. CAUTION  Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out as shown in the illustration. Then pull the head restraint up to make sure that it is locked in place and will not come out of the seatback. Seat belts N00406001481 Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help reduce the risk of injury to the driver and passenger in the event of an accident. Always use the provided seat belts. Carefully review the following information for proper seat belt usage.  To help reduce the risk of injury or death in an accident, seat belts and child restraint systems must always be used. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13 for additional information.  Never use one seat belt for more than one person.  Never carry more people in your vehicle than there are seat belts.  Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.  Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put it behind you or under your arm.  Always wear the lap belt as low as possible across your hips, not around your waist.  Never modify or alter the seat belts in your vehicle.  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver’s airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle. Seat and restraint systems 4-7 4 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts WARNING 4  To reduce the risk to a front seat passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying airbag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated all the way back and upright in their seat, and moves the seat as far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page 4-21 for additional information.  Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.  Children 12 years old and under should always ride in the rear seat and be properly restrained. This reduces their risk of serious injury or death in an accident, especially due to a deploying front passenger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13 for additional information.  Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing child safety seat and positioned in the rear seat. 4-8 Seat and restraint systems WARNING  In the event of an accident, all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attachment hardware, should be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to determine whether replacement is necessary. Seat belt instructions N00406200460 All seats are equipped with a seat belt which uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with an emergency locking retractor. This system is designed to provide both comfort and safety. It permits full extension and automatic retraction of the belts during normal vehicle operation. A sensing device inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the retractor in the event of a sudden change in the vehicle’s motion. NOTE  For instructions on installing a child restraint system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt” on page 4-18. 1. Occupants should always sit back in their seats with their backs against the upright seatback. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death during deployment of the airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle. The front passenger seat should also be moved as far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust the seat forward or backward” on page 4-3. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts WARNING  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death. 2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the webbing so that it easily pulls across your body. 3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate. Push the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is locked securely in the buckle. 4 NOTE NOTE  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled out, pull it once with force and let it retract all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. 4. The lap part of the belt must always be worn low and snug across the hips. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to take up any slack in the lap belt.  With the exception of the seat belt for the driver, the seat belts in all other seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function (see page 4-18). When the ALR function has been activated, the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4. WARNING  Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and is worn as low as possible across the hips, not around the waist. Failure to follow this instruction will increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident. Seat and restraint systems 4-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts WARNING  Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt performance. 4 5. To release the belt, press the button on the buckle and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists in the webbing. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts. Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light N00418400384 A tone and warning light are used to remind the driver to fasten the seat belt. without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a warning light will come on and a tone will sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind you to fasten your seat belt. If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still unfastened, the warning light will blink and the tone will sound intermittently until the seat belt is fastened. WARNING  In order to reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, always fasten your own seat belt. Do not allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or she is also seated and fastening a seat belt. Children should additionally be restrained in a secure child restraint system. NOTE  If the seat belt subsequently remains unfastened, the warning light and the tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a stop. Front passenger seat belt warning light N00418300237 If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON 4-10 Seat and restraint systems The front passenger seat belt warning light is located at shown in the illustration. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, this indicator normally comes on and goes off a few seconds later. The light comes on when a person sits on the front passenger seat but does not fasten the seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is subsequently fastened. WARNING  When a child booster seat is used on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat belt warning light will not come on, if the seat belt is not fastened when the booster seat is used. Confirm that the child is wearing the seat belt properly.  Do not install any accessory or sticker that makes the light difficult to see. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belts Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (front seats) N00406300357 The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) and slide the anchor to the desired position. Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into position. Installation WARNING  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when the vehicle is not in motion.  Make sure the anchor is securely locked in position after adjusting it. 1. Unfasten the button (A) of the seat belt guide strap. Put the seat belt webbing through the seat belt guide strap and fasten the button. Seat belt guide strap (rear seat) N00419301055 The seat belt guide straps are equipped on the seatback. The seat belt guide strap will provide comfort by keeping away the belt webbing from your neck. CAUTION WARNING  Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder without touching your neck. The shoulder belt should not be able to fall off your shoulder. Failure to follow this instruction can adversely affect seat belt performance and increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.  Make sure the part of the seat belt webbing you inserted into the seat belt guide strap is not twisted. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt performance. Seat and restraint systems 4-11 4 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Seat belt use during pregnancy 2. Fasten the seat belt and make sure it fits snugly across your shoulder. 4 WARNING  The extender should only be used if the existing belt is not long enough. Anyone who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an extender can adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.  When not required, the extender must be removed and stowed. Seat belt use during pregnancy Seat belt extender N00406800147 N00406700205 If your seat belt is not long enough, even when fully extended, a seat belt extender must be obtained. The extender may be used for either of the front seats. Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, pregnant women are more likely to be seriously injured or killed in an accident if they do not wear seat belts. WARNING  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to pregnant women and unborn children in an accident, pregnant women should always wear a seat belt. The lap portion of the seat belt should be worn snug and low across the hips and below the rounding. Consult your doctor if you have any additional questions or concerns. 4-12 Seat and restraint systems Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems N00417701752 The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner system and force limiter system. Pre-tensioner system The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner system. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side collision or when a rollover or overturning of the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner system operates simultaneously with the deployment of the front airbags, side airbags or curtain airbags. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within the seat belt retractors (A). When activated, the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt webbing and increase seat belt performance. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in ON. The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes the following components: 12345- SRS warning light Front impact sensors Seat belt pre-tensioner Side impact sensors Airbag control unit The airbag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate under the same conditions as the airbag control unit. When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, some smoke is released and a loud noise will be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, as it may cause some temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems. The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in certain collisions, even though the vehicle may appear to be severely damaged. Such non-activation does not mean that something is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather that the collision forces were not severe enough to activate the system. WARNING  The seat belt pre-tensioner system is designed to work only once. After the seat belt pre-tensioners have been activated, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire seat belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. SRS warning light N00408700137 This warning light tells you if there is a problem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS warning light” on page 4-27. Force limiter system N00408900142 In the event of an accident, the seat belt force limiter system will help reduce the force applied to the driver and front seat passenger. Child restraint systems N00407101753 When transporting infants or small children in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint system must always be used. This is required by law in the U.S. and Canada. Seat and restraint systems 4-13 4 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems 4 Child restraint systems specifically designed for infants and small children are offered by several manufacturers. Choose only a child restraint system with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufacturer’s statement of compliance on the box and child restraint system itself. The child restraint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight and height, and should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. For detailed information, refer to the instruction manual accompanying the child restraint system. Guidelines for child restraint system selection All children should be properly restrained in a restraint device that offers the maximum protection for their size and age. Be sure to check local, state, or provincial requirements for child size and age that may vary from the recommendations listed below.  Children less than 1 year old and who weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat. 4-14 Seat and restraint systems  Children older than 1 year of age and who weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must be in a forward-facing restraint used only in the rear seat.  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should use a suitable child seat or a booster seat in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-andshoulder belt fits them properly. WARNING  All children must be seated in the rear seat, and properly restrained. Accident statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat, rather than in the front seat.  Be sure to select a child restraint system that is appropriate not only for the child’s size and age but also for your vehicle. Some child restraint systems may not fit your vehicle properly. WARNING  Any child who is too large to use a child restraint system should ride in the rear seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt properly. The shoulder belt must be positioned over the shoulder and across the chest, not across their neck, and with the lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips, not across their stomach. If necessary, a booster seat should be used to help achieve a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use a booster seat that is certified as complying with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations.  Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop. BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems Airbag WARNING  Your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger’s airbag. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger’s airbag. During deployment of that airbag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraint systems or infant restraint systems must only be used in the rear seat. WARNING  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If one must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child. WARNING  It is important to use an approved rearfacing infant restraint until the infant is one year old (unless the infant outgrows the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s neck and spine to develop enough to support the weight of their head in the event of an accident.  When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer and follow the directions in this manual. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death to your child in an accident or sudden stop.  After installation, push and pull the child restraint system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the child or other occupants in the event of an accident or sudden stop.  When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt, or remove it from the vehicle, in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident. Seat and restraint systems 4-15 4 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems NOTE 4  Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it in the rear seat to ensure proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some manufacturer’s child restraint systems. If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has been tightened, choose another manufacturer’s child restraint system. Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the child restraint system that you have, the child restraint system can be attached using one of the following 2 methods: • Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the child restraint system is compatible with the LATCH system (See page 4-16). • Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-18). 4-16 Seat and restraint systems Installing a child restraint system using the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for children) system N00418801183 Lower anchor locations The outboard seating positions in the rear seat of your vehicle are equipped with lower anchors for attaching child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system. Tether anchor locations N00418901230 Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear seat. These are for securing a child restraint system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your vehicle. BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems Examples of child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system N00419000202 3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the child restraint system into the lower anchors (C) in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Remember, the lower anchors provided with your vehicle are designed to secure suitable child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system in the outboard positions of the rear seat only. The anchor connectors are NOT designed to secure a suitable child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat. A- Rear-facing child restraint system B- Front-facing child restraint system C- Child restraint system lower anchor connectors D- Tether strap (These are only examples.) Using the LATCH system N00419101297 1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, remove the head restraint from the location where you wish to install the child restraint system. 2. Open the gap a little between the seat cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with your hand to locate the lower anchors (C). ABCD- Vehicle seat cushion Vehicle seatback Lower anchor Connector NOTE  In order to secure a child restraint system compatible with the LATCH system, you must use the lower anchor points in the outboard positions of the rear seat. To secure a child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’s center seat belt. WARNING  If there is any foreign material in or around the lower anchors, remove it before installing the child restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is away from, not looped through or otherwise interfering with, the child restraint system. If foreign matter is not removed and/or the seat belt interferes with the child restraint system, the child restraint system will not be secured properly, could detach and move forward in the event of sudden braking or an accident, and could result in injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.  When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust the seat where the child restraint system is installed. 4. Open the cover for the tether anchor by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (4). Seat and restraint systems 4-17 4 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems 5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child restraint system to the anchor (F) as illustrated below (5) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened. 4 Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt (with emergency/automatic locking mechanism) N00407301540 6. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to ensure it is firmly secured. WARNING  Child restraint system tether anchors are designed only to withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 4-18 Seat and restraint systems With the exception of the driver, the seat belt in all other seating positions can be converted from normal Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. This means that when you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function. Always use the ALR child restraint installation function when you install a child restraint system using the seat belt. Children 12 years old and under should always be restrained in the rear seat, whenever possible, although the front passenger seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode. WARNING  When you install a child restraint system using the seat belt, always make sure the retractor has been switched to the ALR child restraint installation function. The ALR function will keep the child restraint system tightly secured to the seat. Failure to convert the retractor to the ALR function may allow the child restraint system to move forward during sudden braking or an accident, resulting in serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems WARNING  Never remove the buckle (A) for the rear center seat from the rubber belt (B). If the buckle is detached from the rubber belt, the ALR mode may become deactivated and a child restraint system used in the rear center seat position may not be secured, resulting in serious injury or death to a child using the child restraint system and/or other occupants. Always make sure that the buckle is passed under the rubber belt as shown in the illustration below. Installation 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat where you wish to install it. To help assure proper fitting of the child restraint system, always remove the head restraint. 2. Route the seat belt through the child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure you hear a “click” when you insert the latch plate into the buckle. 3. To activate the ALR child restraint installation function, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out of the retractor until it stops. Then let the belt feed back into the retractor. 4 4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is in the ALR function, you will not be able to pull it out. If the webbing can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR function has not been activated and you will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. Seat and restraint systems 4-19 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child restraint systems 4 5. After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt allowing the slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child restraint system will not be secure. It may help to put your weight on the child restraint system and/or push on its seatback while pulling up on the belt (See illustration). 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint system to the tether anchor (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened. 9. To remove a child restraint system from the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, remove the child from the restraint. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt from the restraint and let the belt fully retract. 10. Reinstall the head restraint. Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-5. Children who have outgrown child restraint systems N00407601686 WARNING If your child restraint system requires the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in accordance with the following procedures. 6. Open the cover from the tether anchor installation point by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (6). 4-20 Seat and restraint systems  Child restraint system tether anchors are designed only to withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 8. Before putting your child in the restraint, push and pull the restraint in all directions to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this before each use. If the child restraint system is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 through 7. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses their stomach, a commercially available booster seat must be used to raise the child so that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the lap belt remains positioned low across their hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations. BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Maintenance and inspection of seat belts WARNING  Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system, to reduce their risk of serious injury or death in an accident.  A child should never be left unattended in, or unsupervised around, your vehicle. When you leave the vehicle, always take the child out as well.  Children can die from heat stroke if left or trapped inside the vehicle, especially on hot days.  Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children.  Never allow children to play in the trunk of your vehicle. Maintenance and inspection of seat belts N00407000364 The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow them to retract until completely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or redye the belts. The color may rub off and the webbing strength may be affected. Regularly check your seat belt buckles and their release mechanisms for positive engagement and release of the latch plate. Check the retractors for automatic locking when in the Automatic Locking Retractor function. The entire seat belt assembly should be replaced if the webbing shows any obvious cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any section of the webbing from broken fibers, or severe fading from sunlight. All of these conditions indicate a weakening of the belt, which may adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident. WARNING  Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the seat belt assemblies. This work should be done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer perform the work could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could result in a serious injury or death in an accident. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag N00407701850 This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which includes airbags for the driver and passengers. The SRS front airbags are designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems by providing those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS front airbags, together with sensors at the front of the vehicle and sensors attached to the front seats, form an advanced airbag system. The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the forward movement of the driver’s lower legs and provide increased overall body protection in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags are also designed to supplement the seat belts. The SRS side airbags provide the driver and front passenger with protection against chest injuries by deploying the bag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide the driver and passengers on the front seat and rear outboard seat with protection against head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions and by deploying both curtain airbags when a rollover is detected. The curtain airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of complete and partial ejec- Seat and restraint systems 4-21 4 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag tion from the vehicle through side windows in both side impact and rollover type accidents. 4 The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use of the seat belts. For maximum protection in all types of accidents, seat belts must ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or rides in this vehicle (with infants and small children in an appropriate child restraint system in the rear seat, and older children buckled in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13. WARNING  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. • Seat belts help keep the driver and passengers properly positioned. This reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, and reduces the risk of serious injuries or death when the airbags inflate. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained or improperly restrained driver or passengers can move forward into direct contact with, or within close proximity to, the airbag when it begins to inflate. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injuries or death if the occupant comes in contact with the airbag at this time. 4-22 Seat and restraint systems WARNING • Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in rear impact collisions, and in lowerspeed frontal collisions because the airbags are not designed to inflate in those situations. • Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle in a collision or rollover.  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED. • A driver or front passenger sitting too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment can be seriously injured or killed. • Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. If the driver and front passenger are not properly seated and restrained, the airbag may not provide the proper protection, and can cause serious injuries or death when it inflates. • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death due to a deploying driver’s airbag, always properly wear your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible, maintaining a position that still allows the driver to have good control of the steering wheel, brake, accelerator, and other vehicle controls. WARNING • To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying passenger’s airbag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated upright and all the way back in the seat, and positions the seat as far back as possible. • Seat all infants and children in the rear seat, properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. Do not sit on the edge of the seat or sit with your lower legs too close to the instrument panel, or lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or the instrument panel.  Do not put your feet or legs on or against the instrument panel. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag WARNING  Infants and small children should never ride unrestrained, or lean against the instrument panel. They should never ride held in your arms or on your lap. They can be seriously injured or killed in an accident, especially when the airbags inflate. Seat all infants and children in the rear seat, properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13. WARNING  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger’s airbag. During deployment of that airbag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraint systems or infant restraint systems must only be used in the rear seat. WARNING  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If they must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child. Airbag WARNING  Older children should be seated in the rear seat with their seat belt properly worn, and with an appropriate booster seat if needed. Refer to “Children who have outgrown child restraint systems” on page 4-20. Seat and restraint systems 4-23 4 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag When the impact sensors detect a sufficient front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s), the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. How the Supplemental Restraint System works N00407801587 When the airbag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be deployed. The SRS includes the following components: 4 10- Front impact sensors 11- Side impact sensors 12- Curtain airbag modules 1234567- Airbag module (Driver) Passenger’s airbag off indicator SRS warning light Airbag module (Passenger) Side airbag modules Driver’s seat position sensor Passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system 8- Airbag module (Driver’s knee) 9- Airbag control unit The airbag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in ON. The airbags will operate under the same conditions as the airbag control unit. When airbags deploy, some smoke is released accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale the smoke as it may cause temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems. An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you may not even notice that the airbag was inflated. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, and does not prevent people from leaving the vehicle. CAUTION  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. In certain situations, contact with an inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abrasions, and bruises. Event Data Recording N00418600256 This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). 4-24 Seat and restraint systems BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:  How various systems in your vehicle were operating;  Whether or not the driver and front passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,  How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. “SRS warning light” on page 4-27. NOTE  EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. WARNING  If the SRS warning light comes on, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.  Please observe the following instructions to ensure that the driver’s seat position sensor can operate correctly. • Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2. • Do not recline the seatback more than necessary when driving. • Do not place metallic objects or luggage under the front seat.  If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. Driver’s seat position sensor N00417900223 The driver’s seat position sensor is attached to the seat rail and provides the airbag control unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft position. The airbag control unit controls deployment of the driver’s front airbag in accordance with the information it receives from this sensor. If there is a problem involving the driver’s seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to Passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system N00418000364 The passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system is attached to the front passenger seat cushion and provides the airbag control unit with information regarding the occupant on the front passenger seat. The airbag control unit controls deployment of the Seat and restraint systems 4-25 4 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag 4 passenger’s front airbag in accordance with the information it receives from this system. The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy in an impact when the system senses no occupant on the front passenger seat or a child in a child restraint system. In this case, the passenger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate. Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on page 4-26. If there is a problem involving the passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-27. WARNING  If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible: • The SRS warning light does not initially come on when the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions. • [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in ON. • The SRS warning light does not go out after several seconds. 4-26 Seat and restraint systems WARNING • The SRS warning light comes on while you are driving.  To ensure that the passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system can sense correctly, observe the following instructions. Failure to follow these instructions can adversely affect the performance of the passenger’s airbag system. • Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2. • Do not recline the seatback more than necessary. • Never have more than one person (adult or child) sitting on the seat. • Do not place anything between the seat and the floor console. • When attaching a child restraint system, secure it firmly. • Do not place luggage or other objects on the seat. • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion. • Do not modify or replace the seat and seat belt. • Do not place luggage or other objects under the seat. • Do not place and use an electronic device such as a computer on the seat. • Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other objects into it. • Do not remove the seat cushion skin. WARNING • If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it and dry the seat immediately.  If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. Passenger’s airbag off indicator N00418101359 The passenger’s airbag off indicator is located at shown in the illustration. The indicator normally comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes out a few seconds later. In the following situations, the indicator will stay on to show that the passenger front airbag is not operational.  The front passenger seat is not occupied. BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag  The system senses that a child is using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. When the passenger’s seat occupant classification sensor system senses there is a person seated in the front passenger seat, the indicator goes out to show that the passenger’s front airbag is operational. WARNING  If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have the airbag system in your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible: • The passenger’s airbag off indicator comes on when an adult is sitting on the front passenger seat. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does not come on when the front passenger seat is not occupied. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does not come on when a child is in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator comes on and goes out repeatedly. WARNING  Do not attach any accessory to your vehicle that makes the passenger’s airbag off indicator difficult or impossible to see. You must be able to see the passenger’s airbag off indicator and verify the status of the passenger’s airbag system. SRS warning light N00408300579 There is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. The system checks itself every time the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS warning light will come on for several seconds and then go out. This is normal and means the system is working properly. If there is a problem involving one or more of the SRS components, the warning light will come on and stay on. The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system. 4 WARNING  If any of the following conditions occur, there may be a problem with the SRS airbags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and they may not function properly in a collision or may suddenly activate without a collision: • Even when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON, the SRS warning light does not come on or it remains on. • The SRS warning light comes on while driving. The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-tensioners are designed to help reduce the risk of serious injury or death in certain collisions. If either of the above conditions occurs, immediately have your vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Driver’s and passenger’s front airbag system N00407900321 The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. Seat and restraint systems 4-27 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag 4 The front passenger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panel above the glove compartment. The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at the same time. However, the front passenger’s airbag does not deploy when the front passenger seat is not occupied or when the system senses that a child is in the child restraint system. Driver Front passenger Driver’s knee airbag system N00404500036 The driver’s knee airbag is located under the steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is designed to deploy at the same time as the driver’s front airbag. 4-28 Seat and restraint systems 午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Deployment of front airbags N00408001658 The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when … Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical condition is shown in the illustration to the left. The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are designed to deploy only in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions within the shaded area between the arrows in the illustration to the right. 4 Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is above a specific threshold level. The threshold level is approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is below this threshold level, the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This threshold level may also be higher if the vehicle hits something that absorbs the impact, either by bending or moving (for example, another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard rail). The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful, and can cause serious injury or death if you are too close to the deploying airbag. Accordingly, it is important that you always wear the available seat belt. Seat and restraint systems 4-29 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when … 4 In certain types of front collisions, the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the impact and deform in order to help protect the occupants. Some typical situations where the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy are shown in the illustrations. Since the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag do not protect the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck Oblique frontal impact Side collision to your vehicle The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are not designed to deploy in situations where Seat and restraint systems Since the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear the your seat belts properly. Rear end collision to your vehicle The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when … 4-30 they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustration. Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when … The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may deploy if the underside of the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe impact (undercarriage impact). Some typical situations are shown in the illustration. Since the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may deploy in certain types of unexpected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, and these unexpected impacts can move you out of position, it is important to always wear your seat belts properly. When worn properly, seat belts can help maintain your distance from the airbags when they begin to inflate. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injury or death if you are close to the deploying airbag. Collision with an elevated median/island or curb 4 Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole WARNING Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground WARNING  Do not attach anything to the steering wheel’s padded cover, such as trim material, badges, etc. These could strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.  Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the instrument panel above the glove compartment. Such items could strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.  Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of, the windshield. They could restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and injure an occupant, when the airbag inflates.  Do not attach additional keys or accessories (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the ignition key. Such objects could prevent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating normally or could be propelled to cause serious injury if the airbag inflates.  Do not attach accessories to the lower portion of the driver’s side instrument panel. Such objects could prevent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating normally or could be propelled to cause serious injury if the airbag inflates. Seat and restraint systems 4-31 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Side airbag system 4 Curtain airbag system N00408100421 N00419201302 The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and front passenger seatbacks. The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat. The curtain airbags are contained in the front pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the seat. Also, when the airbag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags will deploy. WARNING  Do not attempt to remove, install, disassemble or repair the SRS airbags.  Do not place objects, such as packages or pets, between the airbags and the driver or the front passenger. Such objects can adversely affect airbag performance, or cause serious injury or death when the airbag deploys.  Immediately after airbag inflation, some parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do not touch them. You could otherwise be burned.  The airbag system is designed to work only once. After the airbags deploy, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire airbag system must be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 4-32 Seat and restraint systems A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehicles equipped with side airbags. WARNING  The side airbags and curtain airbags can cause serious injury or death to anyone too close to the airbag when it deploys. To reduce the risk of injury from a deploying side airbag and curtain airbag, all occupants must be properly restrained and seated well back, upright, and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean against the door. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag WARNING  Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other object around the part where the curtain airbag deploys, such as on the windshield, side door glass or front and rear pillars and roof side rail. When the curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or other object may be hurled with great force or the curtain airbag may not inflate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. WARNING  In order to reduce the risk of injury from a deploying side airbag, do not allow any rear seat passengers to hold onto the back of either front seat. Special care should be taken with children.  Do not place any objects around the area where the side airbags deploy. Such objects can interfere with proper side airbag deployment, and cause injury during deployment of the side airbag.  Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on the back of either front seat. They can interfere with proper side airbag deployment. WARNING  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats that have side airbags. Covers can interfere with proper side airbag deployment and adversely affect side airbag performance. WARNING  Never install a rear-facing child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Rearfacing child restraint systems MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.  Front-facing child restraint systems should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. If a front-facing child restraint system must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, and make sure that the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained and away from the door.  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit close to the passenger door, even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. The child’s head should also not lean against or be close to the section of the seatback where the side airbag and curtain airbag are located. It is dangerous if the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys. Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead to serious injury or death to the child.  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side airbag or curtain airbag components should be done only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk of a serious injury or death. Improper work methods can cause accidental side airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or render a side airbag or curtain airbag inoperable. Either of these situations could result in serious injury or death. Seat and restraint systems 4-33 4 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Deployment of side airbag and curtain airbag N00408201588 4 The side airbag and curtain airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when... The side airbag and curtain airbag are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe side impact to the middle of the passenger compartment. Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy. Typical situations are shown in the illustration. Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body’s side structure When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle (Curtain airbag only) 4-34 Seat and restraint systems The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in an accident. The SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly. The side airbag and curtain airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when... In certain types of side collisions, the side airbag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the impact and to deform in order to help protect the occupants. There are also cases where the side airbag and curtain airbag may not deploy at the same time, depending on the location of the impact. Some typical situations where the side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy are shown in the illustrations on the following page. Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always wear the seat belts properly. Side impact in an area away from the passenger compartment Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collision with the side of vehicle Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag Oblique side impact Head-on collision SRS servicing N00408501741 WARNING Rear end collision to your vehicle Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag only) Pitch end over end The side airbag and curtain airbag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when... The side airbag and curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustration. Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.  Any maintenance performed on or near the components of the SRS should be performed only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else to do any service, inspection, maintenance or repair on any SRS components or wiring. Similarly, no part of the SRS should ever be handled, removed or disposed by anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper work methods on the SRS components or wiring could result in an accidental airbag deployment or could make the SRS inoperable. Either of these situations could result in serious injury or death.  Do not modify your steering wheel or any other SRS component or related vehicle part. For example, replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications to the front bumper or body structure can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury.  If your vehicle has received any damage, you should have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to make sure it is in proper working order. Seat and restraint systems 4-35 4 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag WARNING 4  Do not modify your front seats, center pillar or center console. Such modifications can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury. Also, if you discover any tear or open seam in the seat fabric near the side airbag, have the seat inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  If you have found any scratch, crack or damage to the portion of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, you should have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to another person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the applicable sections in this owner’s manual.  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can be made safe for disposal.  If any of the following parts needs to be modified for use by a handicapped person, the advanced airbag system will be greatly affected. Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. • Driver’s seat • Front passenger seat • Front seat belt 4-36 Seat and restraint systems NOTE • Steering wheel • Instrument panel [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064 [For vehicles sold in Canada] To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 Warning label N00408600383 Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS are located in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. * - Located in the passenger’s side as well. BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Features and controls Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2 Keys .................................................................................................5-2 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9 Door locks ......................................................................................5-24 Power door locks ...........................................................................5-25 Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-26 Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-27 Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-28 Manual window control (if so equipped)........................................5-29 Power window control ...................................................................5-29 Parking brake .................................................................................5-32 Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-33 Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-34 Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-36 Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-37 Starting the engine .........................................................................5-38 Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-40 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-42 Service brake .................................................................................5-46 Hill start assist ................................................................................5-47 Brake assist system ........................................................................5-49 Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-49 Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-51 Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-52 Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-54 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) ..........................5-58 Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-62 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-64 Multi-information display .............................................................5-65 Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-75 Indicators .......................................................................................5-76 Warning lights ................................................................................5-76 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-79 Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-81 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-82 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-82 Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-82 Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-84 Horn switch ...................................................................................5-85 Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-85 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).......................................5-85 USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-105 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-109 12 V power outlets ....................................................................... 5-110 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) ............... 5-110 Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-115 Storage spaces .............................................................................. 5-116 Cup holders .................................................................................. 5-117 Bottle holders ............................................................................... 5-118 Convenience hook ....................................................................... 5-118 Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-119 5 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Break-in recommendations Break-in recommendations Keys N00508701382 5 Advanced automobile manufacturing techniques permit you to operate your new vehicle without requiring a long break-in period of low-speed driving. However, you can add to the future performance and economy of your vehicle by observing the following precautions during the first 300 miles (500 km). Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during the break-in period.  Avoid revving the engine.  Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts, sudden acceleration, prolonged highspeed driving and sudden braking. These would have a detrimental effect on the engine and also cause increased fuel and oil consumption, which could result in malfunction of the engine components. Be particularly careful to avoid full acceleration while in low shift position (low gears).  Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load precautions” on page 6-10.)  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. 5-2 Features and controls N00508801703 Type 1 Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and keyless entry system 2- Key number plate Type 3 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer 2- Key number plate Type 2 Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys are provided. Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency key in a safe place together as a set of spare keys. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) NOTE 1- F.A.S.T.-key (with electronic immobilizer and keyless entry system function) 2- Emergency key 3- Key number plate NOTE  The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a precision electronic device with a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to prevent damage. • Do not leave where it may be exposed to heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on top of the dashboard. • Do not take the remote control transmitter apart. • Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong impacts. • Keep the remote control transmitter dry. • Keep away from magnetic objects such as key rings. • Keep away from devices that produce magnetism, such as audio systems, computers and televisions. • Keep away from devices that emit strong electromagnetic waves, such as cellular phones, wireless devices and high frequency equipment (including medical devices). • Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. • Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high temperature or high humidity.  If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of the vehicle immediately contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer of the key number, they can make a new key. The key number is stamped on the key number plate. Keep the key number plate in a safe place separate from the key itself.  No keys other than those registered in advance can be used to start the engine. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-3. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-19. NOTE  When the theft-alarm is in the system operational status, the alarm operates if a door is opened after using the key, the door lock knob or the power door lock switch to unlock the vehicle.  The system does not enter the preparation status if the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehicle. Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) N00509100780 [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key)] For information on operations for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Antitheft starting system)” on page 5-19. [Except for vehicles equipped with the Freehand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)] The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is Features and controls 5-3 5 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions) using a key “registered” to the immobilizer system. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics. 5 NOTE  A system failure is suspected when the ignition switch is turned to the “START” position, and the engine does not start. In such a case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to recognize the registered ID code from the key. This means the engine will not start even when the key is turned to the “START” position. • When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or magnetic object (Type A) • When the key grip contacts metal of another key (Type B) • When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizer keys (including keys of other vehicles) (Type C)  In cases like the above, move the offending object(s) away from the key and turn the key back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then try to start the engine again. If the engine does not start, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 5-4 Features and controls CAUTION  Do not make any alterations or additions to the immobilizer system. Alterations or additions could cause failure of the immobilizer. Replacement keys Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the vehicle. NOTE  The key may not operate properly when it is near an object or facility that emits strong electromagnetic waves.  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible with commercially available remote starting systems. Use of commercially available remote starting systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. If you lose the key, you can order a key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the vehicle keys must be changed. Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer) by doing the following: Additional keys To add a key, you must already have 2 registered keys. You need to register the ID code to the vehicle. Registering the ID code can be done by yourself (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For you to register the ID code yourself, follow the “Customer key programming” procedure below. If you choose to have your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and all remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  You are provided with 2 keys, but you may register up to 8 keys. Customer key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada) N00562201178 You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid (already registered) keys and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for 1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the “ON” position for 5 seconds. 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and remove the first key. 3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first key, insert the second valid key into the ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer indicator will start to blink. 4. When the immobilizer indicator starts blinking, turn the second valid key to the “OFF” position and remove it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank immobilizer key into the ignition switch and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform this operation no more than 30 seconds after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking. When registration of the ID code is complete, the immobilizer indicator will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an error occurs, the immobilizer indicator will go off during the procedure. NOTE  When the key registration is completed, the immobilizer indicator will come on within 3 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON” position with the blank immobilizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer). 5. If you wish to register another key, perform the process again from step 1. NOTE  It is not possible to register a key if: • the immobilizer indicator goes off during the procedure • the immobilizer indicator does not come on within 30 seconds after step 4.  The procedure will be terminated automatically if: • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the first key is turned to the “OFF” position to the moment when the second key is turned to the “ON” position • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the second key is turned to the “OFF” position to the moment when the blank immobilizer key is turned to the “ON” position • more than 20 seconds elapses after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking Features and controls 5-5 5 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) General information Keyless entry system (if so N00562300097 5 Your electronic immobilizer operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions. equipped) N00509002015 Press the remote control transmitter buttons to lock or unlock the doors. It can also help you signal for attention by setting off the panic alarm.  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTE  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the horn will sound once. To unlock Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all the doors. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. The turn signal lights will also blink twice. Answerback function 1- LOCK ( ) button 2- UNLOCK ( ) button 3- PANIC button 4- Indicator light The horn of the keyless entry system answerback function can be changed as required. This is done with the key removed from the ignition switch. NOTE  The answerback function will not operate if any of the doors are open. To lock Horn deactivation/reactivation Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the doors. The turn signal lights will also blink once. 5-6 Features and controls The answerback function can be set in the following three ways. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) Each time the answerback function is set, a chime will sound to tell you the condition of the answerback function. One chime: The horn will not sound. Two chimes: The horn will sound. Four chimes: The horn will sound if the LOCK button is pressed twice within 1 second. 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. Turn signal lights deactivation/reactivation The turn signal lights answerback function can be changed. If you want to change the answerback function, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Using the panic alarm N00543700034 If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than 1 second. 2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will sound intermittently for about 3 minutes. 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the remote control transmitter. Replacement remote control transmitters Additional remote control transmitters N00543900078 To add a remote control transmitter, you must already have 1 registered remote control transmitter. Registering the ID code can be done by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Take your vehicle and any remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE  You are provided with 2 remote control transmitters, but you may register up to 4 remote control transmitters. N00543801090 Only remote control transmitters programmed with the vehicle’s electronics can lock or unlock all doors. If you lose the remote control transmitter, you can order a remote control transmitter from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the remote control transmitter must be changed. Take your vehicle and all remote control transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. General information N00546100114 Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions. Features and controls 5-7 5 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Keyless entry system (if so equipped)  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. 5 NOTE  Be sure to perform the procedure with the Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you open the remote control transmitter case, the buttons may come out.  The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC) number and the model number (radio certification) are indicated in the illustrated position. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter battery 3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the notch in the remote control transmitter case and use it to open the case. N00544101191 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object. 2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote control transmitter. 5-8 Features and controls 4. Remove the old battery. 5. Install a new battery with the + side (B) up. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) + side - side Coin type battery CR1620 6. Close the remote control transmitter firmly. 7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2. 8. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works. CAUTION  When the remote control transmitter case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components. NOTE  You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric appliance store.  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can replace the battery for you if you prefer. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key) (if so equipped) N00503101150 The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be opened, and the engine to be started and the operation mode to be changed simply by carrying it. The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the remote control transmitter of the keyless entry system. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry system” on page 5-21. The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for vehicle operations such as locking and unlocking the doors, starting the engine, and changing the operation mode. When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are carrying the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle. WARNING  Individuals who use implantable pacemakers or implantable cardiovasculardefibrillators should keep away from the external and internal transmitters. The electromagnetic waves used in the F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators. A- External transmitter B- Internal transmitter Features and controls 5-9 5 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) WARNING 5  Individuals using other electro-medical apparatus besides implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should check with the manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm the effect of the electromagnetic waves used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromagnetic waves may affect the operations of the electro-medical apparatus. The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.key can be modified as stated below. (Keyless entry operations are possible.) For details, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. • Enabling only the locking and unlocking of the doors and the opening of the trunk lid • Enabling only the starting of the engine • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key NOTE  The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic waves. In cases such as the following, operation may be improper or unstable. • The vehicle is near a facility that emits strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV transmitting tower, a power station, a radio station or an airport 5-10 Features and controls NOTE • The key is carried together with other communication devices such as cellular phones or radios, or electrical appliances such as computers • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a metal object • A keyless entry system is being used nearby • The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down • The vehicle is in a location with strong electromagnetic waves or noise Use the emergency key in such circumstances. Refer to “To operate without using the F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-19.  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing reception operations in its communication with the vehicle. This means that the battery is always running down, regardless of how often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery life is about 1 to 2 years, depending on the usage conditions.  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing reception operations, the reception of strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate the running down of the battery. Do not place near to electrical appliances such as televisions or computers. Operating range of the F.A.S.T.-key N00503201223 When a person enters the operating range of the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlock switch the trunk lid switch, verification of the ID code is performed. The doors can only be locked and unlocked, the trunk lid can only be opened, the engine can only be started and the operation mode can only be changed when the ID codes of the vehicle and F.A.S.T.-key match. NOTE  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run down or there are strong electromagnetic waves or noise in the area, the operating range could decrease or operations could become unstable. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Operating range for locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk lid The operating range is within about 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock switch and the trunk lid switch. NOTE NOTE  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating range, even a person not carrying the F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s door switch or the trunk lid switch. Operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode N00503301093 The operating range is the interior of the vehicle.  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating range, it may not be possible to start the engine and change the operation mode if the key is in a storage space such as the glove compartment, on top of the instrument panel, or in the door pocket or luggage compartment.  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle, it may not be possible to start the engine and change the operation mode if the key is too close to a door or door window. To operate using the F.A.S.T.key N00503401313 To lock *: Front of the vehicle : Operating range NOTE  The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.key is too close to the windshield, door windows or trunk lid.  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door switch or the trunk lid switch, the system may not operate if the key is close to the ground or in a high position. *: Front of the vehicle : Operating range While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the driver’s door switch (A) within the operating range to lock all the doors. The turn signal lights will blink once and the buzzer will sound once. Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door locks” on pages 5-24 and 5-25 respectively. Features and controls 5-11 5 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Driver’s door To unlock While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the operating range, you can unlock the doors by using the F.A.S.T.-key. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. The turn signal lights will blink twice and the buzzer will sound twice. 5 Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door locks” on pages 5-24 and 5-25 respectively. Trunk lid switch Press the driver’s door switch (A) to unlock only the driver’s door. Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s door switch one more time to unlock all the doors. NOTE  Settings can be changed so that all the doors are unlocked automatically by pressing the driver’s door switch once. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. To open the trunk lid N00590900027 Press the trunk lid switch (B) to open the trunk lid. Trunk lid switch Driver’s switch NOTE  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.key does not operate. • There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger compartment • A door is open or ajar • The operation mode is not in OFF.  The time within which locking confirmation is possible can be adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. 5-12 Features and controls NOTE  If the doors are unlocked using the driver’s door switch when all doors are locked and no doors are opened within about 30 seconds, the doors will automatically re-lock. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) NOTE  The amount of time after unlocking until the vehicle relocks automatically can be adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.key does not operate. • A door is open or ajar • The operation mode is not in OFF.  Functions settings can be modified as stated below. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. • Activating the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn signal lights) only during locking, or only during unlocking. • Deactivating the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn signal lights) and buzzer. • Modifying the number of blinks in the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn signal lights). • Making the buzzer sound when the F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger compartment when all the doors are closed. Engine switch N00513500088 To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys other than those registered in advance can be used to start the engine. (Electronic immobilizer function) While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine switch can be used to start the engine. NOTE  When operating the engine switch, press the switch all the way in. If the switch is not fully pressed, the engine may not start or the operation mode may not change. If the engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no need to hold the engine switch down. 5 Operation mode of the engine switch and its function OFF CAUTION  The indicator light (A) will flash orange when there is a problem or malfunction in Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter. Never drive if the indicator light on the engine switch is flashing orange. Immediately contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  If the engine switch operation is not smooth and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the switch. Immediately contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. The indicator light on the engine switch turns off. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), the operation mode cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever is in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position. ACC Allows operation of some electrical accessories. The indicator light on the engine switch illuminates orange. ON All electrical accessories can be used. Features and controls 5-13 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) The indicator light on the engine switch illuminates green. The indicator light turns off when the engine is running. ACC power auto-cutout function N00568101049 NOTE 5  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-19) Changing the operation mode N00568000025 If you press the engine switch without pressing the brake pedal {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle) while the vehicle is stationary, you can change the operation mode in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. 5-14 Features and controls CAUTION  When the engine is not running, put the operation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation mode in ON or ACC for a long time when the engine is not running may cause the battery to be discharged, making it impossible to start the engine.  When the battery is disconnected, the current operation mode is memorized. After reconnecting the battery, the memorized mode is selected automatically. Before disconnecting the battery for repair or replacement, make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. Be careful if you are not sure which operation mode the vehicle is in when the battery is run down.  The operation mode cannot be changed from OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode” on page 5-11. When the vehicle is in ACC operation mode for approximately 30 minutes, the ACC power auto-cutout function automatically cuts power to the audio system and other electronic devices that can be used during ACC operation mode. To enable power after ACC power auto-cutout function, press the engine switch while in ACC. NOTE  It is possible to modify the functions as follows: • The time until the power cuts out can be changed to approximately 60 minutes. • The ACC power auto-cutout function can be deactivated. For details, we recommend you to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Warning activation N00503501239 With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given through buzzers and displayed symbols in order to prevent mistaken operations or vehicle theft. When a warning operates, be sure to check the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) also shown if there is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key. If the following warning shows, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key Put the operation mode in OFF and then start the engine again. If the warning is not cancelled, there is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Antitheft starting system). Please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If the following warnings show, the light goes off if the correct action is taken.  The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the vehicle cannot be verified Someone may be carrying a F.A.S.T.-key with a different ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key may not be within the operating range Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key takeout monitoring system” on page 5-15. The battery of the F.A.S.T.key is run down  All the doors cannot be locked even when the driver’s door switch is pressed. Refer to “Key lock-in prevention system” on page 5-15. Refer to “Door ajar prevention system” on page 5-16. Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system” on page 5-16. F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, and a door is opened and the F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger compartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.key and the vehicle can no longer be verified. When the door is closed, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzer sounds once. NOTE  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is removed through a window without opening a door. This setting can be changed. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.  The warning may display even if the F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode. The surrounding environment or electromagnetic waves may make it impossible to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle. Key lock-in prevention system N00559901168 N00559801196 Features and controls 5-15 5 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) When the operation mode is in OFF, the F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compartment, all the doors are closed, and someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s door switch, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked. 5 the driver’s door switch, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked. Starting and stopping the engine N00560001169 When the operation mode is in OFF, and someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s door switch while one of the doors is not fully closed, the warning light blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked. Operation mode OFF reminder system N00560101160 When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, all the doors are closed, and someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing 5-16 Features and controls WARNING N00514601357 Door ajar prevention system The engine is warmed up enough for driving when the low coolant temperature indicator goes out. Refer to “Low coolant temperature indicator” on page 5-76. Tips for starting  The operation mode can be in any mode to start the engine.  The starter motor will be turning for up to approximately 15 seconds if the engine switch is released at once. Pressing the engine switch again while the starter motor is still turning will stop the starter motor. The starter motor will be turning for up to approximately 30 seconds while the engine switch is pressed. If the engine does not start, wait for a while and then attempt to start the engine again. Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.  If the engine will not start because the battery is weak or discharged, refer to “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2 for instructions.  A longer warm up period will only consume extra fuel.  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle out of the area. Carbon monoxide gas, which is odorless and extremely poisonous, could build up and cause serious injury or death. CAUTION  Do not push-start the vehicle.  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive at high speeds until the engine has had a chance to warm up. Starting the engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel injection system. This is a system that automatically controls fuel injection. There is usually no need to depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds between attempts to restart the engine. BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) 1. Make sure all occupants are properly seated with seat belts fastened. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down firmly with your right foot. NOTE  After the engine has not started the brake pedal effort needed engine may become greater. If depress the brake pedal more usual. for a while, to start the this occurs, firmly than 4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down (manual transaxle). NOTE  For vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle, the engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock). This is a safety feature. NOTE  On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), the engine can only be started when the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. For safety reasons, the engine should be started when the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position in which the driving wheels lock. 6. Press the engine switch. 7. Confirm that all warning lights and warning displays are functioning properly. NOTE  Minor noises may be heard on engine startup. These will disappear as the engine warms up. When the engine is hard to start 5. On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. After several attempts, you may experience that the engine still does not start. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such as lights, air conditioning blower and rear window defogger, are turned off. 2. While depressing the brake pedal {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it there, then crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal, immediately after the engine starts. 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine could be flooded with too much gasoline. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), push the accelerator pedal all the way down and hold it there, then press the engine switch to crank the engine. If the engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push the engine switch to stop cranking the engine, and release the accelerator pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a few seconds, and then press the engine switch to crank the engine again while depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but do not push the accelerator pedal. If the engine fails to start, repeat these procedures. If the engine still will not start, contact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Startability of continuously variable transmission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower Features and controls 5-17 5 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) 5 When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start from a standstill even with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position. This phenomenon occurs because the transaxle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. The transaxle will warm up, and you will be able to start normally. Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up operation. Stopping the engine NOTE  If you have to bring the engine to an emergency stop while driving, press and hold the engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.  On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the engine with the selector lever in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the engine is stopped with the selector lever in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position, the operation mode will go to ACC rather than OFF. Put the operation mode in OFF after placing the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operating properly N00568301054 Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console. Starting the engine and changing the operation mode should be now possible. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot after starting the engine or changing the operation mode. N00568200014 WARNING  Do not operate the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake servomechanism will cease to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the steering. This could result in a serious accident. 5-18 Features and controls 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Fully engage the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal. 3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle, press the engine switch to stop the engine, and then move the gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch to stop the engine. NOTE  Do not insert into the key slot anything other than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause damage or a malfunction. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) NOTE  Remove the object or additional key from the F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the key slot. The vehicle may not be able to receive the registered ID code from the registered key. Therefore, the engine may not start and the operation mode may not change. vehicle has run down, the emergency key can be used to lock and unlock the passenger’s door. that the door is locked, turn the emergency key back to the center and remove it. To use the emergency key (A), unlock the lock knob (B) and remove it from the F.A.S.T.-key (C). 5 F.A.S.T.-key reminder If the operation mode is in OFF and the driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key in the key slot, a warning is issued with the warning light and the buzzer buzzing for approximately 3 seconds to remind you to remove the key. To operate without using the F.A.S.T.-key N00514800017 Emergency key N00515201174 The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.key. When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the 1- Lock 2- Unlock NOTE  Only use the emergency key in an emergency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run down, replace the battery as soon as possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.  After using the emergency key, be sure to reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. Locking and unlocking the passenger’s door Turn the emergency key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the door. After checking Electronic immobilizer (Antitheft starting system) N00529600055 The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions) using a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobilizer system. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics. Features and controls 5-19 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE N00561000042 Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the vehicle. 5 If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID codes reprogrammed. Additional F.A.S.T.-keys  You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys. You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada) N00561201201 You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the system if you have two valid (already registered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not registered) F.A.S.T.-key. N00561100056 To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have 2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to register the ID code to the vehicle. Registering the ID code can be done by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it can be done by yourself (except for vehicles sold in Canada). For you to register the ID code yourself, follow the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming” procedure below. If you choose to have your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 5-20 Features and controls 3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot. For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the procedures below. 1. Open the driver’s door. NOTE  Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.key programming is finished. Do not open or close other doors. 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.key, put the operation mode in ON. (Perform the following procedure within 30 seconds.) 4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button during this time. 5. Release in sequence the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Perform the following procedure within 30 seconds.) 6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button during this time. 7. Release in sequence the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The immobilizer warning light will blink. BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Keyless entry system NOTE N00515501278 When registration of ID code is complete, the buzzer will sound 3 times and the immobilizer indicator will come on for 30 seconds. If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key programming will be terminated and the buzzer will sound for 3 seconds. Press the remote control transmitter buttons to lock or unlock the doors. It can also help you signal for attention by setting off the panic alarm. 8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.key, repeat the process from step 1 after the operation mode is put in OFF. NOTE  The immobilizer display will go off immediately if the operation mode is put in OFF.  It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if the immobilizer warning light goes off during the procedure. To unlock Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all the doors. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. The turn signal lights will also blink twice. NOTE  F.A.S.T.-key programming will be terminated if the operation mode is put in OFF before the immobilizer warning light starts blinking.  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the horn will sound once. NOTE 1- LOCK ( ) button 2- UNLOCK ( ) button 3- Trunk button 4- PANIC button 5- Operation indicator light  The door unlock function can be set so that all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on page 5-22. To open the trunk lid N00544401035 To lock Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the doors. The turn signal lights will also blink once. Press the trunk button (3) twice within about 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened. The trunk lid must be closed manually after it has been opened. Features and controls 5-21 5 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) Answerback function N00544501094 The horn of the keyless entry system answerback function can be changed as required. Horn deactivation/reactivation 5 The answerback function can be set in the following three ways. One chime: The horn will not sound. Two chimes: The horn will sound. Four chimes: The horn will sound if the LOCK button is pressed twice within 1 second. Turn signal light deactivation/reactivation The turn signal lights answerback function can be changes. If you want to change the answerback function, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. The buzzer answerback function can be turned ON or OFF as required. Setting of door unlock function The door unlock function can be set to the following two conditions. Each time the door unlock function is set, a chime will sound to tell you the condition of the door unlock function. Number of chimes One chime Condition All doors unlock Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position. 5-22 Features and controls Using the panic alarm N00544701100 Buzzer deactivation/reactivation N00544601138 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time. 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 3. If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than 1 second. 2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will sound intermittently for about 3 minutes. 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the remote control transmitter. NOTE  The indicator light (4) comes on each time a button is pressed.  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However, this distance may change if your vehicle is near a TV transmitting tower, a power station, or a radio station. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) NOTE  If the following conditions are observed after pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) button on the remote control transmitter, the buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be replaced. • The doors cannot be locked or unlocked. • The panic alarm cannot be operated. • The indicator light (4) is dim or does not come on.  If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a replacement.  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.key can be programmed for your vehicle.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it is necessary to register the key with the electronic immobilizer and keyless entry system. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page 5-20. General information N00562000065 Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device com- plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions.  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter battery 5 NOTE  Be sure to perform the procedure with the Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you open the case, the transmitter may come out. 3. Remove the old battery. 4. Install a new battery with the + side (A) up. + side N00562100066 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object. 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the notch in the case and use it to open the case. - side Coin type battery CR2032 Features and controls 5-23 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Door locks 5. Close the case firmly. 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works. NOTE 5  You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric appliance store.  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can replace the battery for you if you prefer. CAUTION  When the remote control transmitter case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components. Door locks N00509201573 WARNING  Make sure all doors are tightly closed and locked while driving. • Locked doors, in combination with the use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk of ejection in an accident. • Locked doors can help keep passengers, especially small children, from opening doors and falling out of moving vehicles. • Locked doors can help prevent outsiders from gaining access to your vehicle when you slow or come to a stop. 5-24 Features and controls WARNING  Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. Children who get into unlocked vehicles may not be able to get out. Children trapped inside vehicles can quickly be overcome by heat and suffer serious injury or death due to heat stroke.  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat stroke, children can activate switches and controls, resulting in an injury or fatal accident.  When closing a door, make sure that the door is fully closed and the door-ajar warning display goes out on the information screen on the multi-information display. If the door is ajar it could open while driving and cause an accident. To lock and unlock with the key (driver’s door) Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the door. After checking that the door is locked, turn the key back to the center and remove it. 1- Lock 2- Unlock NOTE  When locking or unlocking with the key, only the driver’s door will be locked or unlocked. To lock or unlock all doors, use the power door lock switches, the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T-key operation. (if so equipped) Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-25, “Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and 5-21, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.key” on page 5-11.  In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, the passenger’s door can be locked and unlocked using the emergency key. Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-19. BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Power door locks To lock or unlock the door from the inside 2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehicle. Close the door. the lock knob will automatically return to the unlocked position. Operation mode ON reminder system (vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) Move the lock knob to the lock position to lock the door. All doors should be kept locked while driving. N00503800150 If the driver’s door is opened while the engine is stopped and the operation mode is in any position other than OFF, the operation mode ON buzzer will sound intermittently to remind you to put the operation mode in OFF. Key reminder system (except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) N00549600253 1- Lock 2- Unlock The driver’s door can be unlocked without using the lock knob by pulling on the inside door handle. To lock the door without using the key 1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked position. If the ignition switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the key in the ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will sound intermittently to remind you to remove the key. Lock out protection Power door locks N00509301646 NOTE  When locking or unlocking with the key on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will lock or unlock.  Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock could activate the power door locking system’s built-in protection circuit, and prevent the system from operating. If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the power door lock switch. N00517300042 If the key is in the ignition switch or the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF when you push the lock knob forward with the driver’s door or passenger’s door open, Features and controls 5-25 5 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Child safety locks for rear door To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors N00563401177 Using the power door lock switch (if so equipped) 5 You can select the functions to unlock the doors either using the ignition switch or the engine switch, or using the selector lever position {continuously variable transmission (CVT)}. These functions are not activated when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. To activate or deactivate these functions, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Using the ignition switch or the engine switch 1- Lock 2- Unlock All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by pressing the power door lock switch on the driver’s or the front passenger door. Features and controls N00509401315 All doors will unlock when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF. Using the selector lever position {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} All doors will unlock when the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK) position with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. 5-26 Child safety locks for rear door 1- To lock 2- To release BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Trunk lid Child safety locks help prevent rear passengers, especially children, from opening the rear door using the inside door handle. A lock lever for the child safety lock is provided on each rear door. When the lever is in the lock position (1), the rear door cannot be opened using the inside door handle. To open the rear door when the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, pull the outside door handle. When the lever is in the release position (2), the child safety lock is released and the rear door can be opened using the inside door handle. WARNING  Always keep the doors tightly closed and locked when driving. An unlocked door may be accidentally opened by a passenger, especially by a child who could fall out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there is a greater risk of someone being thrown from the vehicle in an accident. To open Trunk lid N00509501215 WARNING  It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and even death.  Do not allow children to have access to the trunk by climbing into the trunk from outside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. If trapped in the trunk, it is possible to escape from the trunk by using the inside emergency trunk release lever. (See “Inside emergency trunk lid release” on page 5-28.) Operation from outside the vehicle Using the key (Vehicles with key cylinder) Insert the key and turn it clockwise. The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to open the trunk. CAUTION  Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns. Using the remote control transmitter (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key) Press the trunk button (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key). (See “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-9.) Features and controls 5-27 5 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Inside emergency trunk lid release The trunk lid will pop up to slightly. Lift it to open the trunk. Operation from inside the vehicle To close Pull the trunk lid downward as illustrated. Gently slam the trunk lid from the outside so that it is completely closed. Always ensure the trunk lid is securely closed. 5 Inside emergency trunk lid release N00509801188 The emergency trunk lid release is designed to provide a way to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. It was developed to help prevent death and serious injuries to children who might become locked inside a vehicle trunk. The emergency trunk lid release lever (see illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid. The lever glows in the dark after exposure to sunlight. Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the left of the driver’s seat, up to open the trunk. CAUTION  Do not use the trunk lid release lever while the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto the road and cause an accident. NOTE  The trunk area light comes on when the trunk lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed. 5-28 Features and controls CAUTION  Be careful to prevent catching anyone’s fingers when closing the trunk lid.  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to confirm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects stored in the trunk could fall out onto the road. You and your family should familiarize yourselves with the location and operation of the emergency trunk lid release lever. Children should be taught not to play in or around vehicles. BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual window control (if so equipped) WARNING  Children should never be left unsupervised in or around vehicles.  Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open vehicle or trunk.  People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk, even if only for a short period of time, can quickly die from suffocation or heat stroke, especially on hot days. Interior temperatures in vehicles can rise in minutes.  Keep your vehicle doors locked and the trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children. CAUTION Power window control  When loading the trunk, place your things so that they will not touch the emergency trunk lid release lever when you close the trunk. Otherwise you could damage the lever and make it unusable. N00510800370 5 Manual window control (if so equipped) N00510700021 1- Open (down) 2- Close (up) To open the trunk from the inside, move the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the trunk and climb out. NOTE 1- To open 2- To close  Never try to operate the main switch and sub-switch in different directions at the same time. This will freeze the window in position.  Operating the power windows repeatedly with the engine stopped will run down the battery. Use the window switches only while the engine is running. WARNING  Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window. Features and controls 5-29 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Power window control WARNING Type 1 Sub switch  Never leave the vehicle without carrying the key.  Never leave children or unreliable adults unattended inside the vehicle. 5 N00548800098 Main switch N00548700130 The main switch located on the driver’s door can be used to operate all the windows. A window can be opened or closed by operating the corresponding switch. Press the switch down to open the window, and pull up the switch to close it. If the driver’s door window switch is fully pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door window automatically opens/closes completely. (Type 1) If the driver’s door window switch is fully pressed down, the driver’s door window automatically opens completely. (Type 2) If you want to stop the window movement, operate the switch lightly in the reverse direction. Type 2 1- Close 2- Open Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own passenger door window, unless the driver’s window lock switch is activated. 12345- Driver’s door window switch Front passenger door window switch Left rear door window switch Right rear door window switch Lock switch NOTE  The rear door windows open only half-way. Power window timer function N00548900132 The power windows can be run up or down when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. The door windows can be opened or closed for a 30-second period after the engine is 5-30 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Power window control stopped. However, once the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened, the power windows cannot be operated. Lock switch N00549000169 When this switch is in the lock mode, the passenger door switches cannot be used to open or close the door windows, and the main switch will open or close only the driver’s door window. To unlock the switch, press it again. Type 1 WARNING CAUTION  Before driving with a child in the vehicle, be sure to lock the window switch to make it inoperative. Children tampering with the switch could easily trap their hands or heads in the window. Safety mechanism (Driver’s door window of Type 1 only) N00528801161 If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the door window is automatically lowered a little. After the door window is lowered, clear the obstruction, then pull up the switch again to close the door window. WARNING Type 2 1- Lock 2- Unlock  If the battery terminals are disconnected or the fuse for electric window is replaced, the safety mechanism will be cancelled. If a hand or head got trapped, a serious injury could result. CAUTION  The safety mechanism is deactivated just before the door window closes. This allows the door window to close completely. Therefore be especially careful that fingers are not trapped in the door window opening.  The safety mechanism is deactivated while the switch is pulled up. Therefore be especially careful that fingers are not trapped in the door window opening.  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head in order to activate the safety mechanism. Your hand or head could be trapped and personal injury could result. NOTE  The safety mechanism can be activated if the driving conditions or other circumstances cause the door window to be subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by trapped hand or head.  If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or more times in a row, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the door window will not close correctly. In such a case, the following procedure should be implemented to rectify this situation. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the driver’s door window switch until that window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, raise the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least1 second, then release it. You should now be able to operate in the normal fashion. Features and controls 5-31 5 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Parking brake NOTE 5 What to do if you hear wind buffeting when driving N00551400043 Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a booming or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting when driving with one or both rear door windows down or partially opened. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear door windows open, open the front door windows as well as the rear door windows to minimize the condition. 5-32 Features and controls To apply Parking brake  If the battery terminals are disconnected or the fuse for electric window is replaced, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the door window will not automatically open/close completely. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the driver’s door window switch until the window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, raise the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least 1 second, then release it. You should now be able to operate the driver’s door window in the normal fashion. N00511400399 To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position for vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle, set the selector lever to “P” (PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a continuously variable transmission (CVT). 1- Pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of hand grip. When the parking brake is set and the ignition switch or the operation mode is in the “ON” position, the brake warning light in the instrument cluster will come on. Before driving, be sure to release the parking brake. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Steering wheel height adjustment To deactivate CAUTION  Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and brake warning light is off. If you drive without the parking brake fully released, the warning lamp will illuminate and a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake, the brakes will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and possible brake failure. 1- Pull the lever up slightly. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of the hand grip. 3- Push the lever downward. When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. Steering wheel height adjustment 5 A- Wheel lock B- Release WARNING N00511500231 To adjust the steering wheel to the desired position, move the lever upward or downward while moving the steering wheel to the desired level.  After adjusting, make sure the lever is secured in the locked (A) position.  Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving. This can be dangerous.  When releasing the lever (moving it to the position (B)), be sure to hold the steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering wheel may slip down too suddenly. Features and controls 5-33 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Inside rearview mirror WARNING Inside rearview mirror N00511601385 Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after making any seat adjustments so as to have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle. 5  Do not attempt to adjust the inside rearview mirror while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirror before driving. Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the view through the rear window. Type 1 To adjust the vertical mirror position It is possible to move the mirror up and down to adjust its position. Type 2 Type 3 5-34 Features and controls To adjust the mirror position It is possible to move the mirror up/down and left/right to adjust its position. BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Inside rearview mirror To reduce the glare Type 1 The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving. Type 2 When the headlights of the vehicles behind you are very bright, the reflection factor of the rearview mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare. NOTE  If you want to stop automatic mode, press the switch (3) for approximately 2 seconds and the indicator (1) will go off. To return to automatic mode, press the switch again. Or turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or put the operation mode in ON, after turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the operation mode in OFF. Type 3 When the headlights of the vehicles behind you are very bright, the reflection factor of the rearview mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare. 1- Daytime position 2- Night position Normally, use the automatic mode. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the green indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection factor of the mirror is automatically changed. NOTE  Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner on the sensor (2), as reduced sensitivity could result. Normally, use the automatic mode. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the green Features and controls 5-35 5 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Outside rearview mirrors indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection factor of the mirror is automatically changed. NOTE 5  Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity could result.  If you want to stop automatic mode, press the switch (3) and the indicator (1) will go off. To return to automatic mode, press the switch again. Or turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or put the operation mode in ON, after turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the operation mode in OFF. WARNING  Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. The objects you see in the mirror will look smaller and farther away than they appear in a regular flat mirror. Do not use this mirror to estimate the distance of vehicles following you when changing lanes. To adjust the mirror position N00549100144 The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. Move the lever (A) to the same side as the mirror you wish to adjust. Outside rearview mirrors N00512200206 Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after making any seat adjustments so as to have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle. WARNING  Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirrors while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driving. 5-36 Features and controls L- Left outside mirror adjustment R- Right outside mirror adjustment Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror position. 1- Up 2- Down 3- Right 4- Left NOTE  After adjusting, return the lever to the “•” (OFF) position (C). To fold the mirror N00549200099 The outside mirror can be manually folded in towards the side window to prevent damage when parking in tight locations. BK0236100US.book 37 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Ignition switch Door mirror heater (if so equipped) N00549301286 When the rear window defogger switch is pressed with the engine running, the outside rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Current will flow through the heater element inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or condensation. The indicator light (A) will illuminate while the defogger is on. The heater will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes. For information on operations for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Engine switch” on page 5-13. [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)] ACC Allows operation of some electrical accessories with the engine off. ON The engine runs and all accessories can be used. START Engages the starter. Release the key when the engine starts.It will automatically return to the “ON” position. NOTE OFF Ignition switch N00512401739 [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key)] The engine is off. The key can be inserted and removed only when the switch is in this position.  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code (which the transponder inside the key sends) must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page 5-3.) To remove the key N00550901240 1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position {continuously variable transmission (CVT)}. Features and controls 5-37 5 BK0236100US.book 38 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Starting the engine 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and remove it. Starting the engine N00512601816 [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.key)] For information on operation for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the engine” on page 5-16. 5 CAUTION  If the engine is stopped while driving, the power brake booster will cease to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the steering.  Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for a long time when the engine is not running. Doing so will cause the battery to be discharged.  Do not turn the key to the “START” position when the engine is running, doing so could damage the starter motor. 5-38 Features and controls [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)] Tips for starting  Do not operate the starter motor continuously for longer than 15 seconds as this could run the battery down or damage the starter motor. If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF” position, wait a few seconds, and then try again. Trying repeatedly with the engine or starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.  If the engine will not start because the battery is weak or discharged, refer to “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2) for instructions.  A longer warm up period will only consume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up enough for driving when the low coolant temperature indicator goes out. Refer to “Low coolant temperature indicator” on page 5-76. WARNING  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle out of the area. Carbon monoxide gas, which is odorless and extremely poisonous, could build up and cause serious injury or death. CAUTION  Do not push-start the vehicle.  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive at high speeds until the engine has had a chance to warm up.  Release the ignition switch as soon as the engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor will be damaged. Starting the engine This model is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel injection system. This is a system that automatically controls fuel injection. BK0236100US.book 39 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Starting the engine There is usually no need to depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. The starter should not be run for more than 15 seconds at a time. To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds between attempts to restart the engine. 1. Make sure all occupants are properly seated with seat belts fastened. 2. Insert the ignition key. 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with your right foot. 5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down (manual transaxle). NOTE  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, the starter will not operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock). 6. On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. NOTE  On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter will not operate unless the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” (PARK) position so that the wheels are locked. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and make certain that all warning lights are functioning properly before starting the engine. 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without pressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key when the engine starts. NOTE  Minor noises may be heard on engine startup. These will disappear as the engine warms up. When the engine is hard to start 2. While depressing the brake pedal {continuously variable transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it there, then crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal, immediately after the engine starts. 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine could be flooded with too much gasoline. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), push the accelerator pedal all the way down and hold it there, then crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and then crank the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but do not push the accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key if the engine starts. If the engine fails to start, repeat these procedures. If the engine still will not start, contact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. After several attempts, you may experience that the engine still does not start. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such as lights, air conditioning blower and rear window defogger, are turned off. Features and controls 5-39 5 BK0236100US.book 40 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual transaxle (if so equipped) Startability of CVT vehicle with ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower 5 When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start from a standstill even with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) position. This phenomenon occurs because the transaxle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. The transaxle will warm up, and you will be able to start normally. Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up operation. Manual transaxle (if so equipped) N00512701181 The shift pattern below is shown on the gearshift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way down while shifting gears. 5-40 Features and controls CAUTION  Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal because this will cause premature clutch wear or damage.  Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position (illegal in many states).  Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest, because this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks. NOTE  During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle. To start Press the clutch pedal all the way down and shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then gradually release the clutch pedal while depressing the accelerator pedal. NOTE  If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then be easier.  To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position, and then shift it into reverse.  To avoid grinding noises when shifting into reverse, wait approximately 3 seconds with the clutch pedal depressed when the vehicle is stationary. Proper shift points N00537400065 CAUTION  Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse while the vehicle is moving forward; doing so will damage the transaxle. Always use care to change the gear with the vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. Proper shifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life. BK0236100US.book 41 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual transaxle (if so equipped) CAUTION  Avoid downshifting that may cause the tachometer pointer to enter the red zone. This puts the engine at risk of being damaged. Upshifting N00512900131 For the best fuel economy and performance in using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed below. At high altitude locations, upshift as listed below. Shift point Upshift speeds 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h) 3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h) 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) Downshifting 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear. Driving precautions N00513100244  Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest. This can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks. Maximum possible driving speed Acceleration Cruise 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h) 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd gear to 3rd gear 28 mph (45 km/h) 19 mph (31 km/h) 3rd gear to 4th gear 36 mph (58 km/h) 33 mph (53 km/h) Recommended downshifting speed 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) 45 mph (72 km/h) Shift point Upshift speeds Shift point N00513000096 It is recommended that you downshift to a lower gear when needed to maintain the desired speed, according to the table. Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The engine may suffer damage. To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep hill. Downshifting is also important to avoid “lugging” the engine at too low a speed, such as when turning a corner or when driving up a steep hill. At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will improve your fuel economy. Downshifting speed Downshifting speed Shift point Under 20 mph (32 km/h) Shift down from current gear to 2nd gear. Shift points Maximum possible driving speed 1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h) 2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h) 3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h) 4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h)  The table above shows the maximum recommended driving speed for in each gear. Do not drive near or at these speeds for prolonged periods of time. Features and controls 5-41 5 BK0236100US.book 42 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) N00560200050 5 The CVT will automatically and continuously change its gear ratio depending on road and driving conditions. This helps achieve smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. DRIVING UPHILL The transmission prevents unnecessary upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is released and ensures smooth driving. DRIVING DOWNHILL According to the conditions, the transmission will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio to achieve stronger engine braking. This may help reduce your need to use the service brake. Selector lever operation N00560301087 As an additional safety precaution, models equipped with a continuously variable transmission have a shift-lock device that holds 5-42 Features and controls the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. To move the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position to another position, follow the steps below. 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. 2. Move the selector lever to the desired position. NOTE  The selector lever cannot be moved from “P” (PARK) to another position if the ignition switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” position, or if the key has been removed, or operation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if the brake pedal is not pressed and held down. The CVT selects an optimum ratio automatically when the selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelerator pedal. Set the selector lever in the gate to operate while the brake pedal is depressed. Set the selector lever in the gate to operate. WARNING  Always press the brake pedal when shifting the selector lever into a selector position from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. When beginning to drive, do not shift the selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while pressing the accelerator pedal. This will cause the vehicle to “jump” forward or backward. BK0236100US.book 43 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) NOTE  To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, make sure you stop briefly at each position. After operating, check the position in the multi-information display.  If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock device activates to prevent the selector lever from being moved from the “P” (PARK) position.  For a shift indicated by If you need to move the vehicle, shift the selector lever as follows. 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully applied. 2. Stop the engine if it is running. 3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry gently as shown to remove the cover. 5 in the illustra- tion, depress the brake pedal before moving the selector lever. If you attempt to move the selector lever before depressing the brake pedal, the selector lever may not move. Selector lever position display N00560400078 When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the selector lever position is shown on the multi-information display. When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” (PARK) position N00563300049 When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” (PARK) position to another position while the brake pedal is pressed and held down with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunctioning. Immediately have your vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right foot. 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while pressing the screwdriver down. Features and controls 5-43 BK0236100US.book 44 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) Selector lever positions WARNING N00560601093 “P” PARK 5 This position locks the transmission to prevent the vehicle from moving. The engine can be started from the “P” (PARK) position. “R” REVERSE Move the lever to this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. CAUTION  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion, the transmission may be damaged. “N” NEUTRAL At this position, the transmission is disengaged. It is the same as the neutral position on a manual transaxle and should be used when the vehicle is not moving for an extended length of time during driving, such as in a traffic jam. 5-44 Features and controls  Never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving since you could accidentally slip it into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position, damaging the transmission.  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when stopped on a slope, the engine should be started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in “N” (NEUTRAL) position.  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shifting into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) position. “D” DRIVE This position is used for most city and highway driving. The transmission will automatically and continuously change its gear ratio depending on road and driving conditions. CAUTION  To prevent transmission damage, never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. “Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING Use when engine braking is needed, or for high-power sport drive. “L” LOW This position is for driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds when driving down steep hills. WARNING  This position can be used for maximum engine braking. Be very careful not to shift into “L” (LOW) suddenly. Sudden engine braking may cause the tires to skid. Select this position according to the road conditions and vehicle speed. BK0236100US.book 45 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) When a malfunction occurs in the automatic transaxle N00549500018 When the selector lever position indicator blinks N00574601036 When the selector lever position indicator blinks while you are driving, there could be a malfunction in the automatic transaxle system or CVT fluid temperature becomes abnormally high. CAUTION  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while driving, the indicator will blink. In this case, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and follow these procedures: [If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per second), the CVT fluid is overheating.] Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not turn off the engine. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position and open the engine hood. Keep the engine, idling. After a while, move the selector lever into any position other than “P” (PARK) position and confirm that the indicator stops blinking. It is safe to continue driving if the indicator no longer blinks. If the indicator continues blinking or blinks intermittently, have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of your choice. [If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2 seconds), the CVT may be operating in failsafe mode due to a malfunction.] Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Operation of the CVT N00560801079 CAUTION  Before selecting a position with the engine running and the vehicle stationary, firmly depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the CVT is engaged, especially when the engine speed or idle speed is high, or with the air conditioning (cooling or heating) operating. Do not release the brake pedal until you are ready to drive away.  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all times. Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency.  To prevent sudden acceleration, never run the engine at high rpms when shifting from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).  Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking efficiency and may cause premature wear of brake pads. NOTE  The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT selector lever switch is broken. It is not seen during normal driving. Features and controls 5-45 5 BK0236100US.book 46 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Service brake CAUTION 5  Use the selector lever in the correct shift position in accordance with driving conditions. Never coast downhill backward in the driving shift position “D” (DRIVE), “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L” (LOW) or coast forward in the “R” (REVERSE) position. Engine stopping and increased brake pedal and steering effort could lead to an accident.  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal pressed when the vehicle is stationary. This can damage the CVT. Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal while holding down the brake pedal with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine revolutions may not rise as high as when performing the same operation with the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. Passing acceleration To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position (when passing another vehicle) push the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will automatically downshift. Waiting For short waiting periods, such as at traffic lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever position and held stationary with the service brake. For longer waiting periods with the engine running, place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking brake, while holding the vehicle stationary with the service brake. Prior to moving off after having stopped the vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in “D” (DRIVE) position. CAUTION  To avoid transmission overheating, never try to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by using the accelerator pedal. Always apply the parking brake and/or service brake.  Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceleration may occur if the selector lever is in a position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). Parking To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, 5-46 Features and controls and then move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. When the CVT makes no speed change If the CVT does not shift while driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual happening in the transmission. Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Service brake N00517501328 Brake pedal Overuse of the brake can cause weakening, resulting in poor brake response and premature wear of the brake pads. When driving down a long or steep hill, use engine braking by moving the selector lever to “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING) or “L” (LOW) position. BK0236100US.book 47 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Hill start assist WARNING  Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emergency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is securely held in place. CAUTION  It is important not to drive the vehicle with your foot resting on the brake pedal when braking is not required. This practice can result in very high brake temperatures, premature lining wear, and possible damage to the brakes. Power brakes N00517600436 Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes for more braking force with less brake pedal effort. Your brakes are designed to operate at full capacity, even if the power assist is not being used. If the power assist is not being used, the effort needed to press the brake pedal is greater. If you should lose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still work. If the power brake unit or either of the two brake hydraulic systems stops working properly, the rest of the brake system will still work, but the vehicle will not slow down as quickly. You will know this has happened if you find you need to press the brake down farther, or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if the brake warning light and the warning display in the multi-information display come on. Have the brake system repaired at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately. WARNING  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Keep the engine running whenever your vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the engine while driving, the power brake booster will stop working and your brakes will not work as well.  If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic system stops working properly, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately. Brake pad wear alarm N00550700124 The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a metallic squeal when the brake pads have worn down enough to need service. If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. WARNING  Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to stop, and can cause an accident. Hill start assist N00562601114 The hill start assist makes it easy to start off on a steep uphill slope by preventing the vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the brakes applied for about 2 seconds when you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Features and controls 5-47 5 BK0236100US.book 48 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Hill start assist CAUTION 5  Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. Under certain circumstances, even when hill start assist is activated, the vehicle may move backwards if the brake pedal is not sufficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily loaded, or if the road is very steep or slippery.  The hill start assist is not designed to keep the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes for more than 2 seconds.  When facing uphill, do not rely on using the hill start assist to maintain a stopped position as an alternative to depressing the brake pedal. Doing so could cause an accident.  Do not perform the following operation while the hill start assist is operating. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or “ACC” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The hill start assist could stop operating, which could result in an accident. To operate N00562701115 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the brake pedal. 5-48 Features and controls 2. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lever into the 1st position. On vehicles with CVT, place the selector lever into the “D” (DRIVE) position. NOTE  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the gearshift lever or selector lever into the “R” position. 3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start assist will maintain the braking force applied while stopping for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill start assist gradually will decrease the braking force as the vehicle starts moving. NOTE  The hill start assist is activated when all of the following conditions are met. • The engine is running. (The hill start assist will not be activated while the engine is starting or immediately after the engine is started.) NOTE • On vehicles with M/T, the gearshift lever is in the following position. [When starting an uphill slope forwards.] The gearshift lever is in any position other than “R” (Reverse). (The hill start assist will operate, even if the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position.) [When starting an uphill slope backwards.] The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position. (The hill start assist will not operate when the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position.) • On vehicles with CVT, the selector lever is in any position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). • The vehicle is completely stationary, with the brake pedal depressed. • The parking brake is released.  The hill start assist will not operate if the accelerator pedal is depressed before the brake pedal is released.  The hill start assist also operates when reversing on an uphill slope.  When the hill start assist is activated, you may feel the operating sound or vibration from under the body. This is a normal result of the hill start assist operation, and does not indicate a problem. BK0236100US.book 49 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Brake assist system Warning indicator N00562800092 If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, the following indicator will turn on. - ASC indicator CAUTION  If the warning is displayed, the hill start assist will not operate. Start off carefully.  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out, in which case the hill start assist is again working normally. If they remain displayed or reappear frequently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. Brake assist system N00567301116 The brake assist system is a device assisting drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly such as in emergency stop situations and provides greater braking force. If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakes will be applied with more force than usual. CAUTION  The brake assist system is not a device designed to exercise braking force greater than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a sufficient distance between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you without relying too much on the brake assist system. NOTE  Once the brake assist system is operational, it maintains great braking force even if the brake pedal is lightly released. To stop its operation, completely remove your foot from the brake pedal.  When the brake assist system is in use while driving, you may feel as if the depressed brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small motions in conjunction with the operation noise, or the vehicle body and the steering wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does not indicate faulty operation. Continue to depress the brake pedal.  When the anti-lock brake system warning light is illuminated, the brake assist system is not functioning. Anti-lock braking system N00517900338 The anti-lock braking system helps prevent the wheels from locking up when braking. This helps maintain vehicle drivability and steering wheel handling. 5 Driving hints  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden braking), steering is slightly different from normal driving conditions. Use the steering wheel carefully.  Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock braking system, leave a greater braking distance when: • Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads. • Driving on uneven road surfaces.  Operation of anti-lock braking system is not restricted situations where brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also prevent the wheels from locking when you drive over manholes, steel roadwork plates, road markings, or any uneven road surface. Features and controls 5-49 BK0236100US.book 50 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Anti-lock braking system 5  When the anti-lock braking system is in use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrating and hear a unique sound. It may also feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. In this situation, simply hold the brake pedal down firmly. Do not pump the brake, which will result in reduced braking performance. Anti-lock braking system warning light N00531600674 If the warning light illuminate while driving CAUTION  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent accidents. It is your responsibility to take safety precautions and to drive carefully.  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the same size and the same type. NOTE  You may feel the operating sound or vibration from under the body when driving immediately after starting the engine. This is a normal result the anti-lock braking system makes when performing a self-check. It does not indicate a problem.  The anti-lock braking system can be used after the vehicle has reached a speed over approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops working when the vehicle slows below 3 mph (5 km/h). 5-50 Features and controls CAUTION • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the warning light does not come on or it remains on and does not go off. • The warning light comes on while driving N00531700604 If only the anti-lock braking system warning light illuminate If there is a malfunction in the system, the anti-lock braking system warning light will come on. Under normal conditions, the ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds later. CAUTION  Any of the following indicates that the antilock braking system is not functioning and only the standard brake system is working. (The standard brake system is functioning normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Test the system by restarting the engine and driving at a speed of about 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. If the warning light then remains off during driving, there is no abnormal condition. However, if the warning light does not disappear, or if they come on again when the vehicle is driven, have the vehicle checked by an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. BK0236100US.book 51 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electric power steering system (EPS) If the anti-lock braking system warning light and brake warning light illuminate at the same time Front WARNING Rear  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is moving. Stopping the engine would make the steering wheel extremely hard to turn, possibly resulting in an accident. NOTE The anti-lock braking system and brake force distribution function may not work, so hard braking could make the vehicle unstable. Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your choice. After driving on icy roads N00529200080 After driving on snow or icy roads, remove any snow and ice which may have be left around the wheels. On vehicles that have an anti-lock braking system, be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the cables located at each wheel. Electric power steering system (EPS) N00568400074 The power steering system operates while the engine is running. It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steering wheel. The power steering system has mechanical steering capability in case the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost for some reason, you will still be able to steer your vehicle, but you will notice it takes much more effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  During repeated full-lock turning of the steering wheel (for example, while you are manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking space), a protection function may be activated to prevent overheating of the power steering system. This function will make the steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In this event, limit your turning of the steering wheel for a while. When the system has cooled down, the steering effort will return to normal.  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary with the headlights on, the headlights may become dim. This behavior is not abnormal. The headlights will return to their original brightness after a short while. Features and controls 5-51 5 BK0236100US.book 52 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Active stability control (ASC) Electric power steering system warning light CAUTION Active stability control (ASC) N00559100176 The Active stability control (ASC) takes overall control of the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function to help maintain the vehicle’s control and traction. Please read this section in conjunction with the page on the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function. 5 If there is a malfunction in the system, the warning light will come on. Under normal conditions, the warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes off after the engine has started. CAUTION  If the warning light appears while the engine is running, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. It may become harder to turn the steering wheel. Anti-lock braking system  P.5-49 Traction control function  P.5-52 Skid control function  P.5-53 CAUTION  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. This system, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s responsibillty to drive carefully, This means taking into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.  Be sure to use the same specified type and size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the ASC may not work properly.  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC may stop functioning properly. NOTE  An operating sound or vibration may be emitted from under the body in the following situations. The sound or vibration is associated with checking the operations of the ASC. At this time, you may feel a shock from under the body and the brake pedal if you depress it. These do not indicate a malfunction. • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • When the vehicle is driven for a while after the engine is turned on.  When the ASC is activated, you may feel a vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whining sound from the engine compartment. This indicates that the system is operating normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.  When the anti-lock braking system warning light is illuminated, the ASC is not active. Traction control function N00559200076 On slippery surfaces, the traction control function prevents the drive wheels from spin- 5-52 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 53 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Active stability control (ASC) ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a stopped condition. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle turns while pressing the acceleration pedal. deactivate the system by pressing down the “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer. When the ASC is deactivated, the indicator will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch; the CAUTION indicator is turned off.  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be sure to install snow tires and drive the vehicle at moderate speeds. ASC operation indicator or ASC OFF indicator Skid control function N00559300051 The skid control function is designed to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle on slippery roads or during rapid steering maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine output and the brake on each wheel. NOTE  The skid control function operates at speeds of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher. ASC OFF switch N00559400254 The ASC is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. You can NOTE  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not allow the engine speed to increase. In such situations, temporarily turning off ASC with the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to move out your vehicle.  If you continue to press the “ASC OFF” switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken operation protection function” will activate and the ASC will turn back on. N00546500118 CAUTION  For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch should be operated when your vehicle is stopped.  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in normal circumstances. NOTE  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both the stability control function and the traction control function. ASC operation indicator The indicator will blink when the ASC is operating. ASC OFF indicator This indicator will turn on when the ASC is turned off with the “ASC OFF” switch. CAUTION  When indicator blinks, ASC is operating, which means that the road is slippery or that your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip. If this happens, drive slower with less accelerator input. Features and controls 5-53 5 BK0236100US.book 54 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE 5 CAUTION  The indicator may turn on when you start the engine. This means that the battery voltage momentarily dropped when the engine was started. It does not indicate a malfunction, provided that the display goes out immediately.  When a compact spare tire has been put on your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire will be lower, making it more likely that the indicator will blink. Towing ASC warning indicator N00546300031 N00546600119 If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, the following indicator will turn on. - ASC indicator - ASC OFF indicator 5-54 Features and controls Cruise control (if so equipped)  The system may be malfunctioning. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out. If they go out, there is no abnormal condition. If they do not go out or appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but you should have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. CAUTION  When towing the vehicle with only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, do not place the ignition switch in the “ON” position or do not put the operation mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in the “ON” position or putting the operation mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate, resulting in an accident. Note that the correct towing method depends on the transmission type and the vehicle’s drive configuration. For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12. N00518300573 Cruise control is an automatic speed control system that keeps a set speed. It can be activated at speeds from about 25 mph (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). CAUTION  When you do not wish to drive at a set speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.  Do not use cruise control when driving conditions will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, slippery, on a steep downhill slope.  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, do not move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position while driving at a set speed without depressing the clutch pedal. The engine will run too fast and might be damaged. NOTE  Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on uphills or downhills.  Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. You may use the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed. BK0236100US.book 55 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE  Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep downhill. You have to use the brake to control your speed. As a result, the set speed driving is deactivated. C- RES + switch Used to increase the set speed and to return to the original set speed. D- CANCEL switch Cruise control switches 5 Used to deactivate the set speed driving. NOTE  When operating the cruise control switches, press the cruise control switches correctly. The set speed driving may be deactivated automatically if two or more switches of the cruise control are pressed at the same time. To activate N00518400385 A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch Used to turn on and off the cruise control. 1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” position or the operation mode is in ON, press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A) to turn on the cruise control. The indicator in the meter cluster will come on. Indicator 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed, then press and release the SET switch (B) when the indicator is illuminated. The vehicle will then maintain the desired speed. B- SET - switch Used to reduce the set speed and to set the desired speed. Features and controls 5-55 BK0236100US.book 56 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE  When you release the SET - switch, the vehicle speed will be set. To increase the set speed 5 N00518500344 There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. RES + switch Press and hold the RES + switch (C) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase. When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. To increase your speed in small amounts, press the RES + switch for less than about 1 second and release it. Each time you press the RES + switch, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. Accelerator pedal SET - switch Press and hold the SET - switch (B) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will slow down gradually. When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator pedal to reach your desired speed and then press the SET - switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed. To slow down your speed in small amounts, press the SET - switch for less than about 1 second and release it. Each time you press the SET - switch, your vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To decrease the set speed N00518600273 Brake pedal There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal, which disengages the cruise control, 5-56 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 57 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cruise control (if so equipped) then press the SET - switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed. To deactivate N00518801634 The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:  Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned off.)  Press the CANCEL switch (D).  Depress the brake pedal. To temporarily decrease the speed To temporarily increase or decrease the speed N00541700056 Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To return to the previously set speed, press the RES + switch (C). Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page 5-58. To temporarily increase the speed Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When you release the pedal, you will return to your set speed. The set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any of the following ways.  When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehicles equipped with manual transaxle).  When your speed slows to about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more below the set speed because of a hill, etc.  When your speed slows to about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. Features and controls 5-57 5 BK0236100US.book 58 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)  When the active stability control (ASC) starts operating. Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page 5-52. WARNING 5  On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), although the set speed driving will be deactivated when shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving. You would have no engine braking and could cause a serious accident. To resume the set speed N00518900306 If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condition described in “To deactivate” on page 5-57, you can resume the previously set speed by pressing the RES + switch (C) while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or higher. Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated automatically when the engine speed rises and approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer dial). CAUTION  When the set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any situation other than those listed above, there may be a system malfunction. Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch to turn off the cruise control and have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. 5-58 Features and controls Under either of the following conditions, however, using the switch does not allow you to resume the previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch is pressed.  [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or “ACC” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.  Indicator is turned OFF. Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) N00530201612 The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The system only indicates when a tire is significantly under-inflated. BK0236100US.book 59 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) WARNING  The compact spare wheel does not have a tire inflation pressure sensor. When the spare tire is used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible to replace or repair the original tire. Tire pressure monitoring system warning light N00532701363 NOTE  The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for regularly checking tire inflation pressures. Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.  The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is installed in the illustrated location. Replace rubber air valve (B) with a new one when the tire is replaced. For details, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light normally illuminates and goes off a few seconds later. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, the warning light will remain illuminated while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. Refer to “If the warning light illuminates while driving” on page 5-60 and take the necessary measures. CAUTION  If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, it means that the tire pressure monitoring system is not working properly. Have the system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. The warning light will issue further warnings each time the engine is restarted as long as the malfunction exists. Check to see whether the warning light goes off after few minutes driving. If it then goes off during driving, there is no problem. However, if the warning light does not go off, or if it blinks again when the engine is restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when the warning light appears while driving, avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving. Features and controls 5-59 5 BK0236100US.book 60 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) 5 Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when 5-60 Features and controls the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. If the warning light illuminates while driving N00532801540 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates, avoid hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. You should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page 9-12. NOTE  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, do not apply excessive force to the valve stem to avoid breakage.  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve cap on the valve stem. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve, resulting in damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor.  Do not use metal valve caps, which may cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion and damage of the tire inflation pressure sensors.  Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving. BK0236100US.book 61 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) 2. If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light remains illuminated after you have been driving for about 20 minutes after you adjust the tire inflation pressure, one or more of the tires may have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a puncture, have it repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. WARNING  If the warning light illuminates while you are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire adversely affects vehicle performance and can result in an accident. CAUTION  The warning light may not illuminate immediately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid leak. NOTE  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors, have any punctured tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor is not covered by your warranty. NOTE  Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray on any tire. Such a spray could damage the tire inflation pressure sensors. Have any puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. The tire pressure monitoring system may not work normally in the following circumstances:  A wireless facility or device using the same frequency is near the vehicle.  Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders and/or on the wheels.  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery is dead.  Wheels other than Mitsubishi Genuine wheels are being used.  Wheels that are not fitted with tire inflation pressure sensors are being used.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memorized by the vehicle are used.  Compact spare tire is fitted on a road wheel.  A window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. NOTE  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambient temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to large variations in ambient temperature, the tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated (causing the warning light come on) when the ambient temperature is relatively low. If the warning light comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure. Whenever the tires and wheels are replaced with new ones N00532900153 If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure sensors are installed, their ID codes must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system. Have tire and wheel replacement performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel replacement is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by your warranty. CAUTION  The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of the sensors. Features and controls 5-61 5 BK0236100US.book 62 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) General information 5 Your tire pressure monitoring system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions.  This device may not cause harmful interference  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5-62 Features and controls Location of rear-view camera Rear-view camera (if so N00533000236 equipped) N00546201268 The rear-view camera (A) is built-in to the trunk lid. When the gearshift lever or the selector lever is in the “R” position with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view image will be displayed on the left portion of the inside rearview mirror. When the gearshift lever or the selector lever is shifted out of the “R” position, the rearview image will go off. WARNING  Never rely solely on the rear-view camera to clear the area behind your vehicle. Always check visually behind and all around your vehicle for persons, animals, obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to do so can result in vehicle damage, serious injury or death.  The rear-view camera is an aid system for backing up, but it is not a substitute for your visual confirmation.  The view on the screen is limited, and objects outside the view, such as under the bumper or around either corner of the bumper, cannot be seen on the screen. CAUTION  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the lens with clean water and gently wipe with a clean, soft cloth.  To avoid damaging the camera; • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish it by using an abrasive compound. • Do not disassemble the camera. • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. • Do not spray the camera and its surroundings with high-pressure water. • Make sure that the trunk lid is securely closed when backing up. BK0236100US.book 63 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) Reference lines on the screen Reference lines and upper surface of the rear bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.  Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.  Two Green lines (C) indicate approximately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the vehicle body.  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate distance from the rear bumper. CAUTION  The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle lens. As a result, images and distances shown on the screen are not exact.  Actual distance may be different from distance indicated by the lines on the screen, depending on the loading condition of the vehicle and road surface condition. The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are based on a level, flat road surface. In the following cases, objects shown on the screen will appear to be farther off than they actually are. • When the rear of the vehicle is weighed down with the weight of passengers and luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) • When there is an upward slope at the back. (Case 2) Case 1 1: 2: 3: Approximately at the rear edge of the rear bumper Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) Case 2 5 A- Actual objects B- Objects shown on the screen CAUTION  The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are intended to indicate the distance to a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. They may not indicate correct distance depending on the shape of an obstacle. For example, when there is an object behind the vehicle that has upper sections projecting in the direction of the vehicle, the reference lines on the screen will indicate that point A is the farthest point and point B is the closest point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B are actually the same distance from the vehicle, and point C is farther off than point A and B. A- Actual objects B- Objects shown on the screen Features and controls 5-63 BK0236100US.book 64 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Instrument cluster To change the language of warning text (3) N00591000025 It is possible to change the language of the warning messages on the screen. 5 4. Press the switch until the desired language appears on the display. Each time you press the switch, the language will change to the next one. When the warning text flashes, setting is completed. Instrument cluster N00519001428 NOTE  Mirror image is displayed on the screen.  It is possible to change the display language of the inside rearview mirror screen. For details, refer to “Change language or turn off the inside rearview mirror screen: To change the language of warning text (3)” on page 5-64.  Under certain circumstances, it may become difficult to see an image on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly. • In a dark area, such as at night. • When water drops or condensation are on the lens. • When sun light or headlights shine directly into the lens. 5-64 Features and controls 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or put the operation mode in ON. CAUTION  For safety reasons, do not perform the following operations with the engine running. 2. Put the gearshift lever or the selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position. 3. Press and hold down the switch (1) to enter language selection mode (for 6 to 11 seconds). In this mode, the image appears and the green indicator (2) comes on. 1234- Tachometer  P.5-65 Multi-information display  P.5-65 Speedometer  P.5-64 Multi-information display switch Speedometer N00519101302 The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). BK0236100US.book 65 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display Type A CAUTION Type D  The red zone indicates an engine speed beyond the range of safe operation. Select the correct shift position (manual transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to control the engine speed so that the tachometer indicator does not enter the red zone. 5 Type B Tachometer N00519201332 The tachometer shows engine revolutions per minute. This allows the driver to determine the most efficient selector position and engine speed combinations. This gauge also assists in evaluating engine performance. Type C Multi-information display N00555001389 The multi-information display includes the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, fuel remaining, selector lever position, average fuel consumption, driving range, etc. Features and controls 5-65 BK0236100US.book 66 ページ２０１６年２月１日 Multi-information display 5 1- Information display  P.5-67 2- Frozen road warning (if so equipped)  P.5-70 3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-70 4- Selector lever position display (if so equipped)  P.5-43 NOTE  When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the selector lever position display, fuel remaining display and frozen road warning are not displayed. 5-66 Features and controls 月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 67 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display Information display N00574801054 Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order. 5 1234- Odometer  P.5-68 Trip odometer  P.5-68 Trip odometer  P.5-68 Instrument panel light dimmer control  P.5-68 5- Driving range display  P.5-69 6- Average fuel consumption display  P.5-69 7- Outside temperature display (if so equipped)  P.5-69 8- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-71 9- Service reminder (month)  P.5-71 NOTE  When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are not displayed.  While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch. Features and controls 5-67 BK0236100US.book 68 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display NOTE  When the parking lights are not illuminated, the instrument panel light dimmer control is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch. Odometer N00574900016 5 The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has traveled. Trip odometer N00575000014 The trip odometer indicates the distance traveled between two points. Usage examples for trip odometer , trip odometer It is possible to measure two currently traveled distances, from home using trip odometer and from a particular point on the way using trip odometer . If trip odometer is displayed, only trip odometer will be reset. To return the display to 0, hold down the multi-information display switch for about 1 second or more. Only the currently displayed value will be reset. Example 5-68 Features and controls Dim NOTE  Both trip odometers and can count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers. When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilometers.  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the memories of trip odometer displays and are cleared, and their displays return to “0.0 miles/kilometers”. 1- Brightness level 2- Multi-information display switch NOTE Instrument panel light dimmer control N00575101025 To reset the trip odometer Bright Turn the parking lights on and press the multi-information display switch (2), there is a sound and the brightness changes.  When the parking lights are illuminated, you can adjust to 8 levels.  Each time you reduce two brightness levels, the segment display of the brightness level decreases by one segment.  If you press and hold the switch for longer than about 1 second, the brightness automatically scrolls through its different levels, and stops scrolling when you release the switch. Select your desired level of brightness. BK0236100US.book 69 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display NOTE NOTE  The brightness level of the instruments is stored when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF. Driving range display N00575201042 This displays the approximate driving range (how many more miles or kilometers you can drive). When the driving range falls below approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed. NOTE  The driving range is determined based on the fuel consumption data. This may vary depending on the driving conditions and habits. Treat the distance displayed as just a rough guideline.  When you refuel, the driving range display is updated. However, if you only add a small amount of fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. Fill to a full tank whenever possible.  When your vehicle is stopped on an extremely steep hill, the driving range value may change. This is due to the movement of fuel in the tank and does not indicate any breakdown. NOTE  The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (miles or km). Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72. Average fuel consumption display N00575300017 This displays the average fuel consumption from the last reset to the present. The reset mode conditions for the average fuel consumption display can be switched between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. For information on how to change the average fuel consumption display setting, refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72.  Average fuel consumption may vary depend on the driving conditions (road conditions, how you drive, etc.). The actual fuel consumption may differ from the fuel consumption displayed, so treat the fuel consumption displayed as just a rough guideline.  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase from memory the manual reset mode or auto reset mode setting for the average fuel consumption display.  The display setting can be changed to the preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72. Outside temperature display (if so equipped) N00556501134 NOTE  The average fuel consumption display can be reset separately in both auto reset mode and manual reset mode.  “---” is displayed when the average fuel consumption cannot be measured.  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”. Shows the temperature outside the vehicle. NOTE  The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (°F or °C). Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-72.  Depending on factors such as the driving conditions, the displayed temperature may vary from the actual outside temperature. Features and controls 5-69 5 BK0236100US.book 70 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is changed to ON. When the remaining fuel level runs very low (no segments displayed), the bar graph flashes. If the warning display appears, refuel as soon as possible. Frozen road warning (if so equipped) N00579000041 5 If the outside air temperature drops below approx. 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds and the outside air temperature warning symbol (A) flashes for about 10 seconds. 1- Full 0- Empty NOTE CAUTION  There is a danger the road might be icy, even when this symbol is not flashing, so please take care when driving.  It may take several seconds to stabilize the display after refilling the tank.  If fuel is added with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON, the remaining fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.  The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler door is located on the left side of the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page 3-3.) Fuel remaining warning display Fuel remaining display N00575401031 The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. 5-70 Features and controls When the remaining fuel level runs low (one segment is displayed), the last segment of the fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is NOTE  On hills or curves, the display may be incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the tank. CAUTION  Running out of gas could damage the catalytic converter. If the warning display appears, refuel as soon as possible. BK0236100US.book 71 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display Service reminder NOTE N00556701312 Displays the approximate time until the next recommended periodic inspection. “---” is displayed when the inspection time has arrived. NOTE  The service reminder time can be modified by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to “Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehicle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For further information, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Distance Month  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100 km) and the time in units of 1 month. 2. This informs you that a periodic inspection is due. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the system checked. 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it displays the time until the next periodic inspection. To reset The “---” display can be reset while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the service reminder display. NOTE  When the next periodic inspection is approaching, the wrench symbol will be displayed whenever the ignition switch is turned from the “OFF” position to the “ON” position or when the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON. The wrench symbol will continuously be displayed, even on non-service reminder displays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until the service reminder is reset. When the service reminder resets, the wrench symbol will not be displayed until the next periodic inspection. 2. Press and hold the multi-information display switch for about 1 second or more to make the wrench symbol start flashing. (If there is no operation for about 10 seconds with flashing, the display will revert to its original indication.) 1. Shows the time until the next periodic inspection. Features and controls 5-71 5 BK0236100US.book 72 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display 3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly press the multi-information meter switch, the display switches from “---” to “cLEAr”. After that, the time until the next periodic inspection is shown. 5 NOTE  When “---” is displayed, after a certain distance and a certain period of time, the display is reset and the time until the next periodic inspection is displayed.  If you accidentally reset the display, consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. Changing the function settings N00556801267 CAUTION  The customer is responsible for making sure that regular inspections and maintenance and periodic inspections and maintenance are performed. Inspections and maintenance must be performed to prevent accidents and malfunctions. NOTE  The “---” display cannot be reset while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. 5-72 Features and controls The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”, “Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature unit” setting can be modified as desired, when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the driving range display. Refer to “Information display” on page 5-67. 2. Each time you press the multi-information display switch for 1 second or more on driving range display, you can switch reset mode for average fuel consumption. (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset mode) Auto reset mode Manual reset mode CAUTION  The driver should not operate the display while the vehicle is in motion.  When operating the system, stop the vehicle in a safe area. Manual reset mode Changing the reset mode for average fuel consumption N00575501032 You can change the mode condition for the average fuel consumption display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset”.  When the average fuel consumption is being displayed, if you hold down the multi-information display switch, these calculations will be reset to zero.  When the following operation is performed, the mode setting changes automatically from manual to auto. BK0236100US.book 73 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Multi-information display [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] Change the operation mode to ON from ACC or OFF. NOTE  The average fuel consumption display can be reset separately for the auto reset mode and for the manual reset mode.  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase from memory the manual reset mode or auto reset mode setting for the average fuel consumption display.  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”. 3. Press and hold the multi-information display switch to switch in sequence from “km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg”  “km/L”. 5 Auto reset mode  When the average fuel consumption is being displayed, if you hold down the multi-information display switch, these calculations will be reset to zero.  When the engine switch or the operation mode is in the following conditions, the average fuel consumption display will automatically reset. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch has been set to the “ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 hours or more. [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] The operation mode has been set to ACC or OFF for about 4 hours or more. Changing the fuel consumption display unit N00557100156 The fuel consumption display unit can be changed. The distance and amount units are also switched to match the selected fuel consumption unit. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the average fuel consumption display. Refer to “Information display” on page 5-67. 2. Press and hold the multi-information display switch for about 5 seconds or more until buzzer sound is heard twice. NOTE  The display units for the driving range, the average fuel consumption are changed, but the units for the indicating needle (speedometer), the odometer, the trip odometer and the service reminder will remain unchanged.  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of the unit setting is erased and it returns automatically to factory setting. The distance units is also changed in the following combinations to match the selected fuel consumption unit. Features and controls 5-73 BK0236100US.book 74 ページ２０１６年２月１日 Multi-information display 5 Fuel consumption Distance (driving range) km/L km L/100 km km mpg mile (s) Changing the temperature unit (if so equipped) N00557201183 The temperature display unit can be switched. 1. When you lightly press the multi-information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the outside temperature display. Refer to “Information display” on page 5-67. 2. Each time you press the multi-information display switch for 5 seconds or more on outside temperature display, you can switch from °F to °C or from °C to °F unit of outside temperature display. NOTE  The temperature value on air conditioning panel is switched in conjunction with outside temperature display unit of the multi-information display. However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to temperature display of an air conditioning. 5-74 Features and controls 月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 75 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Indicator and warning light package Indicator and warning light package N00519801905 5 1- High beam indicator  P.5-76 2- Electric power steering system warning light  P.5-51 3- Tire pressure monitoring system warning light (if so equipped)  P.5-59 4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning lights  P.5-76 5- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped)  P.5-76 6- Door-ajar warning light  P.5-78 7- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light  P.4-27 8- High coolant temperature warning light (red)  P.5-78 9- Low coolant temperature indicator (green)  P.5-76 10- Oil pressure warning light  P.5-78 11- Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”)  P.5-77 12- Charging system warning light P.5-78 13- Brake warning light  P.5-76 14- Anti-lock braking system warning light  P.5-50 15- Multi-information display  P.5-65 16- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light  P.4-10 17- Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)  P.5-55 18- Active stability control (ASC) indicator/warning light  P.5-53, 5-54 19- Washer fluid level warning light (if so equipped)  P.5-79 20- Active stability control (ASC) OFF indicator/warning light  P.5-53, 5-54 21- Position indicator (if so equipped) P.5-76 22- ECO indicator  P.5-76 23- For details, refer to “Warning activation” on page 5-14 (if so equipped) Features and controls 5-75 BK0236100US.book 76 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Indicators 24- For details, refer to “Warning activation” on page 5-14 (if so equipped) Indicators Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) N00520300147 N00520200175 N00519900127 Turn signal indicators/Hazard 5 warning lights This indicator comes on while the front fog lights are on. Position indicator (if so equipped) N00520000216 N00551301049 The arrows will flash in time with the corresponding exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is used. This indicator light illuminates while the parking lights are on. Both arrows will flash when the hazard warning flasher switch is pressed. Low coolant temperature indicator - green N00575600010 NOTE  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if the indicator stays on without flashing, check for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or turn signal connection. This indicator comes on in green while the coolant temperature is low. NOTE  When the indicator goes out, this should be used as a rough indication of when the heating starts working. High beam indicator N00520100086 A blue light comes on when the headlights are on high beam. ECO indicator N00568800036 This indicator comes on while fuel-efficient driving is achieved. 5-76 Features and controls Warning lights Brake warning light and buzzer N00520400526 This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or the operation mode is put in ON. When the engine is started, the light should go off a few seconds later. The warning light also illuminates after starting the engine under the following conditions.  When the parking brake is still applied.  When the brake fluid level is low.  When the brake system circuit is not working properly. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the parking brake is not properly release. Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off. BK0236100US.book 77 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Warning lights CAUTION  If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock braking system warning light are illuminated at the same time, the braking force distribution function will not operate, the vehicle may be destabilized during sudden braking under the following conditions. • When the brake warning light does not go out even when the parking brake is released. • When the brake warning light stays on while driving. If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in a safe place, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the following manner when brake performance is deteriorated. • Confirm that the vehicle slows down when you press down on the brake pedal harder than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal may go all the way to the floor. • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking to reduce your speed and slowly apply the parking brake. Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the stop lights and to alert the vehicles behind you. Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) N00520500804 This indicator is a part of the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system which monitors the emissions, engine control system or continuously variable transmission (CVT) control system. If a problem is detected in one of these systems, this indicator illuminates or flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, this indicator normally comes on and goes off after the engine has started. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank filler cap is not properly tightened. If this indicator comes on and stays on after refueling, stop the engine and check that the cap is properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise until you hear clicking sounds.) If this indicator does not go off after several seconds or lights up while driving, have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. CAUTION  Driving for a long time with the engine malfunction indicator on may cause more damage to the emission control system. This could also affect fuel economy and drivability.  If this indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  If the engine malfunction indicator comes on while the engine is running, avoid driving at high speeds. During vehicle operation with the indicator on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle is stationary with the indicator on, you must depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual since the engine idling speed is higher than usual and a vehicle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to creep forward. Features and controls 5-77 5 BK0236100US.book 78 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Warning lights Oil pressure warning light NOTE 5  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is on. The engine electronic control module stores critical OBD information (especially exhaust emission data), which may be lost if the battery cable is disconnected while the engine malfunction indicator is on. This will make it difficult to diagnose the cause of future problems. Charging system warning light N00520600313 This light comes on in the event of a malfunction in the charging system or when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or the operation mode is put in ON. When the engine is started, the light should go out. Check to make sure that the light has gone out before driving. CAUTION  If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the system checked. N00520700170 This light comes on when the engine oil pressure is below normal. If the light stays on while driving, stop the engine as soon as possible. Do not run the engine until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. CAUTION CAUTION  If the light comes on during vehicle operation, it indicates that the engine is possibly overheating. Continued driving could make the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and take appropriate action. (Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.) NOTE  If this light comes on when the engine oil level is not low, have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  This warning light does not show the amount of oil in the crankcase. This can only be determined by checking the oil level with the dipstick with the engine turned off.  The high coolant temperature warning light may illuminate when the vehicle has been driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This illuminating does not necessarily indicate a problem. It should stop if you keep the engine running for a while or continue driving the vehicle. Door-ajar warning light and buzzer High coolant temperature warning light - red N00520901342 N00575700011 This light comes on in red if the coolant temperature becomes excessively high. This light comes on when any door is open or not completely closed. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h) and any door is open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times to inform the driver that any door is not properly shut. CAUTION  Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar warning light is off. 5-78 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 79 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Combination headlights and dimmer switch The daytime running lights will be illuminated: NOTE  When the auto cut-out function of the doom light is been activated, the light goes out automatically after about 30 minutes. Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-116. OFF The daytime running lights illuminated Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on Washer fluid level warning light (if so equipped) N00590300021 This light comes on when the washer fluid is running low. If the light comes on, replenish the container with washer fluid. Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-9. Combination headlights and dimmer switch N00522501889 Headlights Rotate the switch to operate the lights. The daytime running lights illuminated The combinations of switch operations and illuminated lights differ in accordance with the following conditions. Except for vehicles equipped with daytime running lights OFF All lights off Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on Headlights and other lights on Vehicles equipped with daytime running lights [When the engine is started, and the parking brake is released] Headlights and other lights on NOTE  Once the daytime running light come on, they do not go out until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the operation mode is changed to OFF or ACC. [When the engine is not running, or when the engine is running but the parking brake is not released] The engine starts when the lights are off. OFF All lights off Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on Headlights and other lights on Features and controls 5-79 5 BK0236100US.book 80 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Combination headlights and dimmer switch NOTE 5  Do not leave the headlights and other lights on for a long period of time when the engine is not running. The battery will run down.  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. However, if water collects inside the light, have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. The operation mode is changed to OFF or ACC and the driver’s door is opened.  If the following operation is performed with the combination headlights and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position, the lights automatically turn off after about 3 minutes. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the key is removed from the ignition switch and the driver’s door is not opened. When you want to keep the lights on: If the combination headlights and dimmer switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” position again after the engine is turned off, the about 3-minute auto-cutout function described above will not work. The lights (the parking lights, tail lights and license plate lights) will stay on and will not turn off automatically. Headlight reminder buzzer N00549800226 Light auto-cutout function (headlights and other lights) N00532600570  If the following operation is performed with the combination headlights and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position, the lights automatically turn off. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the key is removed from the ignition switch and the driver’s door is opened. [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] 5-80 Features and controls [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.key] The operation mode is changed to OFF or ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. NOTE  The light auto-cutout function can be deactivated. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. [When using a key to start the engine] If the driver’s door is opened with the key in the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed from the ignition switch while the lights are on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights. [When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the engine] If the driver’s door is opened with the operation mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the operation mode is changed to OFF while the lights are on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights. In either case, the lights will turn off automatically and so will the tone. Or you can turn BK0236100US.book 81 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Turn signal lever the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop the tone. Dimmer (high/low beam change) go back to normal when you let go. While the high beam is on, you will see a blue light on the instrument panel. NOTE N00549900142 To change the headlights from high beam to low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low beam as a courtesy whenever there are oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue light in the instrument cluster indicates when the headlights are on high beam.  You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever toward you, even if the light switch is off.  If you turn the lights off with the head lights set to high-beam illumination, the headlights are automatically returned to their low-beam setting when the light switch is next turned to the “ ” position. Turn signal lever N00522600519 Headlight flasher N00550000185 You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever gently toward you (2). The lights will When changing lanes, or to making a gradual turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” position (1). It will return to the neutral position when you let go. Use the full position (2) when making a normal turn. The lever will return to the neutral position when the turn is complete. There may be times when the lever does not return to the neutral position. This usually happens when the steering wheel is turned only slightly. You can easily return the lever by hand. Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly then release it, the turn signal lights and the indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash three times. 5 NOTE  A light in the instrument panel flashes to show when the turn signal lights are working properly. If this light flashes faster than usual, check for a burned out turn signal light bulb or malfunctioning connection in the signal. If the panel light does not come on when the lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a burned out bulb in the panel. Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  It is possible to modify functions as follows: • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash function for lane changes. • Adjust the time required to operate the lever for the 3-flash function. • Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer as the turn signal lights flash. Features and controls 5-81 BK0236100US.book 82 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Hazard warning flasher switch See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. Front fog light switch (if so equipped) Hazard warning flasher switch N00522700318 5 NOTE  If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or N00522800393 The front fog lights illuminate only when the headlights are on low beam. Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” position turns on the front fog lights as well as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of the “OFF” position. The knob will return to the neutral position when it is released. “ ” position while the front fog lights are illuminated, they will automatically turn off. They can be turned back on again by rotating the combination headlights and dimmer switch back to “ ” position, and turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” position.  Do not use fog lights except in conditions of fog, otherwise excessive light glare may temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. Wiper and washer switch N00523001748 CAUTION If you press the flasher switch, the turn signals will flash intermittently, and so will the hazard warning lights. This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion, except for emergencies. If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers will keep working after the ignition switch is removed or the operation mode is put in OFF. NOTE  If the flashers are used for several hours, the battery will run down. This could make it difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle. 5-82 Features and controls  If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm the glass with the defroster before using the washer. Windshield wipers NOTE  If the headlights are switched to high beam, the front fog lights will go out; they will illuminate again when the headlights are switched back to low beam. The windshield wiper and washer can be operated with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted BK0236100US.book 83 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Wiper and washer switch and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. A 5 1- Fast 2- Slow MIST- Misting function The wipers will operate once. OFF- Off INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) LO- Slow HI- Fast To adjust intermittent intervals With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive intermittent operation) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (A). NOTE  The speed-sensitive-operation function of the windshield wipers can be deactivated. For further information, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Windshield washer N00504600298 To turn on the windshield washer, pull the lever toward you with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will wipe automatically several times when the washer fluid is sprayed. To turn off the spray, release the lever. Misting function The misting function can be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will operate once if the wiper lever is raised to the “MIST” position and released. This operation is useful when it is drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” position. Features and controls 5-83 BK0236100US.book 84 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Electric rear window defogger switch Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers N00523501349 CAUTION 5  If the washer is used in cold weather, washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass with the defroster before using the washer. NOTE  Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely.  Before using the wipers in cold weather, check to be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers while the blades are frozen could cause the wiper motor to burn out.  If the moving wipers become blocked partway through a sweep by ice or other deposits on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop operating to prevent the motor from overheating. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF, and then remove the ice or other deposits. Because the wipers will start operating again after the wiper motor cools down, check that the wipers operate before using them. 5-84 Features and controls NOTE Type 1  Avoid using the washer for more than 20 seconds at a time. Do not operate the washer when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or the pump may fail.  During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution that will not freeze in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer may not work or may be damaged.  Replace the wiper blades when they are worn. Use the proper size replacement blades. For further information, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Type 2 Electric rear window defogger switch N00523701484 The rear window defogger can be used when the engine is running. The indicator light (A) will come on when you press the electric rear window defogger switch. Electric current will flow through the heating wires on the rear window to help clear away moisture or frost. After about 20 minutes of operation, the system will shut off automatically. To switch the defogger OFF before 20 minutes have passed, press the switch again. The indicator light will go out and the defogger will turn off. If you need the defogger for more than 20 minutes, press the switch again. This will add 20 more minutes. BK0236100US.book 85 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Horn switch Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device” on page 7-37. CAUTION  The rear window defogger is not designed to melt snow. Remove any snow manually before using the rear window defogger.  Use the rear window defogger only after the engine has started and is running. Be sure to turn the defogger switch off immediately after the window is clear to save on battery power.  Do not place stickers, tape, or other items that are attached with adhesive over the grid wires on the rear window.  When cleaning the inside rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid wires. NOTE  If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, mist can also be removed from the outside rearview mirrors when the rear window defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door mirror heater” on page 5-37.) Horn switch N00523800185 To honk the horn, press around the “ on the steering wheel. ” mark Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. Link System End User License Agreement N00563801083 Link System (if so equipped) N00563701167 The Link System takes control of the devices connected via the USB input terminal or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the connected devices to be operated by using the switches in the vehicle or voice commands. See the following section for details on how to operate. Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-85. Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-105. Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on page 7-29. Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31. You have acquired a device that includes software licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corporation from Visteon Corporation, and their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a complete list of these 3rd party products and their end user license agreements, please go to the following website. http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldisclosure.pdf Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) N00563901316 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for making/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle using a cellular phone compatible with a wireless communication technology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It also allows the user to play music, saved in a Bluetooth® music player, through the vehicle’s speakers. Features and controls 5-85 5 BK0236100US.book 86 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) The system is equipped with a voice recognition function, which allows you to make hands-free calls by simple switch and voice command operations using a defined voice tree. 5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device” on page 5-91. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. WARNING  Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows you to make hands-free calls, if you choose to use the cellular phone while driving, you must not allow yourself to be distracted from the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident.  Refer to and comply with all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving. 5-86 Features and controls NOTE  For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, if the operation mode is left in ACC, the accessory power will automatically turn off after a certain period of time and you will no longer be able to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory power comes on again if the engine switch is operated. Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function” on page 5-14.  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery or the device power is turned off.  Hands-free calls will not be possible if your phone does not have service available.  If you place the Bluetooth® device in the cargo area, you may not be able to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  You can confirm the Link System software version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3 times (press and hold 2 times and then press briefly) within 10 seconds. NOTE  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, refer to the following website: [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North America website. [For vehicles sold in Canada] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors website. Please read and agree to the “Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”, the websites mentioned above may connect you to websites other than the Mitsubishi Motors website. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/products/index.html  Software updates by cellular phone/digital audio device manufacturers may change/alter device connectivity. Steering control switch and microphone  P.5-87 Voice recognition function  P.5-88 Useful voice commands  P.5-89 Speaker enrollment function  P.5-90 Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and the Bluetooth® device  P.5-91 Operating a music player connected via Bluetooth®  P.5-96 How to make or receive hands-free calls  P.5-96 Phonebook function  P.5-98 BK0236100US.book 87 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Steering control switch and microphone N00564000072 Volume down button Press this button to decrease the volume. SPEECH button 123456- Volume up button Volume down button SPEECH button PICK-UP button HANG-UP button Microphone Volume up button Press this button to increase the volume.  Press this button to change to voice recognition mode. While the system is in voice recognition mode, “Listening” will appear on the audio display.  If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition mode, it will interrupt prompting and allow voice command input. Pressing the button longer will deactivate the voice recognition mode.  Pressing this button briefly during a call will enable voice recognition and allow voice command input. PICK-UP button  Press this button when an incoming call is received to answer the telephone.  When another call is received during a call, press this button to put the first caller on hold and talk to the new caller. • In such circumstances, you can press the button briefly to switch between callers. You will switch to the first caller and the other caller will be put on hold. • To establish a three-way call in such situations, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode and then say “Join calls.” HANG-UP button  Press this button when an incoming call is received to refuse the call.  Press this button during a call to end the current call. When another call is on hold, you will switch to that call.  If this button is pressed in the voice recognition mode, the voice recognition mode will be deactivated. NOTE  When you press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode with a cellular phone paired to the system, current information on the cellular phone, such as “remaining battery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on the audio display.* *: Some cellular phones will not send this information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Features and controls 5-87 5 BK0236100US.book 88 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  Call waiting and three-way calls can be used by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is possible to use those services with your cellular phone. 5 Microphone Your voice will be recognized by a microphone in the overhead console, allowing you to make hands-free calls with voice commands. NOTE  If a cellular phone is within close proximity of the microphone, it may distort the sound quality. In this case, place the cellular phone as far as possible from the microphone. Voice recognition function N00564100086 Bluetooth® The 2.0 interface is equipped with a voice recognition function. Simply say voice commands and you can perform various operations and make or receive hands-free calls. With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice recognition is possible for US English, North 5-88 Features and controls American Spanish, Canadian French and Japanese. The factory setting is “English.” NOTE  If the voice command that you say differs from the predefined command or cannot be recognised due to ambient noise or some other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will ask you for the voice command again up to 3 times.  For best performance and further reduction of ambient noise, the vehicle windows should be closed, lower the blower speed and refrain from conversation with your passengers while engaging the voice recognition function.  Some voice commands have alternative commands.  Depending on the selected language, some functions may not be available.  Language can be changed by using the audio control panel besides the following procedure. For details, refer to “To change the language (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)” on page 7-27. Selecting the language 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Language.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select a language: English, Spanish, French or Japanese.” Say the desired language. (Example: “English”) 5. The voice guide will say “English (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this correct?” Say “Yes.” If you say “No,” the system will return to Step 4. NOTE  The voice guide will repeat the same message twice. The first message is in the current language, and the second message is in the selected language.  If many entries are registered in the vehicle phonebook, changing the language will take a longer time.  Changing the language deletes the mobile phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. If you wish to use it, you will have to import it again. 6. When the voice guide says “English (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,” the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu. BK0236100US.book 89 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Useful voice commands N00564200016 Help function N00564300017 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a help function. If you say “Help” when the system is waiting for a voice command input, the system will tell you a list of the commands that can be used under the circumstances. Canceling N00564401073 There are 2 cancel functions. If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. If you are anywhere else within the system, say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. With the confirmation function activated, you are given more opportunities than normal to confirm a command when making various settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This allows you to decrease the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed. The confirmation function can be turned on or off by following the steps below. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Confirmation prompts.” 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.” Answer “Yes” to change the setting or answer “No” to keep the current setting. 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are <off/on>” and then the system will return to the main menu. Security function NOTE N00564600023  You can return to the previous menu by saying “Go Back.” Confirmation function setting N00564500019 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a confirmation function. It is possible to use a passcode as a security function by setting a passcode of your choice for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. When the security function is turned on, it is necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit passcode in order to use all functions of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for reception. Setting the passcode Use the following procedure to turn on the security function by setting a passcode. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Passcode.” 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is disabled. Would you like to enable it?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the passcode and return to the main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4digit passcode. Remember this passcode. It will be required to use this system.” Say a 4-digit number which you want to set as a passcode. 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say “Passcode <4-digit passcode>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to return to the passcode input in Step 5. 7. When the registration of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say “Passcode is enabled” and the system will return to the main menu. NOTE  Passcode will be required to access the system after the next ignition cycle. Features and controls 5-89 5 BK0236100US.book 90 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE 5  It is required for a little time after engine stop that the entered passcode is actually recorded in the system. If the ignition switch or the operation mode is made to ACC or ON or the engine is started immediately after engine stop, there is a case when the entered passcode is not recorded in the system. At this time, please try to enter the passcode again. Entering the passcode If a passcode has been set and the security function is enabled, the voice guide will say “Hands-free system is locked. State the passcode to continue” when the SPEECH button is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the passcode. If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct passcode. NOTE  You can reenter the passcode as many times as you want.  If you have forgotten your passcode, say “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and then check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 5-90 Features and controls Disabling the passcode Use the following procedure to turn off the security function by disabling the passcode. Speaker enrollment NOTE N00564800038  System must be unlocked to disable the passcode. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Passcode.” 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is enabled. Would you like to disable it?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of the passcode and return to the main menu. 5. When the disabling of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say “Passcode is disabled” and the system will return to the main menu. Speaker enrollment function N00564700011 Bluetooth® You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want. The 2.0 interface can use the speaker enrollment function to create a voice model for one person per language. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to recognise voice commands said by you. It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the speaker enrollment process. To ensure the best results, run through the process while in the driver’s seat, in an environment that is as quiet as possible (when there is no rain or strong winds and the vehicle windows are closed). Please turn off your phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent interruption of the process. Use the following procedure for speaker enrollment. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transaxle), or the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position (continuously variable transmission (CVT)), and pull the parking brake lever. NOTE  Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before attempting speaker enrollment. 2. Press the SPEECH button. BK0236100US.book 91 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 3. Say “Voice training.” 4. The voice guide will say “This operation must be performed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is stopped. See the owner’s manual for the list of required training phrases. Press and release the SPEECH button when you are ready to begin. Press the HANG-UP button to cancel at any time.” Press the SPEECH button to start the speaker enrollment process. NOTE  If you do not start the speaker enrollment process within 3 minutes after pressing the SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment function will time out. The voice guide will say “Speaker enrollment has timed out.” The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be deactivated. 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in table “Enrollment commands” on page 5-105. The system will register your voice and then move on to the registration of the next command. Continue the process until all phrases have been registered. NOTE  To repeat the most recent voice training command, press and release the SPEECH button.  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime during the process, the system will beep and stop the speaker enrollment process. 6. When all enrollment commands have been read out, the voice guide will say “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The system will then end the speaker enrollment process and return to the main menu. NOTE  Completing the speaker enrollment process will turn on the voice model automatically.  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not work in this mode. Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining N00564900055 2. Say “Voice training.” 3. If you have completed a speaker enrollment process once already, the voice guide will say either “Enrollment is enabled. Would you like to disable or retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled. Would you like to enable or retrain?” 4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice model is on; when enrollment is “disabled,” the voice model is off. Say the command that fits your needs. Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enrollment process and recreate a new voice model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on page 5-90.) Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device N00565001366 Before you can make or receive hands-free calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface function, you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want. You can also retrain the system. Use the following procedure to perform these actions. 1. Press the SPEECH button. Features and controls 5-91 5 BK0236100US.book 92 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  Pairing is required only when the device is used for the first time. Once the device has been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, all you need is to bring the device into the vehicle next time and the device will 5 connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically (if supported by the device). The device must have connect. Bluetooth® turned ON to 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transaxle), or the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position (continuously variable transmission (CVT)), and pull the parking brake lever. NOTE  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehicle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is automatically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can also change a Bluetooth® device to be connected. To pair device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. 2. Press the SPEECH button. 3. Say “Pair Device.” NOTE  The following procedure ( to ) can also be used instead of saying “Pair Device.” Replace this step 3 with the following procedure if you prefer. Say “Setup.” Say “Pairing Options.” To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below. 5-92 Features and controls The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set code.” Say “Pair.” NOTE  If 7 devices have already been paired, the voice guide will say “Maximum devices paired” and then the system will end the pairing process. To register a new device, delete one device and then repeat the pairing process. (Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a device” on page 5-93.) 4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing procedure on the device. See the device manual for instructions.” and then will say “The pairing code is <pairing code>.” NOTE  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific pairing code. Please refer to the device manual for pairing code requirements and read the next section “If your device requires a specific pairing code” on page 5-93 to set the pairing code.  The pairing code entered here is only used for the Bluetooth® connection certification. Depending on the connection settings of the Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be entered each time you connect the Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. For the default connection settings, refer to the instructions for the device. BK0236100US.book 93 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number that has been read out in Step 4. NOTE  Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may take a few minutes to pair it with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. NOTE  When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the device tag you have said, the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” To change the device tag, answer “No” and then say the device tag again.  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recogBluetooth® nize the device, the voice guide will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pairing process will be cancelled. Confirm that the device you are pairing supports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.  If you enter the wrong number, the voice guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pairing process will be cancelled. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing it again. If your device requires a specific pairing code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer to the device manual for pairing code requirements and read the next section “If your device requires a specific pairing code” on page 5-93. 6. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the device after the beep.” You can assign a desired name for the Bluetooth® device and register it as a device tag. Say the name you want to register after the beep. 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Complete. Would you like to import the contacts from your mobile device now?” Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say “Please wait while the contacts are imported. This may take several minutes.” Answer “No” to end the pairing process. 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code set to <pairing code>.” When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether the number said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 6. 8. The voice guide will say “Do you want to pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” the system will proceed to Step 3 in the pairing process. Refer to the previous section “To pair.” Selecting a device N00565100025 Bluetooth® If your device requires a specific pairing code If your device requires a specific pairing code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow the procedures below. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. Say “Set Code.” 5. The voice guide will say “Do you want the pairing code to be random or fixed?” Say “Fixed.” 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. If multiple paired devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is automatically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can connect to the other paired cellular phone or music player by following setting change procedures. To select a cellular phone 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Select phone.” Features and controls 5-93 5 BK0236100US.book 94 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 5 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the numbers of the cellular phones and device tags of corresponding cellular phones will be read out in order, starting with the cellular phone that has been most recently connected. Say the number of the cellular phone that you want to connect to. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the phone that you want to connect to is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and connect to the cellular phone. Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say “Please say.” Say the number of the phone that you want to connect to. NOTE  You can connect to a phone at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the number, even before all of the paired numbers and device tags of corresponding cellular phones are read out by the system. 5. The selected phone will be connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice guide will say “<device tag> selected” and then the system will return to the main menu. To select a music player 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Select music player.” 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the numbers of the music players and device tags of corresponding music players will be read out in order, starting with the music player that has been most recently connected. Say the number of the music player that you want to connect to. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the music player that you want to connect to is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and connect to the music player. Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say “Please say.” Say the number of the music player that you want to connect to. NOTE  You can connect to a music player at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the number, even before all of the paired numbers and device tags of corresponding music players are read out by the system. 5. The selected music player will be connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 5-94 Features and controls The voice guide will say “<device tag> selected” and then the system will return to the main menu. Deleting a device Use the following procedure to delete a paired Bluetooth® device from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “Delete.” 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the numbers of the devices and device tags of corresponding devices will be read out in order, starting with the device that has been most recently connected. After it completes reading all pairs, the voice guide will say “or all.” Say the number of the device that you want to delete from the system. If you want to delete all paired phones from the system, say “All.” 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say “Deleting <device tag> <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting all devices. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). BK0236100US.book 95 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 4. 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and then the system will end the device deletion process. NOTE  If the device deletion process fails for some reason, the voice guide will say “Delete failed” and then the system will cancel deleting the device. To check a paired Bluetooth® device N00565200013 Bluetooth® You can check a paired following the steps below. device by 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “List.” 5. The voice guide will read out device tags of corresponding devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth® device that has been most recently connected. 6. After the device tags of all paired Bluetooth® devices have been read, the system will say “End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?” To hear the list again from the beginning, answer “Yes.” When you are done, answer “No” to return to the main menu. NOTE  If you press and release the SPEECH button and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with the next highest number or “Previous” to return to the phone with the previous number.  You can change the device tag by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Edit” while the list is being read.  You can change the phone to be connected by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Select phone” while the list is being read.  You can change the music player to be connected by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Select music player” while the list is being read. Changing a device tag N00565300014 You can change the device tag of a paired cellular phone or music player. Follow the steps below to change a device tag. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Setup.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “Edit.” 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and read out the numbers of the Bluetooth® devices and device tags of corresponding devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth® that has been most recently connected. After all paired device tags have been read, the voice guide will say “Which device, please?” Say the number of the device tag you want to change. NOTE  You can press and release the SPEECH button while the list is being read, and immediately say the number of the device tag you want to change. Features and controls 5-95 5 BK0236100US.book 96 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) 5 6. The voice guide will say “New name, please.” Say the name you want to register as a new device tag. When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say “<New device tag>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” you can say the new device tag you want to register again. 7. The device tag is changed. When the change is complete, the voice guide will say “New name saved” and then the system will return to the main menu. Operating a music player connected via Bluetooth® You can also use the phonebooks in the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without dialing telephone numbers. To make a call P.5-96 Send function P.5-98 Receiving calls P.5-98 Mute function P.5-98 Switching between hands-free mode and private mode P.5-98 NOTE  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly when you place or receive the call directly from your cellular phone, instead of using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. N00565400015 For the operation of a music player connected via Bluetooth®, refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device” on page 7-37. How to make or receive handsfree calls N00565500087 You can make or receive hands-free calls using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. NOTE To make a call N00565600020 You can make a call in the following 3 ways using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: - By saying a telephone number - By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s phonebook - By redialing a telephone number Making a call by using the telephone number You can make a call by saying the telephone number. 5-96 Features and controls 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Dial.” 3. After the voice guide says “Number please,” say the telephone number. 4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <number recognized>.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then make the call. When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the telephone number again. To continue with that number, answer “Yes.” To change the telephone number, answer “No.” The system will say “Number please” then say the telephone number again.  In the case of English, the system will recognise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the number “0.”  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports numbers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).  The maximum supported telephone number length is as follows: • International telephone number: + and telephone numbers (to 18 digits). • Except for international telephone number: telephone numbers (to 19 digits). BK0236100US.book 97 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Making a call using a phonebook You can make calls using the vehicle phonebook or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. For details on the phonebooks, refer to “Phonebook function” on page 5-98. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Call.” NOTE  If you say “Call” when the vehicle phonebook and the mobile phonebook are empty, the voice guide will say “The vehicle phonebook is empty. Would you like to add a new entry now?” Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say “Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.” You can now create data in the vehicle phonebook. Answer “No,” the system will return to the main menu. 3. After the voice guide says “Name please,” say the name you want to call, from those registered in the phonebook. 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will proceed to Step 5. If there are 2 or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to call <returned name>.” If that person is the one you want to call, answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the name of the next matching person will be uttered by the voice guide. NOTE  If you say “No” to all names read by the system, the voice guide will say “Name not found, returning to main menu” and the system will return to the main menu. 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered under the name you just said, the voice guide will proceed to Step 6. If 2 or more telephone numbers are registered that match the name you just said, the voice guide will say “Would you like to call <name> at [home], [work], [mobile], or [other]?” Select the location to call. NOTE  If the name you selected has matching data in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would you like to add location or try again?” Say “Try again,” and the system will return to Step 3. Say “Add location” and you can register an additional telephone number under the selected location.  If the name you selected has matching data in the mobile phonebook but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would you like to try again?” Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to Step 3. Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled. Start over again from Step 1. 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> <location>” and then the system will dial the telephone number. Features and controls 5-97 5 BK0236100US.book 98 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Receiving calls NOTE 5  When the confirmation function is on, the system will check if the name and location of the receiver are correct. If the name is correct, answer “Yes.” To change the name or location to call, answer “No.” The system will return to Step 3. Redialing You can redial the last number called, based on the history of dialed calls in the paired cellular phone. Use the following procedure to redial. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Redial.” Send function N00565700018 During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode, then say “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF tones. For example, if during a call you need to simulate the pressing of a phone button as a response to an automated system, press the SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cellular phone. 5-98 Features and controls N00565800035 If an incoming phone call is received while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC, the audio system will be automatically turned on and switched to the incoming call, even when the audio system was originally off. The voice guide announcement for the incoming call will be output from the front passenger’s seat speaker. If the CD player or radio was playing when the incoming call was received, the audio system will mute the sound from the CD player or radio and output only the incoming call. To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel control switch. When the call is over, the audio system will return to its previous state. Mute function N00565900010 At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle microphone. Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute function and mute the microphone. Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn off the mute function and cancel the mute on the microphone. Switching between hands-free mode and private mode N00566600014 Bluetooth® The 2.0 interface can switch between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) and private mode (calls using cellular phone). If you press the SPEECH button and say “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you can stop the hands-free mode and talk in private mode. To return to hands-free mode, press the SPEECH button again and say “Transfer call.” Phonebook function N00566000018 Bluetooth® The 2.0 interface has 2 types of unique phonebooks that are different from the phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile phonebook. These phonebooks are used to register telephone numbers and make calls to desired numbers via voice recognition function. NOTE  Disconnecting the battery cable will not delete information registered in the phonebook. BK0236100US.book 99 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Vehicle phonebook N00566101162 This phonebook is used when making calls with the voice recognition function. Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehicle phonebook per language. Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: home, work, mobile and other. You can register one telephone number for each location. You can register a desired name as a name for any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle phonebook. Names and telephone numbers can be changed later on. The vehicle phonebook can be used with all paired cellular phones. To register a telephone number in the vehicle phonebook You can register a telephone number in the vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: Reading out a telephone number, and selecting and transferring 1 phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone. To register by reading out a telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “New entry.” 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” Say your preferred name to register it. NOTE  If the maximum number of entries are already registered, the voice guide will say “The phonebook is full. Would you like to delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to delete a registered name. If you say “No,” the system will return to the main menu. 5. When the name has been registered, the voice guide will say “home, work, mobile, or other?” Say the location for which you want to register a telephone number. NOTE  When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say “The current number is <telephone number>, number please.” If you do not want to change the telephone number, say “cancel” or the original number to keep it registered. 6. The voice guide will say “Number please.” Say the telephone number to register it. NOTE  In the case of English, the system will recognise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the number “0.” 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone number you have just read, and then register the number. When the telephone number has been registered, the voice guide will say “Number saved. Would you like to add another number for this entry?” To add another telephone number for a new location for the current entry, answer “Yes.” The system will return to location selection in Step 5. Features and controls 5-99 5 BK0236100US.book 100 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Answer “No” to end the registration process and return to the main menu. NOTE 5  When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the telephone number you have read, the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to return to telephone number registration in step 6. To select and transfer one phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone You can select 1 phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone and register it in the vehicle phonebook. NOTE  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is parked. Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.  All or part of data may not be transferred, even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth®, depending on the compatibility of the device.  The maximum supported telephone number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits. 5-100 Features and controls NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer.  For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Import contact.” 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like to import a single entry or all contacts?” Say “Single entry.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become ready to receive transferred phonebook data. NOTE  If the maximum number of entries are already registered, the voice guide will say “The phonebook is full. Would you like to delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to delete a registered name. If you say “No,” the system will return to the main menu. 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to receive a contact from the phone. Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will receive the phonebook data from the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone. 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone to set it up so that the phonebook entry you want to register in the vehicle phonebook can be transferred to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. NOTE  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recognise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone or the connection takes too much time, the voice guide will say “Import contact has timed out” and then the system will cancel the registration. In such case, start over again from Step 1.  Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing and holding the SPEECH button will cancel the registration. 7. When the reception is complete, the voice guide will say “<Number of telephone numbers that had been registered in the import source> numbers have been imported. What name would you like to use for these numbers?” BK0236100US.book 101 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Say the name you want to register for this phonebook entry. NOTE  If the entered name is already used for other phonebook entry or similar to a name used for other phonebook entry, that name cannot be registered. 8. The voice guide will say “Adding <name>.” When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the name is correct. Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the voice guide will say “Name please.” Register a different name. 9. The voice guide will say “Numbers saved.” 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like to import another contact?” Answer “Yes” if you want to continue with the registration. You can continue to register a new phonebook entry from Step 5. Answer “No,” the system will return to the main menu. To change the content registered in the vehicle phonebook You can also listen to the list of names registered in the vehicle phonebook. NOTE  The system must have at least one entry. [Editing a telephone number] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact”. Say “Edit number.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names.” Say the name of the phonebook entry you want to edit. NOTE  Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phonebook will be read out in order. Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list of registered names” on page 5-102. 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, mobile or other?” Select and say the location where the telephone number you want to change or add is registered. When the confirmation function is on, the system will check the target name and location again. Answer “Yes” if you want to continue with the editing. Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 3. 6. The voice guide will say “Number, please.” Say the telephone number you want to register. NOTE  If the telephone number is already registered in the selected location, the voice guide will say “The current number is <current number>. New number, please.” Say a new telephone number to change the current number. 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone number. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the number is correct. Answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the system will return to the Step 3. 8. Once the telephone number is registered, the voice guide will say “Number saved” and then the system will return to the main menu. You can change or delete a name or telephone number registered in the vehicle phonebook. Features and controls 5-101 5 BK0236100US.book 102 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  If the location where a telephone number was already registered has been overwritten with a new number, the voice guide will say “Number changed” and then the system will return to the main menu. 5 [Editing a name] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Edit name.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names.” Say the name you want to edit. NOTE  Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list of registered names” on page 5-102. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing <name>.” When the confirmation function is on, the system will check if the name is correct. Answer “Yes” if you want to continue with the editing based on this information. 5-102 Features and controls Answer “No,” the system will return to Step 4. 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.” Say the new name you want to register. 7. The registered name will be changed. When the change is complete, the system will return to the main menu. [Listening to the list of registered names] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “List names.” 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the entries in the phonebook in order. 5. When the voice guide is done reading the list, it will say “End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?” When you want to check the list again from the beginning, answer “Yes.” When you are done, answer “No” to return to the previous or main menu. NOTE  You can call, edit or delete a name that is being read out. Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or “Delete” to delete it. The system will beep and then execute your command.  If you press the SPEECH button and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to the next entry or “Previous” to return to the previous entry. [Deleting a telephone number] 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Delete.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry you would like to delete, or say list names.” Say the name of the phonebook entry in which the telephone number you want to delete is registered. BK0236100US.book 103 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE  Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list of registered names” on page 5-102. 5. If only one telephone number is registered in the selected phonebook entry, the voice guide will say “Deleting <name> <location>.” If multiple telephone numbers are registered in the selected phonebook entry, the voice guide will say “Would you like to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], or all?” Select the location to delete, and the voice guide will say “Deleting <name> <location>.” NOTE  To delete the telephone numbers from all locations, say “All.” 6. The system will ask if you really want to delete the selected telephone number(s) to go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.” Answer “No,” the system will cancel deleting the telephone number(s) and then return to Step 4. 7. When the telephone number deletion is complete, the voice guide will say “<name> <location> deleted” and then the system will return to the main menu. If all locations are deleted, the system will say “<name> and all locations deleted” and the name will be removed from the phonebook. If numbers still remain under the entry, the name will retain the other associated numbers. Erasing the phonebook You can delete all registered information from the vehicle phonebook. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Erase all.” 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will ask “Are you sure you want to erase everything from your hands-free system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook and return to the main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “You are about to delete everything from your hands-free system phonebook. Do you want to continue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook and return to the main menu. 6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, erasing the hands-free system phonebook” and then the system will delete all data in the phonebook. When the deletion is complete, the voice guide will say “Hands-free system phonebook erased” and then the system will return to the main menu. Mobile phonebook N00566200049 All entries in the phonebook stored in the cellular phone can be transferred in a batch and registered in the mobile phonebook. Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing up to 1,000 names, can be registered. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically converts from text to voice the names registered in the transferred phonebook entries, and creates names. NOTE  Only the mobile phonebook transferred from the connected cellular phone can be used with that cellular phone. Features and controls 5-103 5 BK0236100US.book 104 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) NOTE 5  You cannot change the names and telephone numbers in the phonebook entries registered in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select and delete specific phonebook entries, either. To change or delete any of the above, change the applicable information in the source phonebook of the cellular phone and then transfer the phonebook again. To import a devices phonebook Follow the steps below to transfer to the mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in the cellular phone. NOTE  Transfer should be completed while the vehicle is parked. Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile phonebook is overwritten by the stored phonebook in the cellular phone.  All or part of data may not be transferred, even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth®, depending on the compatibility of the device.  Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported.  The maximum supported telephone number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits. 5-104 Features and controls NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer.  For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say “Phonebook.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Import contact.” 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like to import a single entry or all contacts?” Say “All contacts.” 5. The voice guide will say “Importing the contact list from the mobile phonebook. This may take several minutes to complete. Would you like to continue?” Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in the cellular phone will start. Answer “No,” the system will return to the main menu. NOTE  The transfer may take some time to complete depending on the number of contacts. NOTE  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable to transfer contact list from phone” and then the system will return to the main menu.  If you press the HANG-UP button or press and hold the SPEECH button during the data transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and the system will return to the main menu.  If an error occurs during the data transfer, all transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide will say “Unable to complete the phonebook import” and then the system will return to the main menu.  If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the voice guide will say “There are no contacts on the connected phone.” 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice guide will say “Import complete” and then the system will return to the main menu. General information N00566301119 Model name: MMC or MDGMY10 FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 or NT8MDGMY10 IC: 279B-MDGMY10 or 3043A-MDGMY10 Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- BK0236100US.book 105 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION  Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Endusers and installers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, use and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Enrollment commands N00566401080 5 USB input terminal (if so equipped) N00566701155  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. You can connect your USB memory device or iPod* to play music files stored in the USB memory device or iPod. This section explains how to connect and remove a USB memory device or iPod. See the following section for details on how to play music files. ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on page 7-29. Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31. *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries. Features and controls 5-105 BK0236100US.book 106 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) How to connect a USB memory device WARNING  An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving. N00566800104 To connect 5 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the glove compartment and remove the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C). 3. Connect a commercially available USB connector cable (D) to the USB memory device (E). 5-106 Features and controls NOTE 4. Connect the commercially available USB connector cable (D) to the vehicle’s connector cable (B). Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. 5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the clips.  Do not connect the USB memory device to the vehicle’s connector cable directly. The USB memory device may be damaged.  When closing the glove compartment, be careful not to trap the connector cable and USB memory device. To remove 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Remove the commercially available USB connector cable (D). Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. BK0236100US.book 107 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) 5 3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and close the glove compartment. How to connect an iPod N00566901157 To connect 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Open the glove compartment and remove the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C). 3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod. NOTE  Use a genuine connector cable from Apple Inc. 4. Connect the connector cable (D) to the connector cable (B). Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. 5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the clips. WARNING  An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving. NOTE  When closing the glove compartment, be careful not to trap the connector cable and iPod. To remove 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Remove the connector cable (D). Features and controls 5-107 BK0236100US.book 108 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 USB input terminal (if so equipped) Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration. Model name Condition USB memory device Storage capacity of 256 Mbytes or more iPod* 5 fifth generation F/W Ver.1.3 or later Model name first gener- F/W Ver.3.1.3 or ation later iPod touch* 80GB/180 F/W Ver.1.1.2 or GB later iPod clas120GB sic* Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications N00567000015 Device types N00567101143 Devices of the following types can be connected. 5-108 Features and controls first gener- F/W Ver.1.3.1 or ation later second F/W Ver.1.1.3 or generation later iPod nano* third generation F/W Ver.1.1.3 or later fourth F/W Ver.1.0.4 or generation later fifth generation F/W Ver.1.0.2 or later sixth generation F/W Ver.1.0 or later second F/W Ver.4.2.1 or generation later third generation F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later fourth F/W Ver.4.3.1 or generation later F/W Ver.2.0.1 or later 160GB F/W Ver.2.0.4 or (late 2009) later 3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and close the glove compartment. Condition iPhone* iPhone F/W Ver.3.1.3 or later iPhone 3G F/W Ver.4.2.1 or later iPhone 3GS F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later iPhone 4 F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later iPhone 4S F/W Ver.5.0.1 or later Models other than USB memory devices and iPods Digital audio player supporting mass storage class On vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, for these connectable device types, “iPod*,” “iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*” and “iPhone*,” refer to the following website: [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] BK0236100US.book 109 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Sun visors You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North America website. [For vehicles sold in Canada] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors website. Please read and agree to the “Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”. The websites mentioned above may connect you to websites other than the Mitsubishi Motors website. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/products/index.html *: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod touch” and “iPhone” are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries. NOTE  Depending on the type of the USB memory device or other device connected, the connected device may not function properly or the available functions may be limited.  It is recommended to use an iPod with firmware updated to the latest version.  You can charge your iPod by connecting it to the USB input terminal when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC.  Do not keep your USB memory device or iPod in your vehicle.  It is recommended that you back up the files in case of data damage. NOTE Sun visors  Do not connect to the USB input terminal any device (hard disk, card reader, memory reader, etc.) other than the connectable devices specified in the previous section. The device and/or data may be damaged. If any of these devices was connected by mistake, remove it after turning the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or putting the operation mode in OFF. N00524600353 Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce front glare while driving. To reduce side glare, turn the visor to the side (2). 5 File specifications N00567200020 You can play music files of the following specifications that are saved in a USB memory device or other device supporting mass storage class. When you connect your iPod, playable file specifications depend on the connected iPod. Item Condition File format MP3, WMA, AAC Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor. Maximum number of levels (including the Level 8 root) Number of folders 700 Number of files 65,535 Features and controls 5-109 BK0236100US.book 110 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 12 V power outlets 12 V power outlets N00525001670 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) CAUTION 5 Card holder Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on the sun visor.  Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.  Also be aware that using electronic equipment with the engine off may run the battery down.  When the power outlet is not in use, be sure to close the power outlet cover. This will prevent the power outlet from becoming clogged and short circuiting. Accessories can be operated while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the cover, and insert the plug in the power outlet. N00554301040 HomeLink® Wireless Control System is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. HomeLink® provides a convenient way to replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink® information can be found at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink®-Hotline at 1800-355-3515. WARNING  Do not use HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Regulations. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. 5-110 Features and controls BK0236100US.book 111 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) Programming a new HomeLink® WARNING  During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are programming. N00584700020 HomeLink® To program to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. NOTE  Once HomeLink® is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (for example, new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Cleaning the programmed information” on page 5-114.  You can program a maximum of 3 devices. To change or replace any of the 3 devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See “Cleaning the programmed information” on page 5-114 or “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button” on page 5-115. 1. Press the HomeLink® button that you would like to program. The indicator light (A) will flash orange slowly. 1- HomeLink® button 1 2- HomeLink® button 2 3- HomeLink® button 3 Before programming HomeLink® N00584600029  Some garage door openers manufactured after 1995 have “rolling code protection”. To program a garage door opener equipped with “rolling code protection”; you will need to access the garage door opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn” or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use a ladder and another person to assist you.  It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. NOTE  You do not need to continue holding the HomeLink® button.  If the indicator light does not flash, refer to “Cleaning the programmed information” on page 5-114. Features and controls 5-111 5 BK0236100US.book 112 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button while keeping the indicator light in view. 5 NOTE  Some devices may require you to replace this “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate operator / Canadian programming” section. If the indicator light does not change to rapidly flashing green or continuously lit green after performing these steps, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com NOTE  Some hand-held transmitters may actually train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button while watching the indicator light (A). Continue pressing the button until the indicator light (A) changes from slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code). Now you may release the hand-held transmitter button. 5-112 Features and controls 4. Press the HomeLink® button that was just programmed and observe the indicator light. • If the indicator light continuously illuminates green, programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. • If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. • If the device does not operate, continue with “Programming a new HomeLink®” steps 5 to 7 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device. 5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit (see the garage door opener manual to identify the “Learn” button.) 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) There are typically 30 seconds to initiate step 7. 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device. BK0236100US.book 113 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) NOTE NOTE  In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink® Hotline. Gate operator/Canadian programming N00584800021 Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission - which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held transmitter will go off when the device times out indicating that it has finished transmitting. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Programming” procedures, replace “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3 with the following:  If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. 3. Press and release - every 2 seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code). Now you may release the hand-held transmitter button. Proceed with “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 4 to complete. Additional steps for programming a door system with feedback N00584900022 The HomeLink® has the capability of receiving garage door status from compatible garage door opener systems. Check your garage door opener manual for the available feature and HomeLink® compatibility. Also for a listing of compatible systems contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com 5 1. Within 5 seconds after successfully programming the garage door opener (refer to “Programming a new HomeLink®” section), both garage door operation indicators (A) will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door feedback has been enabled. If the indicators do not flash, perform steps 2 and 3 while pressing the HomeLink® button up to the first 10 times after successful programming. 2. Press and release the programmed HomeLink® button to activate the door. You now have 1 minute in which to complete step 3. Features and controls 5-113 BK0236100US.book 114 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) 5 3. Once the door has stopped, press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener (refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for the location of the “Learn” button). Both the HomeLink® garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly green upon successful synchronization with the door opener (within 5 seconds). Operating HomeLink® N00585000020 To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. The indicators will illuminate/blink response to the following conditions: : Blinking : Illuminates Garage door opener closing Garage door opener closed Out of range Garage door feedback (orange) (green) (red) N00585200022 The HomeLink® has the capability of receiving garage door status from compatible garage door opener systems. Refer to “Additional steps for programming a door system with feedback” on page 5-113. Garage door status is then displayed with indicators (A). 5-114 Features and controls Garage door opener opening Garage door opener opened Out of range (orange) (green) (red) in The HomeLink® has the capability of listening to these messages at a range up to 820.2 feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED message feedback from the garage door opener. If the unit is out of range before receiving either the UP or DOWN message from the door opener, both the UP and DOWN indicators will flash red followed by a continuous lit orange indicator in the direction the door was last moving. Recall of the door state after initial feedback is possible by simultaneously pressing either HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and 3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message will be displayed for 3 seconds, again following the garage door status indication of the figure above. Clearing the programmed information N00585300023 To erase programming from the 3 buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), follow the steps noted: BK0236100US.book 115 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Interior lights 1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink® buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indicator will change from continuous yellow to rapidly flashing green. 2. Release both buttons. NOTE  Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. 3. HomeLink® is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 1. Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button N00585400024 To reprogram a the following. HomeLink® button, complete 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink® button can be released at this point. Proceed with “Programming a new HomeLink®” step 2. NOTE CAUTION  If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, it will revert to the previously stored programming. For questions or comments, visit www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by  The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. calling the HomeLink® Hotline. General information N00585600026 HomeLink® Your system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.  This device may not cause harmful interference.  This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 12 inches (20 cm) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Interior lights N00525301644 NOTE  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated with the engine off may run the battery down. Never leave the vehicle without checking that the light is off. Features and controls 5-115 5 BK0236100US.book 116 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Storage spaces Dome light N00525801317 5 1- ( ) The light illuminates regardless of whether a door is open or closed. 2- (•) Delayed off function The light illuminates when a door is opened. It goes off approximately 30 seconds after the door is closed. However, the light goes off immediately with all doors closed in the following cases: • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • When the power door lock function is used to lock the vehicle. 5-116 Features and controls • When the remote control transmitter of the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.key is used to lock the vehicle. • When the door lock/unlock switch is pressed to lock the vehicle while carrying the F.A.S.T.-key. Auto cut-out function If the light is left switched on with the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the operation mode is in OFF or ACC, and a door is opened, it goes off automatically after approximately 30 minutes. The light will illuminate again after it automatically goes off in the following cases: • When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. • When the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key is operated. • When all doors are closed. NOTE  When the key was used to start the engine: if the key is removed while the doors are closed, the light is illuminated and after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the engine: if the operation mode is put in OFF while the doors are closed, the light illuminates and after approximately 30 seconds it goes off. NOTE  The time until the light goes off (delayed off) can be adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.  The auto cut-out function cannot be operated when the dome light switch is in the “ ” position. Also, this function can be deactivated. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. 3- ( ) The light goes off regardless of whether a door is open or closed. Storage spaces N00526400528 CAUTION  Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans, or spectacles in the cabin when parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will become extremely hot, so lighters and other flammable items may catch fire and unopened drink cans (including beer cans) may rupture. The heat may also deform or crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spectacle parts that are made of plastic.  Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a storage space could otherwise cause injuries during a sudden stop. BK0236100US.book 117 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cup holders NOTE NOTE  Do not leave valuables in any storage space when leaving the vehicle.  The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is located in the glove compartment. For details, refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-105. Glove compartment N00551500275 WARNING  An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving. To open, pull the lever (A). 5 Cup holders N00527301433 The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans securely in its holes. NOTE  Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit securely depending on the shape of the bottle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving is done while a plastic bottle is not securely placed, so check that plastic bottles are placed securely or use the bottle holder. CAUTION  Do not drink beverages while driving your vehicle. This is distracting and could cause an accident. For the rear seat N00537001215 For the front seat Type 1 The cup holder is located in front of the floor console. The cup holder is located behind the parking brake lever. Features and controls 5-117 BK0236100US.book 118 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Bottle holders NOTE Bottle holders N00502800065 CAUTION  Drink beverages while driving your vehicle is distracting and can cause an accident.  Vibration and shaking while driving may cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as spilling hot beverages could cause burns. 5  Some beverages may not be stored, depending on the size and shape of the plastic bottles, etc. Convenience hook N00574700014 Convenience hook is located on the seatback of the passenger’s seat. There are bottle holders located on the front doors. Type 2 In order to use cup holder, allow the arm rest to drop down. NOTE NOTE  Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle holder.  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when storing beverages that are in plastic bottles, etc. 5-118 Features and controls  To avoid damage to the convenience hook, do not hang objects that weight more than 9 pounds (4 kg). BK0236100US.book 119 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Assist grips Assist grips N00559000074 These grips are to support the body by hand while seated in the vehicle. 5 CAUTION  Do not use the assist grips when getting into or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could detach causing you to fall. Features and controls 5-119 BK0236100US.book 120 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Driving safety Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2 Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2 Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2 Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3 Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4 Braking ............................................................................................6-5 Parking .............................................................................................6-5 Loading information ........................................................................6-6 Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10 Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11 6 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuel economy Fuel economy 6 Driving, alcohol and drugs N00628800178 N00628900049 Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Your personal driving habits can have a significant effect on your fuel consumption. Several recommendations for achieving the greatest fuel economy are listed below. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation. Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of any of these medications.  Whenever accelerating from a stop, always accelerate slowly and smoothly.  When parked for even a short period, do not idle the engine. Shut it off.  Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary stops.  Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures.  For freeway driving, maintain a speed of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when traffic, roadway and weather conditions safely permit.  Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle lubricated according to the recommendations in this manual.  Always keep your vehicle well maintained. A poorly maintained engine wastes fuel and costs money.  Never overload your vehicle. Driving safety To install the floor mat N00628700047 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the floorboard. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation holes over the retaining clips. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips. WARNING  NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired. Floor mat N00628600046 The original equipment floor mat provided with your vehicle was specifically designed for your vehicle. Always properly position the floor mat and assure it does not interfere with operation of the pedals. Always use the 6-2 retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will help prevent the floor mat from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi genuine floor mats are recommended. NOTE  The shape of the mat and the number of retaining clips may vary depending on the vehicle model. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle preparation before driving  Move the driver’s seat as far backward as possible, while keeping good visibility, and good control of the steering wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check the instrument panel indicators and multiinformation display for any possible problem.  Similarly, the front passenger seat should also be moved as far back as possible.  Make sure that infants and small children are properly restrained in accordance with all laws and regulations. WARNING  If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the operation of the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distances resulting in a crash and injury. Always make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal.  Always use the retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor mat.  Always install the mat with the correct side facing down.  Never install a second mat over or under an existing floor mat.  Do not use a floor mat designed for another model vehicle even if it is a Mitsubishi genuine floor mat.  Before driving, be sure to check the following: • Periodically check that the floor mat is properly secured with the retaining clips. If you remove the floor mat while cleaning the inside of your vehicle or for any other reason, always check the condition of the floor mat after it has been reinstalled. • While the vehicle is stopped with the engine off, check that the floor mat is not interfering with the pedals by depressing the pedals fully. Vehicle preparation before driving N00629001770 For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always check for the following: Seat belts and seats  Before starting the vehicle, make certain that you and all passengers are seated and wearing their seat belts properly (with children in the rear seat, in appropriate restraints), and that all the doors are locked. Defrosters Check these by selecting the defroster mode, and set the blower switch on high. You should be able to feel the air blowing against the windshield. Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows)” on page 7-6, 7-10, 7-17. Tires Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires (including spare tire) for proper pressure. Driving safety 6-3 6 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Safe driving techniques Replace your tires before they are heavily worn out. On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, there is a risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement should, only be performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 6 Lights Have someone watch while you turn all the exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn signal indicators and high-beam indicators on the instrument panel. Fluid leaks Check the ground under the vehicle after parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need to find out why immediately and have it fixed. Safe driving techniques N00629200137 Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you can avoid an accident or injury. However, if 6-4 Driving safety you give extra attention to the following areas, you can better protect yourself and your passengers:  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road and weather conditions. Leave plenty of stopping distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.  Before changing lanes, check your mirrors, your blind spots, and use your turnsignal light.  While driving, watch the behavior of other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.  Always obey applicable laws and regulations. Be a polite and alert driver. Always leave room for unexpected events, such as sudden braking.  If you plan to drive in another country, obey their vehicle registration laws and make sure you will be able to get the right fuel. Driving during cold weather N00629400474  Check the battery. At the same time, check the terminals and wiring. During extremely cold weather, the battery will not be as strong. Also, the battery power level may drop because more power is used for cold starting and driving. Before driving the vehicle, check to see if the engine runs at the proper speed and if the headlights are as bright as normally. Charge or replace the battery if necessary. During extreme cold weather, it is possible that a very low battery could freeze. WARNING  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas. Any spark or flame can cause the battery to explode, which could cause serious injury or death. Always wear protective clothes and a face mask when working with your battery, or let a skilled mechanic do it.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After starting the engine, allow a short warm-up time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then drive your vehicle slowly.  Stay at low speeds at first so that the manual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxle fluid has time to spread to all the lubrication points.  Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in cold weather conditions. This is normal and shifting will get easier as the transaxle warms up.  Check the engine antifreeze. If there is not enough coolant because of a leak or from engine overheating, add Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium or equivalent. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Braking Please read this section in conjunction with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7. WARNING  Never open the radiator cap when the radiator is hot. You could be seriously burned. Braking N00629500521 All parts of the brake system are critical to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice at regular intervals according to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. When brakes are wet When driving in cold weather On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking system, making the brakes less effective. While driving in such conditions, pay close attention to surrounding vehicles and to the condition of the road surface. From time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal and check how effective the brakes are. When driving downhill It is important to take advantage of the engine braking by downshifting while driving on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the brakes from overheating. Parking N00629601372 Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immediately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally. A film of water can be formed on the brake discs or brake drums, and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal. Parking on a hill When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels. For vehicles equipped with manual transaxle Place the gearshift lever into the “R” (Reverse) position when parking on a downhill slope, into the 1st position when parking on an uphill slope. For vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT) Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set when parked and that the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This prevents loading the parking brake against the transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to move the selector lever out of the “P” (PARK) position. Parking with the engine running Never leave the engine running while you take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or poorly ventilated place. Driving safety 6-5 6 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information WARNING  Leaving the engine running risks injury or death from accidentally moving the gearshift lever (manual transaxle) or the selector lever (CVT) or from the accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger compartment. 6 Where you park Your front bumper can be damaged if you scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. Be careful when traveling up or down steep slopes where your bumper can scrape the road. WARNING  Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. Do not keep the steering wheel fully turned for a long time More effort could be required to turn the steering wheel. Refer to “Electric power steering system (EPS)” on page 5-51. 6-6 Driving safety When leaving the vehicle Always carry the key and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area. Loading information N00629900424 It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, non-factory-installed options, if any, being towed. The tire and loading information placard located on the driver’s door sill of your vehicle will show how much weight it may properly carry. WARNING  Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can damage your vehicle, adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, cause tire failure, and result in an accident. It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:  Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.  Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum of (a) Curb weight; (b) Accessory weight; (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and (d) Production options weight.  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant.  Accessory weight: the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory- installed equipment (whether installed or not).  Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)* times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information  Production options weight: the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* times the number of specified occupants. (In your vehicle the number is 3)  Occupant distribution: Occupant distribution within the passenger compartment (In your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, 1 in second row seat) *: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one person as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian regulations. 6 This placard shows the maximum number of occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as well as “the combined weight of occupants and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle capacity weight. This placard also tells you the size and recommended inflation pressure for the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-12. Tire and loading information placard N00630100396 The tire and loading information placard is located on the inside sill of the driver’s door. Driving safety 6-7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit N00630201277 1. Locate 6 the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) 6-8 Driving safety 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE  The above steps for determining correct load limit were written in accordance with U.S.A. regulations. Your vehicle cannot tow a trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Loading information NOTE  The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.  For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 6  Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of this manual. Driving safety 6-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cargo loads WARNING Cargo loads N00629700435 Cargo load precautions N00630300082 6 To determine the cargo load capacity for your vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. For additional information, if needed, refer to “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” on page 6-8. DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers listed on the safety certification label (A) located on the inside sill of the driver’s door as the guide for passengers and/or cargo weight. WARNING  To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the combined weights of the driver, passengers and cargo and must never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.  Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, and may cause an accident.  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo or luggage cannot move when your vehicle is in motion. Having either the rear view blocked, or your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury or death.  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. Loading cargo on the roof N00630401149 WARNING  Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and adversely affect its handling characteristics. As a result, driving errors or emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss of control and result in an accident. Drive slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers such as sudden braking or quick turning. 6-10 Driving safety  Make sure that the weight of luggage and the roof carrier do not exceed the maximum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maximum roof load is exceeded, this could cause damage to the vehicle or result in an accident.  The total weight of all occupants and luggage, including your roof load, must not exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For more information, refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 11-3.  Roof load is determined by adding the weight of the roof carrier and the weight of the luggage placed on the roof carrier. CAUTION  Do not load luggage directly onto the roof. Use a roof carrier that properly fits your vehicle. For installation, refer to the instruction manual provided with the roof carrier.  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest items on the bottom. Do not load items that are wider than the roof carrier. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Trailer towing CAUTION Trailer towing  Before driving and after traveling a short distance, always check the load to make sure it is securely fastened to the roof carrier. Stop the vehicle periodically and check that the load remains secure. If the load is not secure, it could fall from the vehicle and damage your vehicle, another vehicle or create a road hazard. N00629801358 6 NOTE  To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in use.  Before using an automatic car wash, check with the attendant to determine if the roof carrier should be removed.  Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the trunk lid during loading luggage on the roof carrier. WARNING  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. It may not be possible to maintain control or adequate braking. Driving safety 6-11 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Comfort controls Vents ................................................................................................7-2 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) .........................................7-7 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)...................................7-12 Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-18 Air purifier (if so equipped)............................................................7-19 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-19 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) ..........................7-29 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-37 Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) .....7-40 Error codes .....................................................................................7-41 Handling of compact discs .............................................................7-42 Antenna ..........................................................................................7-44 General information about your radio ...........................................7-44 7 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vents Vents N00729901305 7 Side vents 1- Center vents 2- Side vents Air flow and direction adjustments N00730200330 Center vents Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vents open. To close the vents, press the dimple on the opposite side. Change the direction of the air flow by turning the vent itself. 1- Open 2- Close NOTE  On rare occasions, air from the vents of an air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is only moist air cooling suddenly and does not indicate a problem.  Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the vents as they could prevent the air conditioning from operating normally. Changing the mode selection N00736401676 To change air flow direction, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on page 7-5, 7-8. On vehicles with the automatic air conditioning, press the MODE switch or defogger switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page 7-2 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vents 7-14, “Defogger switch” on page 7-14.) These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the vents. : Small amount of air from the vents : Medium amount of air from the vents : Large amount of air from the vents Face position Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger compartment. NOTE  With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between 7 Foot/Defroster position Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and the door windows. the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. Foot position Air flows mainly to the leg area. Foot/Face position Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and flows to the leg area. Comfort controls 7-3 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) NOTE  With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the windshield and the door windows. 7 Defroster position Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) N00737700031 The heater can only be used while the engine is running. Control panel N00737801042 Air flows mainly to the windshield and the door windows. 1- Temperature control dial 2- Blower speed selection dial 3- Electric rear window defogger switch  P. 5-84 4- Mode selection dial 5- Air selection lever 7-4 Comfort controls Blower speed selection dial N00737901043 When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the blower speed; turning the dial counterclockwise will decrease it. When the dial is set to the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) Temperature control dial Mode selection dial N00738001067 N00738101084 Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler. To change air flow direction, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside air position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up. CAUTION Air selection lever N00738201056 Normally, use the outside air position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. To change the air selection, use the air selection lever. “ “ ” Outside air ” Recirculated air  Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up. Operating the system N00738301073 Heating Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. Comfort controls 7-5 7 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed to fit your needs. Combination of unheated air and heated air N00738401045 Set the mode selection dial to the positions shown in the illustration and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part of the passenger compartment. Set the desired blower speed. Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm air (depending upon the position of the temperature control dial) flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment. 7 CAUTION Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) N00738501091 CAUTION  For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows. Set the mode selection dial (between “ ” and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the windshield and door window. For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).  The engine speed may increase when the heater is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. NOTE  For quick heating, set the blower speed at the 3rd position. 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ position. 7-6 Comfort controls ” BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. 4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial. Manual air conditioning (if so N00736501228 equipped) N00730300344 The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running. For quick defrosting Control panel N00730501327 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 4. Set the temperature to the highest position. NOTE Blower speed selection dial When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the blower speed; turning the dial counterclockwise will decrease it. When the dial is set to the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop. 1234- Temperature control dial Air conditioning switch Blower speed selection dial Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-84 5- Mode selection dial 6- Air selection lever  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the side vents toward the door windows. Comfort controls 7-7 7 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) Temperature control dial Mode selection dial Air selection lever N00736601258 N00736701246 N00736801423 Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler. To change air flow direction, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. Normally, use the outside air position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. To change the air selection, use the air selection lever. “ “ 7 ” Outside air ” Recirculated air NOTE  While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial. If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside air position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up. 7-8 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) CAUTION  Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up. Operating the air conditioning system Cooling N00731201389 N00731101304 Heating Air conditioning switch N00731001488 Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indicator light (A) will come on. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed to fit your needs. Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indicator light (A) goes off. 7 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Push the air conditioning switch. 4. Change the temperature by turning the control dial clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. Set the desired blower speed. CAUTION NOTE  For quick heating, set the blower speed at the 3rd position.  The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. Comfort controls 7-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) NOTE  If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, set the air selection lever to the recirculation position. Let in some outside air from time to time for good ventilation.  To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection dial to the “ Combination of unheated air and heated air N00731301292 Set the mode selection dial to the positions shown in the illustration and set the air selection lever to the outside air position. ” position. The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part of the passenger compartment. Set the desired blower speed. Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm air (depending upon the position of the temperature control dial) flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment. 7 Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) N00731401596 CAUTION  For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows. Set the mode selection dial (between “ ” and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the windshield and door window. For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow). 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ position. 7-10 Comfort controls ” BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. 4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial. 5. Push the air conditioning switch. NOTE  When defrosting, do not set the temperature control dial near the maximum cool position. This would blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up. For quick defrosting 7 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air position. 3. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 4. Set the temperature to the highest position. 5. Push the air conditioning switch. NOTE  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the side vents toward the door windows. Comfort controls 7-11 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) N00731501353 The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running. Control panel N00711801624 Type 1 7 Type 2 12345678- 7-12 Temperature control switch Air conditioning switch MODE switch Air selection switch Blower speed selection switch Defogger switch AUTO switch Electric rear window defogger switch  P.5-84 Comfort controls 9101112131415- OFF switch Temperature display Mode selection display Air selection indicator Air conditioning indicator AUTO indicator Blower speed display NOTE  There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) in the illustrated position. Never place anything over the sensor, since doing so will prevent it from functioning properly. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) NOTE NOTE  A sound will be made every time you push any of the switches. 1- Increase 2- Decrease Blower speed selection switch N00736900179 Press of the blower speed selection switch to increase the blower speed. Press of the blower speed selection switch to decrease the blower speed. The selected blower speed will be shown in the display (A). Temperature control switch N00737001406 Press or of the temperature control switch to the desired temperature. The selected temperature will be shown in the display (A).  The temperature value of air conditioning is switched in conjunction with outside temperature display unit of the multi information display. Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on page 5-74.  While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the switch. To prevent the windshield and windows from fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to “ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.  When the temperature is set to the highest or the lowest setting under the AUTO operation, the air selection and the air conditioning will be automatically changed as follows. • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set to the highest setting) Outside air will be introduced and the air conditioning will stop. If the air selection and the air conditioning are operated manually after an automatic changeover, manual operation will be selected. • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set to the lowest setting) Inside air will be recirculated and the air conditioning will operate. Comfort controls 7-13 7 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) 7 The above indicates the factory settings. You can personalize the air selection switch and air conditioning switch to match your personal preferences. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning switch (Changing the function setting)” on page7-16. Refer to “Personalizing the air selection (Changing the function setting)” on page7-15. N00737200368 N00703400015 N00737101247 To change air flow direction, press the MODE switch. Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes to the next one in the following sequence: “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”. The selected mode is shown in the display (A). Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. Comfort controls Air selection switch Defogger switch MODE switch 7-14 NOTE  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air conditioning system automatically operates and outside air (as opposed to recirculated air) is selected. Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows)” on page 7-17. When this switch is pressed, the mode changes to the “ ” mode. The indicator light (A) will come on. The selected mode is shown in the display (B). Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. Normally, use the outside air position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch. The selected position will be shown in the display (A).  Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment.  Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment. BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) NOTE  If you press the AUTO switch to select automatic control after manual operation, the air selection switch will also be automatically controlled. Personalizing the air selection (Changing the function setting) N00760000089 When the air conditioning turns on, the air selection is controlled automatically. When the air conditioning turns off, the air selection automatically goes back to the outside air position. If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside air position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up. CAUTION  Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up. You can change the following functions to match your preference.  Enable automatic air control: When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection switch will also be automatically controlled. the system will beep three times and the indicator will flash three times. • When the setting has changed from disabled to enabled, the system will beep two times and the indicator will flash three times. NOTE  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air control”.  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air selection will automatically change to the outside air position, even if the system is set to “Disable automatic air control”, in order to prevent windows from fogging up.  Disable automatic air control: Even when the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection switch will not be automatically controlled.  Changing the settings Press the air selection switch for about 10 seconds or longer. When the setting has changed, the system will beep and the “ ” indicator will flash. • When the setting has changed from enabled to disabled, Comfort controls 7-15 7 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) Air conditioning switch N00737301409 Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator will be shown in the display (A). When the AUTO switch is pressed, or when the temperature control switch has been set to the minimum temperature, the air conditioning switch is automatically controlled.  Disable automatic air conditioning control: The air conditioning switch is not automatically controlled, unless the air conditioning switch is used. 7 Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indicator goes off. Personalizing the air conditioning switch (Changing the function setting) N00759800090 You can change the following functions to match your preference.  Enable automatic air conditioning control: 7-16 Comfort controls  Changing the settings Press the air conditioning switch for about 10 seconds or longer. When the setting has changed, the system will beep and the “ ” indicator will flash. • When the setting has changed from enabled to disabled, the system will beep three times and the indicator will flash three times. • When the setting has changed from disabled to enabled, the system will beep two times and the indicator will flash three times. NOTE  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air conditioning control”. NOTE  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air conditioning will run automatically, even if the system is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning control”, in order to prevent windows from fogging up. AUTO switch N00703500016 When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode selection, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/outside air selection, temperature adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all controlled automatically. The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the display (A). BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) OFF switch N00703600017 Push the switch to turn off the air conditioning system. In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO mode and follow these procedures: 1. Push the AUTO switch. 2. Set the temperature control switch to the desired temperature. The temperature can be set within a range of around 61 to 89 (Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2). The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower speed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFF of air conditioning will be controlled automatically. CAUTION Operating the air conditioning system (automatic mode)  The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. N00731701528 Operating the air conditioning system (manual mode) N00731801141 Blower speed and vent mode may be controlled manually by setting the blower speed selection switch and the MODE switch to the desired positions. To return to automatic operation, press the AUTO switch. CAUTION  The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating. With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) N00732401522 NOTE  Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or 24 (Type 2) under normal conditions. CAUTION  For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows. To remove frost or mist from the windshield and door windows, use the MODE switch or defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”). Comfort controls 7-17 7 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Important air conditioning operating tips For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow). 7 1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” position. 2. Set the air selection switch to the outside air position. 3. Select your desired blower speed by pressing the blower speed selection switch. 4. Select your desired temperature by pressing the temperature control switch. 5. Push the air conditioning switch. 7-18 Comfort controls For quick defrosting Important air conditioning operating tips N00733700336 1. Push the defogger switch to change to the “ ” position. 2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 3. Set the temperature to the highest position. NOTE  While the mode selection is set “ ” position, the air conditioning compressor will run automatically. The outside air position will also be selected automatically.  If the mode selection is set “ ” position, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or select the recirculation position. This prevents the windows from fogging up.  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the side vents toward the door windows.  When defrosting, do not set the temperature to the maximum cool position. This will blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up. 1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the vehicle interior extremely hot which then requires more time to cool. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning to expel the hot air. 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed when the air conditioning is in use. The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce cooling efficiency. 3. When running the air conditioning, make sure the air intake, which is located in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake chamber may reduce air flow and plug the water drains. Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Air purifier (if so equipped) Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. CAUTION  The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC134a and the lubricant ZXL 200PG. Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and may require replacing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system. The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is not recommended. The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, it may contribute slightly to global warming. It is recommended that the old refrigerant be saved and recycled for future use. Air purifier (if so equipped) N00733800180 The air conditioning system is equipped with an air filter to remove pollen and dust. The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace it periodically. For the maintenance interval, refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. NOTE  Operation in certain conditions such as driving on a dusty road and frequent use of the air conditioning can lead to reduction of service life of the filter. When you feel that the air flow is lower than normal or when the windshield or windows start to fog up easily, replace the air filter. Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. During a long period of disuse The air conditioning should be operated for at least five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This includes the quick defrosting mode. Operating the air condition system weekly maintains lubrication of the compressor internal parts to keep the air conditioning in the best operating condition. AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) N00734302131 The audio system can only be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. NOTE  To listen to the audio system while the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position or put the operation mode in ACC. For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, if the operation mode is left in ACC, the accessory power will automatically turn off after a certain period of time and you will no longer be able to use the audio system. The accessory power comes on again if the engine switch is operated with it in the “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power autocutout function” on page 5-14.  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise in the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far away as possible from the audio equipment.  If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system and have it checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Never try to repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio system until it is inspected by a qualified person.  If the audio system is damaged by foreign objects, water, or fire, have the system checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors technician. Comfort controls 7-19 7 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) Volume and tone control panel To adjust the tone N00711901742 NOTE N00712101712 1. Press the /MENU button to select BASS  TREBLE  FADER  BALANCE  Sound control mode off. 2. Turn the SEL switch either clockwise or counterclockwise to change the tone/balance setting. The status will be shown in the display. 7 BASS (Bass tone control) 1- PWR (On-Off)/VOL (Volume control)/SEL (Select) switch 2- Display 3/MENU (Mode change) button 4- SEL (Select) indicator 5(Return) button To select the desired bass level.  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  When set to “0”, it will beep.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Another mode is selected. • No adjustment is performed within 10 seconds.  In a two-speakers vehicle, keep the FADER setting in the middle position. Since no rear speakers are connected, adjusting the FADER setting toward the “R” (rear) side will result in a loss of sound output. TREBLE (Treble tone control) To select the desired treble level. Radio control panel and display N00734901925 FADER (Front/Rear balance control) To adjust the volume N00712001434 Turn the VOL switch clockwise to increase the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The status will be shown in the display. To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R (rear) speakers. BALANCE (Left/Right balance control) To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R (right) speakers. 7-20 Comfort controls 1- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 2- PWR (On-Off) switch BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) 3456- Display Seek (Down-seek) button Seek (Up-seek) button Memory select buttons Automatic tuning CD control panel and display N00735301766 After keeping the seek button depressed until it beeps, release the button, and the selected station reception will start. To listen to the radio N00735001936 1. Press the PWR switch or the RADIO button to turn on the radio. Press and hold the PWR switch for 2 seconds or longer to turn off the radio. 2. Press the RADIO button to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2). 3. Press the seek button to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons to tune in to a station memorized for that button. Refer to “Automatic tuning”, “Manual tuning” or “To enter frequencies into the memory”. To tune the radio Manual tuning The frequency changes every time the seek button is pressed. Press the button to select the desired station. To enter frequencies into the memory As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be entered into the memory. To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps: 1. Press the seek button to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory. 2. Press and hold one of the memory select buttons until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the frequency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in memory as well as the frequency is displayed. 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within 1 second. 7 1234567891011121314151617- MEDIA button RADIO button INFO button CD eject button CD indicator Disc-loading slot FOLDER indicator TRACK indicator Display RPT (Repeat)/F-RPT (Folder repeat mode) indicator RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder random mode) indicator SEL (Select) indicator PAGE (Title scroll) button (Fast-reverse/Track down) button (Fast-forward/Track up) button (Return) button PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch Comfort controls 7-21 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) 18- RPT (Repeat) button 19- RDM (Random) button To eject a disc When the CD eject button is pressed, the disc automatically stops and is ejected. To listen to a CD N00735502127 To load a disc 7 1. Insert the disc with the label facing up. When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator will come on and the CD player will begin playing even if the radio is being used. The CD player will also start playback when the MEDIA button is pressed with a disc in the player or with a disc set in the Disc-loading slot, even if the radio is being used. 2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by pressing the PWR switch for 2 seconds or longer, or change over to the radio mode by pressing the RADIO button, or eject the disc by pressing the eject button. NOTE  For information on adjusting the volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20.  3 inch (8 cm) compact discs cannot be played on this CD player.  For information concerning the handling of compact discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 7-42. 7-22 Comfort controls NOTE  If you do not remove the disc before 15 seconds have elapsed, the CD player will automatically reload the disc and stop. To listen to a music CD Press the MEDIA button if a disc is already in the CD player. The CD player will start playback. The track number and the playing time will appear on the display. The tracks in the disc will be played continuously. To listen to an MP3 CD This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc can hold up to 255 files in up to 100 folders, up to a maximum of 16 levels. The ID3 tag information can be displayed during MP3 playback. For information concerning ID3 tags, refer to “CD text and MP3 title display” on page 7-24. 1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot. 2. Press the MEDIA button if a disc is already in the CD player. The display shows “READING”, then playback will begin. NOTE  While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files, and the external audio input mode by pressing the MEDIA button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep). For information on the external audio input, refer to “To use the external audio input function” on page 7-28.  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.  The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.  Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.  MP3 encode software and writing software are not supplied with this unit. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) NOTE  You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 or displaying the information of MP3 files recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).  If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.  This unit does not record MP3 files.  For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 7-43. Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example) Root folder (Root directory) The disc is fast-reversed while the button is held down. Playback will begin once the button is released. To select a desired track Track up CAUTION  Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format which has the “.mp3” file name may produce noise from the speakers and speaker damage, and can damage your hearing. Fast-reverse Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Folder selection in the order File selection in the order To fast-forward/reverse the disc Fast-forward The disc is fast-forwarded while the button is held down. Playback will begin once the button is released. The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the button is pressed. The display window will show the track number of the track selected. Track down The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the button is pressed. The display window will show the track number of the track selected. To find a file (MP3 CDs only) Operate the SEL switch to select desired file. When this mode is activated by pressing the SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear on the display. Comfort controls 7-23 7 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or to select the folder or file. Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or file. NOTE 7  To cancel the selection, press the button to return to the previous step.  If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the SEL switch has been turned, searching for the desired file is canceled.  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the file is displayed, playback starts.  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the display and the SEL switch is operated, the volume adjustment is activated. To repeat tracks To repeat a track Press the RPT button to repeat the same track. If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indicator will come on. To exit this mode, press the button again. 7-24 Comfort controls To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3 CDs only) Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only) While a song is playing, press the RPT button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep). The F-RPT indicator will come on and the disc will repeat all the songs in the folder that contains the song currently playing. To exit this mode, press the button again. If the RDM button is pressed, the F-RDM indicator will come on and the tracks are played at random from the folder that is currently selected. To exit this mode, press the button again. NOTE  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated. To change the order of tracks for playback Random playback for a disc (music CDs only) If the RDM button is pressed, the RDM indicator will come on and the tracks are played at random. To exit this mode, press the button again. Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only) Press the RDM button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep). The RDM indicator will come on and the tracks are played at random from all folders on the disc currently selected. To exit this mode, press the button again. NOTE  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the random mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random sequence. CD text and MP3 title display N00752101192 This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titles, including ID3 tag information. BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) CD text The CD player can display disc and track titles. Press the INFO button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: disc name  track name  normal display mode. NOTE  The display can show up to 11 characters. If a disc name or track name has more than 11 characters, press the PAGE button to view the next 11 characters.  When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.  Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as “•”. MP3 titles The CD player can display folder and file titles. Press the INFO button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: folder name  file name  normal display mode. ID3 tag information 1. Press the INFO button for 2 seconds or longer to switch to the ID3 tag information. 2. Press the INFO button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: album TAG  track TAG  artist TAG  normal display mode. Example CD player mode Clock mode NOTE  To return from ID3 tag information to the folder name, press the INFO button again for 2 seconds or longer.  When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.  The display can show up to 11 characters. If a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag information has more than 11 characters, press the PAGE button to view the next 11 characters.  Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as “•”. A- 7 (Clock) button NOTE  While the clock mode is selected, the display will switch to the applicable operation display whenever the CD player, external audio input mode or radio, etc. is operated. Then, if no entries are made for 7 seconds, the display will automatically return to the clock mode. To display the clock N00702600010 Press the button to switch the clock mode. To exit the clock mode, press the button. The CD player can display ID3 tag information for files that have been recorded with ID3 tag information. Comfort controls 7-25 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) To adjust the clock NOTE N00702701047  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The beep. 7 A(Clock) button B- SEL (Select) switch C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the button and the clock display flashes. 2. Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “hours” digit. 3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, press the button to flash the “minutes” digit. Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “minutes” digit. 4. When the desired time is displayed, press the button to complete the procedure. 7-26 Comfort controls To confirm the version number of the Gracenote DB (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00702801048 button is pressed until you hear a • The button is pressed. • Another mode is selected.  Reset the time after the battery terminals are disconnected and reconnected.  Seconds do not appear in the clock display, but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, the clock begins to operate from 0 seconds. A/MENU button B- SEL (Select) switch C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2 seconds or longer. 2. Turn the SEL switch or press the /MENU button several times to select “Gracenote DB” and then press the SEL switch. 3. Turn the SEL switch to select “DB Version” and then press the SEL switch to determine the Gracenote DB version. BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) NOTE  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Any operation is not performed for more than 10 seconds. • The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. To change the language (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00702901049 It is possible to set the language used for voice control. C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2 seconds or longer. 2. Turn the SEL switch or press the /MENU button several times to select “PHONE SET” and then press the SEL switch. 3. Turn the SEL switch to select “LANGUAGE” and then press the SEL switch. 4. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangChg YES” and then press the SEL switch. 5. Turn the SEL switch to select language and then press the SEL switch. 6. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangSet YES” and then press the SEL switch. To change the position of the speaker of the output sound (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00755400030 It is possible to change the position of the speaker of the output sound during cellular phone voice cut-in. 7 NOTE  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Any operation is not performed for more than 10 seconds. • The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. A/MENU button B- SEL (Select) swicth C- SEL (Select) indicator D(Return) button 1. Press and hold the seconds or longer. /MENU button for 2 A/MENU button B- SEL (Select) switch Comfort controls 7-27 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped) 7 2. Turn the SEL switch or press the /MENU button several times to select “PHONE SET” and then press the SEL switch. 3. Turn the SEL switch to select “ PHONE IN ” and then press the SEL switch. 4. Turn the SEL switch to select “IN-L” (output sound from the left side speaker) or “IN-R” (output sound from the right side speaker) and then press the SEL switch. NOTE  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL indicator will appear on the display.  This mode will be canceled if any of the following occurs. • The button is pressed. • Any operation is not performed for more than 10 seconds. • The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. To use the external audio input function N00703001021 A- Auxiliary Audio connector (Mini-jack) B- MEDIA button C- Display You can listen to commercially available audio equipment, such as a portable audio system, from your vehicle’s speakers, by connecting the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio connector. NOTE  Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio connector. 7-28 Comfort controls To activate the external audio input mode 1. Connect the headphone port of the portable audio system to the auxiliary audio connector using a commercially available connection cord. 2. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the AUX mode. The display will show “AUX” and then the external audio input mode will be activated. 3. To deactivate the external audio input mode, press the MEDIA button to switch to another mode. CAUTION  Do not operate the connected audio equipment while driving. This could distract you and an accident might occur. NOTE  The connected audio equipment cannot be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio system.  Depending on the connected audio equipment, it may produce noise from the speakers. BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) NOTE  Use the connected audio equipment’s own power source, such as its battery. Noise may be produced from the speakers if the connected audio equipment is used while charging it using the accessory socket of the vehicle.  Do not activate the external audio input mode when no audio equipment is connected. Otherwise, noise may be produced from the speakers.  Connect audio equipment when the external audio input mode is deactivated or lower the vehicle’s speaker volume before connecting it. Noise may be produced from the speakers if audio equipment is connected after the external audio input mode is activated.  Compared to the CD player mode and radio mode, the vehicle’s speaker volume will be lower in the external audio input mode. Therefore, be careful when switching from the external audio input mode to the CD player mode or radio mode since the speaker volume will be higher.  Do not use excessive force on the connection cord. Otherwise, the cord and connectors may be damaged.  If the connection cord alone is left connected to the auxiliary audio connector, noise may be produced from the speakers. NOTE NOTE  For information on how to connect and operate the commercially available audio equipment, refer to the owner’s manual for the commercially available audio equipment. To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)  A file protected by copyright might not be able to playback.  It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of the connected device to 0 db or neutral. iPod control panel and display N00762301070 N00762200056 You can connect your iPod or USB memory device to the USB input terminal and play music files stored in the iPod or USB memory device. See the following section for the types of connectable devices and supported files. Refer to “Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications” on page 5-108. See the following sections for the connecting methods, “How to connect an iPod” on page 5-107 and “How to connect a USB memory device” on page 5-106. If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, you can play music files in your iPod or USB memory device via voice operation. Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31 and “To play USB memory device tracks via voice operation” on page 7-37. 7 123456789- MEDIA button RADIO button INFO button (USB device active) indicator iPod indicator Display TRACK indicator RPT (Repeat mode) indicator RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder random mode) indicator 10- SEL (Select) indicator 11- PAGE (Title scroll) button Comfort controls 7-29 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) 12(Fast-reverse/Track down) button 13(Fast-forward/Track up) button 14(Return) button 15- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch 16- RPT (Repeat) button 17- RDM (Random) button To play from an iPod N00762401101 7 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used. 2. Connect your iPod to the USB input terminal. Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page 5-107. 3. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the iPod mode. The input mode changes as follows every time the MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  iPod mode Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. The iPod indicator is illuminated and then the iPod mode will be activated. 4. Once the device is selected, playback starts and indicator appears on the display. To select a desired track NOTE  Depending on the condition of your iPod, it may take a longer time before the playback starts. 5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO button or MEDIA button to switch to a different mode. NOTE  Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the iPod is connected to the audio system.  To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20. Comfort controls Track up Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display. Track down Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display. NOTE  Pressing the button once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the song. To fast-forward/reverse the track N00762501043 To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button. Fast-forward To fast-forward the current track, press and hold the button. Fast-reverse To fast-reverse the current track, press and hold the button. 7-30 N00762600034 To find a track from the iPod menu N00762701090 You can select desired tracks from the “Playlists”, “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs” or “Genre” (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) menus on your iPod. Operate the SEL switch to select desired tracks. The selected menu or category or track is shown in the display. BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) When this mode is activated by pressing the SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear on the display. Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or to select the menu or category or track. Turn the SEL switch :To show the menu or category or track. To play tracks in random order N00762901034 Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the display. The iPod randomly selects and plays tracks from the current category. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play tracks in each album in random order NOTE NOTE  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button. The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed.  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display.  Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “•”. N00763001045  To cancel the selection, press the button to return to the previous step.  If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the SEL switch has been pressed, searching of the desired tracks is canceled.  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the track is displayed, playback starts.  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the display and the SEL switch is operated, the volume adjustment is activated. To play the same track repeatedly N00762800023 Press the RPT button during playback to show “RPT” in the display. To exit this mode, press the button again. Press and hold the RDM button until you hear a beep to show “F-RDM” in the display. The iPod randomly selects and plays tracks in the album from the current category. To exit this mode, press the button again. To switch the display N00763101059 You can display the track titles, artist names, genre and album titles recorded in the iPod. The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed during playback: Album title  Track name  Artist name  Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)  Normal display. To play iPod tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00763200040 Desired tracks can be selected and played from your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice commands. For information concerning the voice recognition function or speaker registration function, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-85. The following explains how to prepare for voice operation and play the tracks. Preparation for voice operation N00763300067 To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH button (A) first. Comfort controls 7-31 7 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) 3. After the voice guide says “What Artist would you like to play?,” say the artist name. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play <artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. If you say “No,” the next matching artist is spoken by the system. 7 To search by artist name N00763401081 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Artist”. NOTE  If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip step 3. 7-32 Comfort controls NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all artist names offered, the voice guide will say “Artist not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2.  Search time depends on the number of songs on your connected device. Devices containing a large number of songs may take longer to return search results. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist name>,” the system creates a playlist index for the artist. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the artist name is correct. If the artist name is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Artist not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. To search by album title N00763501082 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Album”. NOTE  If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip step 3. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) 3. After the voice guide says “What Album would you like to play?” say the album title. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play <album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. If you say “No,” the name of the next matching album is spoken by the system. NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all album titles offered, the voice guide will say “Album not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <album title>,” the system creates a playlist index for the album title. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the album title is correct. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Album not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. To search by playlist N00763601041 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Playlist”. NOTE  If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip step 3. If the device has no playlist, the voice guide will say “There are no playlists stored on device” and the system returns to step 2. 3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist would you like to play?,” say the playlist name. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play <playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. If you say “No,” the next matching playlist name is spoken by the system. NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all playlist names offered, the voice guide will say “Playlist not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <playlist>,” the system creates an index for the playlist. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the playlist name is correct. If the playlist name is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Playlist not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function setting” on page 5-89. 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. Comfort controls 7-33 7 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) To search by genre N00763701042 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. NOTE  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized 7 or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide. 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Genre”. NOTE  If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step 3. 3. After the voice guide says “What Genre would you like to play?,” say the music type. 4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. 5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to play <genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6. 7-34 Comfort controls If you say “No,” the next matching genre is spoken by the system. USB control panel and display N00763901073 NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all genres offered, the voice guide will say “Genre not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2. 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <genre>,” the system creates an index for the genre. NOTE  If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not found, please try again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function setting” on page 5-89. 12345678- 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback. 910111213141516- MEDIA button RADIO button INFO button (USB device active) indicator USB indicator Display TRACK indicator RPT (Repeat mode)/F-RPT (Folder repeat mode) indicator RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder random mode) indicator SEL (Select) indicator PAGE (Title scroll) button (Fast-reverse/Track down) button (Fast-forward/Track up) button PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch RPT (Repeat) button RDM (Random) button BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) To play from a USB memory device N00764001101 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used. 2. Connect your USB memory device to the USB input terminal. Refer to “How to connect a USB memory device” on page 5-106. 3. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the USB mode. The input mode changes as follows every time the MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  USB mode Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. The USB indicator is illuminated and then the USB mode will be activated. 4. Once the device is selected, playback starts and indicator appears on the display. NOTE  Depending on the condition of your USB device, it may take a longer time before the playback starts. NOTE  To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20. Root folder (Root directory) Supported compressed music files N00764100105 This audio can play MP3, WMA and AAC files recorded in a USB memory device. This audio supports up to 65,535 files in 700 folders on 8 levels. Folder selection order (example) order/file 7 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 playback The folder and file hierarchy in the USB memory device is shown below. Folder selection In the order File selection In the order NOTE  If a file protected by copyrights is played, the file will be skipped. To fast-forward/reverse the track N00764201044 5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO button or MEDIA button to switch to a different mode. To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button. Comfort controls 7-35 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) To find a file Fast-forward To fast-forward the current track, press and hold the button. Fast-reverse To fast-reverse the current track, press and hold the button. 7 To select a file N00764300035 To play the same file repeatedly N00703101035 N00764500024 Operate the SEL switch to select desired file. When this mode is activated by pressing the SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear on the display. Press the RPT button to show “RPT” in the display. To cancel this mode, press the button again. Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or to select the folder or file. Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or file. Track up Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. Track down Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. NOTE  Pressing the button once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the file. NOTE  To cancel the selection, press the button to return to the previous step.  If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the SEL switch has been turned, searching of the desired file is canceled.  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the file is displayed, playback starts.  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the display and the SEL switch is operated, the volume adjustment is activated. To play the files in the same folder repeatedly N00764600038 Press and hold the RPT button until you hear a beep to show “F-RPT” in the display. All tracks in the current folder are played repeatedly. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play a folder in random order N00764701049 Press the RDM button to show “F-RDM” in the display. The audio randomly selects and plays tracks from the current folder. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play all folders in random order N00764801040 Press and hold the RDM button until you hear a beep to show “RDM” in the display. The audio randomly selects and plays tracks from all folders. 7-36 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 37 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) To exit this mode, press the button again. To switch the display N00765101053 You can displays titles with tag information. NOTE  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display.  Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “•”. Folder title The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed during playback: Folder name  File name  Normal display. Tag information 1. Press and hold the INFO button until you hear a beep. 2. The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed briefly: Album TAG  Track TAG  Artist TAG  Genre TAG (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)  Normal display. NOTE  Press and hold the INFO button again until you hear a beep, and the tag information display returns to the folder title display.  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button. The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed. To play USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00765200073 Desired tracks can be selected and played from your USB memory device by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice commands. For information concerning the voice recognition function or speaker registration function, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-85. The playback sequence of tracks is the same as when an iPod is connected. Refer to the “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on page 7-31. 7 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) N00765301114 You can wirelessly connect a digital audio player or cellular phone supporting Bluetooth® to listen to the tracks on the connected device. Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” for the connecting method, etc. on page 5-85. The following explains the basic playback method. Preparation for voice operation To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH button (A) first. Comfort controls 7-37 BK0236100US.book 38 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) NOTE 7  Depending on the connected device, operation of the connected device is limited to its available functions.  Depending on the connected device, the device may not operate correctly.  A file protected by copyright might not be able to playback.  It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of the connected device to 0 db or neutral.  The voice operation is not available to access music files on the connected Bluetooth® device. Bluetooth® device control panel and display N00765401072 1- MEDIA button 2- PWR (On-Off) switch 3- BT (Bluetooth®) indicator 7-38 Comfort controls 45678910111213- TRACK indicator Display PAGE (Title scroll) button (Fast-reverse/Track down) button (Fast-forward/Track up) button INFO button Play/Pause button Stop button RPT (Repeat) button RDM (Random) button To listen to tracks from a device connected via Bluetooth® N00765501103 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used. 2. Press the MEDIA button several times to switch to the BT-A (Bluetooth®) mode. The input mode changes as follows every time the MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  iPod mode  Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. The BT indicator is illuminated and then the BT-A mode will be activated. 3. Connect your Bluetooth® device. Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device” on page 5-91. 4. Playback starts automatically. NOTE  Depending on the connected device, the playback may not start automatically. In this case, operate the connected device to start the playback. To stop the playback (if supported by the device) N00765600035 To stop the playback, press the Stop button. To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause button. To pause the playback (if supported by the device) N00765700036 To pause the playback, press and hold the Play/Pause button until you hear a beep. To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause button. To fast-forward/reverse the track (if supported by the device) N00703201023 To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the button or button. BK0236100US.book 39 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) Fast-forward To fast-forward the current track, press and hold the button. Fast-reverse To fast-reverse the current track, press and hold the button. To select a track (if supported by the device) N00765800037 Track up To play the same track repeatedly (if supported by the device) N00765900038 N00766001033 Press the RPT button several times to switch to show “RPT” in the display. The mode changes as follows every time the RPT button is pressed: No display (not repeat)  RPT (repeat same track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No display To exit this mode, press the button again. Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the display. The system randomly selects and plays tracks from the Bluetooth® device. To exit this mode, press the button again. To play all tracks repeatedly (if supported by the device) N00703301024 Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. Track down Press the button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display. NOTE  Pressing the button once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the file. To play tracks in random order (if supported by the device) Press the RPT button several times to switch to show “F-RPT” in the display. The mode changes as follows every time the RPT button is pressed: No display (no repeat)  RPT (repeat same track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No display (no repeat) All tracks in the Bluetooth® device are played repeatedly. To exit this mode, press the button again. To switch the display (if supported by the device) N00766201051 The system can display tag information. 1. Press the INFO button. 2. The display changes as follows every time the INFO button is pressed: Album title  Title name  Artist name  Genre  Normal display NOTE  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button. The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed.  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display.  Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “•”. Comfort controls 7-39 7 BK0236100US.book 40 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) N00714801494 The remote control switches are located on the left side of the steering wheel. These switches can be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. 3- MODE key Hold down to turn the audio function ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is pressed, switches the audio source. The order of switching is shown below. 7 1- Vol + key, - key Adjust audio functions and the mobile phone function volume. 2- CH key, key Select CD and other audio source tracks and radio stations. Hold down to skip up and down through tracks. 7-40 Comfort controls *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is required. *2: Requires a separately-purchased Bluetooth-capable audio device (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). BK0236100US.book 41 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Error codes Error codes N00736101790 If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below. Audio system Error display Item Repair CHECK DISC Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on disc. Insert disc with label facing up. Remove moisture from disc. DISC ERROR Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or excessive vehicle vibration. Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop. INTERNAL E Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position. to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair. HEAT ERROR Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes. ERROR DC Foreign material is inside of radio or amplifier. Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair. 7 iPod (if so equipped) Error display Item Repair NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod. VER ERROR The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod. Comfort controls 7-41 BK0236100US.book 42 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Handling of compact discs USB memory device (if so equipped) Error display 7 Item Repair FILE ERROR The file cannot be played. The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayed for several seconds, and then the next playable file is played automatically. UNSUPPORTED (first)  DEVICE (after) The USB memory device cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device. UNSUPPORTED (first)  FORMAT (after) The USB memory device format cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device. USB BUS PWR An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred. Remove the USB memory device. Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. LSI ERROR Internal device errors Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Handling of compact discs N00734101350  Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark shown in the illustration below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may cause problems.) 7-42 Comfort controls  The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs (like cracked discs) or lowquality compact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the discs) such as those shown will damage the CD player. BK0236100US.book 43 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Handling of compact discs  In the following circumstances, moisture can form on compact discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal operation. • When there is high humidity (for example, when it is raining). • When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after the heater is turned on in cold weather. In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry out.  When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations, such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not work.  When storing compact discs, always store them in their separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sunlight, or anywhere the temperature or humidity is high.  Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there isn’t a label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always hold it by the outer edge and the center hole.  To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.  Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.  Do not put additional labels or stickers on compact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on which a label or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc that has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD player may stop working properly and you may not be able to eject the compact disc. Notes on CD-Rs/RWs N00751900066  You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.  CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and high humidity than ordinary music CDs and can therefore be damaged and rendered unplayable if left inside your vehicle for a long time.  Depending on the combination of the writing software, the CD recorder (CDR/RW drive), and the disc used to create a CD-R/RW, the disc might not play successfully.  This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session is not closed.  This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs which contain data other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).  Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CD-R/RW disc. Comfort controls 7-43 7 BK0236100US.book 44 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Antenna To install WARNING  Operating the CD player in a manner other than specifically instructed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself. There are no user serviceable parts inside. In case of malfunction, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. 7 Antenna N00734201511 To remove Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. Signal transmission Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) until it is securely retained. NOTE  Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the following cases: • When using an automatic car wash • When covering your vehicle with a car cover • When driving into a structure that has a low ceiling. FM signals do not follow the earth surface nor are they reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot be received over long distances. AM signals follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM broadcasts can be received over longer distances. FM AM General information about your radio N00733901524 Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and FM stations. The quality of your reception is affected by distance, obstacles, and signal interference. 25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius (40 to 64 km) (160 km) Weak reception (fading) Because of the limited range of FM signals and the way FM waves transmit, you may experience weak or fading FM reception. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains or similar obstructions, reception can be disturbed. 7-44 Comfort controls BK0236100US.book 45 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General information about your radio Reflection The reason why one can hear FM but not AM in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected by solid objects such as buildings, etc. Because FM signals are easily reflected by buildings, this can also cause reception disturbances. The direct signal from the broadcast station reaches the antenna slightly before the reflected signal. This time difference may cause some reception disturbance or flutter. This problem occurs primarily in urban areas. Cross modulation If one listens to a weak station and is in the vicinity of another strong station, both stations might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression device. The disturbance is even greater if the station is weak or poorly tuned. FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensitive to electrical disturbances such as power lines, lightning and other types of similar electrical phenomena. 7 FM stereo reception Stereo reception requires a high quality broadcast signal. This means that types of disturbances mentioned previously become more marked and the reception range is somewhat diminished during stereo reception. Causes of disturbances FM reception is affected by the electrical systems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially Comfort controls 7-45 BK0236100US.book 46 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 For emergencies If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2 Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2 Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4 Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5 How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6 Towing ...........................................................................................8-12 Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13 Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15 8 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 If the vehicle breaks down If the vehicle breaks down 8 Jump-starting the engine N00836300233 N00836401837 If your vehicle breaks down on the road, move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane slowly with the hazard lights flashing until you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the flashers flashing. If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or dead, you can start it with the battery from another vehicle using jumper cables. If the engine stops/fails If the engine stops, there will be no power assist to the steering and brakes, making these difficult to use.  The brake booster will not work, so the brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal will be harder to press than usual.  Since there is no power steering assist, the steering wheel will be hard to turn. When the engine fails at the intersection Get help from your passengers, bystanders, etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe area. 8-2 For emergencies WARNING  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery, carefully read this section before jumpstarting the vehicle.  Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing. This can cause an accident resulting in serious injury or death and can damage the vehicle. CAUTION  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt, both systems can be damaged. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N” (Neutral). 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. NOTE  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical loads. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. NOTE  Do not use jumper cables if they have damage or corrosion. 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might create an accidental electrical contact. 2. Position the vehicles close enough together so that the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. 5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.) WARNING  If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP STARTING!! The battery might split open or explode if the temperature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to the proper level. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Jump-starting the engine 6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and then connect the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B). NOTE  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size. Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result. 7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and then connect the other end to the designated ground location of the vehicle with the discharged battery (A) at the point farthest from the battery. WARNING WARNING  Make sure that the jumper cables and your clothing are clear of the cooling fans and drive belts. Entanglement with the fans or belts can cause serious personal injury. NOTE  Open the terminal cover before connecting the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery. (Refer to “Battery: Disconnection and connection” on page 9-11.)  Be sure to follow the proper order when connecting the batteries, of:     Make sure that the connection is made to the correct designated location (as shown in the illustration) properly. If the connection is directly made to the negative (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable gases from inside the battery might catch fire and explode, causing personal injury.  When connecting the jumper cable, do not connect the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal. Sparks can make the battery explode. 8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing the boost. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the reverse order from the way you connected them. Charging the battery by using an external battery charger WARNING  Always remove the battery from your vehicle when the battery is charged by an external battery charger.  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode.  Keep your work area well vented when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.  Remove all the caps before charging the battery.  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corrosive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte comes in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes, or the painted surface of your vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them immediately and thoroughly with water, and get prompt medical attention. For emergencies 8-3 8 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine overheating WARNING  Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working near the battery.  Keep the battery out of the reach of children. As your vehicle has anti-lock brakes 8 If you drive your vehicle with a low battery charge after the engine has been started by using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. This can cause the anti-lock braking system warning light to blink on and off. This is only due to the low battery voltage. It is not a problem with the brake system. If this happens, fully charge the battery and ensure the charging system is operating properly. Engine overheating N00836501391 If the high coolant temperature warning light illuminates while the engine is running, the engine may be overheating. If this happens: 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 2. With the engine still running, carefully raise the engine hood to vent the engine compartment. 8-4 For emergencies 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If the fan is not turning, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. WARNING  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, jewelry and clothes away from the cooling fan. The cooling fan can start at any time. 4. If you see steam or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming from under the hood, leave the engine on until the high coolant temperature warning light goes off. After the high coolant temperature warning light has gone off, you can start driving again. If the high coolant temperature warning light stays on, turn off the engine. WARNING  Before raising the engine hood, check to see if there is steam or spray coming from under the hood. Steam or spray coming from an overheated engine could seriously scald you. Do not open the hood until there is no steam or spray. 6. When you do not see any more steam or spray, open the hood. Look for obvious leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be careful as components will be hot. Any leak source must be repaired. 7. If there is no obvious leak source, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add coolant. 8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs coolant, you will probably also need to add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen or remove the radiator cap until the engine has cooled down. WARNING  Removing the radiator cap could scald you with escaping hot water or steam. When checking the radiator level, cover the cap with a cloth before trying to remove it. Turn it slowly counterclockwise, without pressing down, to the first notch. The pressure in the system will then be let out. When the pressure is COMPLETELY LET OUT, press down and keep turning the cap counterclockwise until it comes off. 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use plain water if you have to (and replace it with the right coolant as soon as possible). BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Jack and tools 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it fully. Check the coolant temperature warning light. You can start driving again when the high coolant temperature warning light does not come on. 11. Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Tools Jack and tools N00836601422 Storage The tools are stored beneath the floor board of the cargo area. The jack is stored under the driver’s seat. 1234- 8 Tools bag Wheel nut wrench Jack bar Towing hook Jack 1- Tools 2- Jack Move the driver’s seat fully forward to access the jack from the rear seat area. (Refer to “Front seat” on page 4-3.) CAUTION  Never access, remove or store the jack from the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so could damage electrical wires under the driver’s seat. For emergencies 8-5 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire To remove Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction (1) until the jack fully retracts and remove the jack from the holder (A). To store Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction (2) by hand until the jack is firmly secured. 8 WARNING  After storing the jack in place, make sure the jack is securely fixed in the holder. If the jack is not fixed securely, it may move and hit an occupant in an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Also the jack may move forward during driving and could interfere with driver’s pedal operation causing an accident. How to change a tire N00836901887 WARNING On vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT), move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and stop the engine. 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a warning triangle, flashing signal light, etc., at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers exit the vehicle. 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally opposite from the tire (B) you are changing.  The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tire.  Never get under the vehicle or put any portion of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat location. 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground. 2. Set the parking brake firmly. 3. On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, stop the engine and move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. 8-6 For emergencies WARNING  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position, leading to an accident. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire NOTE CAUTION  The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with your vehicle. It is recommended that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep them in the vehicle for use if needed.  If chocks or blocks are not available, use stones or any other objects that are large enough to hold the wheel in position. 6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench ready. (Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.) Spare tire information N00849600344 Compact spare tire The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the floor board of the cargo area. It is designed to save space in the cargo area. Its lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs. WARNING  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious.  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the inflation pressure should be checked at least once a month to assure that it remains at the recommended inflation pressure. See the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 11-3.  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.  The compact spare tire should be used only temporarily. While the compact spare tire is being used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly. Have the tire replaced or repaired at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with the compact spare tire.  Avoid sudden starting and braking when driving with the compact spare tire.  Do not drive through automatic car washes and over obstacles that could possibly damage the underside of your vehicle. Because the compact spare tire is smaller than the original tire, there is less clearance between the ground and your vehicle. CAUTION  Because the compact spare tire is designed only for your vehicle, do not use it on any other vehicle.  Do not put the compact spare tire on a different wheel, and do not put standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could damage these parts or other parts on your vehicle.  Do not use tire chains with your compact spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage to your vehicle and loss of the chains. To remove compact spare tire N00849701371 1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area. 2. To remove the compact spare tire, remove the installation clamp (A) by turning it counterclockwise. For emergencies 8-7 8 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire NOTE  The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot be stored beneath the floor board. Store the flat tire in the cargo area. 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking points (A) shown in the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tire you wish to change. NOTE  Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position. To change a tire N00849801529 8 1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first remove the covers (refer to “Wheel covers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. WARNING  Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your vehicle or the jack might fall over and cause personal injury.  Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base. 8-8 For emergencies 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top of the jack. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire 4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the illustration. Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until the tire is raised slightly off the ground surface. WARNING  No one should be in your vehicle when using the jack.  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is on the jack.  Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires that are still on the ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the jack. WARNING  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the valve stem (I), you have installed the wheel backwards. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel installed backwards can cause vehicle damage and result in an accident. 5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench, then take the wheel off. CAUTION 8  Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel surface. WARNING  Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tire is raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the vehicle any higher.  Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack.  Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous.  Do not use a jack except the one that came with your vehicle.  The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tire. 6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installation holes (H) in the wheel, and then mount the spare tire. For emergencies 8-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire 7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered ends facing inward, then tighten by hand until the wheel is no longer loose. 9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the illustration until each nut has been tightened to the torque listed here. 65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) Steel wheel 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The recommended tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver’s door sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15. Aluminum wheel 8 CAUTION  Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts or they will tighten too much. 8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground, by rotating the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. CAUTION  Never use your foot or a pipe extension to apply added force to the wheel nut wrench when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. 10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. 8-10 For emergencies CAUTION  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.  After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that they have not come loose. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to change a tire Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION  If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after changing the tire, have the tire checked for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Do not mix one type of tire with another or use a different size from the one listed. This would cause early wear and poor handling. To store the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut wrench N00849401248 To remove Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it into the notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry the cover away from the wheel. Using the same procedure at the other wheel cover notches, work the wheel cover away from the wheel to remove it completely. N00850000175 Store the flat tire in the cargo area. Reverse the removing procedure when storing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut wrench. Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page 8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5. CAUTION  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only your bare hands can seriously injure your fingers. To install CAUTION  Before installing the wheel cover to the wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the back of the wheel cover correctly engage the ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that has broken tabs. NOTE  The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be careful when prying it off. For emergencies 8-11 8 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Towing 1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel cover notch (D). 4. Gently tap around the circumference of the wheel cover at the top (H), then push the wheel cover into place. CAUTION  Do not attempt to be towed by another vehicle with a rope. NOTE  Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing. These hooks are provided only for the purpose of transporting the vehicle itself.  Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle. 8 There may be local regulations concerning towing in your area. Obey the regulations of the area where you are driving your vehicle. NOTE  Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) provided on the reverse side to show the air valve location. Before installing the wheel cover to the wheel, make sure that the opening with the symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air valve. 2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover into the wheel. 3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel cover and hold them in place with both knees. 8-12 For emergencies Towing N00837001960 If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by a commercial tow truck service. When towing is required, transport the vehicle using a tow truck. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Operation under adverse driving conditions CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the ground. Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style. Towing with front wheels off the ground. Towing the vehicle by a tow truck CAUTION  This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using sling lift type equipment (Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will damage the bumper and front end.  Do not tow continuously variable transmission (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the vehicle is towed like this, the continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not reach all parts of the transmission, thus damaging it. If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E equipment.  If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.  If the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground (Type B or C), the Active Stability Control (ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position or put the operation mode in ACC. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch or the operation mode as follows. [Except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in OFF or ACC. Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B - M/T vehicles only) Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or tie-down strap. Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C) Release the parking brake. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transaxle) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (CVT). Operation under adverse driving conditions N00837200750 If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or snow If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. For emergencies 8-13 8 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Operation under adverse driving conditions Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels. Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the transaxle before trying again. If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for a commercial tow truck service. WARNING 8  When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion can make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward or backward, and injure any bystanders. On wet roads CAUTION  Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt by driving into flood water.  When driving in rain, on water-covered roads, or through a car wash, water could get into the brake discs and make them fail temporarily. In such cases, lightly press the brake pedal to see if they are working properly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly several times while driving to dry the brake pads or linings, then check them again. 8-14 For emergencies CAUTION  When driving in rain, a layer of water may form between the tires and the road surface (hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip on the road, making it difficult to steer or brake properly. When driving on a wet road: • Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. • Do not drive on worn tires. • Always keep the tires at the correct inflation pressures. On snowy or icy roads  When driving on a road covered with snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. There may be state or local regulations about using snow tires. Always check the regulations in your local area before using them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-18 and “Tire chains” on page 9-18.  Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the brakes.  Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.  If a skid occurs when the accelerator pedal is depressed, take your foot off the pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the skid.  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). Hold the brake pedal down firmly and keep it depressed. Do not pump the brake pedal which will result in reduced braking performance.  After parking on snowy or icy roads, it may be difficult to move your vehicle due to the brake being frozen. Depress the accelerator pedal little by little to move the vehicle when safe to do so. CAUTION  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly. The vehicle could start moving when it breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in an accident. On a bumpy or rutted road  Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc. CAUTION  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes can damage the tires and wheels. Wheels with low-profiles tires or underinflated tires are especially at risk for damage.  The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is: BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuel Pump Shut-off System CAUTION • driven over a step (for example, at the entrance or exit of a parking lot); • parked too closely against a curb or parking block, or by the side of a road with curbstones; • driven on a steep slope. Fuel Pump Shut-off System N00860600031 WARNING 8  Before attempting to restart the engine after a collision, always inspect the ground under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do not restart the engine.  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any collision. In the event of a collision causing frontal airbag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off system will activate to stop fuel supply to the engine. For emergencies 8-15 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle care and maintenance Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2 Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3 Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4 View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5 Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5 Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7 Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8 Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9 Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9 Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10 Battery ............................................................................................9-10 Tires ...............................................................................................9-12 Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-18 Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-18 Parking brake .................................................................................9-19 Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19 Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-19 General maintenance .....................................................................9-20 For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-22 Fusible links ...................................................................................9-22 Fuses ..............................................................................................9-22 Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-26 Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-32 Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-32 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-33 9 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Service precautions WARNING Service precautions N00937301485 Taking regular care of your vehicle will preserve its value and appearance as long as possible. 9 You can do some of the maintenance work yourself, and the rest should only be performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. If you discover a malfunction or other problem, have it corrected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. This section describes the maintenance inspections that you can do yourself, if you so desire. Follow the instructions and precautions for each procedure. WARNING  When checking or servicing the inside of the engine compartment, be sure the engine is stopped and has had a chance to cool down.  If you need to work in the engine compartment with the engine running, be especially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, or other moving parts. 9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance  After performing the maintenance work, make sure that no tools or cloths are left behind in the engine compartment. If they are left behind, a fire or damage to the vehicle may occur.  The fan can turn on automatically even if the engine is not running. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF to be safe while you work in the engine compartment.  Do not smoke or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. The fumes are flammable.  Be extremely careful when working around the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on a jack. Always use properly rated automotive jack stands.  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materials in the wrong way can injure you. Ask an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice if you have questions. Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Catalytic converter If your vehicle is raised with a garage jack Only use the designated positions shown in the illustration. Never use the rear suspensions as a jacking point. WARNING WARNING  Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base. To reduce the possibility of catalytic converter damage: Catalytic converter N00937400450 The catalytic converter requires you to use unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the emission-control effectiveness of the converter. *- Front of the vehicle Normally, the catalytic converter does not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned for the converter to continue to work properly. CAUTION WARNING  Set a garage jack only at the position shown here. If the garage jack is set a wrong position, it could damage your vehicle and/or your vehicle might fall from the jack causing injury or death.  Do not park or run your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.  Do not put undercoat paint on the catalytic converter.  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. If the engine malfunctions or misfires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, have it serviced promptly. Running your vehicle when it is overheated may result in damage to the converter and vehicle.  Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of the type of recommended in the “Fuel selection”.  Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of gas could damage the catalytic converter.  Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. If the battery is weak or run down, use jumper cables to properly start the engine.  Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when performing diagnostic tests.  Do not idle the engine for a long time if it is idling roughly or otherwise obviously malfunctioning.  To prevent the catalytic converter from being damaged from unburned gas, do not race the engine when stopping the engine. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3 9 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine hood 9  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the performance is noticeably low, or the engine has a malfunction such as with the ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop driving immediately, slow down and drive for only a short time. Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.  In unusual situations involving major engine problems, a burning odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalytic converter overheating. If this occurs, stop in a safe place, shut the engine off and let the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool, immediately take your vehicle to a dealer or a repair facility of your choice for service. Engine hood To open Use the engine hood release lever (located under the instrument panel near the driver’s door) to unlock the engine hood. Vehicle care and maintenance NOTE  To prevent damage to the engine hood and wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting position when you open the engine hood. Support the engine hood with the hood prop. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening under the hood marked with an arrow. WARNING  Never use the release lever to unlatch the engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.  Do not drive your vehicle unless the engine hood is locked. Release the lever and lift the engine hood. N00937501647 9-4 Pull the lever toward you to release the engine hood latch. CAUTION  Always insert the support prop into the hole specially made for it. Propping the engine hood at any other place could cause the prop to slip out and lead to an accident.  The hood prop can fall out if the hood is lifted by a strong wind. BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 View of the engine compartment To close Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and put it back in its retainer. NOTE Engine oil and oil filter  If this does not close the engine hood properly, drop it again from a slightly higher position.  Do not push down strongly on the engine hood. Depending on how strongly or where you push down, you could create a dent in the vehicle body. View of the engine compartment N00937601781 Slowly lower the engine hood approximately 8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight. To check and refill engine oil It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may need to add oil between the recommended oil change intervals. Before starting the engine, check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary. To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and check the oil level by checking the upper surface of the dipstick. The oil level must not go above the line on the dipstick. NOTE  If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a moment and then recheck the oil level by checking the upper surface of the dipstick. CAUTION  Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when closing the engine hood.  Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed before driving. If you drive without the engine hood completely closed, it could open up while driving. N00937702011 12345678- Engine oil level dipstick Air cleaner filter Battery Brake fluid Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Radiator cap Engine coolant reservoir If the level does not reach the line which shows the minimum amount of oil required, remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve cover, and fill to within the “Good” range. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-5 9 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine oil and oil filter NOTE Good CAUTION 9  Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of oil pressure, which could damage the engine.  The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for example, repeated operation on rough roads, in mountainous regions, on roads with many uphill and downhill gradients, or over short distances). Consequently, the oil will require earlier replacement in accordance with the schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only engine oils with the ILSAC certification symbol on the front of the container. 9-6 Vehicle care and maintenance 1- The upper part indicates the quality of the oil. 2- The center part indicates the SAE grade of the oil viscosity. ILSAC certification symbol Recommended engine oil viscosity Use engine oil with the proper thickness for the outdoor temperatures where you will be driving. NOTE  Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced by payload, engine speed, etc. API service symbol Engine oil identification mark WARNING  Used engine oil is poisonous, and can damage your skin. Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let used oil touch your skin and wash thoroughly after working with it.  Keep used oil out of the reach of children. This mark appears on the top of the oil container and tells you two important things about the oil. If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certification symbol, use an API classification SN or higher oil with the following label. BK0236100US.book 7 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Engine coolant require that the filter can withstand a pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi oil filter is the best replacement filter. Follow the installation instructions printed on the filter. Engine coolant N00937801637 To check the coolant level Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel economy and cold weather starting. If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20 grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the next oil change to maintain optimum fuel economy and cold weather starting. The engine coolant reservoir (A) lets you quickly see when you need to add coolant. When the engine is cold, the level of the coolant in the reservoir should be between the “F” (FULL) and “L” (LOW) marks. The radiator usually stays full so there is no reason to remove the radiator cap (B) except when you check the coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze coolant. Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*. *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation on all metals, including aluminum, and prevents clogs in some parts of the engine. If you need to add coolant often, or if the level in the reservoir does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for testing. CAUTION To replace the oil filter The oil filter should be replaced at the time or mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. Only use high quality replacement filters on this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifications for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters To add coolant FULL LOW  Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants that contain them. Using the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum parts. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-7 9 BK0236100US.book 8 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Air cleaner filter CAUTION 9  The required concentration of anti-freeze differs depending on the expected ambient temperature. Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration of anti-freeze Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration of anti-freeze You can check the concentration level with a gauge from an automotive supply store, or your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or service station can check it for you.  Do not use water to adjust the concentration of coolant.  Do not top off the reservoir with plain water only. Water by itself boils at a lower temperature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the water freezes, it will damage your cooling system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause corrosion and rust. Radiator cap The radiator cap must be sealed tight to prevent losing coolant, which may result in engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equivalent. 9-8 Vehicle care and maintenance WARNING  Wait for the engine to cool down before opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot steam or boiling coolant could spray up from the filler port and scald you.  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator with the proper gauge, and only when it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the contents of the reservoir must be protected against freezing.  Keep the front of the radiator and condenser clean.  If the engine coolant temperature does not rise after the engine is warmed-up, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the thermostat checked, and replaced if necessary. Air cleaner filter N00937900413 Points to remember  Do not overfill the reservoir.  Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow from the reservoir back to the radiator when the engine cools down. If you need to change the cap, use the exact same kind. The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty from use and not filter properly. Replace it with a new filter using the schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. 1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the cover and take out the air cleaner filter. BK0236100US.book 9 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the correct level. Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) N00938200181 Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, if necessary. Refill or change with the oil according to the table below. 2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the cover back on in its original position.  Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recommended when replacing the air cleaner filter.  Make sure that the connector is properly reconnected.  After replacing the air cleaner filter, make sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover are firmly set. CAUTION  Take care not to scratch the engine air flow sensor when removing the air cleaner cover. Lubricant Viscosity range Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance. CAUTION Oil type NOTE Fluid type  Using the improper transaxle fluid may damage the transaxle. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO API Classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid 9 Special additives Do not use any fluid additives to the transmission. Washer fluid N00938601371 (if so equipped) The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in the engine compartment. N00938101129 The continuously variable transmission (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to obtain the best performance and longest life. It is impor- Vehicle care and maintenance 9-9 BK0236100US.book 10 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Brake fluid Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary. Open the reservoir cap and check the level of washer fluid. Full level is approximately 2 inches (5 cm) below from the upper surface of the reservoir. Upper surface Brake fluid N00938701297 To check the fluid level The fluid level must be between the “MAX” and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. MAX Full 9 MIN When freezing weather is anticipated, flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. 9-10 Vehicle care and maintenance The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality. The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when doing other work under the engine hood. The brake system should also be checked for leaks at the same time. If the fluid level falls noticeably in a short length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake system. If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Fluid type Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water out. CAUTION  Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This will damage the seals.  Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can damage painted surfaces.  Use only the listed brake fluid. Different brands of brake fluid have different additives, and these can cause a chemical reaction. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.  Keep the reservoir cap closed to keep the brake fluid from evaporating. Battery N00939100943 The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s electrical system working properly. Check the battery regularly. BK0236100US.book 11 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Battery Checking battery electrolyte level N00901500072 The electrolyte level must be between the limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill it with distilled water as needed. The inside of the battery is divided into several compartments. Take the cap off of each compartment and fill to the mark. Do not fill above the top line because a spill during driving could cause damage. WARNING NOTE  If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace the battery. During cold weather N00901600060 The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. This has to do with its chemical and physical properties and is why a very cold battery, especially one with a low charge, will have a hard time starting your vehicle. It is recommended that you have your battery and charging system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice before the start of cold weather. If necessary, have it charged. This will provide more reliable starting, and longer battery life. Disconnection and connection N00901701169 WARNING  If the battery goes flat, be sure to check the battery electrolyte level before connecting booster cables.  After checking the battery electrolyte level, make sure the caps are fitted securely.  Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the battery.  Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, then the positive (+) terminal. To reconnect the battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, before starting the vehicle. 9 WARNING  Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running, or you could damage the vehicle’s electrical parts.  Never short-circuit the battery. This could cause it to overheat and be damaged.  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode.  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corrosive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or discolor them. And if it gets on your skin or in your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness. Please observe the following handling instructions: Vehicle care and maintenance 9-11 BK0236100US.book 12 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires WARNING 9 • If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of water and neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water. • If electrolyte gets on your hands or clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with water immediately and get immediate medical attention.  Open doors and windows in any closed space where you may be charging or working with the battery.  Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working with the battery, or have a skilled automobile technician do it.  If you are quick-charging your battery, first disconnect the battery cables.  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, and reconnect it last.  Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. NOTE  Check each battery terminal for corrosion. You can stop more corrosion by washing with a solution of baking soda and water. Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or tightening them. 9-12 Vehicle care and maintenance NOTE  Check to see that the battery is securely installed and cannot be moved. Also check each terminal for tightness.  If you will not be driving your vehicle for a long period of time, remove the battery and store it in a place where the battery fluid will not freeze. The battery only should be stored with a full charge.  Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out. Tires N00939201635 WARNING  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged or improperly inflated is dangerous. These type tire conditions will adversely affect vehicle performance. These type tire conditions can also cause a tread separation or blowout which may result in an accident causing serious injury or death.  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious. It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms:  Cold tire pressure: • The measured pressure after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or • The measured pressure when the vehicle is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours.  Maximum pressure: the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.  Recommended inflation pressure: the inflation pressure for optimum tire performance.  Intended outboard sidewall: • The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or • The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less. BK0236100US.book 13 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.  Tread: portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.  Tread rib: a tread section running circumferentially around a tire.  Tread separation: pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.  Carcass: the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the tread and bead.  Section width: the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the tire.  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.  Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the bead seat.  Groove: the space between two adjacent tread ribs. Tire Markings 215 Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire. R Construction code • “R” means radial construction. • “D” means diagonal or bias construction. 15 Rim diameter in inches (in) NOTE 12345- Size Designation Service Description Maximum Load Maximum Pressure U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades Size Designation EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 P Passenger car tire size based on U.S.A. design standards  European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based on European/Japanese design standards. Tires designed to these standards have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter “P” is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based on U.S.A. design standards. The size designation for LT-metric tires is the same as for P-metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.  Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-13 9 BK0236100US.book 14 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires Service Description EXAMPLE: 95H 95 Load index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry. H Speed symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions. The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits) 9 Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry. WARNING  Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire but the date code may only be on one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504 Vehicle care and maintenance Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use. Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits) Code representing the tire size. (2 L9 digits) ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits) 15 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) 04 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) Maximum Pressure DOT 9-14 MA Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. BK0236100US.book 15 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause problems in three major areas: Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Tire inflation pressures N00939301984 Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for the safe and satisfactory operation of your  Safety Too little pressure increases flexing in the tire and can cause tire failure. Too much pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes could then cause tire damage that may result in tire failure.  Economy The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven wear patterns in the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce the tread life, and the tire will have to be replaced sooner. Too little pressure also makes it harder for the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.  Ride comfort and vehicle stability The superior riding experience built into your vehicle partly depends on the correct tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to respond. Unequal tire pressures can make steering your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. The tire pressure for your vehicle under normal driving conditions is listed on the placard attached to the driver’s door sill. (Refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 11-3.) The recommended inflation pressures under normal driving conditions should be used for the tires listed below. Item Tire size Front Rear 165/65R14 240 kPa, 35 psi 240 kPa, 35 psi 175/55R15 220 kPa, 32 psi 220 kPa, 32 psi Normal tire Compact T115/70D14 420 kPa, 60 psi spare wheel Tire pressures should be checked, and adjusted if necessary, at least once a month. Pressures should be checked more often whenever weather temperatures change severely, because tire pressures change with outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed are always “cold inflation pressure”. Cold inflation pressure is measured after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours. Cold inflation pressure must not go above the maximum values molded into the tire sidewall. After driving several miles, your tire inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure. Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the Vehicle care and maintenance 9-15 9 BK0236100US.book 16 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires specified cold pressure, or your tires will be too low. Check your tires each time you refuel. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure for all of them. You should also take the following safety precautions: 9  Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures. (See the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver’s door sill.)  Stay within the recommended load limits.  Make sure that the weight of any load in your vehicle is evenly distributed.  Drive at safe speeds.  After filling your tires to the correct pressure, check them for damage and air leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the valve stems. Replacing tires and wheels N00939601453 CAUTION  Avoid using different size tires from the one listed and the combined use of different types of tires, as this can affect driving safety. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5. Tread wear indicator CAUTION  If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly. N00939801240 Tire maintenance N00939701193 The following maintenance steps are recommended:  Check tire pressures regularly.  Have regular maintenance done on the wheel balance and front and rear suspension alignment.  Rotate your tires regularly as described in the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-17. 1- Location of the tread wear indicator 2- Tread wear indicator Tread wear indicators are built into the original equipment tires on your vehicle to help you know when your tires should be replaced. Many states have laws requiring that you replace your tires at this point. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear when the tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). When the bands appear next to one another in two or more places, replace your tires. NOTE  Tire wear indicators can have different marks and locations depending on the tire manufacturer. 9-16 Vehicle care and maintenance BK0236100US.book 17 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Tires Tire rotation N00939901557 To even out the wear on your tires and make them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends that you rotate your tires at the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. However, the timing for tire rotation may vary according to your vehicle condition, road surface conditions, and your own personal driving habits. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pressure, wheels that are not aligned properly, wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe braking. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find out the reason for uneven tread wear. The first tire rotation is the most important one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly. Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation direction Front Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction Front CAUTION  A compact spare tire can be installed temporarily in place of a tire that has been removed during the tire rotation. However, it must not be included in the regular tire rotation sequence. CAUTION  If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the correct direction of rotation, swap the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle and the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle separately. Keep each tire on its original side of the vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure the arrows point in the direction in which the wheels will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tire whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not perform to its full potential. 9 Front CAUTION  Avoid the combined use of different types of tires. Using different types of tires can affect vehicle performance and safety. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-17 BK0236100US.book 18 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped) Snow tires Clutch pedal free play (if so N00940001428 In some areas of the country, snow tires are required for winter driving. If snow tires are required in your area, you must choose snow tires of the same size and type as the original tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires should also be installed on all four wheels. Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling can be reduced. Even where laws may permit it, snow tires should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). 9 equipped) Brake pedal free play N00940300336 To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn off the engine and press the pedal until you feel resistance. To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn off the engine and press the brake pedal several times with your foot. Then press the pedal down with your fingers until you first feel resistance. Clutch pedal free play: .4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm) Brake pedal free play: .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm) N00940200090 CAUTION  If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly. Tire chains N00940100116 CAUTION  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. The clearance between the chains and the body is not sufficient to allow proper clearance, and the vehicle body might be damaged. 9-18 Vehicle care and maintenance If the free play is not within these limits, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for adjustment. If the free play is not within these limits, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for adjustment. BK0236100US.book 19 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Parking brake WARNING Parking brake N00940400252 Parking brake lever stroke Check the parking brake lever travel occasionally. To check this, pull the lever up slowly and count the number of clicks of the ratchet. Parking brake lever stroke: 7 to 9 notches (clicks) (Parking brake adjustment when pulled with the force of 200 N) Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by the ratchet after pulling.  Continued operation of the vehicle with the parking brake lever out of adjustment may result in the vehicle moving when unattended. Wiper blades N00940701223 Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean them regularly to remove deposits of salt and road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the blades and glass areas. Replace the blades if they continue to streak or smear. NOTE  Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long time. This wears out the rubber and can scratch the glass. During cold weather If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. Emission-control system maintenance N00940800328 Your vehicle is equipped with an emissioncontrol system that meets all the requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and Environment Canada. The emission-control system is made of:  a positive crankcase ventilation system  an evaporative emission-control system  an exhaust emission-control system To be sure the emission-control system works properly, have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. This should be done at the time or mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. These, and all the other “general” maintenance services listed in this manual, need to be performed to keep your vehicle running properly and reliably. You should also have an inspection and service any time you suspect a malfunction. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-19 9 BK0236100US.book 20 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General maintenance Fuel hoses NOTE  To meet government regulations and promote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD). The engine electronic control module that controls OBD functions stores various data (especially about the exhaust emissions). This data will be erased if the battery cable is disconnected, which could make a rapid diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the battery cable when the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is ON. Intake valve clearance 9 Spark plugs N00950100050 N00940900228 Spark plugs must fire properly for good engine performance and emission-control. Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Change them at the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. NOTE  Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are exactly the same. Other plugs could cause engine damage, performance problems or radio noise. 9-20 N00941000040 Check the hose surfaces for any heat and mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay special attention to the hoses closest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check all the hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure and that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or damage, replace the hoses immediately. Vehicle care and maintenance Have the valve clearance checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have adjustments made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Fuel system (tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank filler cap) high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. WARNING  If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel, do not run the engine. Any spark (including from the ignition), flame or smoking material could cause an explosion or fire. Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance. Evaporative emission control system (except evaporative emission canister) N00941400187 If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or damaged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, polluting the air. Have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. General maintenance N00941300173 N00941500292 Check these regularly for damage or leaks in the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay special attention to the fuel lines closest to The next pages list the maintenance service recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. In addition to the general maintenance that needs to be performed at the times listed, BK0236100US.book 21 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 General maintenance there are other parts which do not usually need regular maintenance. But, if any of these parts stops working properly, your vehicle performance could suffer. Have these items checked if you notice a problem with them. If you have any questions, see your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. Disc brake pads N00941600059 Good brakes are essential for safe driving. Check the brake pads for wear. For good braking performance, replace the brake pads with the same type pads as the originals. Brake hoses N00941700076 Brake hoses and tubing should be checked for:  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is showing through any cracks or worn spots in the rubber hose cover, the hose should be replaced. The brakes can fail if the hose wears through.  Improper installation may cause twisting, or wheel, tire or chassis interference. Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots N00941800077 Check the following parts for damage and grease leaks:  Ball joint boots of the front suspension and steering linkage  Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft  The underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged Also check the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, or required service. Any open seams or loose connections could let dangerous exhaust fumes seep into the luggage and passenger compartments. Check for any of the following conditions: Exhaust system N00942200111 WARNING  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these fumes can cause unconsciousness or death. The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas from entering inside your vehicle is to have the engine exhaust system properly serviced. Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and nearby body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts if you notice any of the following:  A change in the sound of the exhaust system  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the vehicle  Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks caused by corrosion or damage.  Check the joints and connections for looseness or exhaust gas leaks.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for damage. Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch N00942500127 The hood lock release mechanism and hood safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and oiled when needed for easy movement and to prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts of the hood latch and release lever. Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- Vehicle care and maintenance 9-21 9 BK0236100US.book 22 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 For cold and snowy weather nism until all the movable surfaces are covered. Also, put a light coat of the same grease on the safety catch wherever moving parts touch. For cold and snowy weather N00942600102 Ventilation slots 9 The ventilation slots in front of the windshield should be brushed clear after a heavy snowfall so that the operation of the heating and ventilation systems will not be impaired. Weatherstripping To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease. Additional equipment (For regions where snow is encountered) It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a shorthandled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping 9-22 Vehicle care and maintenance snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windshield, side and rear window are also useful. individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The fuse blocks are located in the passenger compartment and in the engine compartment. Passenger compartment Fusible links N00942700305 The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current attempts to flow through certain electrical systems. In case of a melted fusible link, see your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for inspection and replacement. For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse load capacities” on page 9-23. The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located in front of the driver’s seat at the position shown in the illustration. WARNING  Fusible links must not be replaced by any other device. Failing to fit the correct fusible link may result in fire in the vehicle, property destruction and serious or fatal injuries at any time. Fuses N00942800902 Fuse block location To prevent damage to the electrical system from short-circuiting or overloading, each Engine compartment In the engine compartment, the fuse block is located as shown in the illustration. While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the cover. BK0236100US.book 23 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuses Type A Passenger compartment fuse location table Type B SymNo. bol Fuse load capacities N00954801342 This fuse list shows the names of the electrical systems and their fuse capacities. There are spare fuses in the fuse block in the engine compartment. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same capacity as the original. Electrical system Capacity 1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A 3 Ignition coil 10 A 4 Starter motor 7.5 A 5 — — — 6 — — — 7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A 8 Outside rearview mirrors 7.5 A 9 Engine control unit 7.5 A 10 Control unit 7.5 A No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity 11 Rear fog light 10 A 12 Door lock 15 A 13 Interior light (Dome light) 15 A 14 Rear window wiper 15 A 15 Gauges 7.5 A 16 Relay 7.5 A 17 Heated seats 20 A 18 Option 10 A 19 Heated outside rearview mirrors 7.5 A 20 Windshield wiper 20 A 21 Back-up light 7.5 A 22 Defogger 30 A 23 Heater 30 A 24 — — — 25 Radio 10 A 26 Electronic controlled unit 15 A  Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-23 9 BK0236100US.book 24 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuses  The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. Engine compartment fuse location table Type A 9 Electrical system Capacity No. Electrical system Capacity BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A F15 Alternator 7.5 A BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A F16 Hazard warning flasher F1 Headlight (low beam) (left) 10 A 10 A F17 Automatic transaxle F2 Headlight (low beam) (right) 15 A 10 A F18 Air conditioning 10 A F3 Headlight (high beam) (left) 10 A F19 ETV 15 A F4 Headlight (high beam) (right) F20 Starter 7.5 A 10 A F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A F5 Horn 10 A F22 Fuel pump 15 A F6 Front fog lights 15 A F23 Engine 20 A F7 Daytime running lights 10 A F24 Automatic transaxle 7.5 A No. Symbol Symbol F8 — — — #1 — Spare fuse 20 A CapacElectrical system ity F9 — — — #2 — Spare fuse 30 A SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A* F10 Battery current sensor 7.5 A SBF2 Anti-lock braking system 30 A* — — SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A* F12 Stop lights (Brake lights) 15 A SBF4 Power window control 40 A* F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A F14 Engine control 7.5 A No. 9-24 Symbol Vehicle care and maintenance F11 — *: Fusible link  Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.  The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. BK0236100US.book 25 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Fuses 15 A: Cigarette lighter When using a substitute fuse, replace with a fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possible. Type B Identification of fuse No. SymCapacElectrical system bol ity Capacity Color 7.5 A Brown 10 A Red 15 A Blue 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse block. 20 A Yellow 40 A* 30 A Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible link type) 40 A* 40 A Green (fusible link type) SBF1 PTC heater 40 A* SBF2 PTC heater SBF3 PTC heater *: Fusible link  Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.  The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A, 10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses burns out, substitute with the following fuse. 7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors 10 A: Option Fuse replacement N00954900131 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical item concerned to the fuse and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine compartment fuse block. 4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the matching tables, to check the fuse that is related to the problem. If the fuse is not blown, something else must be causing the problem. Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-25 9 BK0236100US.book 26 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs Replacement of light bulbs N00942901362 Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is off. Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy the bulb when it gets hot. CAUTION B- Fuse is OK C- Blown fuse 9 5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity securely into the appropriate slot. CAUTION  Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring to heat up and could cause a fire.  If the replacement fuse blows again after a short time, have the electrical system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find and correct the cause. 9-26 Vehicle care and maintenance  Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being turned off. When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently before touching it. You could otherwise be burned.  Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas inside halogen light bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.  Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlights are used. If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with alcohol and let it dry completely before installing the bulb. CAUTION  Do not install commercially available LEDtype bulbs. Commercially available LED-type bulbs could adversely affect the operation of the vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and other vehicle equipment from operating properly. NOTE  If you are unsure of how to carry out the work as required, it is recommended that these procedures be carried out by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing a light and lens. BK0236100US.book 27 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs NOTE  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the light, please have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Bulb capacity N00943000132 The bulb should only be replaced with a new bulb with the same rating and type. The type and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Outside N00950302043 Description 1 Front turn signal light/Parking light Headlight/Day2 time running light (if so equipped) Wattage ANSI Trade No. or Bulb type 32/3 cp #1157NA — 9007 HB5 3 Front fog light (if so equipped) 55 W H11 4 Front side-marker light 5W W5W Side turn signal 5 light (on fender, if so equipped) 5W Side turn signal light (on outside 6 rearview mirror, if so equipped) NOTE  The side turn signal light (on outside rearview mirror) uses an LED rather than the bulb. For repair and replacement, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Rear 9 — — Item — Front NOTE  It is not possible to repair or replace only the bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender). Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice when the light needs to be repaired or replaced. ANSI trade No. Wattage or bulb type 1 High-mounted stop light — — 2 License plate light 5W W5W 3 Back-up light 21 W P21W 21 W PY21W 4 Rear turn signal light Vehicle care and maintenance 9-27 BK0236100US.book 28 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs Item 5 Tail and stop light 6 Rear side-marker light ANSI trade No. Wattage or bulb type 21/5 W P21/5W 5W W5W Inside N00950401715 Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped) N00901801203 1. While pressing the tab (A), pull out the connector (B). NOTE 9  The high-mounted stop light uses an LED rather than the bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. *- Front of the vehicle 2. Remove the locking cap (C) by turning it counterclockwise, and then pull the bulb (D). Item 9-28 Vehicle care and maintenance Wattage 1 Dome light 8W 2 Trunk room light 5W BK0236100US.book 29 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counterclockwise while pressing in. 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Headlight aim adjustment N00943200352 The alignment of the headlights should be checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Front side-marker lights N00917301681 1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to remove it. Front turn signal lights/Parking lights N00943401478 1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to remove it. Front fog lights (if so equipped) N00943601904 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver with a cloth over its tip at the edge of the cover (A) and pry gently to remove the cover. *- Front of the vehicle *- Front of the vehicle Vehicle care and maintenance 9-29 9 BK0236100US.book 30 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs 2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the light unit. 9 NOTE  When unfastening the screw of the fog light, be careful not to mistakenly move the beam position adjustment screw (C). 3. Depress the tab (D) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector (E) to remove it. Vehicle care and maintenance N00943701572 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light unit. 4. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to remove it. 3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the vehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C). 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 9-30 Rear combination lights BK0236100US.book 31 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Replacement of light bulbs 4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it. Type 1 Type 2 License plate lights N00944001439 1. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it, and then pull the bulb out of the socket. DEFG- Back-up light Rear turn signal light Tail and stop light Rear side-marker light 5. Remove the bulb from the socket as follows. • Type 1: Rear side-marker light bulb Pull the bulb out. • Type 2: Other light bulb Turn the bulb counterclockwise while pressing in. 6. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. NOTE 9  When mounting the light unit, align the notch (H) and pin (I) on the light unit with the clip (J) and hole (K) in the body. 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-31 BK0236100US.book 32 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle care precautions Vehicle care precautions N00945100166 In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, perform regular maintenance using the proper materials and procedures. Be sure to use only those materials and procedures that meet your local environmental pollution control regulations. Choose the materials you will use carefully, to be sure that they do not contain corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help in choosing these materials. 9 CAUTION  Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some are poisonous and others are highly flammable. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything in a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the instructions. Always open your vehicle doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use the following chemicals to clean your vehicle: • Gasoline • Carbon Tetrachloride • Benzine • Kerosene • Naphtha • Acetone • Turpentine • Paint Thinner • Lacquer Thinner 9-32 Vehicle care and maintenance Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts CAUTION • Nail Polish Remover These can all be dangerous, and they all can damage your vehicle. Cleaning the inside of your vehicle N00945200095 After washing the inside of your vehicle with any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well ventilated area. CAUTION  Do not use organic substances (solvents, benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or cracking of the surface. If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above. N00945300142 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap and water. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, wring it out well, and wipe off all the soap. NOTE  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protectants containing silicones or wax. Such products, when applied to the instrument panels or other parts, may cause reflections on the windshield and obscure vision. Also, if such products get on the switches of the electrical accessories, it may lead to failure of these accessories. Upholstery N00945500128 NOTE  Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, maintain the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean. BK0236100US.book 33 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm water. 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth and spot remover. NOTE  If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush over the surface in one direction. Genuine leather (if so equipped) Foreign material NOTE  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew may grow.  The genuine leather surface can be damaged if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber brush.  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents can discolor the genuine leather surface and should not be used.  Genuine leather can mildew if not kept clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.  The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as possible.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in summer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather seat may deteriorate and stick to the seat. N00945600187 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gentle soap and water. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, wring it out well, and wipe off all the soap. 3. To preserve and protect, use a leather protecting agent on the genuine leather surface. Cleaning the outside of your vehicle N00945700058 To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax. N00945800033 Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other foreign matters can damage the finish on your vehicle. Generally, the longer any foreign material stays on the finish, the worse the damage. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible whenever the finish gets soiled. Washing N00945901666 Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from air, rain, snow, or road surfaces can damage the paint and body of your vehicle if left on. Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a chamois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to remain. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-33 9 BK0236100US.book 34 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle CAUTION 9  When washing the underside of your vehicle or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands.  Never spray or splash water on the electrical parts in the engine compartment. This may damage them. Be careful also when washing the underbody to ensure that water does not enter the engine compartment.  Avoid automatic car washers that use rotating brushes. These brushes may scratch the paint surface and make it dull. Scratches are more noticeable on darker colored vehicles.  Some hot water washing equipment uses high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. Because hot water can damage plastics parts and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you do the following when using such equipment: • Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches (70 cm) away from the vehicle body. • When washing around the door glass, hold the nozzle at a distance of more than 28 inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the glass surface.  Make sure to do the following when using an automatic car wash, with help from either this manual or the car wash operator, to avoid damaging your vehicle: • Fold the outside rearview mirrors. • Remove the antenna. 9-34 Vehicle care and maintenance During cold weather Salt and other chemicals spread on winter roads in some geographical areas can have a detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody. You should flush the underbody with a high pressure hose every time you wash the outside of your vehicle. Take special care to remove mud or other debris which could trap and hold salt and moisture. After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing. NOTE  When the door is frozen, opening it by force may tear off or crack the rubber gasket installed around the door. Pour warm water to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe off the water after opening the door. To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubricant. Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax on the painted surfaces. After the wax has dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax when the painted surfaces are cool. CAUTION  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should not be used. These waxes remove rust and stain effectively from the paintwork, but are harmful to the finish of the paint, because they also remove paint/clearcoat. They are also harmful to other glossy surfaces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt from the vehicle surface.  Do not put wax on the areas having black matte coating because it can cause uneven discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get wax on them, wipe the wax off right away with a soft cloth and warm water. Polishing N00946100046 Waxing N00946000234 Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or when water does not bead up on the paint. If painted surfaces have been severely damaged and lost their original luster and color tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine polishing compound. Avoid limiting your polishing to the damaged surface only; polish a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing BK0236100US.book 35 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush the compound from the surface and apply a coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. Damaged paint N00946200092 Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched up as soon as possible with touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. Check body areas facing the road or the tires carefully for damage to the paint caused by flying stones, etc. The paint code number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle information code plate on the front passenger door sill. Cleaning plastic parts N00946300194 Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black rough surface of the bumper, molding or lights, the surface may appear white in color. In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water and a soft cloth or chamois. CAUTION  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough scrubber as these may damage the plastic surface. CAUTION CAUTION  Do not use wax containing compounds (polishing powder) which may damage the plastic surface.  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gasoline, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte), as such substances will cause stains, cracks, or discoloration. If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse them immediately with water. Chrome parts  Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the wheels.  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become discolored or stained.  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam cleaner or by any other means.  Contact with seawater or road salt used for de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible. Window glass N00946400052 N00946600054 To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a commercially available chrome polish. The window glass can usually be cleaned using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Aluminum wheels Wiper blades (if so equipped) N00946500183 N00946700084 1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. 2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed easily with water. Rinse off the detergent after washing the wheel. 3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft cloth. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer clean the windshield properly. Vehicle care and maintenance 9-35 9 BK0236100US.book 36 ページ２０１６年２月１日 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle Engine compartment N00947000071 Never spray or splash water on the electrical accessories in the engine compartment. This puts the engine at risk of being damaged. Do not bring the circumferential parts, the plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolor them. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water. 9 9-36 Vehicle care and maintenance 月曜日午前１０時１５分 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2 Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2 Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-3 10 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) N01047101208 This information is provided in compliance with the requirements of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers with information on reporting safety defects. Uniform tire quality grading 10 DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. The specific grade rating in each grade category is shown on the side wall of the tires on your vehicle. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of 10-2 their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING  The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING  The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Reporting Safety Defects N01047201544 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Important facts to know in case of an accident If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: NHTSA Headquarters 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE West Building Washington, DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064 For vehicles sold in Canada To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 Important facts to know in case of an accident N01047300232 If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. You may write to: Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 We hope you will never be involved in an accident, but there is always that potential danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and drive safely. In the event of an accident  Remain calm.  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to the police, and, if necessary, call for an ambulance. Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3 10 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Important facts to know in case of an accident  Record all the details of the accident. This will provide you with accurate records of the accident for discussions with your insurance company and other persons who may be acting on your behalf. Key information to discuss with your insurance company 10  Understand your repair estimate before approving repairs.  Choosing the repair shop and the brands of parts that they use on your vehicle is your decision.  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. Many times, to save money, your insurance company will recommend imitation parts that do not meet the original specifications of fit, finish, corrosion resistance or workmanship. Mitsubishi Motors built-in protection The strength and integrity built into your Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific design referred to as “Energy Management”. Individual body parts are designed to act as one unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves are absorbed by protective panels or are channeled around the passenger compart- 10-4 ment. This important feature is possible because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, something that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets are designed and constructed as important protection features in the event of an accident. By replacing body parts with non-Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, your vehicle may no longer meet original equipment specifications. Consumer rights (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) As a consumer requesting repair on your vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the country, State Insurance Commissioners have begun considering rules on the use of nonOEM parts. This could mean that repair shops will have to disclose to the consumer when they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since regulations are not consistent on this point, remember you have a choice. So, if you want genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may have to specifically request them. Make certain your insurance company understands imitations are not to be used in the repair of your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built with the high quality and durability standards you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors replacements parts are your guarantee that your vehicle will have all the technological advantages and maintain the style and protection of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Specifications Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2 Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3 Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4 Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4 Battery ............................................................................................11-5 Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5 Capacity .........................................................................................11-5 11 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle labeling Vehicle labeling N01147401837 Keep a record of the chassis number and vehicle identification number. Such information will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. 2 - Vehicle identification number plate The vehicle identification number is stamped on the plate riveted to the left front corner of the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. 3 - Air conditioning label The air conditioning label is affixed on the inside panel of the engine hood. 11 1 - Vehicle emission control information label The vehicle emission control information label is affixed on the underside of the engine hood. 4 - Vehicle information code plate The vehicle information code plate is located on the front passenger door sill. 11-2 Specifications Chassis number The chassis number is stamped on the bulkhead as shown in the illustration. BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle dimensions Engine model/serial number Certification label The engine model and serial number are stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration. The certification label is located on the driver’s door sill. *- Front of the vehicle N01148200242 Vehicle dimensions N01147501652 Tire and loading information placard N01148101639 The tire and loading information placard is located on the driver’s door sill. Overall length 169.5 in (4,305 mm) Overall width 65.7 in (1,670 mm) Overall height 59.3 in (1,505 mm) Wheel base 100.4 in (2,550 mm) Specifications 11-3 11 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Vehicle weights Vehicle weights N01147601985 Item Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) Gross axle weight rating (GAWR) Manual transaxle CVT 3,053 lb (1,385 kg) 3,108 lb (1,410 kg) Front 1,609 lb (730 kg) Rear 1,521 lb (690 kg) Vehicle capacity weight Seating capacity Maximum roof load 827 lb (375 kg) 5 persons 110 lb (50 kg) NOTE  Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10. 11 GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants Engine specifications N01147701579 Engine model Engine displacement No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 3A92 72.8 CID (1,193 cm3) Inline-3 Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm) Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm) Compression ratio 11-4 Specifications 10.5:1 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Battery Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C) Spark plugs NGK LZFR5DI-11 Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm) Firing order 1-3-2 Battery PCD: holes) Tires and wheels N01147800296 55D23L (356CCA/99RC) N01147901858 Tire Battery is a 12 volt type. Pitch Circle Diameter (installation Size Wheel PCD 165/65R14 79S 175/55R15 77V 14 x 5 J 15 x 5 1/2J 3.93 in (100 mm) Offset 1.5 in (38 mm) NOTE  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owner’s manual. Capacity N01148002228 Item Fuel (approximate) Engine oil Capacity Lubricants 9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2 Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“starburst” symbol) on the container. If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or higher can be used. Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L) Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on page 9-9. Specifications 11-5 11 BK0236100US.book 6 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Capacity Item Capacity Brake Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch Engine coolant {Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve tank} Washer fluid Refrigerant (air conditioning) Lubricants As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4 As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2 Manual transaxle 4.2 qt (4.0 L) CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium or equivalent* 2.6 qt (2.5 L) — Refer to the “Air conditioning label” on HFC-134a page 11-2. *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology 11 11-6 Specifications BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index A Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5 Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-52 Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Air conditioning Automatic air conditioning .............. 7-12 Important air conditioning operating tips.. 7-18 Manual air conditioning .................... 7-7 Air purifier ......................................... 7-19 Airbag ............................................... 4-21 Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-35 Antenna ............................................. 7-44 Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-49 Arm rest............................................... 4-5 Assist grip ........................................ 5-119 Audio AM/FM electronically tuned radio CD player .................................... Error codes..................................... Handling of compact discs............... with 7-19 7-41 7-42 Automatic air conditioning .................. 7-12 B Back-up light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots ....................................... 9-21 Capacities .......................................... 11-5 Battery .............................................. Charging system warning light ........ Checking battery electrolyte level .... Disconnection and connection ......... During cold weather ....................... Specification.................................. 9-10 5-78 9-11 9-11 9-11 11-5 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 5-85 Charging system warning light ............. 5-78 Bottle holders.................................... 5-118 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-13 Brake Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-26 Brake assist system............................. 5-49 Braking ............................................... 6-5 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-49 Hose ............................................. 9-21 Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-47 Parking brake................................. 5-32 Pedal............................................. 5-46 Pedal free play ............................... 9-18 Power brakes ................................. 5-47 Service brake ................................. 5-46 Warning lights ............................... 5-76 Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2 Card holder ...................................... 5-110 Cargo room light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-3 Certification label ............................... 11-3 Cleaning Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-32 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-33 Clutch Pedal free play................................ 9-18 Consumer information......................... 10-2 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ... 5-42 Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-5 Selector lever operation ................... 5-42 Selector lever positions.................... 5-44 Convenience hook............................. 5-118 Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-27 Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5 C Cup holders ...................................... 5-117 Cruise control ..................................... 5-54 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements..................................... 3-7 12-1 12 BK0236100US.book 2 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index D Daytime running lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-28 Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-84 Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows) .......................... 7-6, 7-10, 7-17 Dimensions ........................................ 11-3 Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-81 Engine Compartment................................... 9-5 Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5 High coolant temperature warning light.... 5-78 Hood............................................... 9-4 Model ............................................ 11-3 Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5 Overheating..................................... 8-4 Serial number ................................. 11-3 Specification................................... 11-4 Disc brake pads .................................. 9-21 Engine hood ........................................ 9-4 Dome light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Engine switch ..................................... 5-13 Error codes ......................................... 7-41 Door-ajar warning buzzer .................... 5-78 Exhaust system ................................... 9-21 Door-ajar warning light ....................... 5-78 12 Doors Lock.............................................. 5-24 Power door locks ............................ 5-25 F Floor mat............................................. 6-2 Electric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-51 Fluid Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-5 Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-5 Manual transaxle............................. 11-5 Washer fluid ............................ 9-9, 11-5 Electric rear window defogger switch ... 5-84 Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-5 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ..................................... 5-3, 5-19 Free-hand advanced security transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9 Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-19 Front fog lights Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4 Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 E 12-2 Bulb capacity ................................. Indicators....................................... Replacement .................................. Switch ........................................... 9-27 5-76 9-29 5-82 Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-2 Front side-marker lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-29 Front turn signal lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-29 Fuel Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3 Fuel economy................................... 6-2 Fuel hoses...................................... 9-20 Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-70 Fuel selection ................................... 3-2 Tank capacity................................. 11-5 Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-15 Fuel remaining display ........................ 5-70 Fuses ................................................. 9-22 Fusible links....................................... 9-22 G General maintenance Maintenance................................... 9-20 General vehicle data............................ 11-3 Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 Glove compartment........................... 5-117 BK0236100US.book 3 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index Loading information.............................. 6-6 H Important facts to know in case of an accident 10-3 Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-82 Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-75 Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-76 Indicators .......................................... 5-76 M Head restraints...................................... 4-5 Information display ............................ 5-67 Malfunction indicator light .................. 5-77 Headlights Bulb capacity ................................. Dimmer ......................................... Headlight flasher ............................ Replacement .................................. Switch ........................................... Inside emergency trunk lid release ....... 5-28 Manual air conditioning......................... 7-7 Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-34 Manual transaxle................................. 5-40 Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-5 Shift points..................................... 5-40 9-27 5-81 5-81 9-28 5-79 Instrument panel light dimmer control .. 5-68 Interior lights .................................... 5-115 Manual window control....................... 5-29 Heater without air conditioning function . 7-4 J High beam indicator............................ 5-76 Jack Garage jack up position..................... 9-3 Storage............................................ 8-5 High coolant temperature warning light 5-78 High-mounted stop light Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Hill start assist .................................... 5-47 HomeLink® Wireless Control System 5-110 Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2 K Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch................................................ 9-21 Key slot............................................. 5-18 Hook Convenience hook ........................ 5-118 Keys ................................................... 5-2 Horn switch........................................ 5-85 L I If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2 Ignition switch.................................... 5-37 Lubricants .......................................... 11-5 Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-21 Labeling ............................................ 11-2 License plate lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-31 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle .. 3-5 Multi-information display ........... 5-64, 5-65 O Octane rating ........................................ 3-2 Oil Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5 Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-5 Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-78 Operation mode .................................. 5-13 Operation under adverse driving conditions.. 8-13 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-36 Overheating.......................................... 8-4 Link System....................................... 5-85 12-3 12 BK0236100US.book 4 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index P Parking ................................................ 6-5 Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-19 Parking brake ............................ 5-32, 9-19 Parking lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-29 Polishing............................................ 9-34 Power brakes...................................... 5-47 Power outlet ..................................... 5-110 Power windows .................................. 5-29 Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 R 12 Radio AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player .................................... 7-19 General information about your radio 7-44 Rear combination lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Rear seat .............................................. 4-5 Rear side-marker lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Rear turn signal lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 12-4 Replacement................................... 9-30 Service precautions ............................... 9-2 Rear-view camera ............................... 5-62 Side turn signal lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Rearview mirror Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-34 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-36 Snow tires .......................................... 9-18 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-20 Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-26 Starting the engine .............................. 5-38 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-16 Steering Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-51 Steering wheel height adjustment ..... 5-33 Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 S Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4 Seat belts............................................. 4-7 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-11 Child restraint systems..................... 4-13 Front passenger seat belt warning light..... 4-10 Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-21 Seat belt extender............................ 4-12 Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-13 Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-8 Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-12 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-12 Seats ................................................... Arm rest .......................................... Front seats ....................................... Head restraints ................................. Heated seats..................................... Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2 4-5 4-2 4-5 4-4 4-2 Service brake ...................................... 5-46 Stop lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Storage spaces .................................. 5-116 Sun visors ........................................ 5-109 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-21 How the Supplemental Restraint System works .......................................... 4-24 Maintenance service ....................... 4-35 T Tail lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacement .................................. 9-30 Tank capacity ..................................... 11-5 Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-58 Tires.................................................. 9-12 Inflation pressures .......................... 9-15 Maintenance................................... 9-16 BK0236100US.book 5 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 Alphabetical index Quality grading............................... 10-2 Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-16 Rotation ......................................... 9-17 Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5 Snow tires ...................................... 9-18 Tire and loading information placard 11-3 Tire chains ..................................... 9-18 To change a tire ................................ 8-6 Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-16 Tools ................................................... 8-5 Storage ............................................ 8-5 Towing .............................................. 8-12 Trailer towing..................................... 6-11 Trunk lid............................................ 5-27 Turn signal light Indicators....................................... 5-76 Lever ............................................. 5-81 U Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-3 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-4 Vents .................................................. 7-2 W Warning lights ................................... 5-76 Washer Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-5 Switch................................... 5-82, 5-83 Washing ............................................ 9-33 Waxing ............................................. 9-34 Weights ............................................. 11-4 Wheel Covers........................................... 8-11 Specification.................................. 11-5 Wiper Switch........................................... 5-82 Wiper blades.................................. 9-19 12 USB input terminal ........................... 5-105 How to connect a USB memory device .... 5-106 How to connect an iPod................. 5-107 V Vanity mirror ................................... 5-109 Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-32 Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3 Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2 12-5 BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日月曜日午前１０時１５分 How to calculate your gasoline mileage </div> </div> </div> </div> </main> <div id="donation-modal" class="modal fade" tabindex="-1" role="dialog"> <div class="modal-dialog" role="document"> <div class="donation_modal_header"> <p>Thanks for visiting my little site! I’ll send the PDF straight away</p> </div> <div class="donation_modal_body"> <div class="donation_form_container"> <div class="form_wrapper"> <form action="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr" method="post" class="donation-form" id="donation-form"> <input type="hidden" name="business" value="steve@onlymanuals.com">  <input type="hidden" name="cmd" value="_xclick">  <input type="hidden" name="item_name" value="Mitsubishi - Mirage G4 - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017"> <input type="hidden" name="item_number" value="159512"> <input type="hidden" name="amount" value="5.00" id="amount"> <input type="hidden" name="currency_code" value="USD"> <input type="hidden" name="cancel_return" id="cancel-return-url" value="https://www.onlymanuals.com/payment-cancel"> <input type="hidden" name="return" id="success-return-url" value="https://www.onlymanuals.com/payment-success"> <input type="hidden" name="notify_url" id="ipn-return-url" value="https://www.onlymanuals.com/payment-ipn"> <input type="hidden" name="rm" value="2"> <input type="hidden" name="manual_id" value="159512" id="manualId"> <div class="form-group"> <input required id="full-name" name="full_name" class="form-control" type="text" placeholder="Your Name"> </div> <div class="form-group"> <input required id="email" name="email" class="form-control" type="text" placeholder="Your Email Address"> </div> <div class="form-group"> <button id="send-email-to-pdf" type="submit" class="submit_download btn" href="">Donate $<span class="donation_amount"></span> and Download</button> </div> </form> </div> <div class="donation_wrapper"> <section id="donation-range"> <div class="title">Can you help keep us online?</div> <div class="range__smile"> <div class="range__smile__mouth"></div> <img src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/smile.png" alt="" class="range__smile__img"> </div> <input type="hidden" class="range-slider" value="5.00" id="range-slider"> <p>Drag the slider left to right to donate what you can.</p> </section> </div> </div> <div class="paypal_info"> <p>The site costs me over $1,000 per month keep online and is totally reliant on donations to keep it going. Donations are totally optional, if you can't afford a few dollars right now please don't feel pressured, but if you can... Pretty please could you help?</p> </div> <p class="coupon_invitation"> <span>or... get all our Mitsubishi Mirage manuals for $15</span> </p> <div class="coupons"> <div class="get_coupon"> <p>Get access to all pdfs for this model paying only $15</p> <form id="get_coupon_form" action="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr" method="post" class="form-group"> <input type="hidden" name="business" value="steve@onlymanuals.com"> <input type="hidden" name="cmd" value="_xclick"> <input type="hidden" name="item_name" value="mirage"> <input type="hidden" name="item_number" value="2381"> <input type="hidden" name="amount" value="15" id="coupon_price"> <input type="hidden" name="currency_code" value="USD"> <input type="hidden" name="cancel_return" value="https://www.onlymanuals.com/payment-cancel"> <input type="hidden" id="coupon_success-return-url" name="return" value="https://www.onlymanuals.com/payment-success"> <input type="hidden" name="notify_url" value="https://www.onlymanuals.com/payment-ipn"> <input type="hidden" name="rm" value="2"> <input type="hidden" name="model_id" value="2381" id="coupon_modelId"> <button id="get-coupon" type="submit" class="form-control btn" href="">Get Coupon</button> </form> </div> <div class="use_coupon"> <div class="use_coupon__checkbox_wrapper"> <input id="add_coupon" type="checkbox"> <label for="add_coupon">Or add your coupon if you have it?</label> </div> <div class="use_coupon__form"> <form id="confirm_coupon_form" class="form-group" action="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr" method="post" > <input required name="coupon" id="coupon_input" class="form-control" type="text"> <button id="coupon_confirm_button" type="submit" class="btn">Confirm</button> <input type="hidden" name="manual_id" value="159512"> </form> </div> </div> </div> </div> <div class="close_modal" data-dismiss="modal"></div> </div> </div> <div id="full-pdf-captcha-modal" class="modal fade" tabindex="-1" role="dialog"> <div class="modal-dialog" role="document"> <div class="modal-content p-0 main_block"> <div class="modal-header"> <button type="button" class="close hidden-sm" data-dismiss="modal" aria-label="Close"><span aria-hidden="true">×</span></button> <div class="header_block"> <div class="row"> <div class="col-md-1 col-sm-2 col-3 text-left mr-md-4" > <picture> <img class="header_image" src="https://onlymanuals.com/images/logo_car.svg"> </picture> </div> <div class="col-md-10 col-sm-10 col-9"> <div class="text-left"> <h2 class="main_heading">Thank you for visiting OnlyManuals.com</h2> <div class="bottom_part"> <p class="description"> Mitsubishi Mirage 2017 PDF will be shown after captcha resolving </p> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <div class="modal-body"> <div class="wrap_main_block no-margin"> <div class="recaptcha-wrapper"> <div class="g-recaptcha" data-sitekey="6LdCwUAUAAAAAOo7JakN1PjHH55ss4sEOMHqpCo-" data-callback="showFullPdfCaptchaCallback"> </div> </div> <button id="show-pdf-fully" class="btn btn-primary" data-manual-id="159512"> Show </button> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <footer class="main_footer"> <div class="container"> <div class="row"> <div class="col-sm-4"> <div> <h4>Who We Are</h4> <ul class="footer_list list-unstyled"> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/about">About Us</a></li> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/about">Contact Us</a></li> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/blogs">Blog</a></li> </ul> </div> </div> <div class="col-sm-4 d-flex justify-content-sm-center"> <div> <h4>Services</h4> <ul class="footer_list list-unstyled"> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/ask-mechanic">Ask the Experts</a></li> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/reviews">Product Review</a></li> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/car-parts-finder">Car Part Finder</a></li> </ul> </div> </div> <div class="col-sm-4 d-flex justify-content-sm-end"> <div> <h4>Legal</h4> <ul class="footer_list list-unstyled"> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/dmca">DMCA Policy</a></li> <li><a href="https://onlymanuals.com/privacy-policy">Privacy Policy</a></li> </ul> </div> </div> </div> </div> <div class="bottom_block"> <div class="container"> <div class="row justify-content-sm-between justify-content-center align-items-center"> <p class="copyright">© 2024 All rights reserved - <a href="/">OnlyManuals.com</a></p> <ul class="list social_list"> <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/Onlymanualscom-1377106822430619/" name="facebook" title="facebook"> <svg class="icon-facebook" aria-hidden="true" role="img"> <use href="#icon-facebook" xlink:href="#icon-facebook"></use> </svg> </a></li> </ul> </div> </div> </div> </footer> <i class="scrollup"> <svg class="icon-arrow-circle-up" aria-hidden="true" role="img"> <use href="#icon-arrow-circle-up" xlink:href="#icon-arrow-circle-up"></use> </svg> </i> <div class="menu_backdrop fade jsCloseMenu"></div> <script type="text/javascript"> const Ziggy = {"url":"https:\/\/onlymanuals.com","port":null,"defaults":{},"routes":{"ignition.healthCheck":{"uri":"_ignition\/health-check","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"ignition.executeSolution":{"uri":"_ignition\/execute-solution","methods":["POST"]},"ignition.shareReport":{"uri":"_ignition\/share-report","methods":["POST"]},"ignition.scripts":{"uri":"_ignition\/scripts\/{script}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["script"]},"ignition.styles":{"uri":"_ignition\/styles\/{style}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["style"]},"autocomplete.home":{"uri":"api\/autocomplete\/all","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"autocomplete.models":{"uri":"api\/autocomplete\/{manufacturer}\/models","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["manufacturer"]},"modelsByManufacturer":{"uri":"api\/{manufacturer}\/models","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["manufacturer"]},"send-pdf-without-donation":{"uri":"api\/send-pdf-without-donation","methods":["POST"]},"check-coupon-and-send-pdf":{"uri":"api\/check-coupon-and-send-pdf","methods":["POST"]},"dmca-notification-send":{"uri":"api\/notification-of-claimed-infringement","methods":["POST"]},"contact-us":{"uri":"api\/contact-us","methods":["POST"]},"create-post-category":{"uri":"api\/create-post-category","methods":["POST"]},"get-questions-answers":{"uri":"api\/get-questions-answers","methods":["POST"]},"get-manufacturers":{"uri":"api\/get-manufacturers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-models":{"uri":"api\/get-models","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-adverts":{"uri":"api\/get-adverts","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-all-blog-posts":{"uri":"api\/get-all-blog-posts","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-all-manuals":{"uri":"api\/get-all-manuals","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-downloads-info":{"uri":"api\/get-downloads-info","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-subscribers-list":{"uri":"api\/get-subscribers-list","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-all-seo-settings":{"uri":"api\/get-all-seo-settings","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-all-questions-answers":{"uri":"api\/get-all-questions-answers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-all-default-questions-answers":{"uri":"api\/get-all-default-questions-answers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-coupons":{"uri":"api\/get-coupons","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-coupon-downloads":{"uri":"api\/get-coupon-downloads","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"get-coupon-settings":{"uri":"api\/get-coupon-settings","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"save-coupon-settings":{"uri":"api\/save-coupon-settings","methods":["PATCH"]},"get-manufacturer-models":{"uri":"api\/get-manufacturer-models","methods":["POST"]},"get-manufacturer-models-by-slug":{"uri":"api\/get-manufacturer-models-by-slug\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["slug"]},"subscribe":{"uri":"api\/subscribe","methods":["POST"]},"login":{"uri":"login","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin":{"uri":"admin","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"logout":{"uri":"logout","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"register":{"uri":"register","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"password.request":{"uri":"password\/reset","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"password.email":{"uri":"password\/email","methods":["POST"]},"password.reset":{"uri":"password\/reset\/{token}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["token"]},"about":{"uri":"about","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"privacy":{"uri":"privacy-policy","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"dmca":{"uri":"dmca","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"mechanic":{"uri":"ask-mechanic","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"home":{"uri":"\/","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"home-full":{"uri":"home","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"blog-post":{"uri":"admin\/blog\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["slug"]},"admin.static.page":{"uri":"admin\/show-page\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["slug"]},"admin.blog":{"uri":"admin-blog","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.create.blog.post":{"uri":"create-post","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"admin.edit.blog.post":{"uri":"edit-post\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.delete.blog.post":{"uri":"delete-post\/{id}","methods":["POST"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.publish.blog.post":{"uri":"publish-post\/{id}","methods":["POST"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.manuals":{"uri":"admin-manuals","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.edit.form.manual":{"uri":"edit-manual\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["slug"]},"admin.download.manual":{"uri":"admin-download-manual\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["slug"]},"admin.edit.manual":{"uri":"edit-manual\/{slug}","methods":["POST"],"parameters":["slug"]},"admin.delete.manual":{"uri":"delete-manual\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["slug"]},"admin.manufacturers":{"uri":"admin-manufacturers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.create.manufacturer":{"uri":"create-manufacturer","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"admin.edit.manufacturer":{"uri":"edit-manufacturer\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["slug"]},"admin.delete.manufacturer":{"uri":"delete-manufacturer\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.models":{"uri":"admin-models","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.create.model":{"uri":"create-model","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"admin.edit.model":{"uri":"edit-model\/{manufacturer}\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["manufacturer","slug"]},"admin.coupons":{"uri":"admin-coupons","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.coupon.downloads":{"uri":"coupon-downloads","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.coupon.settings":{"uri":"coupon-settings","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.adverts":{"uri":"admin-adverts","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.create.advert":{"uri":"create-advert","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"admin.edit.advert":{"uri":"edit-advert\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.delete.advert":{"uri":"delete-advert\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.publish.advert":{"uri":"publish-advert\/{id}","methods":["POST"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.downloads":{"uri":"admin-downloads","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.subscribers":{"uri":"admin-subscribers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.seo.settings":{"uri":"admin-seo-settings","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.create.seo.setting":{"uri":"create-seo-setting","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"admin.edit.seo.setting":{"uri":"edit-seo-setting\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.delete.seo.setting":{"uri":"delete-seo-setting\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.questions.answers":{"uri":"admin-questions-answers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.default.questions.answers":{"uri":"admin-default-questions-answers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.create.question.answer":{"uri":"create-question-answer","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"admin.create.default.question.answer":{"uri":"create-default-question-answer","methods":["POST"]},"admin.create.default.form.question.answer":{"uri":"create-default-question-answer","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.edit.question.answer":{"uri":"edit-question-answer\/{modelId}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["modelId"]},"admin.edit.default.question.answer":{"uri":"edit-default-question-answer\/{id}","methods":["POST"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.edit.default.form.question.answer":{"uri":"edit-default-question-answer\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.delete.question.answer":{"uri":"delete-questions-answers\/{modelId}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["modelId"]},"admin.delete.default.question.answer":{"uri":"delete-default-questions-answers\/{id}","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"],"parameters":["id"]},"admin.conversions":{"uri":"admin-conversions","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.conversions.datatable":{"uri":"admin-conversions-datatable\/{pid}\/{startedAt}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["pid","startedAt"]},"admin.conversions.statuses":{"uri":"admin-conversions-statuses\/{pid}\/{startedAt}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["pid","startedAt"]},"admin.conversions.reports-datatable":{"uri":"admin-conversions-reports-datatable","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.conversion.commands":{"uri":"admin-conversion-commands","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"admin.conversion.run":{"uri":"admin-conversion-run","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"blog":{"uri":"blog","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"blog-categories":{"uri":"blog\/{category}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["category"]},"post-by-slug":{"uri":"blog\/post\/{slug}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["slug"]},"manufacturers":{"uri":"manufacturers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"reviews":{"uri":"reviews","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"printing-service":{"uri":"printing-service","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"car-parts-finder":{"uri":"car-parts-finder","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"viewer.home":{"uri":"{manufacturer}\/{model}\/{manualSlug}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["manufacturer","model","manualSlug"]},"viewer.showFullPdf":{"uri":"{manualId}\/show-full-pdf","methods":["POST"],"parameters":["manualId"]},"manualsByCategoryManufacturerModel":{"uri":"all_manufacturers","methods":["GET","HEAD"]},"download_manual":{"uri":"download-manual\/{token}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["token"]},"confirm_subscription":{"uri":"confirm\/{token}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["token"]},"payment_success":{"uri":"payment-success","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"payment_ipn":{"uri":"payment-ipn","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"payment_cancel":{"uri":"payment-cancel","methods":["GET","HEAD","POST","PUT","PATCH","DELETE","OPTIONS"]},"manualsByModel":{"uri":"{manufacturer}\/{model}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["manufacturer","model"]},"brands":{"uri":"{manufacturer}","methods":["GET","HEAD"],"parameters":["manufacturer"]}}}; !function(t,r){"object"==typeof exports&&"undefined"!=typeof module?module.exports=r():"function"==typeof define&&define.amd?define(r):(t||self).route=r()}(this,function(){function t(t,r){for(var e=0;e<r.length;e++){var n=r[e];n.enumerable=n.enumerable||!1,n.configurable=!0,"value"in n&&(n.writable=!0),Object.defineProperty(t,"symbol"==typeof(o=function(t,r){if("object"!=typeof t||null===t)return t;var e=t[Symbol.toPrimitive];if(void 0!==e){var n=e.call(t,"string");if("object"!=typeof n)return n;throw new TypeError("@@toPrimitive must return a primitive value.")}return String(t)}(n.key))?o:String(o),n)}var o}function r(r,e,n){return e&&t(r.prototype,e),n&&t(r,n),Object.defineProperty(r,"prototype",{writable:!1}),r}function e(){return e=Object.assign?Object.assign.bind():function(t){for(var r=1;r<arguments.length;r++){var e=arguments[r];for(var n in e)Object.prototype.hasOwnProperty.call(e,n)&&(t[n]=e[n])}return t},e.apply(this,arguments)}function n(t){return n=Object.setPrototypeOf?Object.getPrototypeOf.bind():function(t){return t.__proto__||Object.getPrototypeOf(t)},n(t)}function o(t,r){return o=Object.setPrototypeOf?Object.setPrototypeOf.bind():function(t,r){return t.__proto__=r,t},o(t,r)}function i(t,r,e){return i=function(){if("undefined"==typeof Reflect||!Reflect.construct)return!1;if(Reflect.construct.sham)return!1;if("function"==typeof Proxy)return!0;try{return Boolean.prototype.valueOf.call(Reflect.construct(Boolean,[],function(){})),!0}catch(t){return!1}}()?Reflect.construct.bind():function(t,r,e){var n=[null];n.push.apply(n,r);var i=new(Function.bind.apply(t,n));return e&&o(i,e.prototype),i},i.apply(null,arguments)}function u(t){var r="function"==typeof Map?new Map:void 0;return u=function(t){if(null===t||-1===Function.toString.call(t).indexOf("[native code]"))return t;if("function"!=typeof t)throw new TypeError("Super expression must either be null or a function");if(void 0!==r){if(r.has(t))return r.get(t);r.set(t,e)}function e(){return i(t,arguments,n(this).constructor)}return e.prototype=Object.create(t.prototype,{constructor:{value:e,enumerable:!1,writable:!0,configurable:!0}}),o(e,t)},u(t)}var f=String.prototype.replace,a=/%20/g,c="RFC3986",l={default:c,formatters:{RFC1738:function(t){return f.call(t,a,"+")},RFC3986:function(t){return String(t)}},RFC1738:"RFC1738",RFC3986:c},s=Object.prototype.hasOwnProperty,v=Array.isArray,p=function(){for(var t=[],r=0;r<256;++r)t.push("%"+((r<16?"0":"")+r.toString(16)).toUpperCase());return t}(),y=function(t,r){for(var e=r&&r.plainObjects?Object.create(null):{},n=0;n<t.length;++n)void 0!==t[n]&&(e[n]=t[n]);return e},d={arrayToObject:y,assign:function(t,r){return Object.keys(r).reduce(function(t,e){return t[e]=r[e],t},t)},combine:function(t,r){return[].concat(t,r)},compact:function(t){for(var r=[{obj:{o:t},prop:"o"}],e=[],n=0;n<r.length;++n)for(var o=r[n],i=o.obj[o.prop],u=Object.keys(i),f=0;f<u.length;++f){var a=u[f],c=i[a];"object"==typeof c&&null!==c&&-1===e.indexOf(c)&&(r.push({obj:i,prop:a}),e.push(c))}return function(t){for(;t.length>1;){var r=t.pop(),e=r.obj[r.prop];if(v(e)){for(var n=[],o=0;o<e.length;++o)void 0!==e[o]&&n.push(e[o]);r.obj[r.prop]=n}}}(r),t},decode:function(t,r,e){var n=t.replace(/\+/g," ");if("iso-8859-1"===e)return n.replace(/%[0-9a-f]{2}/gi,unescape);try{return decodeURIComponent(n)}catch(t){return n}},encode:function(t,r,e,n,o){if(0===t.length)return t;var i=t;if("symbol"==typeof t?i=Symbol.prototype.toString.call(t):"string"!=typeof t&&(i=String(t)),"iso-8859-1"===e)return escape(i).replace(/%u[0-9a-f]{4}/gi,function(t){return"%26%23"+parseInt(t.slice(2),16)+"%3B"});for(var u="",f=0;f<i.length;++f){var a=i.charCodeAt(f);45===a||46===a||95===a||126===a||a>=48&&a<=57||a>=65&&a<=90||a>=97&&a<=122||o===l.RFC1738&&(40===a||41===a)?u+=i.charAt(f):a<128?u+=p[a]:a<2048?u+=p[192|a>>6]+p[128|63&a]:a<55296||a>=57344?u+=p[224|a>>12]+p[128|a>>6&63]+p[128|63&a]:(a=65536+((1023&a)<<10|1023&i.charCodeAt(f+=1)),u+=p[240|a>>18]+p[128|a>>12&63]+p[128|a>>6&63]+p[128|63&a])}return u},isBuffer:function(t){return!(!t||"object"!=typeof t||!(t.constructor&&t.constructor.isBuffer&&t.constructor.isBuffer(t)))},isRegExp:function(t){return"[object RegExp]"===Object.prototype.toString.call(t)},maybeMap:function(t,r){if(v(t)){for(var e=[],n=0;n<t.length;n+=1)e.push(r(t[n]));return e}return r(t)},merge:function t(r,e,n){if(!e)return r;if("object"!=typeof e){if(v(r))r.push(e);else{if(!r||"object"!=typeof r)return[r,e];(n&&(n.plainObjects||n.allowPrototypes)||!s.call(Object.prototype,e))&&(r[e]=!0)}return r}if(!r||"object"!=typeof r)return[r].concat(e);var o=r;return v(r)&&!v(e)&&(o=y(r,n)),v(r)&&v(e)?(e.forEach(function(e,o){if(s.call(r,o)){var i=r[o];i&&"object"==typeof i&&e&&"object"==typeof e?r[o]=t(i,e,n):r.push(e)}else r[o]=e}),r):Object.keys(e).reduce(function(r,o){var i=e[o];return r[o]=s.call(r,o)?t(r[o],i,n):i,r},o)}},b=Object.prototype.hasOwnProperty,h={brackets:function(t){return t+"[]"},comma:"comma",indices:function(t,r){return t+"["+r+"]"},repeat:function(t){return t}},g=Array.isArray,m=String.prototype.split,j=Array.prototype.push,w=function(t,r){j.apply(t,g(r)?r:[r])},O=Date.prototype.toISOString,E=l.default,R={addQueryPrefix:!1,allowDots:!1,charset:"utf-8",charsetSentinel:!1,delimiter:"&",encode:!0,encoder:d.encode,encodeValuesOnly:!1,format:E,formatter:l.formatters[E],indices:!1,serializeDate:function(t){return O.call(t)},skipNulls:!1,strictNullHandling:!1},S=function t(r,e,n,o,i,u,f,a,c,l,s,v,p,y){var b,h=r;if("function"==typeof f?h=f(e,h):h instanceof Date?h=l(h):"comma"===n&&g(h)&&(h=d.maybeMap(h,function(t){return t instanceof Date?l(t):t})),null===h){if(o)return u&&!p?u(e,R.encoder,y,"key",s):e;h=""}if("string"==typeof(b=h)||"number"==typeof b||"boolean"==typeof b||"symbol"==typeof b||"bigint"==typeof b||d.isBuffer(h)){if(u){var j=p?e:u(e,R.encoder,y,"key",s);if("comma"===n&&p){for(var O=m.call(String(h),","),E="",S=0;S<O.length;++S)E+=(0===S?"":",")+v(u(O[S],R.encoder,y,"value",s));return[v(j)+"="+E]}return[v(j)+"="+v(u(h,R.encoder,y,"value",s))]}return[v(e)+"="+v(String(h))]}var T,k=[];if(void 0===h)return k;if("comma"===n&&g(h))T=[{value:h.length>0?h.join(",")||null:void 0}];else if(g(f))T=f;else{var x=Object.keys(h);T=a?x.sort(a):x}for(var N=0;N<T.length;++N){var C=T[N],D="object"==typeof C&&void 0!==C.value?C.value:h[C];if(!i||null!==D){var $=g(h)?"function"==typeof n?n(e,C):e:e+(c?"."+C:"["+C+"]");w(k,t(D,$,n,o,i,u,f,a,c,l,s,v,p,y))}}return k},T=Object.prototype.hasOwnProperty,k=Array.isArray,x={allowDots:!1,allowPrototypes:!1,arrayLimit:20,charset:"utf-8",charsetSentinel:!1,comma:!1,decoder:d.decode,delimiter:"&",depth:5,ignoreQueryPrefix:!1,interpretNumericEntities:!1,parameterLimit:1e3,parseArrays:!0,plainObjects:!1,strictNullHandling:!1},N=function(t){return t.replace(/&#(\d+);/g,function(t,r){return String.fromCharCode(parseInt(r,10))})},C=function(t,r){return t&&"string"==typeof t&&r.comma&&t.indexOf(",")>-1?t.split(","):t},D=function(t,r,e,n){if(t){var o=e.allowDots?t.replace(/\.([^.[]+)/g,"[$1]"):t,i=/(\[[^[\]]*])/g,u=e.depth>0&&/(\[[^[\]]*])/.exec(o),f=u?o.slice(0,u.index):o,a=[];if(f){if(!e.plainObjects&&T.call(Object.prototype,f)&&!e.allowPrototypes)return;a.push(f)}for(var c=0;e.depth>0&&null!==(u=i.exec(o))&&c<e.depth;){if(c+=1,!e.plainObjects&&T.call(Object.prototype,u[1].slice(1,-1))&&!e.allowPrototypes)return;a.push(u[1])}return u&&a.push("["+o.slice(u.index)+"]"),function(t,r,e,n){for(var o=n?r:C(r,e),i=t.length-1;i>=0;--i){var u,f=t[i];if("[]"===f&&e.parseArrays)u=[].concat(o);else{u=e.plainObjects?Object.create(null):{};var a="["===f.charAt(0)&&"]"===f.charAt(f.length-1)?f.slice(1,-1):f,c=parseInt(a,10);e.parseArrays||""!==a?!isNaN(c)&&f!==a&&String(c)===a&&c>=0&&e.parseArrays&&c<=e.arrayLimit?(u=[])[c]=o:"__proto__"!==a&&(u[a]=o):u={0:o}}o=u}return o}(a,r,e,n)}},$=function(t,r){var e=function(t){if(!t)return x;if(null!=t.decoder&&"function"!=typeof t.decoder)throw new TypeError("Decoder has to be a function.");if(void 0!==t.charset&&"utf-8"!==t.charset&&"iso-8859-1"!==t.charset)throw new TypeError("The charset option must be either utf-8, iso-8859-1, or undefined");return{allowDots:void 0===t.allowDots?x.allowDots:!!t.allowDots,allowPrototypes:"boolean"==typeof t.allowPrototypes?t.allowPrototypes:x.allowPrototypes,arrayLimit:"number"==typeof t.arrayLimit?t.arrayLimit:x.arrayLimit,charset:void 0===t.charset?x.charset:t.charset,charsetSentinel:"boolean"==typeof t.charsetSentinel?t.charsetSentinel:x.charsetSentinel,comma:"boolean"==typeof t.comma?t.comma:x.comma,decoder:"function"==typeof t.decoder?t.decoder:x.decoder,delimiter:"string"==typeof t.delimiter||d.isRegExp(t.delimiter)?t.delimiter:x.delimiter,depth:"number"==typeof t.depth||!1===t.depth?+t.depth:x.depth,ignoreQueryPrefix:!0===t.ignoreQueryPrefix,interpretNumericEntities:"boolean"==typeof t.interpretNumericEntities?t.interpretNumericEntities:x.interpretNumericEntities,parameterLimit:"number"==typeof t.parameterLimit?t.parameterLimit:x.parameterLimit,parseArrays:!1!==t.parseArrays,plainObjects:"boolean"==typeof t.plainObjects?t.plainObjects:x.plainObjects,strictNullHandling:"boolean"==typeof t.strictNullHandling?t.strictNullHandling:x.strictNullHandling}}(r);if(""===t||null==t)return e.plainObjects?Object.create(null):{};for(var n="string"==typeof t?function(t,r){var e,n={},o=(r.ignoreQueryPrefix?t.replace(/^\?/,""):t).split(r.delimiter,Infinity===r.parameterLimit?void 0:r.parameterLimit),i=-1,u=r.charset;if(r.charsetSentinel)for(e=0;e<o.length;++e)0===o[e].indexOf("utf8=")&&("utf8=%E2%9C%93"===o[e]?u="utf-8":"utf8=%26%2310003%3B"===o[e]&&(u="iso-8859-1"),i=e,e=o.length);for(e=0;e<o.length;++e)if(e!==i){var f,a,c=o[e],l=c.indexOf("]="),s=-1===l?c.indexOf("="):l+1;-1===s?(f=r.decoder(c,x.decoder,u,"key"),a=r.strictNullHandling?null:""):(f=r.decoder(c.slice(0,s),x.decoder,u,"key"),a=d.maybeMap(C(c.slice(s+1),r),function(t){return r.decoder(t,x.decoder,u,"value")})),a&&r.interpretNumericEntities&&"iso-8859-1"===u&&(a=N(a)),c.indexOf("[]=")>-1&&(a=k(a)?[a]:a),n[f]=T.call(n,f)?d.combine(n[f],a):a}return n}(t,e):t,o=e.plainObjects?Object.create(null):{},i=Object.keys(n),u=0;u<i.length;++u){var f=i[u],a=D(f,n[f],e,"string"==typeof t);o=d.merge(o,a,e)}return d.compact(o)},F=/*#__PURE__*/function(){function t(t,r,e){var n,o;this.name=t,this.definition=r,this.bindings=null!=(n=r.bindings)?n:{},this.wheres=null!=(o=r.wheres)?o:{},this.config=e}var e=t.prototype;return e.matchesUrl=function(t){var r=this;if(!this.definition.methods.includes("GET"))return!1;var e=this.template.replace(/(\/?){([^}?]*)(\??)}/g,function(t,e,n,o){var i,u="(?<"+n+">"+((null==(i=r.wheres[n])?void 0:i.replace(/(^\^)|(\$$)/g,""))||"[^/?]+")+")";return o?"("+e+u+")?":""+e+u}).replace(/^\w+:\/\//,""),n=t.replace(/^\w+:\/\//,"").split("?"),o=n[0],i=n[1],u=new RegExp("^"+e+"/?$").exec(decodeURI(o));if(u){for(var f in u.groups)u.groups[f]="string"==typeof u.groups[f]?decodeURIComponent(u.groups[f]):u.groups[f];return{params:u.groups,query:$(i)}}return!1},e.compile=function(t){var r=this;return this.parameterSegments.length?this.template.replace(/{([^}?]+)(\??)}/g,function(e,n,o){var i,u;if(!o&&[null,void 0].includes(t[n]))throw new Error("Ziggy error: '"+n+"' parameter is required for route '"+r.name+"'.");if(r.wheres[n]&&!new RegExp("^"+(o?"("+r.wheres[n]+")?":r.wheres[n])+"$").test(null!=(u=t[n])?u:""))throw new Error("Ziggy error: '"+n+"' parameter does not match required format '"+r.wheres[n]+"' for route '"+r.name+"'.");return encodeURI(null!=(i=t[n])?i:"").replace(/%7C/g,"|").replace(/%25/g,"%").replace(/\$/g,"%24")}).replace(this.origin+"//",this.origin+"/").replace(/\/+$/,""):this.template},r(t,[{key:"template",get:function(){var t=(this.origin+"/"+this.definition.uri).replace(/\/+$/,"");return""===t?"/":t}},{key:"origin",get:function(){return this.config.absolute?this.definition.domain?""+this.config.url.match(/^\w+:\/\//)[0]+this.definition.domain+(this.config.port?":"+this.config.port:""):this.config.url:""}},{key:"parameterSegments",get:function(){var t,r;return null!=(t=null==(r=this.template.match(/{[^}?]+\??}/g))?void 0:r.map(function(t){return{name:t.replace(/{|\??}/g,""),required:!/\?}$/.test(t)}}))?t:[]}}]),t}(),P=/*#__PURE__*/function(t){var n,i;function u(r,n,o,i){var u;if(void 0===o&&(o=!0),(u=t.call(this)||this).t=null!=i?i:"undefined"!=typeof Ziggy?Ziggy:null==globalThis?void 0:globalThis.Ziggy,u.t=e({},u.t,{absolute:o}),r){if(!u.t.routes[r])throw new Error("Ziggy error: route '"+r+"' is not in the route list.");u.i=new F(r,u.t.routes[r],u.t),u.u=u.l(n)}return u}i=t,(n=u).prototype=Object.create(i.prototype),n.prototype.constructor=n,o(n,i);var f=u.prototype;return f.toString=function(){var t=this,r=Object.keys(this.u).filter(function(r){return!t.i.parameterSegments.some(function(t){return t.name===r})}).filter(function(t){return"_query"!==t}).reduce(function(r,n){var o;return e({},r,((o={})[n]=t.u[n],o))},{});return this.i.compile(this.u)+function(t,r){var e,n=t,o=function(t){if(!t)return R;if(null!=t.encoder&&"function"!=typeof t.encoder)throw new TypeError("Encoder has to be a function.");var r=t.charset||R.charset;if(void 0!==t.charset&&"utf-8"!==t.charset&&"iso-8859-1"!==t.charset)throw new TypeError("The charset option must be either utf-8, iso-8859-1, or undefined");var e=l.default;if(void 0!==t.format){if(!b.call(l.formatters,t.format))throw new TypeError("Unknown format option provided.");e=t.format}var n=l.formatters[e],o=R.filter;return("function"==typeof t.filter||g(t.filter))&&(o=t.filter),{addQueryPrefix:"boolean"==typeof t.addQueryPrefix?t.addQueryPrefix:R.addQueryPrefix,allowDots:void 0===t.allowDots?R.allowDots:!!t.allowDots,charset:r,charsetSentinel:"boolean"==typeof t.charsetSentinel?t.charsetSentinel:R.charsetSentinel,delimiter:void 0===t.delimiter?R.delimiter:t.delimiter,encode:"boolean"==typeof t.encode?t.encode:R.encode,encoder:"function"==typeof t.encoder?t.encoder:R.encoder,encodeValuesOnly:"boolean"==typeof t.encodeValuesOnly?t.encodeValuesOnly:R.encodeValuesOnly,filter:o,format:e,formatter:n,serializeDate:"function"==typeof t.serializeDate?t.serializeDate:R.serializeDate,skipNulls:"boolean"==typeof t.skipNulls?t.skipNulls:R.skipNulls,sort:"function"==typeof t.sort?t.sort:null,strictNullHandling:"boolean"==typeof t.strictNullHandling?t.strictNullHandling:R.strictNullHandling}}(r);"function"==typeof o.filter?n=(0,o.filter)("",n):g(o.filter)&&(e=o.filter);var i=[];if("object"!=typeof n||null===n)return"";var u=h[r&&r.arrayFormat in h?r.arrayFormat:r&&"indices"in r?r.indices?"indices":"repeat":"indices"];e||(e=Object.keys(n)),o.sort&&e.sort(o.sort);for(var f=0;f<e.length;++f){var a=e[f];o.skipNulls&&null===n[a]||w(i,S(n[a],a,u,o.strictNullHandling,o.skipNulls,o.encode?o.encoder:null,o.filter,o.sort,o.allowDots,o.serializeDate,o.format,o.formatter,o.encodeValuesOnly,o.charset))}var c=i.join(o.delimiter),s=!0===o.addQueryPrefix?"?":"";return o.charsetSentinel&&(s+="iso-8859-1"===o.charset?"utf8=%26%2310003%3B&":"utf8=%E2%9C%93&"),c.length>0?s+c:""}(e({},r,this.u._query),{addQueryPrefix:!0,arrayFormat:"indices",encodeValuesOnly:!0,skipNulls:!0,encoder:function(t,r){return"boolean"==typeof t?Number(t):r(t)}})},f.v=function(t){var r=this;t?this.t.absolute&&t.startsWith("/")&&(t=this.p().host+t):t=this.h();var n={},o=Object.entries(this.t.routes).find(function(e){return n=new F(e[0],e[1],r.t).matchesUrl(t)})||[void 0,void 0];return e({name:o[0]},n,{route:o[1]})},f.h=function(){var t=this.p(),r=t.pathname,e=t.search;return(this.t.absolute?t.host+r:r.replace(this.t.url.replace(/^\w*:\/\/[^/]+/,""),"").replace(/^\/+/,"/"))+e},f.current=function(t,r){var n=this.v(),o=n.name,i=n.params,u=n.query,f=n.route;if(!t)return o;var a=new RegExp("^"+t.replace(/\./g,"\\.").replace(/\*/g,".*")+"$").test(o);if([null,void 0].includes(r)||!a)return a;var c=new F(o,f,this.t);r=this.l(r,c);var l=e({},i,u);return!(!Object.values(r).every(function(t){return!t})||Object.values(l).some(function(t){return void 0!==t}))||Object.entries(r).every(function(t){return l[t[0]]==t[1]})},f.p=function(){var t,r,e,n,o,i,u="undefined"!=typeof window?window.location:{},f=u.host,a=u.pathname,c=u.search;return{host:null!=(t=null==(r=this.t.location)?void 0:r.host)?t:void 0===f?"":f,pathname:null!=(e=null==(n=this.t.location)?void 0:n.pathname)?e:void 0===a?"":a,search:null!=(o=null==(i=this.t.location)?void 0:i.search)?o:void 0===c?"":c}},f.has=function(t){return Object.keys(this.t.routes).includes(t)},f.l=function(t,r){var n=this;void 0===t&&(t={}),void 0===r&&(r=this.i),null!=t||(t={}),t=["string","number"].includes(typeof t)?[t]:t;var o=r.parameterSegments.filter(function(t){return!n.t.defaults[t.name]});if(Array.isArray(t))t=t.reduce(function(t,r,n){var i,u;return e({},t,o[n]?((i={})[o[n].name]=r,i):"object"==typeof r?r:((u={})[r]="",u))},{});else if(1===o.length&&!t[o[0].name]&&(t.hasOwnProperty(Object.values(r.bindings)[0])||t.hasOwnProperty("id"))){var i;(i={})[o[0].name]=t,t=i}return e({},this.g(r),this.m(t,r))},f.g=function(t){var r=this;return t.parameterSegments.filter(function(t){return r.t.defaults[t.name]}).reduce(function(t,n,o){var i,u=n.name;return e({},t,((i={})[u]=r.t.defaults[u],i))},{})},f.m=function(t,r){var n=r.bindings,o=r.parameterSegments;return Object.entries(t).reduce(function(t,r){var i,u,f=r[0],a=r[1];if(!a||"object"!=typeof a||Array.isArray(a)||!o.some(function(t){return t.name===f}))return e({},t,((u={})[f]=a,u));if(!a.hasOwnProperty(n[f])){if(!a.hasOwnProperty("id"))throw new Error("Ziggy error: object passed as '"+f+"' parameter is missing route model binding key '"+n[f]+"'.");n[f]="id"}return e({},t,((i={})[f]=a[n[f]],i))},{})},f.valueOf=function(){return this.toString()},f.check=function(t){return this.has(t)},r(u,[{key:"params",get:function(){var t=this.v();return e({},t.params,t.query)}}]),u}(/*#__PURE__*/u(String));return function(t,r,e,n){var o=new P(t,r,e,n);return t?o.toString():o}}); </script><script> var CATEGORIES_ALL_VALUES_SLUG = 'all_categories'; var MODELS_ALL_VALUES_SLUG = 'all_models'; var MANUFACTURERS_ALL_VALUES_SLUG = 'all_manufacturers'; var VIEWER_STYLESHEET_URL = 'https://cdn-0.onlymanuals.com/css/viewer-override.css'; var DESCRIPTION_FLAG = '[FLAG]'; </script> <script async src='https://www.googletagmanager.com/gtag/js?id=UA-135511909-1'></script> <script> window.dataLayer = window.dataLayer || []; function gtag(){ dataLayer.push(arguments); } gtag('js', new Date()); gtag('config', 'UA-135511909-1'); </script> <script>window.lazySizesConfig = window.lazySizesConfig || {}, window.lazySizesConfig.expand = 10, lazySizesConfig.expFactor = 1.5;</script> <script> window.isMobile = (function() { var check = false; (function(a){if(/(android|bb\d+|meego).+mobile|avantgo|bada\/|blackberry|blazer|compal|elaine|fennec|hiptop|iemobile|ip(hone|od)|iris|kindle|lge |maemo|midp|mmp|mobile.+firefox|netfront|opera m(ob|in)i|palm( os)?|phone|p(ixi|re)\/|plucker|pocket|psp|series(4|6)0|symbian|treo|up\.(browser|link)|vodafone|wap|windows ce|xda|xiino/i.test(a)||/1207|6310|6590|3gso|4thp|50[1-6]i|770s|802s|a wa|abac|ac(er|oo|s\-)|ai(ko|rn)|al(av|ca|co)|amoi|an(ex|ny|yw)|aptu|ar(ch|go)|as(te|us)|attw|au(di|\-m|r |s )|avan|be(ck|ll|nq)|bi(lb|rd)|bl(ac|az)|br(e|v)w|bumb|bw\-(n|u)|c55\/|capi|ccwa|cdm\-|cell|chtm|cldc|cmd\-|co(mp|nd)|craw|da(it|ll|ng)|dbte|dc\-s|devi|dica|dmob|do(c|p)o|ds(12|\-d)|el(49|ai)|em(l2|ul)|er(ic|k0)|esl8|ez([4-7]0|os|wa|ze)|fetc|fly(\-|_)|g1 u|g560|gene|gf\-5|g\-mo|go(\.w|od)|gr(ad|un)|haie|hcit|hd\-(m|p|t)|hei\-|hi(pt|ta)|hp( i|ip)|hs\-c|ht(c(\-| |_|a|g|p|s|t)|tp)|hu(aw|tc)|i\-(20|go|ma)|i230|iac( |\-|\/)|ibro|idea|ig01|ikom|im1k|inno|ipaq|iris|ja(t|v)a|jbro|jemu|jigs|kddi|keji|kgt( |\/)|klon|kpt |kwc\-|kyo(c|k)|le(no|xi)|lg( g|\/(k|l|u)|50|54|\-[a-w])|libw|lynx|m1\-w|m3ga|m50\/|ma(te|ui|xo)|mc(01|21|ca)|m\-cr|me(rc|ri)|mi(o8|oa|ts)|mmef|mo(01|02|bi|de|do|t(\-| |o|v)|zz)|mt(50|p1|v )|mwbp|mywa|n10[0-2]|n20[2-3]|n30(0|2)|n50(0|2|5)|n7(0(0|1)|10)|ne((c|m)\-|on|tf|wf|wg|wt)|nok(6|i)|nzph|o2im|op(ti|wv)|oran|owg1|p800|pan(a|d|t)|pdxg|pg(13|\-([1-8]|c))|phil|pire|pl(ay|uc)|pn\-2|po(ck|rt|se)|prox|psio|pt\-g|qa\-a|qc(07|12|21|32|60|\-[2-7]|i\-)|qtek|r380|r600|raks|rim9|ro(ve|zo)|s55\/|sa(ge|ma|mm|ms|ny|va)|sc(01|h\-|oo|p\-)|sdk\/|se(c(\-|0|1)|47|mc|nd|ri)|sgh\-|shar|sie(\-|m)|sk\-0|sl(45|id)|sm(al|ar|b3|it|t5)|so(ft|ny)|sp(01|h\-|v\-|v )|sy(01|mb)|t2(18|50)|t6(00|10|18)|ta(gt|lk)|tcl\-|tdg\-|tel(i|m)|tim\-|t\-mo|to(pl|sh)|ts(70|m\-|m3|m5)|tx\-9|up(\.b|g1|si)|utst|v400|v750|veri|vi(rg|te)|vk(40|5[0-3]|\-v)|vm40|voda|vulc|vx(52|53|60|61|70|80|81|83|85|98)|w3c(\-| )|webc|whit|wi(g |nc|nw)|wmlb|wonu|x700|yas\-|your|zeto|zte\-/i.test(a.substr(0,4))) check = true;})(navigator.userAgent||navigator.vendor||window.opera); return check; })()</script> <script src='https://www.google.com/recaptcha/api.js'></script> <script defer src="https://onlymanuals.com/js/vendor.js"></script> <script defer src="https://onlymanuals.com/js/main.js"></script> <script> var svg_icons = "https://onlymanuals.com/images/svg-icons.svg"; var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest(); xhr.open('GET', svg_icons); xhr.onload = function () { if (xhr.status === 200) { var svg = document.createElement('div'); svg.innerHTML = xhr.responseText; document.getElementsByTagName('body')[0].appendChild(svg); } }; xhr.send(); </script> <script> function getMobileOperatingSystemIOS() { var userAgent = navigator.userAgent || navigator.vendor || window.opera; if (/iPad|iPhone|iPod/.test(userAgent) && !window.MSStream) { document.getElementsByTagName('html')[0].className += ' iOS'; } } getMobileOperatingSystemIOS(); function getMobileOperatingSystemAndroid() { var userAgent = navigator.userAgent; if (/Android/.test(userAgent)) { document.getElementsByTagName('html')[0].className += ' android'; } } getMobileOperatingSystemAndroid(); </script>  <script>if (!!navigator.userAgent.match(/Trident\/7\./)) { document.body.className += ' ie_browser'; }</script> <style>.ie_browser .visionary_mapping_section { background: url('https://onlymanuals.com/images/visionary-mapping.jpg') 100%/cover no-repeat !important; }</style>  </body> </html>